Home

Avocent DSView 3 device license - 100 pack

1. Chapter 8 Adding and Deleting Units 131 You can also automatically discover supported KVM switches See Automatic Discovery on page 152 Adding a single managed appliance This procedure is valid for supported KVM switches It may also be valid for appliances supported by a plug in see the appropriate documentation To add a single managed appliance 1 In a Units View window containing managed appliances see 4ccessing Units Yiew windows on page 118 click Add The Add Appliance Wizard opens If you were not in an appliance type Units View window when you clicked Add in the first step the Select Appliance Type window opens Select Add a single appliance by type then select a managed appliance from the product list Click Next If you were in an appliance type Units View window when you clicked Add in the first step go to the next step Enter the IP address for the appliance in the field provided If the appliance has already been configured with this IP address click Next Or If the appliance has not yet been configured with an IP address select Appliance does not have an IP address assigned yet Complete the following steps a Plug in the appliance and turn it on b IPv4 addresses Type the subnet mask in the field provided c Enter a gateway in the field provided d IPv6 addresses Select the prefix length from the menu The preset value is 64 bits e Click Next The Select Options window will open
2. Selecting the session link for that service in the Action field s Alternate Action menu in Units View windows that list that target device Clicking the Action field in the Unit Services window for that service Service options may include actions to be performed if a problem is detected with the service This may include automatically launching a KVM session prompting the user or no action Chapter 10 Managing Units 171 To add support for services on a target device 1 Ina Units View window containing target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on a target device name 2 In the side navigation bar click Services The Unit Services window will open listing the services that are supported 3 Click Add The Add Service Wizard will appear 4 Ifthe target device does not have an address in the DSView 3 software database you will be prompted to enter it After you enter the name click Next 5 The Select the Procedure window will open You may add support for the service either by discovery of services running on the target device or by selecting from all available services Enable the radio button for adding with discovery or without discovery then click Next If you chose to add a service by discovery a Request in Progress display will appear before the next window opens 6 The Select Service window will open Select the services from the Available Services or Services Found list then clic
3. 1 From a shared SSH Passthrough or Avocent Session Viewer session where you have read only access enter the following command Eca The user with read write access receives a message that read write access has been transferred to the specified user You receive a message that the user has lost read write access Chapter 14 SSH Passthrough Sessions 231 You now have sole read write privileges to the SSH Passthrough or Avocent Session Viewer session Transferring read write access generates DSView 3 software system events Disconnecting a session To disconnect an SSH session 1 From an SSH Passthrough session enter the following command Ec 2 Your session is closed If you had read write access to the session read write access is granted to a randomly selected user who is sharing the session Displaying session output If a data log was created for the SSH Passthrough session you can enter a command to display the last 30 lines limited to 16384 characters of the data log on the SSH client The last 30 lines may include previous SSH sessions but will only display target device output not user actions NOTE To display session output data logging must be enabled and the user must have access rights to unit See Data Logging on page 211 and User Access Rights on page 273 To display session output 1 From an SSH Passthrough session enter the following command Ecr 2 The client displays the last 30 lines of t
4. Download the DSView 3 software installation package log out and close the web browser Return to step 2 6 The Introduction window will open Click Next 7 The License Agreement window will open If you accept the terms click I accept the terms of the License Agreement and then click Next Go to step 8 If you do not accept the terms click Z do NOT accept the terms of the License Agreement A License Agreement Warming message box will appear If you click Quit the installation will exit without installing the DSView 3 software If you click Resume you will be returned to the License Agreement window The DSView 3 software license agreement may also be viewed from the User Login window by clicking the Avocent DSView 3 End User License Agreement link The agreement will appear in a separate web browser window 10 11 12 13 Chapter 2 Installation 15 If the default TCP port used by the dedicated server hosting the DSView 3 software TCP port 443 is not available the Define Web Application Server TCP port window will open Type the port you want to use in the TCP port field then click Next Clicking Cancel exits the Checking for an Updated version installation program If the default TCP port used by the Avocent proxy server TCP port 1078 is not available the Define TD target device Session Viewer Proxy TCP port window will open Type the port you want to use in the TCP port field then click Next
5. PAP Password Authentication Protocol CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol default MS CHAP Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol In the Shared Secret field type the shared secret configured on the TACACS server in step 1 which is a password protected field For the shared secret Microsoft s implementation allows up to 128 ASCII characters and Cisco s implementation allows up to 32 ASCII characters other servers may have a different limit NOTE If you change the authentication type you will be required to enter the shared secret C d Re enter the shared secret in the Confirm Shared Secret field Click Next 8 The Specify TACACS Group Authorization Method window will open a b Click the corresponding radio button to choose one of the following options to manage group authorization DSView intemal groups Choose this option if you plan to associate TACACS users with DSView 3 software internal user groups TACACS privilege level attribute Choose this option if you plan to associate TACACS users with external TACACS groups using the privilege level attribute TACACS custom attribute for group names Choose this option if you plan to associate TACACS users with external TACACS groups using the custom group names attribute Click Next 9 Ifyou selected DSView internal groups and the external authentication service was added successfully the Completed Succ
6. The following fields are always displayed regardless of the power device type and model e Socket Socket outlet number e Appliance Name Name of the power device socket in the appliance e Unit Name Name of the power device socket in the DSView 3 software database To change power device socket settings 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name 192 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 6 7 8 Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar click Ports and then Power device in the side navigation bar The Power Devices Attached to Appliance window will open Click on the name of a power device Click Sockets in the side navigation bar The Power Device Sockets window will open Click on a power device socket The Power Device Socket Settings window will open Some fields are read only For fields that can be modified enter or select new values If you change the appliance name and the automatic name pull feature is enabled see Automatic name pull on page 143 for the effect Click Save and then click Close The Power Device Sockets window will open Click Close The Power Devices Attached to Appliance window will open Click Close The Units View window will open Power Control of Devices Attached to Power Devices There are several ways to power up power down or power cycle a target device that is attached to a power device
7. 1 n a 2 8 9 Click the Units tab Click Tools in the side navigation bar The Unit Tools window will open Click the Export Units icon or link The Export Units Wizard will appear To add one or more properties to be exported select the properties in the Available Properties list then click Add The properties will be moved to the Properties to Export list To remove one or more properties to be exported select the properties from the Properties to Export list then click Remove The properties will be moved to the Available Properties list To change the order in which properties are listed in the output csv file select one or more properties in the Properties to Export list and use the up and down arrows to move the selected properties up or down in the listing To create a topology report enable the Export Topology checkbox If any properties are also being exported they will be listed after the topology information in the report Click Next The Save Process window will open Click Next 10 The Completed Successful window will open along with a File Download dialog box Chapter 21 Using Tools 349 11 Click Open The file will download and open By default csv files are configured to open in Microsoft Excel If Microsoft Excel is not installed on your computer you will be prompted to select a text editor to use for opening the csv file The default filename of the csv file is unitproperties csv Su
8. 1 2 In the Select When to Run the Task window of the Add Task Wizard click Periodic The Specify Periodic Schedule window will open a Select the hour minute and AM or PM to indicate when to begin running the task b Click Every minutes and select a number of minutes or click Every hours and select a number of hours c Click on the calendar button or the field to the left of the calendar button and select a date to begin running the task To use the calendar e Click on the year and select a year e Click on the month name and select a month or use the arrows at the top of the calendar to move forward and backward by month e Click on a day in the calendar to close the calendar and fill the field to the left of the calendar with the date you have selected To run a task daily 1 2 In the Select When to Run the Task window of the Add Task Wizard click Daily The Specify Daily Schedule window will open a Select the hour minute and AM or PM to indicate when to begin running the task 366 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Click Every Day to mn the task each day of the week Sunday Saturday or Click Weekdays to run the task once each weekday Monday Friday or Click Every days and select the number of consecutive days 1 365 Click on the calendar button or the field to the left of the calendar button and select a date to begin running the task To use the calendar e Click on the yea
9. 6 Confirm or cancel the deletion NOTE When a spoke server is deleted it is no longer allowed to communicate with the hub server Only spoke servers that are no longer active should be deleted If a spoke server is still active it may be re registered using the Register Spoke Server wizard Promoting spoke servers Promoting a spoke server to be a hub server is usually done only if the current hub server is no longer operational and will not be brought back into service For less severe problems with a hub server the backup and restore operations can be used If a spoke server must be promoted be sure to run the replication task if possible see Replication on page 84 on all other spoke servers then on the spoke server being promoted immediately before the promotion This will prevent loss of data from the other spoke servers After the promotion of a spoke server to a hub if the server that was originally the hub becomes operational again it will have to register as a spoke server since a system can have only one hub server To promote a spoke server to be a hub server 1 On the spoke server click the System tab 2 Click Tools in the side navigation bar 3 Click Promote to hub server The Promote Hub Server Wizard will appear 84 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 4 Follow the prompts and heed the cautionary wamings in the wizard The spoke server on which the wizard is running will become the hub server an
10. Dejanje 5 Joomectea Figure 20 1 Telnet Viewer Window Chapter 20 Using the Telnet Viewer 329 Table 20 1 Telnet Viewer Window Descriptions Number Description 1 Title Bar Displays the name of the target device being viewed 2 Toolbar Allows you to access many of the features in the Telnet Viewer See Table 20 2 fora description of the toolbar icons 3 Virtual Terminal window Interacts with your target device through this window By default the window size is 80 characters x 24 lines 4 Viewer window Resizes the window when you click and hold on the frame Although the window may be resized the Virtual Terminal window will remain the same size Status Bar Displays one of the following Connected Displays during normal terminal emulation in a Telnet Viewer session 5 Logging Displays when logging is enabled Logging Paused Displays when logging is paused NOTE The Close button may not be present on all operating systems NOTE On supported Macintosh system clients the Telnet Viewer opens in a self contained window and is not included in the Application Menu Telnet Viewer window toolbar Table 20 2 describes the Telnet Viewer window s toolbar icons Table 20 2 Telnet Viewer Window Toolbar Icons Icon Description B Session Settings Displays the Session Properties dialog box 27 Help Displays the DSView 3 software help Tm Copy Screen Copies a screen of Telnet Viewer session
11. managed appliance will be used to indicate a supported CPS appliance CCM appliance or generic appliance that supports Telnet Viewer connections When a session is established with a supported appliance the Telnet client switches to SSH Secure Shell mode and opens an SSH shell to through the appliance The SSH shell can use any of the Telnet client s terminal emulations See Security Property on page 330 The Telnet Viewer uses the credentials provided by the DSView 3 software to establish a session and will automatically accept the appliance server key The username and password provided by the users when they log in are authenticated by the authentication service configured in the DSView 3 software Requirements The Telnet Viewer is actually an applet that runs within the Java 1 5 0 02 plug in JRE The Telnet Viewer may also work with other Java versions The DSView 3 software client automatically downloads and installs the JRE Java Runtime Environment the first time the Video Viewer or the Telnet Viewer is launched See Java Installation on page 23 for information about user interaction with the JRE installer 328 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Telnet Viewer Window Features A new Telnet Viewer window will open for each new Telnet session established by a user The Telnet Viewer window contains menus a toolbar and a window that provides virtual terminal emulation File View Options Macros Help B ala gt
12. sS Avocent gt K1 TE gt DSView 3 Software Version 3 7 1 Installer User Guide Avocent the Avocent logo The Power of Being There DSView DSR MergePoint MergePoint Unity AlterPath AutoView OutLook OSCAR AVWorks Dambrackas Video Compression and Cyclades are registered trademarks of Avocent Corporation or its affiliates in the U S and other countries All other marks are the property of their respective owners 2009 Avocent Corporation 590 395 501P iii TABLE OF CONTENTS LE OF CONTENTS Product Overview J u oai aa NE a Ae hs EAS tt 1 Heatures and 1AA A AANE E EAA E E A EEE A 1 System COMPOnents 2 2 2 0 LALES EEE eee SK SEK KK KK SK KK KK KK KK KK KK 6 2 Third Party Products renhnnrreaaana M 72 7 _ _ _ Z Gx z xz_ BBDBI__MM Z MT XI MZM W W W a 9s9XsSs 9s99S9 a 3 PAVIN CR DIOAUCIS 2 hh PhS ee hin ad eG 1d 255 V SED al ded Zan TSE 4 Supported Units kera l245 dya Dik neka o a as ad eee VA EA A N AA ete is 4 VANA a MM MMMMMMMRMRHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHEm 7 Fower devices OO na e ea Sc EA Se O HHHH 7 System Configurations 5 05 2 2 See ahi de ae Beate ene a Da 2 ESS Qo RAAT ao De kk 8 Install ations 2 5 a sale eda ips ld a roa eco ale tte te NAN hE lid tu 11 About Installation 0 02 02 00 e cee eee eee cece AKA D ST a k ka 11 Minimum requirements for the DSView 3 software 2222202000c eee e cece
13. An FRU is a module or component which is typically completely replaced as part of a field service repair operation Graceful shutdown A graceful shutdown is identical to a shutdown performed by selecting Start Shutdown and then selecting Shut down in the Shut Down Window dialog box Hotkey A hotkey is a keystroke that may be assigned and used to cause a specific action or set of actions to occur within a user interface By assigning the action s the keystroke s normal operation for example pressing F1 to open help is superseded HTML Hypertext Markup Language HTML is a markup language used to create hypertext documents that are portable from one platform to another on the World Wide Web WWW HTML files are ASCII text files with embedded codes markup tags to indicate formatting and hypertext links Web browsers interpret and display HTML documents HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP is the underlying protocol by which WWW clients and servers communicate HTTP is an application level generic stateless object oriented protocol for distributed Appendices 451 collaborative hypermedia information systems A feature of HTTP is the typing and negotiation of data representation allowing systems to be built independently of the data being transferred HTTPS Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTPS is an extension to the HTTP protocol that supports sending data securely over the WWW Integrated windows authe
14. Auditor Appliances Web Services API Child Zones AVR Appliances Field Serial Number Currently in Use Licensed Currently in Use Licensed Currently In Use Licensed Currently In Use Licensed Currently in Use Licensed Licensed Licensed To display license keys 1 2 Click the System tab Description Serial number encoded in the license key for the DSView 3 software hub The total number of licenses for managed devices that can be added to and managed by the DSView 3 system Total number of licenses for spoke DSView 3 servers Number of licenses for spoke DSView 3 servers currently in use Total number of licenses for third party power devices Unlimited indicates there are no restrictions on the number of power devices that can be added Number of licenses for third party power devices currently in use Total number of license IDs for plug ins Number of license IDs for plug ins currently in use Total number of Auditor appliances licensed to be added as managed appliances Number of Auditor appliance licenses currently enabled Status of the Web Services API licensing may be enabled or disabled For more information see the DSView 3 SDK GUI Access API and Web Services API Installer User Guide Total number of zones that can be created Total number of non Avocent KVM switches that can be managed These switches are supported by plug ins see the corresponding p
15. Click Disable A confirmation dialog box will appear Confirm or cancel the action To activate a plug in 1 ee IS i Click the System tab Click Plug ins in the top navigation bar The Plug ins window will open Click on the name of plug in to be activated The plug in overview window will open In the DSView Servers area click the checkbox next to the DSView 3 server you are currently logged into Click Activate A confirmation dialog box will appear Confirm or cancel the action 405 APPENDICES Appendix A Technical Support Our Technical Support staff is ready to assist you with any installation or operating issues you encounter with your Avocent product If an issue should develop follow the steps below for the fastest possible service To resolve an issue 1 Check the pertinent section of the manual to see if the issue can be resolved by following the procedures outlined 2 Check our web site at www avocent com support to search the knowledge base or use the online service request 3 Call the Avocent Technical Support location nearest you 406 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Appendices 407 Appendix B TCP and UDP Ports The DSView 3 software client accesses the server and performs commands using a standard web browser The communication protocol used between the client web browser and the server is the HTTPS protocol By default TCP IP port 443 is used for HTTPS connections but y
16. Click the System tab Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open Click Add The Add Task Wizard will appear E D S Select Validate external authentication server user accounts from the drop down menu Type a 1 64 character name for the task 5 Select a time to run the task see Specifying when to run tasks on page 364 6 Click Finish Task Pull names from selected units Automatic name pull see Automatic name pull on page 143 is not supported on some managed appliances including the LANDesk Server Manager To keep these appliances synchronized with the DSView 3 software you may instead schedule the pull names task NOTE For more information about LANDesk Server Manager integration see the DSView 3 Software Plug in for LANDesk Server Manager online help Chapter 22 Using Tasks 379 This task may be used to pull names from a managed appliance and update the DSView 3 software database This task performs the same operations as the Pull Names from Appliance option in the Operations menu see Name Synchronization on page 141 Once this task is added you may run it on demand at any time see Running tasks manually on page 382 To add the task 1 Click the System tab Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window opens Click Add The Add Task Wizard appears YAR N Select Pull Names from selected units from the drop down menu Type a 1 64 character name for the task 5 Sele
17. NOTE This procedure creates appliance configuration templates that can only be applied to the selected unit In a Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 select the appliance for which you want to save an appliance configuration template Click the Save Last Known Good Configuration Template or Save Current Configuration Template icon or link Or In a Units View window containing appliances select the checkbox next to the appliance for which you want to apply the appliance configuration template From the Operations menu select Save Last Known Good Configuration Template or Save Current Configuration Template Modifying appliance configuration template properties To view modify or delete appliance configuration template files NOTE Administrator rights are required to view and delete appliance configuration template files 1 Click the System tab 2 Click Appliance Files in the top navigation bar 3 Click Configuration Template in the side navigation bar A list of configuration templates is displayed 4 To delete an appliance configuration template select the checkbox next to the template s and click Delete Chapter 10 Managing Units 157 5 To view the properties of an appliance configuration template click the name of the template 6 The appliance configuration template properties are displayed including the name supported unit type creation date and the unit that cr
18. RCM trap is sent from the DSView 3 software server When a response change occurs during communication between the DSView 3 server and a managed appliance the DSView 3 software writes the event to the event log and sends an SNMP trap to the configured trap destinations Trap destinations may also be specified by clicking on a managed appliance and changing the SNMP appliance settings Settings for inactivity time out authentication policy Single Sign On SSO for the session or restrictions to use specific IP addresses to start the sessions Also displayed the number of client sessions currently in use Settings for dial up sessions including inactivity time out time to wait for a connection and dial back number IP address of the SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol server that is used by the DSView 3 software to send email notifications Enables disables unit status polling for the DSView 3 server and specifies the delay between polling cycles and the number of managed appliances that will be concurrently polled Enables you to manage the DSView 3 software spoke servers in your system Settings for data log file location archiving and Syslog server To display server properties Click the System tab DSView Server will automatically be selected in the top navigation bar and Identity will automatically be selected in the side navigation bar The DSView Server Identity Properties window will open The top of the side navigation bar
19. RELEASE or Ctrl Right RELEASE will appear in the list box to the left of the keyboard graphic 5 In the Assigned to Macro area select the target devices to which you want to assign the macro 6 Click Save and then click Close Active Sessions There are two types of active session displays all active sessions in your system and active session information for each target device All active sessions To display information about all active sessions 1 2 3 Click the Units tab Click Active Sessions in the side navigation bar The Active Sessions window will open To display information about a session click on the name in the Start Date Time column The Active Session Information window will open Click Close to close the window and return to the Active Sessions window 202 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Customizing the Active Sessions window for all sessions The Start Date Time field which indicates when the target device session was started is always displayed in the Active Sessions window The following fields may be displayed in the Active Sessions window Use the Customize link to add or remove fields in the display See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 Duration Length of the DSView 3 software session User User who initiated the session which may be a user a local port user or a user with a local user account Target Device Name of the target device being used for the se
20. The DSView 3 hub server should be upgraded first followed by each spoke server Before upgrading a replication should be performed see Replication on page 84 then a backup immediately before and after upgrading the DSView 3 software see Backing up and Restoring Hub Servers Manually on page 77 The firmware for the appliances may also need to be upgraded in order to support new functionality in the DSView 3 software The DSView 3 software should work with the existing firmware revisions but in cases where new functionality is not supported until the firmware is upgraded the DSView 3 software will indicate this in the GUI Recommended upgrade process NOTE In order to safely upgrade the DSView 3 software and to provide for a roll back path in case of upgrade failures perform each of the following steps If your DSView 3 configuration does not include spoke servers skip steps that refer to spokes Chapter 2 Installation 17 To upgrade the DSView 3 software 1 6 T Ensure that you are able to upgrade the hub server and any spoke servers during the same upgrade time The expected time to perform this procedure is 30 minutes However due to differences in DSView 3 configurations and amounts of data your time may vary Verify that the installer files for both the new and old versions in case recovery is needed are available to you Perform a replication of all spoke servers See Replication on page 84 Backup all hu
21. amp Dn D Carto Hermann 3 D 4 Dn 3 n 1 D 3 n 3 U joshus wang 3 n Kem Canton 3 n 3 n 3 r 4 n 3 n 3 n 3 D Enacee n Enasted 3 n Enaceed n Cxsabied 1 Expires t Figure 3 1 Example Avocent DSView 3 Explorer Window Areas 28 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Table 3 1 DSView 3 Explorer Window Area Descriptions Number Description Top option bar Use the top option bar to bookmark a DSView 3 software window refresh a 1 window display print a page log out of a software session or access online help The name of the logged in user appears on the left side of the top option bar Tab bar Use the tab bar to display and manage units user accounts reports system settings and 2 session profiles 3 Top navigation bar The selections in the top navigation bar vary depending on the active tab in the tab bar Topics relevant to each selection display in the side navigation bar 4 Side navigation bar Use the side navigation bar to select system information to display or edit in the content area The side navigation bar contains arrows that affect its display 5 Content area The information specified by the tab bar top navigation bar and side navigation bar selections is displayed and changed in the content area Accessing Target Devices Target devices TDs that may be accessed system wide are displayed in a Units View window You may initiate a session with a target device from a U
22. partner product Separate multiple URLs with a line break The maximum length in each field is 512 characters 5 Click Save A button icon and link will appear for each configured URL on the Partner Tools page To launch a browser session to a partner URL 1 Click the Units tab 2 Click Partners in the top navigation bar 3 The Partner Tools window will open This window exists only if at least one URL has been defined in the Partner Properties window 4 Click on the button or link to launch the browser window to the specified URL 65 G O DSView 3 Servers This chapter describes how to configure DSView 3 server properties backup and restore hub servers and manage spoke servers Server Properties Table 5 1 lists the DSView 3 server properties Table 5 1 Server Properties Property Identity Network Proxy Server Description Name of the DSView 3 server and the server s role hub or spoke IP address and port used by clients to access the server using the HTTPS SSL protocol You may change the port number used for the HT TPS connection NOTE When the DSView 3 server is running on a Linux system the IP address field may contain the loopback address If this is not desired edit the etc hosts file on the Linux system Add a new line above the line that defines the loopback address The new line should contain the IP address followed by the host name For example the following new line adds
23. to an existing target device in the DSView 3 database Successful or failed automatic discovery generates a DSView 3 event Automatic Inheritance for Group Memberships and Properties You can allow new target devices to inherit group memberships and some properties from the appliances to which the target devices are attached Only location contacts notes and custom field properties are inherited For information about assigning properties to a unit see Unit Properties on page 158 To enable automatic inheritance 1 R ED S92 5 Click the System tab Click Global Properties in the top navigation bar Click Automatic Inheritance in the side navigation bar To allow new target devices to inherit group membership and properties from the appliance select Allow new target devices to inherit the group memberships and properties from the corresponding appliance Click Save When automatic inheritance is enabled the following occurs When you use the Add Unit Wizard to add an appliance you can specify the group for which you want the appliance to belong Attached target devices will inherit these group memberships Or you can select Do not inherit group membership See Adding a single managed appliance on page 131 Properties are not inherited at this time because the new appliance does not yet have any properties assigned When new attached target devices are discovered using automatic topology synchronization the Resync
24. 00022000 cccc even cece SESERRA 329 ECUNU FODEN yi cio SRE BRR a a Sb OE AON ok RS Se Sate Mid SANT ae le Sik CEE AT ES 330 Opening a SOSSION 2230 5 Bala b nan aniha Az sey eae nalan hed Soe Seg Gee b SOQA hota Tae Soke 331 Customizing the Telnet Viewer 20222222000 cece eee cece cece cence cece eee eeeeeeee 331 Customizing Session Properties 0 22 00 0 22200222 cee eee ene cee 332 LO SUNS CHIPS sects os ENO Md kera keza NS Saka ld Bs Oe SRI Na Sti bY See oR ee ee Se 335 Reviewing Session Datd 2 2 0 2 0022000 c cee eee 336 MA CHOS ha danan ERs Now Ya o 005050025 1 DO DE NN ae ON D 3h0 SOS DENK ESE PEER ARS ale 337 Matro un X XXeXxXPX YAeepprp _ e lt g_ _ e AE OES 339 KOD DRO Derey e SELA SORE yak st 5 il ONA AA DO bO a aya e n Dada A daba Sek YDA yA Xaka ND 3092 341 Copying Pasting and Printing Session Data L La a EEE EEE EZE K AS 344 Power Control of Devices Attached to Power Devices LALES EZAZ 345 Closing a Telnet Viewer Session 222222 000ce cece SEZA SEE EE EEE EEE EKE KK KK S 346 ELST n Reo E S SEE E EA HHH mne 347 sins Unu Tools adan k k ee ere hot a YEE ae k 4 a a 347 EXPONO UNS DM DD DD rrr e a DD e a SS td te 347 Exporting access rights 0 000000 cece cece cece cece cece cece cece SEK KK KK KK KK 349 Merging target devices 0 222222 c cece cence SE SEE EE EE SES EE KESE AK KEKE KK KK KK 350 Merging target device endpo
25. 3 software hub server will appear at the top of the side navigation bar Click Spoke Servers in the side navigation bar The Spoke Servers window will open In the Spoke Servers window click Certificate The Spoke Server Certificate window will open including information about the spoke server certificate Actual Certificate and the certificate registered for this spoke server on the hub server Registered Certificate The window displays the certificate on the spoke server and the certificate registered on the hub server If the DSView 3 management software cannot obtain the certificate information from the spoke server a message will appear at the bottom of the DSView Server Certificate Spoke Server window The message states Remote server is not responding Information displayed may not match remote side e If the certificate information does not match go to step 5 e If the certificate information matches go to step 6 Click Update The spoke server certificate information will be updated on the hub server Click Close The Spoke Servers window will open 72 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To update the certificate of a hub server on a spoke server 1 4 On the spoke server click the System tab DSView Server will automatically be selected in the top navigation bar and the name of the spoke server will appear at the top of the side navigation bar Click Hub Server in the side navigation bar The Hub Serve
26. 4 Click Connection in the side navigation bar The Authentication Service Connection Settings window will open 5 To change the name of the service a Type a 1 64 character name in the Service Name field b Click Save c If that is the only change you are entering click Close Otherwise continue with the next steps 6 To clear the RSA SecurID node secret for one or more DSView 3 servers a Click the checkbox to the left of the server name To select all DSView 3 servers on the page click the checkbox to the left of DSView Server at the top of the list b Click Clear Node Secret A confirmation dialog box will appear c Confirm or cancel the operation Chapter 6 Authentication Services 113 7 To update the RSA configuration files used by one or more DSView 3 servers to communicate with the RSA Authentication Manager software a Click the checkbox to the left of the server name To select all DSView 3 servers on the page click the checkbox to the left of DSView Server at the top of the list b Click Update The Update RSA Configuration File window will open c To change the sdconf rec configuration file enter the path in the sdconf rec field or browse to the location d To specify the advanced option sdopts rec file for manual load balancing enter the path in the sdopts rec field or browse to the location e Click Save and then click Close The DSView Service may need to be restarted when the RSA configura
27. 4030 8020 8030 and 8035 switches Exit macros allow software administrators to create a macro that returns a target device to a known state They reside on the managed appliances and are executed whenever a DSView 3 software session is terminated For example if a user is connected to a target device and the user closes the Video Viewer session an exit macro may be executed that resets the target device to a known state by logging the user out of the target device session Exit macros may be created and maintained by any user with Configure Unit Settings access rights Different groups of exit macros may be created for each managed appliance in your system To define exit macros 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name 2 Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar and then click Sessions The Appliance Sessions window will open 3 Click Exit Macros in the side navigation bar The Appliance Exit Macros window will open 4 Click the number of a macro The Appliance Exit Macro Settings window will open 5 Enter a unique description for the global macro in the Name field 6 Inthe Select Keyboard field select the country configuration of your keyboard The keyboard graphic in the window will update to reflect your selection 7 Click on the buttons in the keyboard graphic to create the macro As a button is clicked it will appear in the li
28. 5 6 In the Group Type area click Global if you wish to create a global macro group or click Personal if you wish to create a personal macro group Click OK to save the name and return to the Macro Groups dialog box Click Close To add or delete macros in an existing macro group 1 8 9 10 Select Macros Configure Macro Groups from the Video Viewer menu or click the Macro Groups button The Macros Groups dialog box appears Select one of the following All displays both personal and global macro groups Personal displays only personal macro groups or Global displays only global macro groups Select the macro group to be altered from the Defined Groups list box Windows and Sun are the default macro groups If you have created new groups they will also be displayed Click Edit The Create Edit Macro Groups dialog box will appear If you are editing a Personal Macro group select one of the following from the View area All displays both personal and global macros Personal displays only personal macros or Global displays only global macros To add macros to the group select the macro from the Macros Available list Click the Add button The macro moves to the Macros in Group list Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to move the macro up or down in relation to the other macros To remove macros from the group select the macro from the Macros in Group list Click the Remove button The macro moves to
29. C 2 shows the DSR Remote Operations window areas and descriptions follow in Table C 2 Ee DSR Remote Operations N Severs gt ores a Computer 1 Newe Computer 2 P 520255 00EA76 B Computer 3 520255 00E87B8 Computer 4 520255 00ED2B 3 Computer 5 520255 00EA9B Computer 6 520255 00EC7B amp Computer 7 520255 00EF82 E Computer 8 520255 00EF97 E Computer 9 520255 D0EA92 amp Computer 10 520255 00ECDE E Computer 11 20255 00EABA IS Anmann 47 521255 flflF 43 j PERE Appendices 421 Figure C 2 DSR Remote Operations Window Table C 2 DSR Remote Operations Descriptions Number Description 1 Menu bar Allows you to access many of the features in the DSR Remote Operations window 2 Toolbar Provides shortcut buttons for quickly accessing commands in the Tools menu 3 Status Bar Displays the tips for selected menu items and the progress of operations 4 Content Area Use this area to display information from the DSR switch and control and start DSView 3 software sessions to the DSR switch 5 Side Navigation Bar Displays the DSR switching system information you wish to access which displays in the Content Area The items displayed in the content area of the DSR Remote Operations window will vary depending on the link selected in the side navigation bar You may refresh any view by selecting View Refresh from the menu Servers view Selecting Servers in the side navigation bar of the DSR Remote Operations windo
30. CPS serial over IP network appliance is an Avocent managed appliance that provides a Telnet server and an SSH server for accessing serially attached devices over a standard TCP IP connection Model numbers include the CPS810 and CPS1610 appliances Database replication Database replication is the process of distributing and keeping in sync the same database to all DSView 3 servers in a DSView 3 software system Database replication ensures that all database changes made at the hub server or spoke servers are replicated to all DSView 3 servers in the DSView 3 software system The DSView 3 management software versions of the spoke server and hub server must match in order to register the spoke server For example you may not register a spoke server running DSView 3 software version 3 1 with a hub server running DSView 3 software version 3 2 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is an Intemet protocol used to automate the configuration of computers using TCP IP DHCP can be used to do the following e Assign IP addresses automatically e Deliver TCP IP stack configuration parameters such as the subnet mask and default router e Provide other configuration information such as printer addresses Digital Certificate A digital certificate is an attachment to an electronic message used for security purposes The most common use of a digital certificate is to verify that users sending a message are who they claim to be and to provid
31. Cursor profile settings on page 294 a b Click Cursor in the side navigation bar The Cursor Settings window will open In the Local Cursor field if you do not check the Inherit Default Settings checkbox enable the radio button for the desired cursor type Check or uncheck the Allow users to override this setting checkbox In the Single Cursor Mode menu indicate whether the Video Viewer will start up in single cursor mode Enable or disable the Allow users to override these settings checkbox In the Release Keystroke menu select the keystroke that will release the Video Viewer single cursor mode Enable or disable the Allow users to override these settings checkbox 2 Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 299 In the Avocent Mouse Sync menu select Enable or Disable Enabling Avocent Mouse Sync provides improved mouse tracking on the target device on supported system configurations If Avocent Mouse Sync is enabled it is not necessary to disable mouse acceleration on the target device Enable or disable the Allow users to override these settings checkbox In the Avocent Mouse Sync Notification select Display Notification or Do Not Display Notification to indicate if you want the mouse acceleration pop up warning to display when a user launches a KVM session Users cannot override this setting If you changed any settings click Save To change toolbar settings see Toolbar profile settings on page 295 a b Cli
32. DSView 3 software Telnet Viewer VT100 terminal emulation works identically to VT100 with the exception of support for the function keys listed in Table D 2 Table D 2 VT100 Function Key Support Function Sequence Function Sequence Home lt Esc gt h F4 lt Esc gt 4 End lt Esc gt k F5 lt Esc gt 5 Insert lt Esc gt F6 lt Esc gt 6 Delete lt Esc gt F7 lt Esc gt 7 Page Up lt Esc gt F8 lt Esc gt 8 Page Down lt Esc gt F9 lt Esc gt 9 F1 lt Esc gt 1 F10 lt Esc gt 0 F2 lt Esc gt 2 F11 lt Esc gt F3 lt Esc gt 3 F12 lt Esc gt ASCII VT52 VT 100 VT 102 VT220 and VT 320 modes send hex 7F when the Delete key is pressed V T 100 VT 102 VT 220 and VT320 modes map the F1 F4 keys to the PF1 PF4 keys VT102 terminal emulation VT102 terminal emulation works identically to VT100 with additional support for decoding receive codes as described in Table D 3 Table D 3 VT102 Receive Codes VT102 Receive Code Deletes n characters starting with the character at the current cursor position Delete Character DHC and moves all remaining characters left n positions n spaces are inserted at the right margin Appendices 427 VT102 Receive Code Inserts n lines at the line where the cursor is currently positioned Lines displayed Insert Line IL below the cursor position move down Lines moved past the bottom margin are lost Deletes n lines starting with the line where the cursor is c
33. END N da b ka li kan l nan pose ie doh ey oc 28 Using the Side Navigation Bar 0 000000 c cece EEE EEE EEE EE EE SEE cece cece KK KAS 28 iv DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Sorting information in a window 0000000 0000 eevee eee 30 Filtering information in a window 00000000 00 ccc cece eee eee ees 30 Saving information in a window 0 00 000 0000 cece cece cece KK KH 32 Using the Customize link in windows 2222220000000e cece cece eee ESASA ASAS KK 32 Displaying PaQes 0 000000 occ e KK KK KH 33 Bookmarking a window sraya aoa a d Gan Ah D22 WA Ne Na KE QAR AE DAR AA 34 Printing G WiIRdO W y 4 2k k h n z a VENDA k eee AN Stil stadt A Ke ya Mo ok be 35 Refreshing a window 00000 0000 ccc eee eee 2l A E eens 35 Using keyboard commands 0c 35 Basic Operations 2 5 2 2 se os enero seis at de de ate eze Sods Sosa sass 37 DIS View SCID c Diza eda k n nae ANA ha DIES ate Ne eel e ASE Suh baile ete cag Olt 37 Configuring the DSView 3 help location LEZA LALE ELSA eee eee 37 Installing DSView 3 help on a local server 00 ccc eee eee eee ee eee eee 38 Global System Properti s 2 20 cece eee Kuh b na nae dad 38 Legal DONNA DA Lape SRN eek ot Spek a ate dels ds RNN 39 PCI Compliance Configuration 0000000 000 ccc cece eee ees 39 Profiles SSAA ND n V d w S82 e wa NEN Oi SUEY OOS et Se
34. If the default ports used by the SSH server and the Syslog server for data logging are not available appropriate windows will open Type the port you want to use then click Next The Choose Destination Location window will open a Click Choose and use the Browse for Folder dialog box to select a directory in which to install the DSView 3 software Or Click Restore Default Folder to restore the installation directory to the default C Program Files Avocent DSView 3 b Click Install The Installing window will open and display the progress of the installation The software will be installed in the specified folder a Start Programs DSView 3 shortcut menu will be generated and the DSView 3 software service startup will be verified If a previous version of the DSView 3 software already exists on the dedicated server message boxes may appear prompting you to confirm overwriting existing files Click Yes to All When the software has finished installing the Successful Service Startup message box will appear Click Continue The Installation Complete window will open To begin configuration of the DSView 3 software click Done see Configuring the DSView 3 Software on page 17 A Security Alert dialog box will appear containing certificate information and a waming that the generator of the certificate is not trusted This occurs because the DSView 3 server certificate created when the server is installed is a self sign
35. Inactivity Timeout area click Enable Inactivity Timeout and use the arrows to specify a time out value from 1 90 minutes that the managed appliance will wait during inactive intervals until the session is closed and the user must log back into the managed appliance To enable video noise compensation click the Enable Video Noise Compensation checkbox In the Encryption Level area specify an encryption level for the keyboard and mouse and also for the video e DES SSL Single DES encryption e 3DES SSL Triple DES encryption e 128 Bit SSL 128 bit encryption which used an ARCFOUR RC4 SSL cipher e AES AES encryption At least one encryption level must be specified for the keyboard and mouse When you specify more than one SSL encryption type the switch negotiates the strongest algorithm that is supported by both sides The strongest algorithm is AES followed by 128 bit 3DES and DES Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open To change the virtual media session settings on a KVM switch This procedure is valid for KVM switches that support virtual media 1 In a Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the KVM switch name Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar and then click Sessions The Appliance Sessions window will open Click Settings in the side navigation bar and then click Virtual Media The Appliance Virtual Media
36. Logging then Server Settings The Syslog Properties window will open 4 Click the Enable Syslog Server checkbox The preset TCP port is 4514 If you wish to change the port enter a port value in the range 1 65535 in the Port field If DSView 3 clients are located on an external connection the specified SSH server port must be opened on your firewall 5 Click Save You are prompted to confirm the change Confirm or cancel the change 6 Ifyou have not already done so click the SSH server page link and enable the SSH server See Enabling the SSH server on page 213 for more information Enabling or disabling the Syslog server will generate a DSView 3 software system event Enabling and disabling data logging on units Data logging is enabled and disabled per connection Depending on the appliance type you may enable or disable data logging on target device connections appliance connections or both You must have the Configure Unit Settings access right to enable disable data logging To enable or disable data logging on a unit NOTE The exact name and content of configuration pages are specific to the appliance type see the appropriate documentation 1 Ina Units View window containing the appliance or target device see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the unit name 2 Click Appliance Settings click Data Logging and then Configure in the side navigation bar The Data Logging Configuration window for tha
37. Passthrough Sessions 225 2 Click DSView Server in the top navigation bar 3 Click SSH Passthrough in the side navigation bar The SSH Passthrough Properties window opens 4 To enable shared SSH Passthrough sessions select the Enable Port Sharing checkbox 5 To allow simultaneous shared SSH Passthrough sessions from multiple DSView 3 servers select the Enable Hub Spoke Forwarding checkbox If hub spoke forwarding is enabled shared SSH Passthrough sessions are centralized to the DSView 3 server that owns the appliance to which the session is opened NOTE The appliance is owned by the DSView 3 server to which it was first added To determine which DSView 3 server owns an appliance go the appliance Unit Overview Page and click Properties Network The DSView Server menu displays the name of the server that owns the appliance See Unit Properties on page 158 for more information 6 To allow sharing among SSH Passthrough sessions and Avocent Session Viewer sessions select the Enable DSView Client Serial Sessions checkbox 7 Click Save Configuring the Avocent Session Viewer To allow sharing among sessions initiated from the DSView 3 client software you must preconfigure the Avocent Session Viewer as the serial viewer To configure the Avocent Session Viewer 1 Click the Profile tab 2 Click Applications in the side navigation bar 3 Select the Avocent Session Viewer checkbox 4 Click Save For more information about
38. Settings window See User Authentication Services Window on page 113 for more information about trusted forests 94 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To change settings for the Active Directory external authentication service 1 2 10 Click the Users tab Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open Click the name of the Active Directory AD service The side navigation bar will change to include the name of the AD service at the top and below the name the information you may define Click Connection in the side navigation bar The Authentication Service Connection Settings AD window will open Type a name in the Service Name field to change the name of the service that appears in the Name column of the User Authentication Services window Type the domain name of the Active Directory service in the AD Domain Name field In the User Container field specify the name of the container to search for user accounts This will limit the search scope to that container The name may be entered in several forms optionally including a sub domain See To add an Active Directory external authentication service on page 90 for an explanation of the valid forms In the Group Container field specify the name of the container to search for user groups This will limit the search scope to that container The name may be entered in several forms optionally includin
39. Spoke DSView 3 Servers Optional 14 Hypervisor Manager 4 External Authentication Servers Optional 15 Target Device 5 SNMP Manager Optional 16 IQ Module 6 TCP IP 17 Cascade Switch 7 Replication 18 Target Devices 8 ACS Advanced Console Server 19 MergePoint SP Manager 9 Power Device 20 Hypervisor Server 10 DSR Switch 21 Virtual Machines 11 OSCAR Interface 22 Blade Chassis 10 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 11 Installation This chapter describes the following installation sequence for the DSView 3 software e What you should do before installing the DSView 3 software e Installing the DSView 3 software e Configuring the DSView 3 software plus considerations when upgrading e Running the DSView 3 software that is start a client session Final sections describe how to change your password uninstall the software end a DSView 3 software session and install Java About Installation When the DSView 3 management software is installed the DSView 3 software database and a hub server are also installed on the dedicated server The DSView 3 software may be installed on a computer containing an existing DSView 2 x software authentication server without causing any interference with the operation of the DSView 2 x software system The DSView 2 x software authentication server and the DSView 3 software may run on the same dedicated server at the same time Rebooting the dedicated server is not required prior to using
40. Store The System Trust Store window will open listing all trusted certificate authorities known to the DSView 3 software By default the list contains the standard CAs from Java To view or change information about a certificate click on its name The System Trust Store Entry window will open You may change the CRL Location which indicates where the CRL should be obtained for that CA If you change the location click Save Then click Close To delete one or more certificates a Click the checkbox to the left of the certificate name To delete all certificates on the page click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list b Click Delete c You are prompted to confirm the deletion Confirm or cancel the deletion To add a certificate a Click Add The New System Trust Store Entry window will open b In the Certificate File field enter the name of the file containing the X 509 certificate to upload into the trust store The file may be binary or Base64 encoded c Inthe CRL Location field you may enter the location of the CRL for the uploaded certificate maximum 256 characters The supported protocols are http and Idap d Click Add Integrated Windows Authentication The DSView 3 management software allows DSView 3 software clients to authenticate against Microsoft Windows NT domain and Microsoft Active Directory external authentication servers using Integrated Windows Authentication This feature allow
41. System Appliance Files window e Tasks Management View schedule and run tasks from the System Tasks window Firmware Management Upgrade appliance firmware e System Management View and modify some system settings e Log Viewing View event logs data logs and reports under the Reports tab To allow or deny access rights for a zone 1 Click the System tab then click Global Properties 2 Select Zones in the side navigation bar 254 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Click the name of zone you wish to modify Click Access Rights in the side navigation bar 3 4 5 The Assign Zone Rights window opens For each access rights group select 4 ow or Deny 6 Click Save Using Zones Zones operate as independent subsets of the DSView 3 software system When logged into a zone most actions only affect your active zone even if you have access rights to other zones However some actions are restricted or are only available to super users administrative users belonging to the top level zone All actions require appropriate zone access rights Users must also be qualified with user and user group access rights The following sections describe under what circumstances an action may be performed and how it affects the DSView 3 software system Units actions in a zone NOTE Asan exception a modem is still available to all zones even if it is moved to a sublevel zone Table 16 1 Unit Actions in a Zone A
42. TACACS external authentication service ALL LAZEK ASA 106 vi DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide RSA SecurID external authentication service 00 000222 e eee cece eee e eee cece 110 User Authentication Services Window 0000002cecc cece EEE cece eee KK 113 Units View Windows 0 20 0 2 ccc cece cece cece cece ccc KK KK KK KK KK RR 115 Types of Units View windows 0 000000 ccc cece ence KK KK KK KK KK KS 115 TOPOLO RV Vi EW aae se Bs eis te aah ek td ate tah Sa aie han bBo SAWA gi lente fd D a AU 116 Accessing Units View windows 222 0000 eee EEE EEE EEE EEE cece ERK KK KK KK K 1 8 Showing and hiding units 00 00000222 c ESAS SEES ESASA cece cece eee eeeeee 119 Units View windows fields 0 222222 ccc cece EEE cence eee EE EE SESERRA KK eeee 120 Multiple unit operations from a Units View window 22222 22220220220e 124 Unit Overview Windows aa ode fo ence ES win bd EE EE SE SEK EE KK SK KK KK KK KK KK KK 125 Unit Status Pindo oh a Eka ke n n Sete hoa A ee ied oo Sak saul oui it 127 Adding and Deleting Units 2 02020000 K KK KK KK 129 Addins UI NItSe oes sss oh aN shee da ee a eh et AS has ded de dace De rd bee ant Ge 129 Wizards that add units 000 2222 e cece eee EEE EEE EEE KE EEE SEK KESEK eens 130 Adding a single managed appliance 00 00022cc cece cece anoano ennaa 131 Adding a single embedded
43. This procedure is valid only for IBM ASM RSA II DRAC 4 HP iLO and NEC IPF embedded appliances To add a single embedded appliance 1 In a Units View window containing managed appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click Add The Add Appliance Wizard will open The Select Add Unit Procedure window will open Click Add a single appliance then click Next If you were not in an appliance type Units View window when you clicked Add in the first step the Select Appliance Type window will open Select an embedded appliance from the product list then click Next e Foran IBM ASM RSA II embedded appliance go to step 4 e Fora DRAC 4 embedded appliance go to step 5 e For an HP iLO embedded appliance go to step 6 e For an NEC IPF embedded appliance go to step 7 For IBM ASM RSA II embedded appliances a The Configure IBM ASM RSA II Settings window will open b In the Appliance Name field type a 1 64 character appliance name The name is not case sensitive c Inthe Address field type a 1 256 character IP address in dot notation form or a DNS name The address is not case sensitive d Inthe Username field type a 1 64 character username to be used to log in to the embedded appliance Usernames are case sensitive e In the Password field type a 1 64 character password to be used to log in to the embedded appliance Passwords are case sensitive f Click Next 134 DSView 3 Software Installer U
44. To specify a key for exiting single cursor mode 1 Select Tools Session Options from the Video Viewer menu or click the Session Options button The Session Options dialog box appears 2 Click the Mouse tab 3 In the Single Cursor mode field select a key from the menu 4 Click OK The key will be displayed in the title bar When single cursor mode is enabled pressing the specified key returns the session to regular desktop mode To exit single cursor mode Press the key identified in the title bar To align the mouse cursors NOTE The DSView 3 software cannot get constant feedback from the mouse so occasionally the mouse on the switch may lose sync with the mouse on the host system If your mouse or keyboard no longer responds properly align the mouse to re establish proper tracking Alignment causes the local cursor to be aligned with the cursor on the remote server Resetting causes the appliance to simulate a mouse and keyboard reconnect at the device as if you had disconnected and then reconnected them Click the Align Local Cursor button in the Video Viewer toolbar The local cursor will align with the cursor on the remote device If cursors drift out of alignment turn off mouse acceleration in the device Toolbar commands These commands may also be specified in a KVM session profile see Toolbar profile settings on page 295 To specify a toolbar hide time 1 Select Tools Session Options from the Video Viewer men
45. Type a 1 64 character name for the RADIUS authentication service b Select RADIUS from the Type menu c Click Next The Specify RADIUS Connection Settings window will open a Type the address of the RADIUS host in dot notation format xxx xxx xxx xxx or type the DNS host name in the Server Address field b Type the number of the port from 1 65535 for connecting to the RADIUS host in the Port Number field The default is port 1812 c Click Next The Establish Connection with Authentication Service window will open briefly If the external authentication service is contacted successfully the Specify RADIUS Authentication Settings window will open a Select the authentication type from the Authentication Type menu Make sure it is one of the available authentication types noted in step 1 PAP Password Authentication Protocol CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol default MS CHAP Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol MS CHAP v2 Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol Version 2 b In the Shared Secret field type the shared secret that was configured on the RADIUS server in step 1 which is a password protected field Microsoft s implementation allows up to 128 ASCII characters for the shared secret other servers may have a different limit c Re enter the shared secret in the Confirm Shared Secret field d Click Next 106 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide I
46. Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the checkbox next to the unit s To change custom fields for all units in the page click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list If the page contains units that do not support custom fields they will not be affected Click Operations then select Properties from the drop down menu The Multiple Unit Properties window will open Click Custom Fields Type the information in each of the custom fields Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open To change the note properties for a unit Is s In a Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance or target device name Click Properties in the side navigation bar and then click Notes in the side navigation bar The Unit Notes window will open Type description accounting and comment information Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open To change the note properties for one or more units from a Units View window 1 In a Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the checkbox next to the unit s To change note properties for all units in the page click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list If the page contains units that do not support note properties they will not be affected Click Operations then select Properties from the drop down menu 162 DSVie
47. View window containing appliances select the appliance s for which you want to adjust target device names Select Adjust Target Device Names from the Operations menu Select a location name from the menu for each appliance Or Enter a new location name in the field for each appliance NOTE Each appliance must have a unique location name 174 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 4 Click Submit The fixed name and location name are combined to create new target devices names It is recommended that automatic name push is enabled so that appliances are automatically updated with the new target device names see Automatic name push on page 142 You can also use the manual name push feature to manually update target device names see Manual name push on page 145 The location is updated in the Unit Properties for the appliance and attached target devices However the Unit Properties are not updated for target devices that are attached to a cascade KVM switch or cascade power device IQ Module Settings IQ modules are connected to supported KVM switches To display IQ module information 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the KVM switch name 2 Click Appliance Settings click Ports and then click JO Modules in the side navigation bar The Appliance IQ Modules window will open This window lists all modules with their EID status port number applicati
48. WA WO 21h baya BADAN Sh ehd k3 4 174 KVM Switch and Cascade Switch Settings 22202000cc EEE EEE EEE EKA AA 175 OSCAR interface settings son sasti sisya cece cece a ekk suna a d ta si 0L 20 at ETEN 177 Local Account Settings LAL L ALS ESASA EEE SELE E EEE EE SEE EE EE SEE SEES KK KK KK 178 Embedded Units e gt e e eeeeeeoeeeeoe eoeobeoepepepeeeeeeepeeepepmma 181 Launching embedded unit sessions 2222220200000 EEE cece EEE SESERRA 182 Changing embedded unit credentials 0002222000 cece cece cece eee eeeeeee 182 Asset and Usage RepOrlS cc div4 Wad st ua sen ha n y WAK abs eee ee zay Q2 20z HIRE TORRE 184 SAN O Bests ae hi Bh eae en a eed ae Sey ROS ae ee 184 viii DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Power Devices and Power Device Sockets j 666 187 Power DeyiC 52k EEE E An E O E a ey EEE EE TTET 187 Power Device Input Feed 0 2 2 0 0c EEE ESSA SEE eee cee eee cece eee KEKE EKA KKKS 189 Power Device oGk lS isa cant oie nan d s lan xas bena ada ce dk ak D0sa aS b kina VE obs Z na na 191 Power Control of Devices Attached to Power Devices LALE ESER AAS 192 Unit Sessions and Connections 2 22 2 20 195 Managed Appliance Session Settings 0 LALE SELE EEE EEE EEE eee EEE RAA ees 195 Customizing the Appliance Sessions window 222222 000seeee cece cece cess 195 Active SSCSSLONSS
49. Wizard or the update topology task the new target devices inherit group memberships and location contacts notes and custom field properties from the appliance For more information about these operations see Automatic topology synchronization on page 147 Resynchronizing units on page 358 and Task Update topology for selected units on page 379 154 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 155 Managing Units This chapter describes how to manage unit properties and settings access rights and local account settings and how to view unit asset and usage reports Appliance Configuration Templates Appliance configuration templates allow DSView 3 administrators to quickly configure new units or replace failed units You can create an appliance configuration template based on any supported unit in the DSView 3 software system The appliance configuration template saves the properties of the model unit so that they can be applied to other units Two classifications of settings are saved in appliance configuration templates e Personality data is specific to a single unit and is only applied during a replace appliance operation An example of personality data is an IP address e Fixed data is specific to the unit family such as DSR 8035 switches but is not specific to a single unit Fixed unit data such as session time outs is applied during both an apply appliance configuration template operation and a replace appliance operation Y
50. a KVM or browser session to the embedded devices Each session is handled by the embedded unit and is launched in a separate window browser HP iLO NEC IPF IBM ASM RSA II and DRAC 4 viewers are proprietary to their owners and the DSView 3 software has little control of their look feel and configuration There is no status polling for these sessions status is idle by default nor are there connection types All embedded KVM browsers have their own certificate authentication Users must accept certificate authentication to launch embedded unit video sessions Users must manually close the window to close a session In all cases exiting or logging out of the DSView 3 software will not shut the KVM browser session The DRAC 4 KVM session launches a standalone launch browser which in turn launches a KVM applet To leave the session the user must exit the KVM session applet and the standalone launch browser The IBM ASM RSA II KVM session launches a KVM session applet within a browser To leave the session users must exit the K VM browser session The NEC IPF KVM session launches a standalone KVM session applet To leave the session users must exit the standalone KVM session e The HP iLO session will launch a browser session to the login page of the embedded device server Users must log in to the web server to access the target device s KVM session To leave the session users must exit the KVM browser session See the embedded
51. a Units View window 1 Ina Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the checkbox next to the appliance To reboot all managed appliances in the page click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list If the page lists units other than managed appliances they will not be affected 2 Click Operations then select Reboot from the menu A confirmation dialog box will appear 3 Confirm or cancel the reboot If confirmed all active sessions will be disconnected A Multiple Unit Operation window will open containing a link to another window where results may be viewed see Multiple unit operations from a Units View window on page 124 To reboot a managed appliance from a Unit Overview window NOTE To reboot a KVM switch or serial console appliance you must have Reboot Appliance access rights By default users who are members of the DSView 3 software administrators user administrators and appliance administrators built in groups have this access right See About Access Rights on page 163 1 In the Unit Overview window click the Reboot icon or link A confirmation dialog box will appear 2 Confirm or cancel the reboot If confirmed all active sessions will be disconnected 358 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Upgrading firmware To upgrade the firmware on a managed appliance NOTE A valid Flash file must exist in the DSView 3 server s firmware repository for the KVM swit
52. a Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name Click Connections in the side navigation bar The Appliance Connections window will open Click on a connection The Appliance Connections Rename window will open Type in new name for one or more items in the connection chain If you modify a name and the automatic name push feature is enabled the new name will be pushed to the appliance based on the configured push properties See Automatic name push on page 142 Click Save and then click Close The Appliance Connections window will open Adding and deleting target device connections To add a target device connection 1 O EH Oe Re In a Units View window containing target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the name of a target device Click Connections in the side navigation bar The Target Device Connections window will open Click Add The Add Target Device Connection Wizard will open Select the appropriate target device connection type from the list Click Next The Select Appliance with Available Ports window will open Select a managed appliance then click Next The Select Available Connection window will open Select a connection then click Next The Completed Successful window will open Click Finish The Target Device Connections window will open 210 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To delete
53. a directory and filename and click Save The Status area of the DSAuth Migration Utility dialog box will contain messages as the backup is created A Finished message box will appear when the backup is completed 5 Click OK 354 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To import DSView 2 x software databases 1 In the Units Tools window click the Import DSView 2 x Database icon or link The Import DSView 2 x Database Wizard will appear Use the Browse button to locate the zip backup file of the DSView 2 x software database you created then click Next The Select Import Options window will open a Select Import DSView 2 x system settings and apply them to this system to allow the following settings to be imported from the DSView 2 x software database migration file into your DSView 3 software system e Whether connected users may be viewed See Video Viewer session properties on page 290 e Whether connections are automatically shared when a KVM session is started See Video Viewer session properties on page 290 e Whether polling is enabled or disabled See Unit status polling on page 76 e The delay between polling cycles See Unit status polling on page 76 e The retention time of the event log See Changing the Event Log Retention Period on page 395 Select Allow Target Devices to be added for nodes that have a default name to allow target devices to be added to your DSView 3 software system for nodes in the DS
54. a hub server running DSView 3 software version 3 2 9 The Type in Hub Server Address and Port window will open Type the address of the DSView 3 software hub server using standard dot notation xxx xxx xxx xxx or type the DNS name in the Address field Click Next 10 The Accept DSView Server Certificate window will open Click Next to accept the certificate 11 The Type in Hub Administrator Credentials window will open Type a valid username and password for a user with DSView 3 software administrator privileges on the DSView 3 software hub server Click Next 12 The Registering Spoke Server window will open with the message Request In Progress Please Wait The configuration of the spoke server will be saved to the database of the hub server and the spoke server s certificates will be installed on the hub server 13 The Completed Successful window will open when the spoke server has been added Click Finish Running the DSView 3 Software DSView 3 software clients access the DSView 3 management software host using a supported web browser Any software required by the client such as applets and the Java Runtime Environment JRE will be automatically installed by the DSView 3 server host The DSView 3 software uses Secure Sockets Layers SSL encryption to send data between the DSView 3 software host and the web browser on the client to ensure data integrity and privacy When a user attempts to log in to a DSView 3 software client
55. a new directory a Click the Create New Folder button A new directory named New Folder appears in the directory list b Click the New Folder entry in the directory list to highlight it Then click the entry again to edit its name Type in a new name Press Enter The directory appears in alphabetical order in the directory list c Double click the newly created directory in the directory list The Filename field will now contain the name of the new directory d Type a new filename in the Filename field If you enter a filename that already exists the new file will overwrite the old file 4 You are prompted to confirm the directory selection and begin logging Confirm or cancel the logging start When logging begins the Logging Status label will indicate Logging To pause logging Select Options Logging Pause from the menu The Logging Status label will change to Logging Paused To resume logging Select Options Logging Resume from the menu The Logging Status label will change to Logging To stop logging Select Options Logging Stop from the menu The Logging Status label will disappear 344 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Copying Pasting and Printing Session Data In the Telnet Viewer you may e Copy a screen of Telnet Viewer session data to the system clipboard e Copy all of the Telnet Viewer session buffer contents to the system clipboard e Copy a highlighted portion of the Telnet Viewer sessio
56. all of the other servers in a DSView 3 software system The DSView 3 software hub server and a spoke server offer the same software functionality to a user The distinction of hub or spoke only has to do with the database replication role the server plays and not with the software functionality the server offers to the user The DSView 3 management software versions of the spoke server and hub server must match in order to register the spoke server For example you may not register a spoke server running DSView 3 version 3 1 with a hub server running DSView 3 software version 3 2 DSView 3 software spoke server A DSView 3 software spoke server is responsible for initiating database replication with the hub server A spoke server sends its database changes to the hub server and receives database changes from it The DSView 3 software hub server and a spoke server offer the same software functionality to a user The distinction of hub or spoke only has to do with the database replication role the server plays and not with the software functionality the server offers to the user The DSView 3 management software versions of the spoke server and hub server must match in order to register the spoke server For example you may not register a spoke server running DSView 3 software version 3 1 with a hub server running DSView 3 software version 3 2 DSView 3 software system A DSView 3 software system includes all the components required to pro
57. and SSH Passthrough features To enable the SSH server 1 Sek xt Click the System tab Click DSView Server in the top navigation bar Click SSH Server in the side navigation bar The SSH Properties window will open Click the Enable SSH Server checkbox The preset TCP port is 4122 If you wish to change the port enter a port value in the range 1 65535 in the Port field Optional IPv6 only Select JPv6 Proxy Port to use the IPv6 protocol to connect to the SSH server The preset port is 4123 typically the IPv6 proxy port number is one increment higher than the SSH server port If you wish to change the port enter a port value in the range 1 65535 in the Port field If DSView 3 clients are located on an external connection the specified SSH server port must be opened on your firewall Click Save If you changed the port value you are prompted to confirm the change Confirm or cancel the change Enabling or disabling the SSH server will generate a DSView 3 software system event 214 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Enabling the Syslog server The Syslog server must be enabled in the DSView 3 software to use the data logging feature You may change the TCP port where the DSView 3 software will listen for Syslog messages forwarded by the SSH server To enable or disable Syslog server port 1 Click the System tab 2 Click DSView Server in the top navigation bar 3 In the side navigation bar click Data
58. and select the day of the month to run the task Chapter 22 Using Tasks 367 Or Click The and select a week and a day of the week to run the task For example if you wish to run the task each second Tuesday of the month select second from the first menu and Tuesday from the second menu c Select the month to run the task from the list box Multiple months may be selected by pressing Ctrl while clicking on the months d Click on the calendar button or the field to the left of the calendar button and select a date to begin running the task To use the calendar e Click on the year and select a year e Click on the month name and select a month or use the arrows at the top of the calendar to move forward and backward by month e Click on a day in the calendar The calendar will close and fill the field to the left of the calendar with the selected date Adding Tasks Using the Add Task Wizard Tasks may be added only by DSView 3 software administrators Task Backup DSView 3 software database and system files This task creates a compressed zip file containing a backup of your DSView 3 software system The backup file contains everything necessary to fully restore the DSView 3 software hub server The backup file is named dsviewBackup zip by default but you may also append the date and time to the end of the backup filename If a backup is restored to a server with a different IP address managed appliances may not be able to
59. appliance 00222200000 c eevee cece anaana 133 Adding managed appliances from a range or list of IP addresses 135 Adding a generic appliance or an EVR1I500 environmental monitor 137 Adding a target device ossidi siza ll tulanlal an Ed eee ee eee cence eee e cece eeeeeeee 137 Deleting ONS hiss DD DD Rt et SSN AIRE NEA lc Let SSA Od 98 2 138 Automatically deleting attached units 2222 0 0000 ec eee cece eee eee e eee e eee 138 Synchronizing the DSView 3 Software Database 2 0 2 0 141 Name Synchronization 0002222000000 c eee eee EEE EE EE SEES EEE EK EK KK KK KK KK 141 Automatic name push 0 22 22 0000 eee eee eee EEE cence eee EE SESERRA KK en 142 Automatic name pull 2 2 2 2220 ALE SEES cece eee cece cece eee cece eeeeeeee 143 Mantial name DuS ns a 0 cak adana aa deda ndi sa oe a hoes FESR Pa ok 145 Manual name pullo ns DUE 145 Topology Synchronization 2 00 00 cee cece cece eee eee cece cece eee cece KK KAS 146 Automatic topology synchronization 0 002022 e eee eee EEE eee cece eeeeeee 147 Topology synchronization options in the Add Unit Wizard 148 Table of Contents vii Topology synchronization options in the Resync Wizard 222222 149 Merging target devices 022222 EEE ALS eee ccc cence eee EE SES cece KESK KK KK 150 Merging or splitting casca
60. appliance administrator or user level to a local user See Built in User Groups on page 45 You must have Configure Local Accounts rights to add modify or delete local user accounts See About Access Rights on page 163 To display the Appliance Local User Accounts window 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name 2 Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar and then click Local Accounts The Appliance Local User Accounts window will open To change access control method for local user accounts 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name 2 Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar click Local Accounts and then Settings The Appliance Local User Access Method window will open 3 Enable the Port or Port group radio button Chapter 10 Managing Units 179 4 Click Save Customizing the Appliance Local User Accounts window The preemption level and access level fields may be displayed in the Appliance Local User Accounts window Use the Customize link to add or remove fields in the display See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 To add a local user account 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name 2 Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar
61. appliance local memory reaches the size specified in this field The recommended first warning size is 500KB Chapter 13 Data Logging 217 Buffer Full Second Warning bytes If an SSH session cannot be opened a second warning will be sent once the appliance local memory reaches the size specified in this field The recommended second waming size is 700 KB Configuring the buffer warnings events as SNMP If the appliance fails to open an SSH connection to the DSView 3 server the appliance will continue to store data logs in local memory To ensure that the administrator receives buffer warnings events if the SSH connection fails change the notification mode from Syslog to SNMP To configure the buffer warnings as SNMP 1 2 3 In a Units View window click on the appliance name Select 4ppliance Settings Events Traps Syslog Click the checkbox next to the following events Appliance Data Log Buffer Full First Warning Appliance Data Log Buffer Full Second Waming and Appliance Data Log Loss Click the Enable SNMP Trap button The Notification Mode for the events changes from Syslog Enabled to SNMP Trap Enabled If available click the Flash Required button to ensure that these settings remain even if power is interrupted If the Flash Required button is not displayed the settings have been saved to non volatile Flash memory on the appliance To begin receiving buffer warning events configure the DSView 3 software fo
62. assetreport1001102204 csv If an exported report file exists in the specified directory and you do not enable this option it will be overwritten when the new file is created Click Finish Task Exporting a Usage Report to a csv file This task exports selected fields from the DSView 3 software system Usage Reports to a csv file The exported file may be stored on a local or network drive The exported report is named Chapter 22 Using Tasks 373 usagereport csv by default but you may also append the date and time to the end of the file The output csv file may be viewed in a text editor or spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel Once this task is added you may run it on demand at any time see Running tasks manually on page 382 To add the task 1 Click the System tab Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open Click Add The Add Task Wizard will appear ee ee NS Select Export Usage Report to a comma separated values CSV file from the drop down menu Type a 1 64 character name for the task 5 Select a time to run the task see Specifving when to run tasks on page 364 then click Next 6 The Specify Export Usage Report Properties window opens a Type the directory in which to create the file which may be a physical local drive on the DSView 3 server or at a shared network location specified by a UNC path The location cannot be set to a mapped network drive The directory name
63. at least one client session license for each zone including the top level zone for other license types you may specify an assigned license value of zero The number of licenses assigned to one zone cannot exceed the number of licenses assigned to the parent zone In addition the total number of assigned licenses for all zones cannot exceed the number of licenses in the DSView 3 software system NOTE For more information on what operations each license type allows see Licenses on page 60 To assign zone licenses 1 Click the System tab then click Global Properties 2 Select Zones in the side navigation bar 3 Click the name of zone you wish to modify 4 Click Licenses in the side navigation bar 5 The Assign Zone Licenses window opens For each license type enter the number of licenses that can be used by this zone in the Assigned Licenses field The number of available licenses in the zone is listed in the Available Licenses column 6 Click Save Chapter 16 DS Zones 253 Managing zone access rights When operating a DSView 3 software system with zones there are multiple layers of access rights to consider First you can allow or deny access rights per zone If you deny an access right group for a zone no users in that zone including administrative users can perform the associated actions In addition a user cannot create a sublevel zone with access rights that were denied in the parent zone If you allow an access ri
64. authenticate until the new DSView 3 server IP address has been programmed into the managed appliances Once this task is added you may run it on demand at any time see Running tasks manually on page 382 You may also create a backup manually see Backing up and Restoring Hub Servers Manually on page 77 To add the task 1 Click the System tab 2 Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open 3 Click Add The Add Task Wizard will appear 368 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 4 Select Backup DSView database and system files from the drop down menu Type a 1 64 character name for the task 5 Select a time to run the task then click Next See Specifying when to run tasks on page 364 6 The Specify DSView System Backup Properties dialog box will appear a Type the directory location in which to create the system backup which may be a physical local drive on the DSView 3 server or a shared network location specified by a UNC Universal Naming Convention path The Location field cannot be set to a mapped network drive The directory name must be entered in case sensitive text if your operating system supports case sensitive filenames If the specified directory location is a network path that requires a login enable the Login required to access shared drive location checkbox Then type the username and password and confirm the password of a user account that has read write access to the network
65. bar The Email Notifications window will appear 2 Click the checkbox to the left of the notifications to delete To select all notifications on the page click the checkbox to the left of Email Subject at the top of the list 3 Click Delete You will be prompted to confirm the deletion 4 Confirm or cancel the deletion Enabling and Disabling Event Logging The logging of individual events that occur in the DSView 3 software system may be enabled or disabled When an enabled event occurs it is written to the event log When an event is disabled its occurrence will not be logged until the event is enabled By default the Enabled Log Events window lists the event name and whether it is enabled or disabled The enabled disabled state differs from an event s state in the event log see Event states on page 394 You may change which fields and the number of items per page that will be displayed in the Enabled Log Events window by clicking the Customize link see Using the 392 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Customize link in windows on page 32 This may be helpful if you want to sort the list by a field such as category or event ID To enable or disable logging of one or more events 1 2 Click the Reports tab Click Enabled Events in the side navigation bar The Enabled Log Events window will open listing all enabled and disabled log events If you want to display only the events in a particular category click
66. bar and clicking Configuration in the side navigation bar Chapter 21 Using Tools 361 To restore a managed appliance configuration 1 In the Unit Overview window click the Restore Configuration icon or link The Restore Appliance Configuration Wizard will appear 2 Click the radio button to the left of the file containing the configuration you wish to restore and then click Next 3 The Completed Successful window will open 4 Click Finish The Unit Overview window will open 5 Reboot the managed appliance to enable the restored configuration See Importing data on page 355 Saving a managed appliance user database NOTE You may not save the user database of aDS1800 digital switch or DSR1161 DSR2161 DSR4160 DSR800 switch You may save the local user database on a KVM switch or serial console appliance For information on restoring a user database see Restoring a managed appliance user database on page 361 To save the user database of a managed appliance 1 In the Unit Overview window click the Save User Database icon or link The Save Appliance User Database Wizard will appear 2 Type a description of the user database that will be saved and can be used if you wish to restore the database and then click Next 3 The Completed Successful window will open 4 Click Finish The Unit Overview window will open Restoring a managed appliance user database NOTE You may not restore the user database of aDS1800 dig
67. be used in the DSView 3 software If the cascade switch is uniquely identified for example a power device or an Auto View 2000 switch that type will automatically be entered in the Type field and cannot be changed If the appliance cannot uniquely identify the cascade switch type the Type field will include a list of compatible units from which you may choose A compatible unit will have at least as many inputs and outputs as the DSView 3 software indicates in its database for the cascade switch For example if the DSView 3 software database indicates the cascade switch has more than one connection to the same appliance only switches with two or more inputs will be included in the list The target side ports are also checked if a cascade switch has a target device on port 14 only types that support 14 or more ports will be displayed Click Save and then click Close Chapter 10 Managing Units 177 You may also change the name of a cascade switch in the DSView 3 software database by using the Merge Cascade Switch wizard see Merging or splitting cascade switches on page 152 You may also change cascade device properties identity location contacts custom fields and notes by clicking the property in the side navigation bar These windows operate identically to those described in Unit Properties on page 158 OSCAR interface settings DSR switches can be configured either from the local OSCAR interface or from the DSView 3 softwa
68. blank for users who do not have Appliance Administrator or User Administrator access rights when the Video Viewer session property view identity of shared connections is not set See Video Viewer session properties on page 290 Preemption Level Effective user preemption level for the session user See Preemption Levels on page 46 Channel Channel number when connection includes a cascade switch valid only for KVM or virtual media sessions Client IP address of client who is connected to this session valid only for KVM or virtual media sessions IQ Module IQ module ID associated with the session valid only for KVM or virtual media sessions Lock Status Whether KVM and virtual media sessions are locked See Virtual media session settings on page 322 Mode Session mode which may change during the session See Customizing the Appliance Sessions window on page 195 for a description of the available modes Port Port associated with the session To disconnect one or more target device active sessions NOTE To disconnect a session a user must have unit view access rights and a preemption level that is greater than or equal to the session user 1 In a Units View window containing target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on a target device Status field The Active Sessions window for that target device will open Chapter 12 Unit Sessions and Connections 205 2 Click the checkb
69. blue 3 To change the text color click the Text Normal Mode box in the Colors section and select a color The default color is white To change the cursor appearance 1 Select Options Preferences from the menu The Preferences dialog box will appear 2 Inthe Caret list choose Block to display the cursor as a block or choose Underline to display the cursor as an underline The default value is Underline To enable disable an exit warning prompt for Telnet Viewer sessions 1 Select Options Preferences from the menu The Preferences dialog box will appear 2 Enable or disable the Prompt on Exit checkbox When the exit warning prompt is enabled a message appears when you select Telnet Exit You may then choose to exit or continue the session When disabled the session closes without further prompting The default value is enabled To enable disable autoscaling 1 Select Options Preferences from the menu The Preferences dialog box will appear 2 Enable or disable the Auto Scale checkbox When autoscaling is enabled the user may reduce or expand the virtual terminal window by dragging a comer of the window When autoscaling is disabled the virtual terminal window will not scale when the view is changed instead scroll bars will appear around the window The default value is enabled Customizing Session Properties When you are connected to an appliance or port using the DSView 3 software Telnet Viewer you may specify se
70. box located between the LAN and Internet makes all necessary IP address translations NAT serves three main purposes e Provides a type of firewall by hiding internal IP addresses e Enables a company to use more intemal IP addresses Since they re used internally only there s no possibility of conflict with IP addresses used by other companies and organizations e Allows a company to combine multiple ISDN connections into a single Internet connection NAT device A NAT device is a network address translation NAT device enables the use of more internal IP addresses than the number that are assigned A NAT device provides IP addresses that are not exposed outside of the device The DSView 3 management software will not support network configuration where the DSView 3 server and KVM switch or serial console appliance are separated by a NAT device Negative hysteresis Negative hysteresis is the unsigned number of counts added to the raw threshold value which creates the re arm point for all sensor thresholds that are less than zero 0 A negative hysteresis value of 0 indicates that any thresholds less than zero do not contain hysteresis OSCAR interface The OSCAR interface is a tool that is built in to Avocent appliances and allows a user connected to the local KVM port to display and change settings in a KVM switch The OSCAR interface also allows a local user to connect to target devices 454 DSView 3 Software Installer Use
71. checkbox If you do not want the units in the unit group to belong to any other unit group select Exclusive If you want to add another unit group in the same hierarchy click Add New The Add Unit Group window opens Or If you do not want to add another group click Add Close The Unit Groups window opens Chapter 15 Grouping Units 245 To delete a unit group NOTE Deleting a unit group deletes the group only the units still exist in the DSView 3 software system You cannot delete any system defined unit groups global root personal root and unassigned 1 Click the Units tab Click Groups in the top navigation bar The Unit Groups window will open Click the checkbox next to the unit group to be deleted Click Delete A confirmation dialog box will appear A Rw oN Confirm or cancel the deletion Changing the unit group properties Access rights indicate which users and user groups may access units in the DSView 3 software system Access rights also indicate which actions are allowed See About Access Rights on page 163 You can assign access rights from a unit group perspective as described in this section Using this method selected users and members of selected user groups are allowed or prohibited from initiating certain actions on all units in the unit group Access rights for a unit group default to inherit if they are not explicitly granted to a user or user group For example if you create unit group A and
72. children can be target devices cascade switches with target device children of their own and power control devices with socket children of their own When the topology feature is enabled in a Units View window that contains appliances an arrow will appear next to each appliance This arrow can be used to expand open an appliance display to list all the appliance ports A Port column will be added next to the Name column The port value is the port number on the appliance or SPC if a power device is Chapter 7 Units View Windows 117 attached to an SPC port on a DSR switch the port number on a cascaded switch or the socket number on a cascaded power device for example Al By default the topology view sorts by the Port column The Port column is sorted by type number and then unit name Expanding and collapsing the display follows the same rules as the side navigation bar If the arrow is pointing right clicking it causes the children to be displayed expanding opening the item If the arrow is pointing down clicking it causes the children to be hidden collapsing closing the item If a port has a cascade switch or power control device attached the unit name for that port will include an arrow that can be used to expand collapse the display of either all the ports on the cascade switch or all the sockets on the power control device Ports on an appliance or a cascade switch that do not have units attached are also listed
73. click Local Accounts and then Users The Appliance Local User Accounts window will open 3 Click Add The Add Local User Account Wizard will appear 4 The Type in Local User Credentials window will open a Type the name of the local user account b Type a password for the local user account c Confirm the password for the local user account d Click Next 5 The Select Preemption Level window will open Select a preemption level 1 4 for the local user This will be used for KVM serial and virtual media sessions See Preemption Levels on page 46 Click Next 6 The Select Access Level window will open Select an access level from the menu Appliance Administrator User or User Administrator DSR1010 DSR2010 and DSR4010 switches support local accounts but the Appliance Administrator access level cannot be changed so this menu will not appear for these switches 7 Click Next If you selected User go to step 8 If you selected Appliance Administrator or User Administrator go to step 9 8 The Assign target devices window will open Add or remove user access rights to a target device a To add user access rights to one or more target devices select the target device s in the Available Target Devices list then click Add The target devices will be moved to the Assigned Target Devices list 180 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 9 b To delete user access rights to one or more target devices select the
74. credentials to browse users on the external Windows NT authentication based on credentials configured on the server If this option is selected do the following a Type the username for a Windows NT account that has browse rights in the User Name field b Type the password for a Windows NT account that has browse rights in the Password field c Click Next The Establish Connection with Authentication Service window will briefly appear If the external authentication service is added successfully the Completed Successful window will open Click Finish The User Authentication Services window will open with the new service listed To change connection settings for the Windows NT external authentication service 1 2 6 7 Click the Users tab Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open Click the name of the Windows NT service The side navigation bar will change to include the name of the service at the top and below the name the information you may define Click Connection in the side navigation bar The Authentication Service Connection Settings NT window will open Type a name in the Service Name field to change the name of the service that appears in the Name column of the User Authentication Services window Type the name of the Windows NT domain in the Domain Name field Click Save and then click Close The User Authentication Services windo
75. data to the system clipboard 330 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Description Copy Buffer Copies the contents of the Telnet Viewer session buffer to the system clipboard Copy Text Copies highlighted text in a Telnet Viewer session screen to the system clipboard Restore Restores the ability to highlight screen text when autoscaling is enabled and the virtual terminal window has been scaled Paste Pastes the contents of the system clipboard into a Telnet Viewer session Prints a screen of Telnet Viewer session data DP Ji e Security Property A fully functional SSH2 Secure Shell Version 2 Client is built into the Telnet Viewer The SSH2 Client is Java based and provides a secure method for accessing target devices The Telnet Viewer provides the following security features e Strict host key checking Support ciphers for AES 128 192 256 bit Blowfish Twofish Cast 3DES and Arcfour Diffie Hellman key exchange support SSH RSA key types e Supported for hmac md5 hmac shal hmac shal 96 hmac md5 96 and hmac ripemd 160 The DSView 3 software will determine whether to create a Telnet or SSH2 connection when you start a session with an appliance A serial connection provides SSH2 serial access to the target device from the appliance Terminal emulation options are supported using both types of connections The SSH2 client is started when you initiate a session with an appliance port from th
76. deleted It is also used when a target device is added to the DSView 3 software system and no other profile is assigned NOTE For DSView 3 software systems that are upgraded to version 3 2 or later from an earlier version existing target devices will not be assigned a profile You may create any number of additional KVM session profiles and then assign them to target devices When a new profile is created it has all settings configured to Inherit Default Settings that is it uses all the settings from the default profile The appliance administrator may then change only those settings that differ from the default profile For example a new profile may be identical to the default profile except with different toolbar settings Some settings have a profile override option which indicates whether users may override the profile information by using Video Viewer menu commands see Using Menu Commands to Manage Session Settings on page 301 If the override option is disabled for a setting in the 292 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide profile the Video Viewer menu selection for that setting will be disabled for the target device using that profile If a target device is not assigned a profile a user with a Video Viewer connection to that target device may use the Video Viewer menu commands to control their session In addition to the profile override option the color depth and video scaling settings have an option that can be enable
77. device If the automatic name pull feature is enabled see Automatic name pull on page 143 for the effect Target Device Naming You can specify a fixed target device name for each port on an appliance Up to 48 port names can be specified for a single appliance The fixed name and location name are combined to create the target device name See Unit Properties on page 158 for more information about location names Target device naming is a global system property and affects all DSView 3 servers in the system Target device naming is not supported for all appliances if it is not supported the related buttons and links are not displayed To enable and specify fixed target device names 1 era ie OP S2 7 Click the System tab Click Global Properties in the top navigation bar Click Units Target Device Naming in the side navigation bar Select the checkbox under Target Device Naming to enable target device naming Select Target device name begins with the fixed name followed by the target device location if you want the fixed name to be applied as prefix to the location name Or Select Target device name begins with the target device location followed by the fixed name if you want the fixed name to be applied as a suffix to the location name A list displays 48 ports and a Fixed Name field next to each port Enter a unique target device name for each port Click Save To adjust target device names k In a Units
78. display is not affected by customization Category Category of an event log entry Chapter 23 Events and Event Logs 393 Detailed Description Detailed information which may include the name of a target device session type user and so on For example a MIB II interface link up trap might contain Appliance change of state in the Description column while the Detailed Description column contains Generic link up interface 1 DSView Server Name of the DSView 3 server where the event was logged Event ID Unique event identifier which can be useful for sorting displays Trap Enterprise Enterprise object identifier for a received SNMP trap The Trap Enterprise field in an Event Log window is named Enterprise OID in the Event Information window Unit Name of a managed appliance for the event User User associated with the event For example when a Unit Deleted event is detected this field contains the username of the initiator To display the event log Click the Reports tab The Event Log All window will open To display event log entries by severity click Severity Level in the side navigation bar and then click one of the levels See the Note below for an alternative way to display the event log by certain severity levels To display event log entries by category click Event Category in the side navigation bar and then click one of the categories To display event log entries that occurred during a specifie
79. does not support them For example you may enable Video Viewer and virtual media sessions to a target device that is attached to a serial console appliance which does not support virtual media The target device access rights are not based on the valid type of connection to that target device the ability to establish a particular session type exists only when the target device through its managed appliance supports it Using the above example if the target device that was attached to the serial console appliance was later moved Chapter 10 Managing Units 165 to a managed appliance that supported virtual media sessions the target device could then be accessed by that method Each access right is independent of other access rights For example you may enable virtual media session access to a target device that supports it but not enable KVM Video Viewer session access to that target device Since a virtual media session is launched from a KVM session that user would in fact not be able to open a virtual media session with that target device The access right only indicates that the user is allowed to perform the operation it does not mean that the operation can actually be performed How access rights can be assigned There are several ways you may assign access rights e You may assign access control rights from a unit perspective From this perspective you select one or more units specify the users user groups for which rights wil
80. e Save or restore the configuration valid only for supported KVM switches and serial console appliances e Save or restore the user database valid only for supported KVM switches and serial console appliances The available tasks depend on the type of managed appliance and the user s access rights on the managed appliance Custom tools defined by a plug in may also be available EVR1500 environmental monitor or generic appliance Name and type of EVR1500 environmental monitor or generic appliance and links for establishing a connection to it You may change the overview information for one target device from a Unit Overview window From a Units View window you can change the type or icon for several target devices in one operation This may be helpful when you want to assign the same values to several units See Unit Properties on page 158 Other types of Unit Overview windows may be supported by plug ins see the plug in documentation for more information To change overview information for a target device 1 In a Units View window containing target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the name of a target device The Unit Overview window will open Enter a name for the target device Enter a type for the target device Select a new icon for the target device using the arrows Chapter 7 Units View Windows 127 5 Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open If you added
81. e Status or result of the operation You may also access this window at any time by clicking the Units tab then clicking Operation Results in the side navigation bar 4 To view the results for an individual operation click on the name The Operation Results window for that operation type will open indicating e Status Current status of the task Summary Number of successful failed total unit operations for example the summary of an operation with a status of Rebooting the unit s might contain a 2 0 3 summary 2 successful 0 failed and 3 total units e Name of the operation e Type of unit When the operation started e How long the operation took e Status or result of the operation on the unit 5 Click Close Unit Overview Windows The Unit Overview window contains the following information about an individual unit 126 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Target Devices Name type and icon associated with the target device You may also use this window to connect to the target device The available connection methods are determined by the type of target device Power information appears only if the target device is a power device and the user has power control rights In this case the user may power up power down or cycle the power of the target device Managed appliances Name and type of managed appliances and the tools that may be used to e Reboot e Upgrade firmware e Resynchronize
82. e ee 12 Before installing and configuring the DSView 3 software 222222 220002 12 Installing the DSView 3 Software 22 2 ZL SELE EEE EE SEE EEE eee cece cece cence cece KK 13 Upgrading the DSView 3 Software 2 2 2 2 0000 eee cece aaa EEE EE EEE EEE KK esses 16 Recommended upgrade process 0 2 2222000 cece eee eee cece EE EE SE SEE EEE KK KK KK KK 16 Configuring the DSView 3 Software 0000000 00 coves 17 Running the DSView 3 Software 2 2 0 0002 cece cence cece SEE EEE ESER KS 19 Minimum client requirements 2 00 00000 aaaea ec cee e cece cece cece cece eee KAS 19 Opening a client SesSiOn 2 0 anaana nananana aaaeei cece cece cece ee KK KK KK KK 20 RESGINING ACCESS v2 2 P20 pce tek Vike He Sock 33 Bebe HH HHHHHEHEnEELnEE MMREHnEHNRM 22 Uninstalling the DSView 3 Software 000222222 c cece eee c cece cece cece eees 22 Closing a DSView 3 Software Session 0 00000 ccc ccc eee e eee KAS 23 Java Installationicecisscis cok ot Bhs gst Are toot hes ound Se eee da ANN a tale Sols ie ian 23 Avocent Viewer Plug in Installation 0022222200000 cece cece cece cece cece eee cceeeeeeee 24 Installing the DSR Remote Operations Software 222 000000e EEE EEE EEE EEE AKA 24 DSView 3 Explorer Windows 22 22222 cccc cece cece cc cceeeeccececeseeees 27 Accessing Target Devices storus AWA
83. event log file enable the Use date and time for file naming checkbox For example if you are creating the event log file on October 1 2005 at 10 04 pm the file created will be named eventlog1001052204 csv If an event log exists in the specified directory and you do not enable this option it will be overwritten when the new event log is created d Click Next 7 The Select Event Log Columns to Export window will open 8 To add one or more columns to export select the column s from the Available Columns list then click Add The column s will be moved to the Columns to Export list 9 To remove one or more columns to export select the column s from the Columns to Export list then click Remove The column s will be moved to the Available Columns list 10 To change the order in which exported columns are listed in the output csv file select one or more columns in the Columns to Export list and use the up and down arrows to move the selected columns up or down in the listing 11 Click Finish Task Exporting an Asset Report to a csv file This task exports Asset Report data from the DSView 3 software system to a csv file The exported file may be stored on a local or network drive The exported report is named 372 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide assetreport csv by default but you may also append the date and time to the end of the file The output csv file may be viewed in a text editor or spreadsheet applicati
84. events in any state New or Acknowledged will be included Acknowledged events will be grayed out To change the state of one or more event log entries 1 Click the Reports tab The Event Log All window will open You may tailor the display by severity category or date if desired 2 Click the checkbox to the left of the events whose state you wish to change To select all events on the page click the checkbox in the heading at the top of the list 3 Chapter 23 Events and Event Logs 395 Click Set State and then select Acknowledged or New from the drop down list Using the date filter The event log retains all events occurring in the DSView 3 software system for the specified retention time By default the 5000 most recent events are displayed You may use the date filter to display older events or to display events from any interval in the retention time To use the date filter 1 2 3 Click the Reports tab In any Event Log window click Date Filter The Date Filter window will open In the first drop down menu in the From line select Events On to select the start date and time Click on the calendar button or the field to the left of the calendar button and select a start date To use the calendar a Click on the year and select a year from the drop down menu b Click on the month name and select a month from the drop down menu or use the arrows at the top of the calendar to move forward and backward b
85. focus to the next control in the window including the calendar Shift Tab Transfers focus to the previous HTML control Table 3 6 lists the keyboard commands that may be used when a calendar is enabled and has focus 36 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Table 3 6 Calendar Keyboard Commands Key Enter or Space Esc Page Up Page Down Right Arrow Left Arrow Up Arrow Down Arrow Description Displays or closes the calendar Closes the calendar Decrements the month by one month and selects the first day of the month Increases the month by one month and selects the first day of the month Increments the day by one day If the last day of the month is selected and the Right Arrow key is pressed the month is incremented to the next month Decrements the day by one day If the first day of the month is selected and the Left Arrow key is pressed the month is decremented to the previous month Decrements the weekday by one week If the first weekday type of the month is selected and the Up Arrow key is pressed the month is decremented to the previous month Increments the weekday by one week If the last weekday type of the month is selected and the Down Arrow key is pressed the month is incremented to the next month Table 3 7 lists the keyboard commands that may be used when a spinner is enabled and has focus Table 3 7 Spinner Keyboard Commands Key Up Arrow Down Arrow Description Incre
86. from the list of groups on the external authentication service If the list of groups contains more than 5000 entries a message will indicate that not all items are displayed You may filter the list by using the Filter button and the adjacent text field If you are using an Active Directory Server you can choose the filter method 278 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 8 Click Filter in DSView 3 Server legacy to use a traditional filtering method see Filtering information in a window on page 30 or Click Filter in Active Directory Server to use a modified filtering method that only provides matches to the filter string based on the common name CN of the group This filter uses LDAP search syntax This method passes the filter to the AD server allowing the AD server to return the matches which provides faster results than the legacy filter method Select one or more external authentication service groups from the list Select a role for the user group s See Built in User Groups on page 45 for information about user roles From the Preemption Levels menu select a preemption level from 1 4 the higher the number the higher the preemption level See Preemption Levels on page 46 Click Finish TACACS external authentication services To add a TACACS user group It Click the Users tab Click Groups in the top navigation bar Click User Defined in the side navigation bar The User Groups User Defined window
87. have been created in the global root group and each of those four unit groups contain groups The unit group Gamma has been selected and indicates it has two subgroups Lab and Operations The Unassigned global group will contain any units that are not assigned to another global unit group Three personal unit groups have been created The ProjectA and ProjectB unit groups do not have subgroups The ProjectC unit group has one or more subgroups To display a list of unit groups in the Unit Groups window 1 Click the Units tab Chapter 15 Grouping Units 243 2 Click Groups in the top navigation bar The Unit Groups window will open If a unit group has subgroups children an arrow will be displayed next to its name e To display a list of groups in the global root group click Global Root The first global unit group listed will automatically be selected Click on the arrow next to a group to expand it and display subgroup names To display a list of groups in the personal root group click Personal Root The first personal unit group listed will automatically be selected Click on the arrow next to a group to expand it and display subgroup names You may customize the number of items per page that appear in this window see Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 To display a list of unit groups in a Units View window NOTE When you create a unit group you may indicate whether it and any of its child unit groups wil
88. in step 1 In the Test Configuration field type Initial Configuration In the Appliances and target devices field type EVR1500 Environmental Monitors In the Manager field type Mary Jones Click Save and then click Close The Appliance All window will open 4 The configuration of a generic appliance has been verified so the administrator wants to create a category named Final Configuration that will contain the final test units The category will contain one generic appliance managed by Tim Brown a d e f In the Appliances All window click on the generic appliance The Unit Overview window will open Click Properties in the side navigation bar and then click Custom Fields The Unit Custom Fields window will open including the custom field names you defined in step 1 In the Test Configuration field type Final Configuration In the Appliances and target devices field type Generic Appliances In the Manager field type Tim Brown Click Save and then click Close The Appliance All window will open Figure 15 1 indicates how the side navigation bar will appear after the example procedure Clicking on a custom field link displays the units associated with that custom field Chapter 15 Grouping Units 239 Y Unit Views Appliances Target Devices gt Sites gt Groups Test Configuration Final Configuration Initial Configuration VR1500 Devices i Unit Status i Active Sessions i Activ
89. in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open Click Add The Add Task Wizard will appear Pe NS Select Upgrade firmware of selected appliances of the same type from the drop down menu Type a 1 64 character name for the task 378 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 5 Select a time to run the task see Specifying when to run tasks on page 364 and then click Next 6 The Select Unit Group window will open Select All Appliances or select a particular unit group to upgrade from the menu See Unit Groups on page 239 Then click Next 7 The Select Appliance Type window will open Select the type of managed appliance that you wish to upgrade then click Next 8 The Select Appliances window will open Select one or more managed appliance to be upgraded from the Available Appliances list then click Add The appliances will be moved to the Appliances to Configure list 9 Click Finish Task Validating user accounts on an external authentication server This task may be used to ensure that LDAP Active Directory and NT external authentication services contain accounts for users Any user accounts not found on the external authentication server will be flagged as suspicious a question mark icon will appear to the left of the user s name Suspicious accounts are indicated in event log files Once this task is added you may run it on demand at any time see Running tasks manually on page 382 To add the task 1
90. include the name of the LDAP service at the top and below the name the information you may define Click User Browsing in the side navigation bar The Authentication Service User Browsing LDAP window will open Click Browse Anonymously to browse users on the external LDAP authentication server Or Click Browse with User Credentials to browse users on the external LDAP authentication based on credentials configured on the server If this option is selected do the following a Type a log in ID in the User Name field in one of two forms a fully qualified distinguished name or the username of an account in the base user DN b Type the password for the LDAP user account in the Password field Click Save and then click Close The User Authentication Services dialog box will appear RADIUS external authentication service To add a RADIUS external authentication service 1 On the RADIUS server that will be used as an external authentication service add the DSView 3 server as a RADIUS client Make a note of the configured shared secret and the Chapter 6 Authentication Services 105 available authentication type s on the RADIUS server From the DSView 3 Explorer Click the Users tab Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open Click Add The Add Authentication Service Wizard will appear The Provide Authentication Service Name and Type window will open a
91. information about using power management see the Power Manager Plug in help To add the task 1 Click the System tab Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open Click Add The Add Task Wizard will appear Raz BOS Select Restore Power Manager database from the drop down menu Type a 1 64 character name for the task 5 Select a time to run the task then click Next See Specifying when to run tasks on page 364 6 The Specify Power Manager Restore Backup Properties window will open a Type the directory location from which to retrieve the backup file which must be a logical or mapped drive on the DSView 3 server The directory name must be entered in case sensitive text if your operating system supports case sensitive filenames b Ifthe specified directory location is a network path that requires a login enable the Login required to access shared drive location checkbox Then type the username and password and confirm the password of a user account that has read write access to the network share location c Ifthe backup file is encrypted enable the Backup File is encrypted checkbox then type a password to unlock the encrypted file 7 Click Finish Running tasks manually Although tasks are scheduled to run at particular times using the Add Task Wizard you may run an existing task at any time To manually run tasks 1 Click the System tab 2 Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks
92. interface modem port of the DSR switch A modem PPP dial up connection must be established before the DSR Remote Operations software may be started The modem port should have auto answer tumed off typically a modem s default setting The dial up connection options should be set to 115200 baud 8 bits 1 stop bit no parity and enabled hardware flow control The DSR Remote Operations application must be started within the authentication time out specified in the Terminal Applications menu of the DSR switch or the PPP modem link will be disconnected Ensure that the PC containing the client interface has dial up software and that the software is configured properly See the operating system documentation for more information Install the DSR Remote Operations software Installing the DSR Remote Operations software In this procedure the DSR Remote Operations software plus its online help and the JRE Java Runtime Environment will be installed Minimum requirements for the DSR Remote Operations software The following are the minimum requirements for installing the DSR Remote Operations software as a DSView 3 software client 1 GHz Pentium or equivalent processor 512 MB RAM XGA video with graphics accelerator Desktop size setting of at least 800 x 600 Color palette of at least 256 colors One of the following operating systems 418 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide e Windows 2000 Workstation or Server with Service Pack
93. is too dark or too light select Tools Automatic Video Adjust or click the Automatic Video Adjust button This command is also available in the Video Adjustments dialog box In most cases this will correct video problems In those cases where clicking on Auto Adjust several times does not set the contrast and brightness as desired adjusting the contrast and brightness manually may help First increase the brightness Do not go more than 10 increments before moving the contrast Generally the contrast should be moved very little Detection thresholds In some cases noise in the video transmission keeps the packets sec count up This may be seen when little dots change in the area of the cursor when it is moved Varying the threshold values may result in quieter screens and improved cursor tracking Noise Threshold and Priority Threshold values may be modified if you are using standard video compression Block Noise Threshold and Pixel Noise Threshold values may be modified if you are using the KVM switch DVC algorithm upgrade Default threshold values can be restored by clicking Auto Adjust Video Block noise threshold and pixel noise threshold The Block Noise Threshold and Pixel Noise Threshold values set the minimum color levels in terms of changed video blocks and pixels per thousand that are allowed e The Block Noise Threshold sets the minimum color change that will occur in a single video block Increasing the value will redu
94. lt String gt NOT lt String gt Results Entering a string displays a filtered list of items that contain the word thatis it will find matching strings that are followed by anything other than a letter or number For example typing email will list any items that contain the string email followed by a space or punctuation mark If you enter multiple words separated by spaces but without logical operators OR is assumed and each word is treated separately For example typing email server will display items containing email or server Surrounding the string with quotation marks displays a filtered list of items containing the exact string including spacing and punctuation For example typing email server will display items that contain email server The DSView 3 software will provide a closing quotation mark if it is omitted Using the AND logical operator displays the items that contain both strings For example typing email and server will display items named email server 3 email server 2 server email and so on Using the OR logical operator displays the items that contain at least one of the strings For example typing email or server will find any items that contain the string email or the string server Parentheses may be used to override the default left to right order of precedence during evaluation of a filter string For example searching for email and server or service would be the equivalent of email an
95. management software functionality that allows access to a supported DSR switch when an Ethernet connection is not available For example if you are in a branch office and your Ethernet network is down you may still access your remote server network by attaching a v 34 v 90 or v 92 compatible modem to the modem port on a supported DSR switch for KVM access administration and flexible server management control from anywhere in the world NOTE The DSR Remote Operations software uses the IPv4 protocol for communication so the IPv4 protocol must be enabled on the client server The IPv6 protocol may also be active on the client server but has no impact upon DSR Remote Operations The following DSView 3 software operations are supported e Establishing a KVM session to a target device connected to the switch e Controlling the power sockets of a power device attached to the DSR switch SPC port e Rebooting the switch e Retrieving and displaying the switch version All other DSView 3 software options including using virtual media are not available when using the DSR Remote Operations software The following Video Viewer window commands are not available when using the DSR Remote Operations software e Displaying connected user information e Creating editing copying and deleting macros Only the default Windows and Sun macro groups are available when using the Remote Operations software e Background refresh The DSR Remote Operations s
96. menu but may not be supported on all appliances If a value is not supported it is disabled or hidden If you enable Allow users to override this setting or if no profile is assigned to the target device users may specify the video scaling using Video Viewer menu commands See Video commands on page 304 Background refresh The background refresh setting enables or disables background refresh When background refresh is enabled a small portion of video data is constantly sent by the KVM switch to background refresh the Video Viewer window When background refresh is disabled the Video Viewer window is updated by the switch only when it determines that the target device video image has changed NOTE This option is not available if the switch does not support background refresh or if the DSR Remote Operations software is being used to connect to the DSR switch viewing the target device See DSR Remote Operations Software on page 415 Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 297 If you enable Allow users to override this setting or if no profile is assigned to the target device users may enable disable background refresh using Video Viewer menu commands Users may also use the Refresh Image command See Video commands on page 304 Managing KVM session profiles Only appliance administrators may display add change or delete a KVM session profile To assign a profile to a target device the user must either be an appliance administrator or h
97. navigation bar e Sessions Per Day Displays the number of sessions opened to a target device from the DSView 3 software each day during the last seven days Frequently Accessed Targets Displays the number of sessions opened from the DSView 3 software for each target device during the last seven days Click the arrow next to Today to select the number of days to include in the report data If you select Custom enter the dates and times in the fields provided If you select Last nn days enter the number of days in the field provided Click Run Report The report is displayed as a line graph Click the bar chart or table view icons to change the view or click the interpolation icon to show only data points If applicable you may click the colored boxes below the report to show or hide report data for a category Click Export Data if you wish to export and save the report data as a csv file Click Schedule Export Task if you wish to create a task that exports Usage Report data at specific intervals See Task Exporting a Usage Report to a csv file on page 372 186 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 187 Power Devices and Power Device Sockets See Power devices on page 7 for information about the power device types and models that are supported on Avocent appliances See Licenses on page 60 for information about third party power device licenses Power Devices To display a list of power devices attached to an ap
98. navigation bar click Data Logging then Archiving The Data Logging Archiving Properties window will open In the Archive by frequency field select the interval for archiving current data log files daily every day at midnight local time weekly every Sunday at midnight or monthly the first day of each month at midnight In the Archive by size field enter a size from 1 2000 MB When a current file reaches this size it will be closed and archived In the Number of archived versions field select a value 1 10 This specifies the maximum number of archived versions of a file based on the file name that will be retained When this number is exceeded the oldest archived file will be deleted For example if a value of 5 is specified up to five archived versions of each file will be retained When a subsequent archive operation occurs for that log file triggered either by the archive frequency or size value being reached the oldest archived version will be deleted Changing this value affects all archived files Click Save Dynamically archiving and deleting data log files Data log files are automatically archived and deleted according to the properties specified in the preceding procedure You may also archive current files or delete archived files at any time To archive data log files dynamically 1 2 4 gt Click the Reports tab Click Data Log Session Files in the top navigation bar The Data Log Session
99. of line Erase from beginning of line to cursor Erase entire line containing cursor Erase from cursor to end of screen Appendices 431 Encode Decode No Yes No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes limited support Yes Yes limited support Yes Yes limited support No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Reverse Video only No Yes No No No No No Yes 432 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Control Sequence Esc 1 J Esc 2 J Esc Ps Ps Ps q Esc Pt Pbr Esc gorEsc 0g Esc 3g Esc 20h Esc 201 Esc 1h Esc 11 gt Esc 21 Esc 3h Esc 31 Esc 4h Esc 41 Esc 5h Esc 51 Esc 6h Esc 6l Esc 7h Esc 7I Esc 8h Definition Erase from beginning of screen to cursor Erase entire screen Programmable LEDs Scrolling Region Clear tab at current column Clear alltabs Modes to Set New Line Only supports Linefeed New Line Column mode wraparound Modes to Reset Linefeed Only supports Linefeed New Line Column mode wraparound Modes to Set Cursor Key Mode Appl Modes to Reset Cursor Key Mode Cursor Modes to Reset VT 52 Modes to Set 132 columns Modes to Reset 80 columns Modes to Set Smooth Scroll Modes to Reset Jump Scroll Modes to Set Reverse Screen Mode Modes to Reset Normal Screen Mode Modes to Set Relative Origin Mode Modes to Reset Absolute Origin Mode Modes to Set Wraparound On Modes to Reset Wraparoun
100. opens Click Connections The Connections window opens Click Add The Add Unit Connection Wizard opens From the menu select a target device to be merged with the hypervisor manager or server Click Next Click Finish The new connection is displayed To delete merged connections 1 2 3 In a Units View window containing Virtualization units click the name of a hypervisor manager or server The Unit Overview window opens Click Connections The Connections window opens Select the connection from the list Click De ete then click Yes to confirm 211 Data Logging The DSView 3 software supports logging of serial session console data from certain appliances and their target devices using the Syslog protocol NOTE Navigation links configuration pages and display pages for data logging will only be visible for appliances and target devices that support Syslog messaging The DSView 3 software has an SSH server that supports SSH2 this server must be enabled in the DSView 3 software to use the data logging feature An appliance establishes an SSH connection to the DSView 3 server using its X 509 appliance certificate on demand when it has Syslog messages to send The SSH server then forwards valid messages to the Syslog server this server must be enabled in the DSView 3 software to use the data logging feature There are two types of Syslog messages e Data log messages Contain serial console data that will
101. or remove a power device the power device must be in the online state Additionally to add a power device other than an Avocent SPC or Cyclades power device you must have a valid third party license see Licenses on page 60 1 In a Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name The Unit Overview window will open Click Manage Power Devices in the Tools area The Power Management Wizard will appear You may also access the Power Management Wizard by clicking the following sequence in the side navigation bar Appliance Settings Ports Power Devices Manage The Select Action window will open To add a power device enable the Add Power Devices radio button e To remove a power device enable the Remove Power Devices radio button Click Next The Select Parameters window will open a In the Port menu select the port where the power device will be added or removed e Fora DSR switch containing one SPC port the Port menu will indicate SPC and cannot be changed For a DSR switch containing more than one SPC port the Port menu will contain entries for each for example SPC 1 and SPC 2 e Fora serial console appliance select the physical port number in the Port menu e Foran appliance supported by a plug in select the appropriate port value b Ifyou are adding a power device select the type in the Power Device Type menu c Click Next A Complet
102. otc ose cou aeesuk am tude noth te mer dondeet i sas amadet sack Gace eile TESA 201 ALI SACTIVEFSCSSTONS incest 2 Z222 mc d att Maen aw a and k cure hai lity ac DA 201 Active sessions on a target device 0 2 2 2 c cece eee eee cece eee cece eeeeeee 203 Active modem SESSIONS sosa AAA Ka DIZA MA Shido Sa eh We an m b bss Dan eg Raha es 205 Connections to Units 2 00 0 c ccc cee cee cee eee cee eee cence eee ceeeeeees 207 Connection display format 0 0 2 22000 ccc cence cece cence cece eee KEKE KAK KK 207 Renaming a managed appliance connection 222200000 20 eee eee SAS 209 Adding and deleting target device connections 22222220000e eee ee eee eens 209 Merging virtual and physical target device connections 22 2222 210 Data Ee e oTi ayo aie E ee hk abe HE HEkNERERNRHHEHEEnHNnNERMNJ T D 211 Configuring Data Logging 0002 cece cece EEE EE EE EEE cece cece cece eee eeeeeee 212 Enabling the SSH server 02 22 2000 ESASA cece ccc cece EE SE cece ccc SEK KK KK KK KK KK KK 213 Enabling the Syslog server 00220200000 cc eevee cece ccc ence ESER KK KK 214 Enabling and disabling data logging on units 222220 00000 eee e eee eee eee 214 Verifying the data logging settings for each connection 222222 215 Viewing and customizing the SSH server settings 200220000eeeeeeeeee 216 Configuring th
103. request is sent to the DSView 3 server which then sends a command to the managed appliance The command is converted and serially sent to the power device The power device then performs the requested action for example turning a power outlet on or off The DSView 3 software supports the following power devices e Avocent SPC power control devices e Server Technologies Sentry Switched CDU CW 8H1 CW 8H2 CW 16V1 CW 16V2 CW 24V2 CW 24V3 CW 32VD1 and CW 32VD2 supported models may change contact Avocent Technical Support for current information Cyclades Power Distribution Units AlterPath PM devices All of the above power devices are supported on DSR switches that contain one or more SPC ports Avocent and Server Technologies power devices are also supported on CCM and CPS appliances System Configuration Figure 1 1 illustrates an example system configuration using the DSView 3 management software For information about the TCP ports that the DSView 3 software uses see TCP and UDP Ports on page 407 rn a 2 a11 8 10 m 13 H n 12 dU EN 15 Hie re 17 ere TF mm _ kaml L ax xa e dee m ee panes ca XERE nee ID edi Chapter 1 Product Overview 9 Figure 1 1 Example System Configuration Table 1 1 DSView 3 Software System Configuration Descriptions Number Description Number Description 1 DSView 3 Software Client 12 Power Device 2 Hub DSView 3 Software Server 13 Generic Appliance 3
104. security zone typically has its own security restrictions The following four security zones are available in Internet Explorer Trusted Sites Web sites contained in the list of trusted sites Restricted Sites Web sites contained in the list of restricted sites Local Intranet Web sites accessed using a host name for example https sun e2 callisto Internet All other web sites including those accessed using standard dot notation for example https 10 0 0 1 By default the DSView 3 software operates correctly in the Internet Local Intranet and Trusted Sites security zones when accessing a hub server 50 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide NOTE ADSView 3 software hub server installed on a PC running the Windows 2003 Server will not operate correctly in the Internet security zone The current security zone appears in the lower right comer of the DSView 3 Explorer window To ensure that the DSView 3 software works correctly in security zones Specify settings for the Local Intranet and Internet security zones When a DSView 3 software client accesses a hub server using a host name for example https avocent the Local Intranet security zone will be used When a client accesses a hub server using a web address with periods for example https www avocent com the Intemet security zone will be used Or Add the DSView 3 software hub server to the Trusted Sites list The DSView 3 software client will always c
105. selected See Changing user options on page 41 Clicking on a link that does not contain an arrow will display its corresponding window Some windows contain additional links which may display another window and a side navigation bar with different content 30 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Using Windows Sorting information in a window The order of rows in a list may be changed by clicking the heading of one of the displayed columns When you click a column heading the order of the list rows will change to alphabetically ascending based on that column If you click the column heading a second time the order will change to an alphabetically descending order An up arrow indicates ascending order and a down arrow indicates descending order If you are using the topology feature in a Units View window see Topology view on page 116 for sorting criteria Filtering information in a window Some DSView 3 software windows allow you to filter list information by providing a text string that will be used to retrieve matching items Filtering is useful if you have many target devices or other items that extend over many pages Windows that allow filtering contain a text field and a Filter button in the content area as shown in Figure 3 1 Filtering is performed either over the entire list of items or of specified columns and can provide a shorter more exact list of items When filtering is performed each row and column is searche
106. selecting Tools Virtual Media To map a physical drive as a virtual media drive a In the Virtual Media dialog box click the Mapped checkbox next to the drive s you wish to map If you wish to limit the mapped drive to read only access click the Read Only checkbox next to the drive If the virtual media session settings were previously configured so that all mapped drives must be read only this checkbox will already be enabled and cannot be changed You might wish to enable the Read Only checkbox if the session settings enabled read and write access but you wished to limit a particular drive s access to read only To add and map an ISO or floppy image as a virtual media drive In the Virtual Media dialog box click Add Image The common file dialog box will appear with the directory containing disk image files that is those ending in iso or img displayed Select the desired ISO or floppy image file and click Open Or If the client workstation s operating system supports drag and drop select the desired ISO or floppy image file from the common file dialog box and drag it onto the Virtual Media dialog box The file s header is checked to ensure it is correct If it is the common file dialog box will close and the chosen image file will appear in the Virtual Media dialog box where it can be mapped by clicking the Mapped checkbox 324 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide d Repeat steps a through c
107. serial session applications see Choosing the serial session application on page 42 SSH Passthrough Sessions You may establish an SSH connection to a target device or an appliance console by specifying the appropriate name in the SSH command You may also establish an SSH session to a target device with multiple connections but the appliance name and port number must be entered in place of the target device name NOTE It is recommended that no more than 2048 concurrent data logging and SSH Passthrough sessions be open 226 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Preemption Your SSH session may be interrupted or disconnected based on the appliance preemption levels If the appliance supports DSView 3 software preemption levels then user preemption rights will be determined based on the preemption levels set in the DSView 3 software For more information see Preemption Levels on page 46 Logging in with a User SSH key A user SSH key may be used instead of a password to authenticate the user before establishing an SSH Passthrough session See User SSH key on page 268 to configure the key Establishing an SSH Passthrough connection to a unit To establish an SSH Passthrough connection to a target device or appliance console NOTE If you are using the Linux or Unix SSH command you will need to specify the port by entering p and the port number The default port number is 4122 For more information or to change the port numbe
108. share location To encrypt the created system backup file enable the Encrypt Backup File checkbox then type a password to lock and unlock the encrypted file To append the date and time in military time to the end of the system backup filename enable the Use date and time for file naming checkbox For example if you are creating the backup file on October 1 2005 at 10 04 pm the file created will be named dsviewBackup1001052204 zip If a system backup file already exists in the specified directory and this option is not enabled the existing backup file will be overwritten when the new backup file is created 7 Click Finish Task Configure SNMP trap settings on a managed appliance This task turns SNMP traps on or off for one or more managed appliances of a particular type To specify SNMP trap settings for other types of managed appliances you must create additional tasks Once this task is added you may run it on demand at any time see Running tasks manually on page 382 You may also configure SNMP trap settings manually see Managed Appliance SNMP Settings on page 169 To add the task 1 Click the System tab 2 Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open Chapter 22 Using Tasks 369 3 Click Add The Add Task Wizard will appear 4 Select Configure SNMP trap settings on appliance from the drop down menu Type a 1 64 character name for the task 5 Select a time to run the task see Speci
109. socket From a Power Device Sockets window see the procedure in this section From a Units View window containing power devices see the procedure in this section From the Video Viewer see Power Control of Devices Attached to Power Devices on page 320 From the Telnet Viewer see Power Control of Devices Attached to Power Devices on page 345 From the DSR Remote Operations software see Power control of devices attached to power device sockets on page 423 To control power from a Power Device Sockets window 1 In a Units View window containing appliances see 4ccessing Units Yiew windows on page 118 click on the appliance name Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar click Ports and then Power device in the side navigation bar The Power Devices Attached to Appliance window will open Click on the name of a power device Click Sockets The Power Device Sockets window will open Chapter 11 Power Devices and Power Device Sockets 193 Click the checkbox to the left of the power device socket s To select all sockets on the page click the checkbox to the left of Socket at the top of the list Click On Off or Cycle to power up power down or power cycle off and then on the selected power device sockets The Power field for the selected sockets will reflect the state For certain power device types and models administrators may also lock or unlock a socket s current state by clicking Lock or Unlock This
110. status for both of these connections If both connections do not reply with ON or OFF the power status will display as Partial Power The managed appliance did not provide status information This may occur for multiple reasons such as the appliance is not powered up or itis disconnected from the DSView 3 software system e Action Type of session that may be initiated Although a unit may have multiple actions that may be performed for example you may be able to access a target device using a browser session or a Telnet session only one action will be displayed NOTE Actions are also available from Connections windows For example a target device that is only attached to a serial console appliance will not contain a KVM Session link If a target device has a connection to both a serial console appliance and a KVM switch a KVM Session link will appear As shown in Figure 7 1 other available actions that have been enabled may be accessed by clicking the Alternate Actions arrow to the right of the action with the highest precedence Clicking on one of the displayed links will launch the corresponding window type 122 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Action KVM Session Click on the Alternate Actions KVM Session KVM Session KVM Session Exclusive KVM Session Browser Session l Telnet Session KVM Session KVM Session Figure 7 1 Alternate Actions Arrow in a Units View
111. tab 2 Click Groups in the top navigation bar The Unit Groups window will open 3 Click the checkbox to the left of one or more unit groups then click Rights The Unit Group Access Rights window will open Chapter 15 Grouping Units 247 If you are setting access rights for one unit group you may click on the unit group name then click Access Rights in the side navigation bar to access the Unit Group Access Rights window To add or remove a user or user group from the User and User Groups list a Click Edit List The Unit Access Rights User Selection window will open To add one or more users or user groups select the user s or user group s from the Available list then click Add The users and or user groups will be moved to the List to Update list To remove one or more users or user groups select the user s or user group s from the List to Update list then click Remove The users and user groups will be moved to the Available list Inherited users and user groups can only be removed from the first unit group that specified any access rights other than inherit b Click OK The Unit Access Rights window will display the current list of users and or user groups When a user or user group is added to the list the default access rights will be displayed To set access rights select a user or user group from the User and User Groups list then enable or disable a checkbox in the Access Rights table for each access ng
112. target device s in the Assigned Target Devices list then click Remove The target devices will be moved to the Available Target Devices list Click Next The Completed Successful window will open 10 Click Finish The Appliance Local User Accounts window will open To delete a local user account 1 4 5 In a Units View window containing appliances see 4ccessing Units Yiew windows on page 118 click on the appliance name Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar and then click Local Accounts The Appliance Local User Accounts window will open Click the checkbox to the left of the local usernames to be deleted To delete all local user accounts click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list Click Delete A confirmation dialog box will appear Confirm or cancel the deletion To change the settings of a local user account 1 Con ER EDN A ak In a Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar and then click Local Accounts The Appliance Local User Accounts window will open Click on the name of a local user account The Appliance Local User Account Settings window will open Type a new name for the local user Select a preemption level 1 4 for the local user See Preemption Levels on page 46 If available select an access level User Administrator
113. the DSR Remote Operations window will display version information for the following items e Application Boot e Digital Application e Digital Hardware e Hardware Rebooting a switch NOTE Users with a User level account may not reboot a switch To reboot the switch 1 From the menu select Tools Reboot Appliance A confirmation dialog box will appear 2 Confirm or cancel the reboot Appendices 423 Managing servers To connect to a server NOTE Users with a User level account may connect to a server only when given access to a switch Select View Servers from the menu or click Servers in the side navigation bar Select a server and select Tools Connect from the menu or Select a server and click the Connect toolbar button or Right click on a server and select Connect from the shortcut menu A Video Viewer window will open See Using the Video Viewer on page 285 Power control of devices attached to power device sockets Users with User level account privileges cannot change the power state of power device sockets Use the Power view to manage power device sockets attached to the switch See Power view on page 422 To control the power of a device attached to a power device socket 1 Select View Power from the menu or click Power in the side navigation bar A list of power device sockets attached to the switch will appear in the content area 2 To power up a device attached to a power device socket cho
114. the DSView 3 software hub server for example https 10 0 0 1 Click Add The web site address will appear in the web sites list box Ensure that Require server verification https for all sites in this zone is selected Click OK to save the settings and close the Trusted Sites dialog box Click OK to close the Intemet Options dialog box Advanced Internet options Internet Explorer contains advanced settings that may be specified to enhance use of the DSView 3 software Changing these settings is not required but is recommended for optimum results To specify advanced Internet options for the DSView 3 software 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options The Internet Options dialog box appears Click the Advanced tab Select the following settings e Always send URLs as UTF 8 e Disable script debugging e Play animations in web pages e Show pictures e Print background colors and images e Use SSL 2 0 e Use SSL 3 0 Select Enable Integrated Windows Authentication if the DSView 3 software is using Integrated Windows Authentication See Integrated Windows Authentication on page 55 Uncheck the following settings e Always expand ALT text for images 52 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 6 e Display a notification about every script error Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog box Certificates The DSView 3 software system uses certificates to provide secure transactions b
115. the DSView 3 software Once the DSView 3 software is installed and you have configured the hub server users may log in at another computer as a DSView 3 software client using a supported web browser You may also install the DSView 3 software on additional computers and configure them as spoke servers See Spoke Servers on page 80 and Jnstalling the DSR Remote Operations Software on page 24 NOTE Alicense key permits the operation of the DSView 3 software on the dedicated server The license key also specifies the number of clients that may use the software and the number of spoke servers allowed on a system See Licenses on page 60 12 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Minimum requirements for the DSView 3 software The following are the minimum requirements for installing the DSView 3 software on a dedicated hub server or a computer that will function as a DSView 3 software spoke server For supported Windows and Linux systems 2 GHz Pentium or equivalent processor For supported Solaris systems 1 GHz UltraSparc III processor 4 GB of RAM additional memory may be needed depending on the number of plug ins installed and appliances supported 100BaseT NIC 1GByte LAN recommended 10 GB of free disk space additional disk space may be required for data logging and plug ins One of the following operating systems Windows Server 2003 Standard Enterprise and Web Edition Windows Server 2008 Standard Enterprise and Dat
116. the File field type the path and name of the import file or browse to the file location The file must be a valid DSView 3 software data import file in an XML format Click Next 356 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 8 The Select Import Options window will open Specify the User Password Options Select Set the user s password to the user s username or Set the user s password to a default value If you choose a default password value type a 3 64 character password in the Password and Confirm Password fields Specify the Account Options Depending on which options you choose you may select multiple checkboxes Only valid combinations will be enabled You may choose from the following options e Disable user account e User must change password at next login e User cannot change password e Password never expires Click Next The Import In Progress message will display until the import attempt is complete If the import is successful the Completed Successful window will open and display a summary of the results If the import was not successful the Completed Unsuccessful window will open and display the errors that caused the import to fail If some items could not be imported a message will direct you to a csv file with more information You may attempt to import the data again Click Finish Although data has been imported from the AlterPath Manager to the DSView 3 software system the units are not yet compatible
117. the IP address 172 30 20 206 for the host name sun jcv fc3 avocent com above the existing line that defines the loopback address 127 0 0 1 172 30 20 206 sun jcv fc3 avocent com 127 0 0 1 localhost localdomain sun jcv fc3 avocent com localhost sun jcv fc3 DSView 3 server certificate presented to DSView 3 software client web browsers When the Avocent proxy server is used DSView 3 software client KVM and serial session requests are sent through the DSView 3 server rather than directly to the KVM switch or serial console appliance which prevents the exposure of the internal address of the managed appliance You may change the proxy server configuration EVR1500 environmental monitor DSI5100 IPMI and generic appliance sessions are not sent through the DSView 3 server even when the proxy is enabled 66 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Property SSH Server Trap Destinations DSView Client Sessions DSView Modem Session Email Unit Status Polling Spoke Servers Data Logging Description Enables disables the SSH server and specifies the port it uses The DSView 3 server polls KVM switches or serial console appliances to determine if they are responding If the managed appliance does not respond the DSView 3 server sends an SNMP Loss Of Communication LCM trap or alert to the external SNMP manager When the DSView 3 server detects that the appliance is once again communicating a Regained Communication
118. the Power Device Input Feeds window For detailed field descriptions see the product documentation Use the Customize link to add or remove fields in the display See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 Input Feed Name Status Unknown on off cycling pending off pending on pending cycle or no status Load Alarm Threshold a trap will be sent if the Load value reaches the Alarm Threshold value Load Max a trap will be sent if the Load value is greater than the Load Max value Load Min a trap will be sent if the Load value is less than the Load Min value To change power device input feed information 1 In a Units View window containing appliances see 4ccessing Units Yiew windows on page 118 click on the appliance name Click Appliance Settings click Ports and then Power devices in the side navigation bar The Power Devices Attached to Appliance window will open Click on the name of a power device Click Input Feeds in the side navigation bar The Power Device Input Feeds window will open Click on an input feed name The Power Device Input Feed Settings window will open Some fields are read only For fields that can be modified enter or select new values Click Save and then click Close The Power Device Sockets window will open Click Close The Power Devices Attached to Appliance window will open Chapter 11 Power Devices and Power Device Sockets 191 8 Click Close The Units View window will op
119. the access right is neither allowed nor denied Repeat the preceding step to change access rights for other users user groups Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open Managed Appliance Settings To change the network settings of a managed appliance NOTE The MAC address cannot be changed 1 In a Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name 3 Chapter 10 Managing Units 167 Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar and then click Network The Appliance Network Settings window will open To change information e Type an IP address in standard dot notation xXX XXX XXX XXX If you change the appliance IP address in the Appliance Network Settings window you must then also change the address in the Unit Network Properties window See Unit Properties on page 158 When changing an IP address always change it in the Appliance Network Settings window before changing it in the Unit Network Properties window e Type a subnet in standard dot notation xxx xxx xxx xxx e Type a gateway in standard dot notation xxx xxx XXX XXX e Specify a LAN speed This network setting will not appear for CPS appliances e Enable or disable DHCP or BootP KVM switches e Enable or disable ICMP ping reply Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open To change the IP addresses of DSView 3 servers used for mana
120. to find the user and user groups to which the authenticated user belongs If you deselect Allow use of Users Groups from Trusted Forests any previously discovered trusted forests will be hidden from the User Authentication Services window and users belonging to trusted forests will not be permitted to log in Click Save to save your changes e Ifyou selected Use SSL in Certificate based Trust Mode the Certificates heading will appear in the side navigation bar Go to step 13 e Ifyou selected Do Not Use SSL or Use SSL in Trust All Mode go to step 16 96 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 15 16 17 18 Click Certificates The Authentication Service Certificate Management AD window opens and list all servers in that domain A status of Trusted indicates the certificate is trusted based on the certificate policy see System certificate policy and trust store on page 53 Untrusted indicates the certificate cannot be trusted To register certificates a To select one or more certificates click the checkbox to the left of the server IP addresses To select all certificates on the page click the checkbox to the left of the IP Address heading b Click Register above the IP Address list to register the certificates The Accept SSL Certificate window will open c Click Save to store the certificate values to the DSView 3 software database on the host or click Close if you do not wish to save the certificate va
121. units documentation for further information Changing embedded unit credentials You may change the login credentials for the IBM ASM RSA II DRAC 4 and NEC IPF embedded units To change login credentials for an IBM ASM RSA II embedded appliance 1 Click the Units tab 2 Click Appliances in the side navigation bar and then click on the appliance type in the side navigation bar 3 Click on the embedded appliance name 6 Chapter 10 Managing Units 183 Click the Credentials link in the side navigation bar and then click Credentials in the side navigation bar The IBM ASM RSA II Settings window will open To change information e Inthe Appliance Name field type a 1 64 character appliance name The name is not case sensitive Inthe Usemame field type a 1 64 character username to be used to log in to the embedded appliance Usernames are case sensitive e In the Password field type a 1 64 character password to be used to log in to the embedded appliance Passwords are case sensitive Click Save and then click Close To change login credentials for a DRAC 4 embedded appliance F 2 6 Click the Units tab Click Appliances in the side navigation bar and then click on the appliance type in the side navigation bar Click the embedded appliance name Click the Credentials link in the side navigation bar and then click Credentials in the side navigation bar The DELL DRAC4 Settings window will open To c
122. which checks the permissions of the target device If the logged in user has permissions to establish sessions to the selected target device the server will establish a connection to the appliance using TCP IP port 3871 to authorize the session In a non proxied SSH connection the client communicates directly with the appliance using port 22 410 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide DSView 3 Software Client TCP IP Port 22 SSH A gt j Firewall wm ED EE oe DSView 3 Server LTP n irs yd i _ UD Port 3211 z x 1 TCRIP Port3211 jwa TCP IP Por 3871 gt ri Figure B 3 Ports Used with a Serial Console Appliance Connection Serial Without Proxy In a proxied connection communication between the DSView 3 server and serial console appliance occurs over port 22 The SSH connection between the client and the DSView 3 server is tunneled over port 1078 Appendices 411 DSView 3 Server DSView 3 Software Chent TOPAP b TOPAP ee ENA __ a en i UDP Foaia an Port 3211 TOPIE 7 io Port 3211 r l l TOPP TCPIIP HTTPS 1078 Pon 443 Serial i i TCP IP Port 3871 _ I Serial Console Appliance Firewall 2 e Tunnel r l l l l Router Figure B 4 Ports Used with a Serial Console Appliance Proxy Server Connection Serial DSView
123. which the user belongs For example if a user belongs to appliance administrators with a group preemption level of 3 and auditors with a group preemption level of 1 this field will display 3 See Preemption Levels on page 46 When a User Accounts window contains this column or a Preemption Level column values are not displayed for external users users validated with external authentication services You may display an external user s effective and group preemption level by selecting the user s name and then clicking Preemption Levels in the side navigation bar Home Address Home address defined in the user s properties See Address on page 271 Home Phone Home phone number defined in the user s properties See Phone contact on page 271 Mobile Phone Mobile phone number defined in the user s properties See Phone contact on page 271 Pager Pager number defined in the user s properties See Phone contact on page 271 User Preemption Level User preemption level defined in the user s properties See Preemption Levels on page 46 and Preemption level on page 271 Adding User Accounts The following information is configured when a user account is created Whether the user will be authenticated using the DSView 3 software internal authentication or an extemal authentication server See Authentication Services on page 87 The user groups in which the user will be included Each user group contains specific acc
124. will indicate the name of the DSView 3 software server To change server network properties 1 2 Click the System tab Click Network in the side navigation bar The DSView Server Network Properties window will open Type a new DSView 3 server port number in the HTTPS Port field Chapter 5 DSView 3 Servers 67 If the default value 443 is modified the port number in the URL must be specified when accessing the DSView 3 software For example if the IP address of the hub server is 10 0 0 1 and the port number is changed to 444 https 10 0 0 1 444 dsview must be typed in the Address field of the web browser to access the DSView 3 software The selected port must be available on the DSView 3 server If DSView 3 software clients are located on an external connection the specified port must be open on the firewall 4 Click Save A confirmation dialog box will appear A web browser error message will appear when Save is clicked This error message is a normal occurrence To reestablish connection to the DSView 3 software you must reconnect to the hub server by typing the URL with the new port number For example if you changed the port number to 334 for a hub server with an IP address of 10 0 0 1 type https 10 0 0 1 334 dsview to access the DSView 3 management software 5 Confirm or cancel the change Server certificates DSView 3 software administrators manage server certificates See Certificates on page 52 fora d
125. will open Click Add The Add User Group wizard will appear The Select Authentication Service window will open This window lists all authentication services that may be used to authenticate the user group when the user logs in Select an appropriate TACACS authentication service from the list Click Next If the TACACS service you selected is configured to use the privilege level attribute method the Specify External Group Name window will open and display a list of privilege levels 0 15 the higher the number the higher the level of access Select a privilege level from the list The DSView 3 server will assign a group name based on the privilege level you select For example if you choose level 7 the group name will be Privilege Level 7 Click Next or If the TACACS service you selected is configured to use the group name custom attribute method the Specify External Group Name window will open and display a Name field Type the name for the extemal user group on the external authentication Chapter 18 User Groups 279 service The group name must correspond to one of the values configured in the TACACS service 2 Click Next Select a role for the user group s then click Next See Built in User Groups on page 45 for information about user roles From the Preemption Levels menu select a preemption level from 1 4 the higher the number the higher the preemption level See Preemption Levels on page 46 Click F
126. window will open Chapter 22 Using Tasks 383 Click the checkbox to the left of the task s you wish to run To select all tasks on the page click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list Remote tasks that are scheduled on another DSView 3 server may not be run from the DSView 3 server to which you are logged in To run a remote task you must log in to the DSView 3 server on which the task was created Click Run Now The icon to the left of the task name will change to the running icon and the status of the task will change to Running Displaying task results The Task Results window displays the status of the most current mn of tasks including successful and unsuccessful runs and information on each run The following fields display in the Task Results window for the Configure SNMP trap settings on appliance Control power of target devices Migrate Units Send IPMI chassis control command to target devices and Upgrade firmware of selected appliances of the same type tasks Name Names of the unit on which the task is running or has been run Start Time Exact time at which each task run occurred Duration Date and time of the task run Status Result of the task run To display the results of a task 1 2 3 Click the System tab Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open Click the name of the task The Task Results window will display containing information about the task
127. window will open To change the contact properties for one or more units from a Units View window 1 In a Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the checkbox next to the unit s To change contact properties for all units in the page click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list If the page contains units that do not support contact properties they will not be affected Click Operations then select Properties from the drop down menu The Multiple Unit Properties window will open e To change the primary contact information click Primary Contact Type names and phone numbers for the primary contact 4 Chapter 10 Managing Units 161 e To change the secondary contact information click Secondary Contact Type names and phone numbers for the secondary contact Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open To change the custom fields for a unit 1 3 In a Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance or target device name Click Properties in the side navigation bar then click Custom Fields in the side navigation bar The Unit Custom Fields window will open To change information type the information in each of the custom fields Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open To change the custom fields for one or more units from a Units View window l s GE rak gt In a
128. with the DSView 3 software To complete the configuration and import process you must use the Migrate Units task When creating the Migrate Units task it is recommend that you select Enable Secure Mode for the units See Task Migrating units on page 373 Using the Managed Appliance Tools The DSView 3 management software contains tools that allow you to perform the following actions on a supported KVM switch or serial console appliance Reboot Upgrade the firmware Resynchronize the managed appliance so that it reflects the current DSView 3 software system configuration Save or restore the configuration Chapter 21 Using Tools 357 e Save or restore the database of local users To access the managed appliance tools 1 Click the Units tab In the side navigation bar click one of the following e Appliances The Appliances All window will open You may also click on a link below Appliances to display only specific types of managed appliances in an Appliances window e Sites and then click on a site link A Units in Site window will open e A custom field label and then the label you specified for the managed appliance The Units in Custom Fields window will open e Recently Accessed The Recently Accessed Units window will open 2 Click on the name of a managed appliance The Unit Overview window will open The tools are listed in the Tools section of the window Rebooting To reboot one or more managed appliances from
129. y i Port 8192 i Poten yd l ae pK i TGPIIP KVM Switch ssa l l l Mouse l Figure B 1 Ports Used with a KVM Switch Connection Without Proxy In a proxied connection communication with TCP IP ports 8192 and 2068 occurs between the server and the KVM switch instead of directly between the client and the KVM switch The client receives information by communicating back and forth with the server using port 1078 Appendices 409 DSView 3 Server DSView 3 Software Client a TCRIP HTT2S j _ 7 TOPAP gt Part 1078 _ _ van UDP Por 3211 EE gt TORE A Pet 3211 F a EN X 1 j TORIR H Port 3871 I ae P TEPP TCP IP Port 1078 HTTPS KVM Firewall with Tunnel F TCP IP I Port 8192 ur u 4 erat y9 gt Port 2088 5 5d KVM Switch t l k ee ee ee L j Figure B 2 Ports Used with a KVM Switch Proxy Server Connection KVM If the user wishes to establish a session with another port on the KVM switch the same process is used For debugging purposes connection details may be seen by using the console port to place the KVM switch into Debug mode Serial console appliance ports Like a KVM switch a serial console appliance may use a non proxied or a proxied connection Serial console appliances use a Secure Shell Protocol SSH The client contacts the server
130. you may also enable or disable the Prohibit users from selecting a higher value checkbox When enabled users 300 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide e may select a higher color depth value than the current setting When disabled users may not select a higher value but they may select a lower value In the Video Scaling field choose the desired value Enable or disable the 4 ow users to override these settings checkbox If users are allowed to override this setting you may also enable or disable the Prohibit users from selecting a higher value checkbox When enabled users may select a higher video scaling value than the current setting When disabled users may not select a higher value but they may select a lower value In the Background Refresh field enable or disable background refresh Enable or disable the Allow users to override these settings checkbox If you changed any settings click Save 9 Click Close To delete one or more KVM session profiles NOTE The default KVM Session Profile cannot be deleted 1 Click the Units tab 2 Click Profiles in the top navigation bar 3 To delete one or more profiles click the checkbox to the left of the profile name To delete all profiles except the Default KVM Session Profile click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list 4 Click Delete A confirmation dialog box will appear 5 Confirm or cancel the deletion To assign a KVM sessi
131. 1 0 Build 06 14 HP iLO Integrated Lights Out Version 1 20 NEC IPF Itanium Processor Family Version 0 5 1 20 For management functions other than launching video sessions that are not performed by the DSView 3 software see the documentation for the unit Legacy units The following legacy units are supported in the DSView 3 software DSI5100 IPMI proxy appliances EVR1500 environmental monitors DS1800 digital switches AutoView 200 4 200 8 400 4 400 8 416 424 and 2000 AM switches these switches must be Flash upgraded to be added to a DSView 3 software system OutLook 140ES 180ES 280ES 1160ES 2160ES and 4160ES switches Cyclades KVM net KVM over IP switches Cyclades KVM net Plus KVM over IP switches Cyclades TS appliances CCM console management appliances CPS810 and 1610 serial over IP network appliances Target devices Target devices encompass a wide range of data center components such as servers and routers that a DSView 3 software administrator may manage virtually through the DSView 3 software system A target device is added automatically to your DSView 3 software system when the supported managed appliance is added A target device may also be added individually Power devices A power device is a type of target device that can be cascaded from a managed appliance 8 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide When a DSView 3 software client sends a power control request to a target device an HTTPS
132. 1 huntsville gt 520255 023FB7 switch one 4 gt 520255 023FB704 dsr 102 1 huntsville gt 520255 023FB7 switch one 5 gt 520255 023FB705 dsr 102 1 huntsville gt 520255 023FB7 switch one 6 gt 520255 023FB706 dsr 1021 huntsville gt 520255 023FB7 switch one 7 gt 520255 023FB707 dsr 102 1 huntsville gt 520255 023FB7 switch one 8 gt 520255 023FB708 Example Power device connection In the following example an Avocent SPC power device is connected to the SPC port of a DSR1021 switch named dsr 1021 huntsville SPC device outlet Al is connected to target device 02 17 F2 SPC A1 dsr 1021 huntsville SPC gt 02 17 F2 SPC A1 gt 02 17 F2 SPC Al To display a connections window 1 Ina Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on a unit name The Unit Overview window will open 2 Click Connections in the side navigation bar e Ifyou selected a target device the Target Device Connections window will open including all connections to the target device 3 Chapter 12 Unit Sessions and Connections 209 Ifyou selected a managed appliance the Appliance Connections window will open including all connections to the managed appliance Optional Click Table to view the connections as a table or click Graphical to view the connections as an illustration Renaming a managed appliance connection To rename a managed appliance connection 1 5 In
133. 2 or later e Windows XP Home Edition or Professional The DSR Remote Operations software is installed from the DSView 3 software DVD To install the DSR Remote Operations software 1 2 3 Log on to the host system as Administrator Insert the DSView 3 software DVD An autorun file opens a menu of installation options Click Install DSR Remote Operations or If autorun is not enabled type lt drive gt DSR Remote Operations win32 setup exe where lt drive gt is the letter of your DVD drive An installation preparation dialog box displays and the installation program will verify that the client computer meets the minimum requirements for installing the DSR Remote Operations Software The Introduction window will open Click Next The License Agreement window will open e If you accept the terms click J accept the terms of the License Agreement and then click Next Go to step 7 e Ifyou do not accept the terms click Z do NOT accept the terms of the License Agreement A License Agreement Waming message box will appear e Ifyou click Quit the installation will exit without installing the DSR Remote Operations software e Ifyou click Resume you will be returned to the License Agreement window The Choose Destination Location window will open a Click Choose and use the Browse for Folder dialog box to select a directory in which to install the DSR Remote Operations software Or Click Restore Default Folder t
134. 233 Custom Fields ecco r GS EE EE NI EIS 236 CL LOUD eaaa 25253535023538 na DEDA A2 ss be tus eerie 1 00A de tar RAN DA QE Sok Nan Sean 239 Unit group hierarchy c h ivess See Jih k l hala ub Dada ala zik dil dod Soe Saute sl tik i 241 Adding or deleting a unit group 0 0000222 c ccc cence eee eee cence cece cece AA 244 Changing the unit group properties 000222 e cece EEE EEE EEE EEE A KAS 245 DS ZONES 02 og ei A EEE E welsh ease oa een A HHH tise ss eee 249 Managing and Accessing Zones 2 2 2 0 000222 E EEE EEE EE EEE EEE EEE EEE KESEK KK KK KAS 249 Enabline DS Zones daois Shoe oe eet HHHH HHH Se EI SES 249 GCrEGUNG ZONES 2 N NN ESS Be OE EES 249 ACCESSING ZONES 22 ee eee 250 Transferring units tO A ZONe u cee e EEE EEE SEKE KK KS 251 Managing zone properties 2 2 0 2 0222 252 C SINS ZONES 82 APRs Oe O DD DD r ES SPOS eee LCE StS EES 8 Sol 254 Units actions in ZONC 2 22 eee 254 Managing User Accounts 22 222 e eee ecceeeeeeeeeceeees 261 User Accounts Windows 2 00 0000 e EEE SEE EE EE ee ee eee cece KESK KK KK KK KK KRG 261 Adding User ACCOUNTS Suyu S5 2553 2a diode d n W n eae k s n i bbn Coe Se geek bA Ooo Soe 263 Deleting User Accounts 0002222002 c cece eee cece eee EE EE EE SK SK EKE KK KK KK KK 266 x DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Unlocking User ACCOUNTS 2 l lia suun sU LA B
135. 3 server ports The DSView 3 server uses the HTTPS port for communication with clients and spoke servers Changes made to the browse list through the DSView 3 management software are transmitted back to the DSView 3 server host which refreshes its browse list view over the TCP IP port 443 connection Changes to the DSView 3 software are also copied to and from the DSView 3 software hub server over the specified HTTPS port Generic appliance ports If you are using a generic appliance in your DSView 3 software system you may use a Telnet connection through TCP IP port 23 or an HTTP connection through TCP IP port 80 The connection is made directly between the client and the generic appliance 412 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide DSView 3 Software Client OSView 3 Server TCPIIP Port 23 a gt moor Generic Appliance Figure B 5 Generic Appliance Session Ports If Active Directory or LDAP extemal authentication is being used within your DSView 3 software system TCP IP ports 389 and 636 are used for connections between the DSView 3 server and the external authentication server Port 389 is typically used for non SSL connections and port 636 is used for SSL connections You may configure the ports used by an Active Directory or LDAP external authentication server using the Authentication Service Connection Settings window See Authentication Services on page 60 Appendices 413 External authentication ports DSVi
136. 7 Example Custom fields In the following example a DSView 3 software administrator wants to examine a unit test configuration The units will be placed in one of two categories an initial configuration or a final configuration category The administrator also wants to identify the unit s managers At the present time the DSView 3 software administrator has one DSR1021 switch and one EVR1500 environmental monitor to add to the test configuration category and one generic appliance to add to the final configuration category 1 First the DSView 3 software administrator will define the custom fields a b Click the Units tab Click Custom Field Labels in the side navigation bar The Unit Custom Field Labels window will open In Label 1 type Test Configuration All first level custom fields for units will appear under this heading in the side navigation bar In Label 2 type Appliances and target devices All second level custom fields for units will appear under this heading in the side navigation bar In Label 3 type Manager This custom field will not appear in the side navigation bar but may be displayed in the content area by using the Customize link Click Save to save the changes Custom Field Labels will still appear in the side navigation bar because the administrator has not yet defined any custom fields for the units 2 A DSR1021 switch has been added to the system but will need to go into a category named I
137. Appliance Administrator or User Type a new password for the local account and then confirm the password Click Save and then click Close The Appliances window will open To change target device access rights to a local account 1 In a Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name Chapter 10 Managing Units 181 2 Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar and then click Local Accounts The Appliance Local User Accounts window will open 3 Click on the name of a local account The Appliance Local User Account Settings window will open If the local user has Configure Local Accounts rights a message will indicate that the local user may access all target devices in the system 4 For all managed appliances except CCM appliances click Access Rights in the side navigation bar The Appliance Local User Account Access Rights window will open e To add local user account access to one or more target devices select the target device s in the Available Target Devices list Click Add The target devices will be moved to the Assigned Target Devices list e To remove local user account access to one or more target devices select the target device s in the Assigned Target Devices list Click Remove The target devices will be moved to the Available Target Devices list 5 For CCM appliances e To change local user account access by port click Access Ri
138. Can add units as members No can only add groups No No can only add groups Yes Yes e Unit Groups window clicking the Units tab and then Groups in the top navigation bar e Units View Groups window clicking the Units tab and then Groups in the side navigation bar Global groups that contain units the user cannot access will not be displayed unless there are descendent groups containing units the user is allowed to access All personal unit groups are displayed in the Unit Groups window even if they do not contain any units In Units View Groups windows groups will not be listed unless they have assigned units 242 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Y Global Root Alpha 1 Beta gt Delta f Gamma _ 2 Lab 3 re a d Unassigned 4 r Personal Root ProjectA ProjectB l 5 gt ProjectC 6 Figure 15 3 Unit Group Hierarchy Example Table 15 4 Unit Group Hierarchy Example Descriptions Number Description Number Description Global unit group Alpha has one or Global unit group Unassigned has all units 1 4 that are not assigned to a group it cannot more subgroups have subgroups 2 Global Unit group Gamma has two 5 Personal unit group ProjectB has no subgroups subgroups These unit groups do not have 3 subgroups in a Units view Group Personal unit group ProjectC has one or window a document icon will appear more subgroups to the left In the example four unit groups
139. Click Login The window that appears depends on the rights assigned to the DSView 3 user that is logging in If the client machine uses an onboard video controller and experiences video problems be sure the BIOS is updated to the latest version RSA SecurlD login When an RSA SecurID external authentication service has been added to the DSView 3 software the login credentials include a usemame and a passcode The passcode includes a PIN and an RSA SecurID tokencode The login request is sent to the RSA Authentication Manager Depending on the user configuration and state on the RSA Authentication Manager the user may be prompted for a second successive tokencode The user configuration also specifies how the 4 6 digit PIN will be generated User defined the user must enter a PIN System generated the user cannot enter a PIN it must be generated by the RSA server User selectable the user may choose to enter a PIN or allow the RSA server to generate it 22 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide If a PIN has not yet been assigned to the user or if security policy requires a PIN change the user will be prompted accordingly If the RSA server generates the PIN the user will be given a brief interval to memorize it Regaining access If access to a DSView 3 software system is lost see Regaining Access to the DSView 3 Software on page 443 Uninstalling the DSView 3 Software To uninstall the DSView 3 software on a supported Win
140. DSView 3 software database Multiuser cascade switches are treated as separate cascade switches by the managed appliance You may initiate a manual name pull from a Units View window and from the following windows e Target Devices window see Target Device Settings on page 172 e Power Device window see Power Devices on page 187 e Power Device Sockets window see Power Device Sockets on page 191 e Appliance cascade switches window see KVM Switch and Cascade Switch Settings on page 175 To initiate a name pull operation from a Units View window 1 Ina Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the checkboxes next to one or more units To select all units on the page click the checkbox to the left of the heading at the top of the list 2 Click Operations then select Pull Names from Appliance from the drop down menu 3 The Multiple Unit Operations window will open containing a link to the Operation Results window see Multiple unit operations from a Units View window on page 124 Topology Synchronization The topology synchronization operation updates the DSView 3 software database when a change occurs in a managed appliance Examples of changes are the adding removing of an IQ adaptor cascade switch or power device Synchronization options include e Merge target device names A target device that has connections to more than one appliance managed by the DSView 3 software can appear as two dif
141. DSView 3 server A DSView 3 server is a customer provided PC on which the DSView 3 management software is installed DSView 3 software client The DSView 3 software client is a customer provided PC with an installed web browser The web browser accesses the DSView 3 server and provides the user interface that is the DSView 3 Explorer for the DSView 3 software system The DSView 3 Explorer enables users to access and administer the server managed appliances and target devices DSView 3 software client session The DSView 3 software client session is a single HTML session between the client web browser and the server For each DSView 3 software client session the user must log into the DSView 3 server Multiple DSView 3 software client sessions can exist between a given DSView 3 software client PC and the DSView 3 server This occurs when the user launches another web browser window and connects to the same DSView 3 server A DSView 3 software client session may contain multiple target device sessions DSView 3 software hub server A DSView 3 software hub server is responsible for maintaining the master copy of the DSView 3 software system database Only one server in a DSView 3 software system can be configured as the hub server Spoke servers in a DSView 3 software system Appendices 449 perform database replication with the hub server The DSView 3 software hub server acts as the traffic cop for database replication between itself and
142. Deleting tasks NOTE Remote tasks which are scheduled on another DSView 3 server may not be deleted from the DSView 3 server to which you are logged in To delete a remote task you must log in to the DSView 3 server on which the task was created To delete a task 1 2 3 Click the System tab Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open Click the checkbox to the left of the task s you wish to delete To delete all tasks on the page click the checkbox to the left of Name column at the top of the list 384 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 4 Click Delete A confirmation dialog box will appear 5 Confirm or cancel the deletion Changing tasks NOTE Remote tasks which are scheduled on another DSView 3 server may not be modified from the DSView 3 server to which you are logged in To change a remote task you must log in to the DSView 3 server on which the task was created You may change the schedule and properties for existing tasks The Validate extemal authentication server user accounts task does not contain properties To change a task schedule 1 Click the System tab Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open Click on the name of the task et os iS Click Schedule in the side navigation bar The Task Schedule window will open Select the type of task you wish to schedule and complete the information See Specifying when to run tasks on page 364 To cha
143. Domain Users Groups in LDAP extemal authentication services are specified using a modified distinguishedName of their LDAP object minus the group base DN specified in the DSView 3 software For example if you have an LDAP external authentication service with a group base DN of ou myldap c US the cn Admin Users ou Users o myldap c US group will have a DSView 3 software equivalent of Admin Users Using the same example but with the cn Admin Users c Sunrise ou Users o myldap c US group the DSView 3 software equivalent is Sunrise Admin Users Adding User defined User Groups If you are using DSView 3 software internal authentication you may add your own custom user defined user groups and then add other users that use DSView 3 internal authentication as members Extemal user defined user groups on external authentication servers may be added but their membership is not controlled by the DSView 3 software NOTE You must have DSView 3 software administrator or user administrator rights to add user defined user groups Chapter 18 User Groups 277 DSView 3 software internal RADIUS LDAP Windows NT or Active Directory authentication services To add a user defined user group 1 Click the Users tab Click Groups in the top navigation bar Click User Defined in the side navigation bar The User Groups User Defined window will open Click Add The Add User Group wizard will appear The Sel
144. E cece EE SE SEE EE SEES KK eee eees 276 Deleting User defined User Groups 000202200020 c EE EEE ESAS EE SEES KEKE KAK KK 279 User Group Properties osise enrere oaa zal A E LA eee 279 Changing User Group Members 2 222 222 0 cc ee eee eee EE EE EE SES cece EK KK KK KK KI 280 User Group Access Rights LALES ASAS SES cece SE SEES SES eee eee eee cece ee KK KK KK 281 Using the Video Viewer 0 00 000 c cece cece cee cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeees 285 About the Video Viewer 22 0 0c cece cece eee cence cece ccc cence cece ee KK KK KK KH 285 WindOW Features i Ay 2a hn g l dek Xalzlaa kh lie D cay Di a 2 Sad Satie as 286 Opening a KVM Session 2 2 0 2 0022200 EE ELE SEES EEE SE SE SEKS SK eeeeee 288 Opening an exclusive KVM session 0000220000 anaoa nanoa oenen rannen 288 Connecting to an existing SeSSION 2 22 22200022 289 Video Viewer session properties 0 22202000cc cence cece cece cence EEE KAS 290 Session time out 2 2 2 20 ccc LAL LAL LL LL EEL a222 LLL SAS SS E SK KK anaana nann 291 Table of Contents xi Closing a Video Viewer Session 0000200c0cccccce SEZA EEE EEE EEE KEK KK 291 KVM S SSiON Profiles veces ois Bok 2 EN BE en 4 aryl Genk DN ek thd 291 General profile settings 0 0 2 2 00 cece eee e cence eee EE EE SEES AER eeees 292 CursOr profile settings noco soo eos sins HHH EBHH HH HH HiiN N8ai ai
145. Esc Pnq Scrolling Region Esc Pnr Clear tabs Esc Png Device status report Esc Pnn What are you Esc Pnc Sat Mode Esc Pnh Delete Pn Characters Esc PnP Insert Pn Lines Esc PnL Delete Pn Lines Esc Pn M Insert Character Esc Pn Erase Pn Characters Esc Pn X Appendices 443 Appendix E Regaining Access to the DSView 3 Software Access to a DSView 3 software system may be lost due to reasons such as Being locked out by the DSView 3 software e Deleting the last DSView 3 software administrator e Forgetting the DSView 3 software administrator password To regain access to a DSView 3 software system 1 Contact Avocent Technical Support You will be provided with the resetpassword zip archive file 2 Extract the resetpassword zip archive file into the lt DSView Installation Directory gt bin directory on the DSView 3 software hub server using a third party product 3 From the Control Panel select Administrative Tools Services and stop the Avocent DSView 3 software service 4 Open a terminal window change directories to the lt DSView Installation Directory gt bin directory and enter resetpassword bat A code successfully generated message will appear in the terminal window along with a request code in the same format as the following 341D3DAD E71A15B1 66D77BBD E655BB6C NOTE Request codes are valid for only four hours 5 Contact Avocent Technical Support and provide the generated request code 6 Avocent Technical Suppo
146. Files window will open Click the checkboxes to the left of current log files to be archived To select all files on the page click the checkbox at the top of the list The status for all selected files must be Current Click Archive Now A confirmation dialog box will appear Confirm or cancel the archiving To delete data log files dynamically NOTE Always use this procedure to delete data log files dynamically rather than using other methods to delete files 1 Click the Reports tab 220 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 4 5 Click Data Log Session Files in the top navigation bar The Data Log Session Files window will open Click the checkboxes to the left of log files to be deleted To select all files on the page click the checkbox at the top of the list Click Delete A confirmation dialog box will appear Confirm or cancel the deletion Viewing Data Log Files Displaying lists of data log files Each row in the display table contains the following information about a single log file Log file name Name of the DSView 3 server where the file was created and stored When the file was created When the file was last modified File size in megabytes Status Archived Current File not Found or Pending The Size and Last Modified fields are optional use the Customize link to add or remove them from the display see Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 To display information abo
147. For more information about the options that affect adding target devices connected to the appliance see Topology Synchronization on page 146 For appliances supported by plug ins the content of this window may differ see the appropriate documentation a Enable the Enable secure mode checkbox if you want the managed appliance to only be accessible by this DSView 3 software system In non secure mode the managed appliance may be added to multiple DSView 3 software systems 132 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide This checkbox will not appear when adding a DSI5100 appliance which may only be added in Secure mode b Enable the Allow target devices with the same name to be merged into a single target device checkbox if you wish to merge a target device that has multiple connections into a single target device c Under Allow target devices that contain default names to be added for these type of connections you may enable the checkboxes for one or more connection types Any target devices that contain default names in the managed appliance and support the enabled connection type in the managed appliance will be added to the DSView 3 software database This option has no effect when adding a DSI5100 appliance since default target device names are not supported A target device is named when it is added as a BMC port using the Add IPMI BMC Wizard d Click Next If automatic inheritance is enabled the Select Group s to Inh
148. II characters other servers may have a different limit NOTE If you change the authentication type you will be required to enter the shared secret c Re enter the shared secret in the Confirm Shared Secret field d Click Save 6 To change the group authorization settings click Group Authorization in the side navigation bar The Method field will display the group authorization method configured when the TACACS authentication service was added This field cannot be changed a In the Service field type the appropriate TACACS service If TACACS privilege level attribute is the method the default value is shell If TACACS custom attribute for group names is the method the default value is raccess If the TACACS service requires a protocol for authorization requests type the protocol in the Protocol field In the Attribute Name field type the attribute name that the DSView 3 server will receive after an authorization request If TACACS privilege level attribute is the method the default value is priv lvl Chapter 6 Authentication Services 111 If TACACS custom attribute for group names is the method the default value is group_name d Click Save 7 Click Close The User Authentication Services dialog box will appear RSA SecurlID external authentication service When an RSA SecurID external authentication service is added the DSView 3 software obtains user authentication information and r
149. JavaScript on the client s web browser e Configure the web browser If you are using Internet Explorer see Internet Explorer Considerations on page 48 To open a client session NOTE If DSView 3 Software Client Certificate Authentication or DSView 3 Software Client Integrated Windows Authentication is being used the user will not be required to log in See Certificates on page 52 Chapter 2 Installation 21 From the DSView 3 software client web browser enter the URL of the server host in the address bar in the format https lt servername gt dsview In this case lt servername gt is the DNS name of the host system or the IP address in standard dot notation xxXx xxx XXX XXX NOTE To avoid multiple security warnings enter the DNS name Or If you are opening the session on the DSView 3 server you may select Start Programs Avocent DSView 3 DSView Software Accept all security alerts that may appear as the client computer connects to the DSView 3 server The DSView 3 Explorer User Login window will open If an RSA SecurID external authentication service has been added to the DSView 3 software see RSA SecurID login on page 21 below for the login procedure Type a valid username and password in the fields provided Depending on the settings specified by the administrator you may be required to change your password before being allowed to complete the login process See Adding User Accounts on page 263
150. Keypad Keypad Keypad 0 9 Keypad 0 9 gt 0 9 F1 F1 EscOP F2 F2 EscOQ F3 F3 EscOR F4 F4 EscOS F6 F6 Esc 17 F7 F7 Esc 18 F8 F8 Esc 19 F9 F9 Esc 20 F10 F10 Esc 21 F11 F11 Esc 23 F12 F12 Esc 24 F13 Ctrl F5 Esc 25 F14 Ctrl F6 Esc 26 F15 Ctrl F7 Esc 28 F16 Ctrl F8 Esc 29 F17 Ctrl F9 Esc 31 F18 Ctrl F10 Esc 32 Appendices 435 VT220 Keyboard Byte VT220 Keyboard PC Keyboard Sequence F19 Ctrl F11 Esc 33 F20 Ctrl F12 Esc 34 Table D 9 lists the decoding for VT220 terminal emulation Table D 9 VT220 Decoding VT220 Keyboard Function VT220 Keyboard Byte Sequence Index Esc D New Line EscE Reverse Index EscM Escape Esc O Save cursor and attributes Esc7 Restore cursor and attributes Esc8 Up Arrow Esc A Down Arrow Esc B Right Arrow Esc C Left Arrow Esc D Set cursor to home position Esc H Set cursor to home position Esc f Character attributes Esc m Erase from cursor to end of line gt Esc K Erase from cursor to end of screen Esc j Programmable LEDs Esc q What are You Esc c 436 VT220 Keyboard Function Set Mode Delete 1 Character Insert 1 Line Delete 1 Line Up Arrow Down Arrow Right Arrow Left Arrow Fill Screen with Es Up Arrow amount specified by Pn Down Arrow amount specified by Pn Right Arrow amount specified by Pn Left Arrow amount specified by Pn Erase parts of current line Erase parts of current screen Direct Cursor Addressing Direct Cursor Addressi
151. License Key window will open If you did not receive a license key click the http www avocent com activation link to obtain a license key Type a valid new add on license key in the License Key field License keys from a DSView software release prior to version 3 0 are not valid Click Save The License Keys window opens containing a new row with the new license key 64 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide System Information The System Information window displays the total number of client sessions in use and the DSView 3 software version currently installed To view system information 1 Click the System tab 2 Click Global Properties in the top navigation bar 3 Click System Information in the side navigation bar The System Information window opens ISV Partners The Avocent Independent Software Vendors ISV partners program supports configuring and launching a browser from within the DSView 3 software to the console of the Ipswitch WhatsUp Professional Only members of the DSView 3 administrators user group may configure ISV partner URLs See the Avocent web site for more information about the ISV partners program To add or change the partner URLs 1 Click the Units tab 2 Click Partners in the top navigation bar 3 If partner URLs have not already been configured click Properties in the side navigation bar 4 The Partner Properties window will open Enter the URLs for launching a browser to the
152. Options button The Session Options dialog box appears 2 Click the General tab 3 Enable or disable the Background Refresh checkbox 4 Click OK You may also use the Refresh Image command To refresh the screen Click the Refresh Image button in the Video Viewer toolbar or select View Refresh from the Video Viewer menu The digitized video image will be completely regenerated Mouse scaling command Mouse scaling cannot be specified in a KVM session profile To prevent potential mouse conflicts you may configure certain settings on each server connected to a managed appliance For details see the Mouse and Pointer Settings Technical Brief which is available on the DSView 3 software DVD and on the Avocent web site Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 305 To set mouse scaling 1 Select Tools Session Options from the Video Viewer menu or click the Session Options button The Session Options dialog box appears 2 Click the Mouse tab 3 To use one of the preconfigured settings enable a radio button e Inthe Default 1 1 scaling ratio every mouse movement on the desktop window will send an equivalent mouse movement to the server e Inthe High 2 1 scaling ratio the same mouse movement will send a 2X mouse movement e In the Low 1 2 scaling ratio the value will be 1 2X 4 To set custom scaling click the Custom radio button The X and Y fields become enabled Type a mouse scaling value in the X and Y fields For eve
153. PS dialog box will appear Contact the issuer of your certificate 3 When a Warning Security dialog box appears you have the following choices e Ifyou click Yes a connection will be made with the appliance and the viewer will open but the warning dialog box will continue to appear each time you connect to the serial console appliance e Ifyou click No a connection will not be made with the serial console appliance e Ifyou click Always the certificate will be added to the Java certificate store To create a CSR 1 Click the System tab 2 Click Certificate in the side navigation bar The DSView Server Certificate Properties window will open 3 Click Get CSR A File Download dialog box will appear 4 Click Open The CSR is downloaded and displays in the configured text editor Or Click Save The Save As dialog box will appear Select a directory and filename and click Save to save the CSR 5 Submit the CSR generated request to a CA to obtain a signed server certificate 6 Update the DSView 3 server to use the certificate created by the CA 70 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To update certificate information on the DSView 3 server NOTE You may also update a spoke server certificate on a hub server and update a hub server certificate on a spoke server see Managing hub and spoke server certificates on page 71 1 2 Click the System tab Click Certificate in the side navigation bar The DSView
154. Power Device gt lt Port gt lt target device gt lt DSI5100 Appliance Name gt lt Port gt gt lt target device gt The following examples illustrate typical connections that may appear in your DSView 3 software Example Target device connections In the following example there are three target devices connected to ports 3 4 and 8 ofa DSR1021 switch named dsr 1021 huntsville The DSR1021 switch ports are connected to the three target devices using IQ modules The IQ module with an EID of 520255 044F6F is 208 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide connected to target device td john while 520255 03F757 is connected to td mary and 520255 016BEO is connected to td tim dsr 1021 huntsville 3 gt 520255 044F6F gt td john dsr 102 1 huntsville 4 gt 520255 03F757 gt td mary dsr 102 1 huntsville 8 gt 520255 016BE0 td tim Example Cascade switch connection In the following example an AutoView 200 1 x 8 switch is connected to port one of a DSR1021 switch named dsr 1021 huntsville using an IQ module with an EID of 520255 023FB7 Each port of the AutoView 200 switch is connected to a different target device 520255 023FB701 through 520255 023FB708 dsr 1021 huntsville gt 520255 023FB7 switch one 1 gt 520255 023FB701 dsr 1021 huntsville gt 520255 023FB7 switch one 2 gt 520255 023FB702 dsr 1021 huntsville gt 520255 023FB7 switch one 3 gt 520255 023FB703 dsr 102
155. Rights window will open To add or remove a user or user group from the Access Rights Assignment list click Edit List The Unit Access Rights User Selection window will open e To add one or more users or user groups select the users or user groups from the Available list then click Add The users and or user groups will be moved to the List to Update list To remove one or more users or user groups select the users or user groups from the List to Update list then click Remove The users and user groups will be moved to the Available list Click OK The Unit Access Rights window will contain the current list of users user groups When a user user group is added to the list default access rights will be displayed To set access rights select a user or user group from the User and User Groups list then enable or disable a checkbox in the Access Rights table for each access nght e Allow the access right is allowed for the user group e Deny the access right is denied for the user group e Inherit the access right is inherited from the unit group s to which the selected user group belongs When Inherit is selected the Allow and Deny checkboxes will become gray and unchangeable and indicate the inherited value If the inherited settings indicated both Allow and Deny the inherited value is Deny which takes precedence To disable the inherit functionality uncheck the Inherit checkbox e If none of the checkboxes are checked
156. SSL in Certificate based Trust Mode to use SSL encryption for data transmission The DSView 3 management software will approve the server and then the certificate before transmitting data This SSL method provides maximum security Click Use Kerberos for User Authentication to use the Kerberos protocol for authentication requests including the browsing If enabled you must use DES encryption types for this account If an account was created prior to Active Directory the user s password must be changed after this setting is changed In addition the Active Directory server addresses must be resolvable to their host names via DNS When this is not checked the LDAP protocol will be used Click Enable Chasing of Referrals to allow the Active Directory server to refer DSView 3 software clients to additional directory servers Specify the search mode Enable Use Recursion to search groups if you wish to have the AD service access the domain controller for the specified domain name This search includes the Member attribute of ObjectClass group This search is recursive and finds nested groups This search may be slow depending on the number of groups and levels of nesting or Enable Use an Active Directory Global Catalog to have the AD service access the global catalog for the specified domain name The search includes the TokenGroups attribute of the ObjectClass user This search is faster but only retrieves the nested groups SIDs su
157. SView 3 software obtains external group membership and external user information when a user logs in If a user s group membership changes or the user is deleted externally the DSView 3 software will not see those changes until the next time that user logs in Preemption level See Preemption Levels on page 46 To change the preemption level of a user 1 2 3 4 5 Address Click the Users tab Click on a username The User Name window will open Click Preemption Levels in the side navigation bar The User Preemption Level window will open Select a preemption level 1 4 from the menu Click Save and then click Close The user address may be changed only for internal authentication users To specify address information for a user I SS Qaz A9 Click the Users tab Click on a username The User Name window will open Click Addresses in the side navigation bar The User Address Properties window will open Type the home address and business address of the user Click Save and then click Close Phone contact The phone contact may be changed only for internal authentication users To specify phone contact information for a user 1 2 3 Click the Users tab Click on a username The User Name window will open Click Telephones in the side navigation bar The User Telephone Properties window will open Type the home phone number business phone number mobile phone number mobile business pho
158. SView 3 software system provides redundancy and the ability to distribute DSView 3 software functionality across multiple sites After the hub server and optional spoke server s are configured you may create and configure the type of access levels for users within your network environment You may also set up event logs to record full details of user access and other events DSView 3 software client A DSView 3 software client is a computer with a web browser that can access the DSView 3 management software installed on the DSView 3 server Third party products Third party products are not a part of the DSView 3 software but are supported for use with it External authentication servers An external authentication server enables the DSView 3 server to broker authentication requests from users requesting access to the DSView 3 software system SNMP managers The SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol manager monitors the managed appliances and receives SNMP traps from the DSView 3 software on the server An example of an SNMP manager is the HP OpenView product Third party Telnet viewers A third party Telnet viewer may be used for serial sessions instead of the DSView 3 software Telnet Viewer 4 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Third party session software Third party software such as RDP or VNC when properly installed and configured on the target device may be enabled for use within the DSView 3 software for ini
159. Save to store client session information in the DSView 3 software database on the host DSView 3 software modem sessions For more information about modem sessions see Active modem sessions on page 205 NOTE Modem sessions are available on supported ACS console servers To specify modem session properties Click the System tab Chapter 5 DSView 3 Servers 75 Click DSView Modem Sessions in the side navigation bar The DSView Server Modem Session Properties window will open Specify the following Session Timeout properties a Inactive dial up session timeout in the drop down menu specify the number of seconds in the range of 60 3600 after which the session will be terminated The default value is 120 seconds Dial up connection attempt timeout in the drop down menu specify the number of seconds in the range of 60 600 after which the attempt will be terminated The default value is 120 seconds Dial back connection attempt timeout in the drop down menu specify the number of seconds in the range of 60 600 after which the modem will be removed from listening mode The default value is 120 seconds Specify the following Dial Up settings a In the Server Prefix field type the dial up prefix for the DSView 3 server to obtain an outside line This prefix will be added to the unit phone number Enter the IP address range to be used in dial up connections in the From address and To address fields Specify the foll
160. Server Certificate Properties window will appear Click Update The Update DSView Server Certificate Wizard will appear The Select Operation to Perform window will open Select Create a new self signed SSL server certificate to create a minimal security SSL certificate without incurring the costs and overhead involved with a Certificate Authority CA Click Next then go to step 5 Select Import a signed SSL server certificate to import a more secure SSL certificate that has been approved perhaps by a CA The public key of the imported certificate must match the public key in the certificate that the DSView 3 server is currently using This requires that both certificates be made on the same DSView 3 server Click Next then go to step 6 The Type in Certificate Information window will open a 2 Type the name of the computer that will serve as the DSView 3 server on your intranet in the Common Name field If the DSView 3 server is outside the intranet type the server s full domain name in dot notation format xxx xxx xxx xxx Type the name of the organization or country Type the name of the organizational division or name under which the organization is doing business Type the complete city or location name The City or Location field is required for organizations registered only at the local level Type the complete name of the state or province where the organization is located Type the two character ISO count
161. Services window will open The User Authentication Services window may be customized by using the Customize link See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 To remove authentication services NOTE The internal authentication service cannot be removed 1 Click the Users tab 2 Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open 3 Check the checkbox to the left of the authentication service s to delete To delete all external authentication services on the page check the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list 4 Click Delete A confirmation dialog box will appear 5 Confirm or cancel the deletion DSView 3 software internal authentication service To change the DSView 3 internal authentication service account policies 1 Click the Users tab Chapter 6 Authentication Services 89 2 Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open 3 Click DSView Internal The side navigation bar will change to include DSView Internal at the top and below the name the information you may define 4 Click Account Policies The Authentication Service User Account Policies DSView Internal window will open 5 Specify the password policies for the authentication service a Type a number from 1 64 in the Minimum Password Length field or click the arrows to select a number b Check the Passwords Expi
162. Session Settings window will open Chapter 12 Unit Sessions and Connections 199 4 Inthe Session Lock area enable the Virtual Media locked to KVM session checkbox if you wish to close the virtual media session when the associated KVM session is closed When this feature is disabled an active virtual media session will remain active when the associated KVM session is closed 5 In the Drive Mappings area choose an access mode from the Virtual Media Access Mode menu read only or read write When the access mode is read only the user will not be able to write data to the mapped drive on the client machine When the access mode is read write the user will be able to read and write data to the mapped drive If the drive is a read only drive for example CD DVD drives or ISO images the access mode setting will be ignored If the drive on the client machine is read write for example a mass storage device or USB removal media setting read only access mode will prevent the user from writing data to the client machine 6 In the Encryption Level area enable one or more encryption levels for the virtual media session DES 3DES 128 Bit SSL or AES Any combination of selections or no selection is valid 7 Ifthe KVM switch supports virtual media the Virtual Media Access per IQ Module section lists all USB2 or PS2M IQ modules The list includes details about each IQ module including a virtual media status of Enabled or Disabled The lis
163. T100 ANSI VT52 Up Arrow lt Esc gt A lt Esc gt OA lt Esc gt A Down Arrow lt Esc gt B lt Esc gt OB lt Esc gt B Right Arrow lt Esc gt C lt Esc gt OC lt Esc gt C Left Arrow lt Esc gt D lt Esc gt OD lt Esc gt D NOTE When the Terminal Emulation mode is VT52 the Arrow keys are interpreted as indicated in this column regardless of the value in the Arrow Keys list Select Options Session Properties from the menu or click the Session Settings icon in the toolbar The Session Properties dialog box will appear Click the Terminal tab In the Arrow Keys list choose either VT100 or ANSI The default value is VT100 To change the terminal type 1 Select Options Session Properties from the menu or click the Session Settings icon in the toolbar The Session Properties dialog box will appear Click the Terminal tab In the Terminal Type box enter a value of up to 40 characters beginning with a letter and ending with a letter or digit Valid characters are the letters A Z digits 0 9 forward slash 334 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide dash left parenthesis and right parenthesis The terminal type must be entered in the Terminal Type field exactly as shown in Table 20 4 Table 20 4 Terminal Emulation and Type Terminal Emulation Terminal Type VT52 DEC VT52 VT100 DEC VT100 VT100 DEC VT100 VT102 DEC VT102 VT220 DEC VT220 VT320 DEC VT320 To change the linefeed settings 1 Select Optio
164. TP requests such as requests from a web browser A web server uses the HTTP protocol to communicate with clients on a TCP IP network X 509 X 509 is the most widely used standard for defining digital certificates X 509 is an International Telecommunications Union ITU recommendation which means that the standard has not yet been officially defined or approved As a result companies have 458 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide implemented the standard in different ways For example both Mozilla and Microsoft use X 509 certificates to implement SSL in their web servers and web browsers However an X 509 certificate generated by Mozilla may not be readable by Microsoft products and vice versa sS Avocent The Power of Being There For Technical Support www avocent com support 590 395 501P
165. The Status column will indicate No Device Attached and the Type column will indicate the default valid connection type for that port The Action column will indicate Attach Device see the procedure in this section for how to attach device from this link If a target device is connected to multiple managed appliances it will appear multiple times in a topology view If you select one occurrence of an item all other occurrences are also selected If you expand a display and select one or more child items collapsing the display will hide those children and deselect them The Select All checkbox at the top of the list will only select displayed items on the current page Items that are hidden in a collapsed unit cannot be selected with the Select All checkbox In a topology view the number of items per page value applies to appliances and children even if the display is collapsed and the children are not visible You may also specify that the topology view expand automatically when the Topology button is clicked See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 If you filter the display see Filtering information in a window on page 30 and a child matches the filter criteria the parent s automatically open If only an appliance matches the filter criteria the appliance is closed unless the Expand View Automatically option is enabled To enable or disable a topology view In a Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on pag
166. The CSR filename is the name of the DSView server with extension p10 the PEM certificate filename is DSView System Certificate pem and the SSH key filename is DSView System Certificate pub For example if the server is running on Windows XP and the name of the server is WinXPServer the files are saved to rootdrive Documents and Settings username and the names are CSR file WinXPServer p10 PEM certificate DSView System Certificate pem SSH key DSView System Certificate pub To enable PCI compliance 1 Click the System tab 2 Click Global Properties in the top navigation bar 3 Click PCI Compliance in the side navigation bar The PCI Compliance Properties window will open 4 To enable PCI compliance select Make DSView Server PCI Compliant Click Save 5 Restart the DSView 3 server 6 Run the MSI installer to push the Video Viewer files to the Internet Explorer clients accessing the DSView 3 software follow the procedure in Managing ActiveX controls on page 48 NOTE The PCI compliance setting is not replicated to other DSView 3 servers You must configure PCI compliance settings individually for each server that you wish to be PCI compliant Profiles Profile information contains features and tasks that may affect actions when using the DSView 3 software These include e User options e Color scheme e Changing a password e Choice of serial session application e Specifying a user certificate e Specif
167. To delete all units on the page click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list 2 Click Delete You are prompted to confirm the deletion 3 Confirm or cancel the deletion Automatically deleting attached units For target devices exclusively managed by a single appliance you may specify that the target devices are automatically deleted when the managing appliance is deleted To modify target device delete policy settings 1 Click the System tab Chapter 8 Adding and Deleting Units 139 Click Global Properties in the top navigation bar Click Units then click Deletion in the side navigation bar If you want target devices automatically deleted select Delete target devices that no longer have connection Or If you do not want target devices automatically deleted select Do not delete the target devices 140 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 141 Synchronizing the DSView 3 Software Database This chapter describes how to synchronize the DSView 3 software database with changes that occur on units Name Synchronization Units and connections in the DSView 3 software system have a Name in DSView which is the name stored in the DSView 3 software database Some units appliance serial ports cascade switches target devices power devices and power device sockets may also have a Name in Appliance which is the name stored in the managed appliance The DSView 3 software name synchro
168. VM switches are opened from the Video Viewer About the Video Viewer The DS View 3 management software uses either a Java based program or an ActiveX applet to display the Video Viewer window The Java based Video Viewer is launched from the Mozilla and Firefox based clients when a KVM session is requested The ActiveX Video Viewer is launched from Internet Explorer on Windows KVM sessions may be launched to devices from any supported KVM switch Each KVM session will be established using the configured encryption level See Managed Appliance Session Settings on page 195 To launch a KVM session a user must have been assigned rights or belong to a user group which has been assigned rights to establish a KVM session See About Access Rights on page 163 The DSView 3 software uses system memory to store and display images within Video Viewer windows Each opened Video Viewer window requires additional system memory An 8 bit color setting on the client PC requires 1 4 MB of memory per Video Viewer window a 16 bit color setting requires 2 4 MB and a 32 bit color setting requires 6 8 MB Opening more than four simultaneous Video Viewer windows may affect system performance and is not recommended If you attempt to open more Video Viewer windows than your system memory allows you will receive an out of memory error and the requested Video Viewer window will not open 286 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide When using a non proxied connec
169. Video Viewer 291 6 To specify if a single available smart card can be automatically mapped enable or disable Automatically map the Smart Card when a single card is present 7 Click Save and then click Close Session time out A remote session may time out if there has been no activity in a session window for a specified time The session time out value is configured by the DSView 3 software administrator at the switch level See Managed Appliance Settings on page 166 You may override this value within the DSView 3 Explorer If you specify a new time out value it will be used the next time the DSView 3 software is started Closing a Video Viewer Session KVM To close a Video Viewer session Select File Exit from the Video Viewer menu Session Profiles KVM session profiles provide a convenient method of controlling KVM session behavior on a target device DSView 3 software appliance administrators may add change and delete KVM session profiles A profile is then assigned to a target device Appliance administrators or users with unit configure or unit edit rights may assign a profile to one or more target devices There is always one KVM session profile named the Default KVM Session Profile This profile is called the default profile for the remainder of this section Its configuration may be changed but the default profile cannot be deleted The default profile is used when the profile assigned to a target device is
170. View 3 Software Installer User Guide 7 e To remove one or more events select the event s from the Events To Notify list then click Remove The event s will be moved to the Available Events List Click Next The Select Unit Groups to Trigger Email Notification window will open e To add one or more unit groups select the unit group s from the Available Unit Groups list then click Add The unit group s will be moved to the Selected Unit Groups list e To remove one or more unit groups select the unit group s from the Selected Unit Groups list then click Remove The unit group s will be moved to the Available Unit Groups list Click Next The Completed Successful window will open Click Finish To change an email notification 1 Click Email Notifications in the side navigation bar The Email Notifications window will open Click on the email subject of the notification you wish to change The Email Notification Properties window will appear To change the notification information a Inthe Send To field enter or remove the email addresses of persons you want to notify Separate multiple addresses with a comma This field has a limit of 1024 characters b In the From field change the email address up to 64 characters of the person you wish to designate as the sender of the notification c In the Subject field change the subject heading up to 64 characters for the notification To change the even
171. View 2 x software migration file that have default names In DSView 2 x software a default name is considered to be a name such as Port 1 Channel 1 and Socket 1 All default names are adjusted when they are imported to include the name of each CPS appliance DS1800 digital switch and DSR switch Select Allow nodes with the same name to be merged into the same target device if you wish to merge a target device that has multiple connections into a single target device For example a target device may be connected to a both a DSR switch and a power device Select Add Active Directory authentication services instead of NT authentication services when Active Directory is detected to add an Active Directory service when an Active Directory domain is detected in the DSView 2 x software database migration file If this option is not selected the service will be added to the DSView 3 software system as a Windows NT Domain service Chapter 21 Using Tools 355 e Type the case insensitive names of any DSView 2 x software database nodes that you do not wish to import separated by commas in the Node Names to Ignore field Any children within the parent nodes listed in the field are also ignored that is not imported You may import a node containing a comma on its name by enclosing the node name in quotation marks For example to import a node named node two containing a comma and a node named nodeone type node two nodeone in the No
172. View 3 server When a session is initiated with a target device the viewer communicates using the Avocent Proxy Protocol APP and the DSView 3 server makes a direct connection to the appliance Virtual media On supported KVM switches a virtual media capable IQ module and the virtual media feature allow the client workstation user to load files onto USB2 compatible target devices when the usual network resources are unavailable Mapping physical drives or image files on the client system as virtual drives on the target device can accommodate critical tasks required on the target device such as operating system installation or recovery BIOS updating and configuration backups Dual stack support for IPv4 and IPv6 The DSView 3 server is a dual stack host for IPv4 and IPv6 network protocols Several Avocent appliances support IPv6 including DSR switches ACS advanced console servers and MergePoint service processor SP managers Virtual segregation of resources with DS Zones DS Zones provide virtual segregation of data center resources including appliances target devices and virtual machines You can manage the users licenses and authentication services assigned to each zone and transfer units among zones System Components The DSView 3 software system contains the following components DSView 3 management software The DSView 3 software resides on the DSView 3 server host or hub computer and provides a web gateway and ser
173. View 3 software administrator privileges to edit Global Macros Select Macros Configure Macros from the menu The Configure Macros dialog box appears In the Macros table select the macro you wish to edit Chapter 20 Using the Telnet Viewer 339 3 Click Edit The Configure Macros dialog box expands to display an Edit Macro area containing the information defined for the macro 4 Edit the macro properties as needed 5 Click OK The changes are saved and the Configure Macros dialog box returns to its abbreviated view 6 Repeat steps 2 5 to edit additional macros 7 Click OK to close the Configure Macros dialog box To delete a macro NOTE You must have DSView 3 software administrator privileges to delete Global Macros 1 Select Macros Configure Macros from the menu The Configure Macros dialog box appears 2 Select the macro in the Macros table that you wish to delete 3 Click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion 4 Confirm or cancel the deletion To use a macro 1 Select the macro from the Macros menu if the macro s definition includes a hotkey press the hotkey or hotkey sequence A macro s hotkey is accessible only when the macro belongs to the active macro group or select Macros Configure Macros from the menu The Configure Macros dialog box appears 2 Select the macro in the Macros table that you wish to run 3 Click Run Macro groups To create a macro gr
174. View windows using the Customize link See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 To define custom fields NOTE You must have Software Administrator or Appliance Administrator access to define custom fields 1 2 4 Click the Units tab Click Custom Field Labels in the side navigation bar The Unit Custom Field Labels window will open For each custom field type the 1 64 character name for the first custom field label The first and second level custom fields for units will appear under this heading in the side navigation bar all other custom fields will not appear in the side navigation bar but may be displayed in the content area by clicking Customize and adding the field Click Save The Custom Field Labels name will continue to appear in the side navigation bar until you associate the custom label with a unit To associate a custom label with a unit 1 In a Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on a unit The Unit Overview window will open Click Properties in the side navigation bar and then click Custom Fields The Unit Custom Fields window will open In the each field type the 1 64 character name to associate with the corresponding label You may also leave the field blank Click Save and then click Close The Appliance All window will open The side navigation bar will include the names of the defined and associated custom fields Chapter 15 Grouping Units 23
175. Window Table 7 2 Action Links arrow to display a list of all available connection methods r Click on an action to launch the corresponding window Action link KVM Session Exclusive KVM Session Embedded Session IPMI Session Serial Session Browser Session Displays Video Viewer window Video Viewer window this link only appears when Alternate Action arrow is selected Viewer window IPMI Viewer window Opens a Telnet session window using the configured application Web browser Valid for TDs attached to KVM switch channels ports TDs attached to KVM switch channels ports Supported versions of IBM ASM RSA II DRAC 4 and NEC IPF embedded units IPMI TDs Target devices EVR1500 environmental monitors generic appliances standalone TDs and TDs attached to serial console appliances HP iLO embedded unit or KVM switch ports Chapter 7 Units View Windows 123 Action link Displays Valid for EVR1500 environmental monitors j j generic appliances standalone TDs Telnet Viewer window or third party Telnet Session j i and TDs attached to serial console Telnet view window 2 appliances HP iLO embedded unit or KVM switch ports ae A Target devices see Target Device lt Service Name gt Service interface Services on page 170 j oh Appliances and or TDs supported by lt Connection Name gt Session interface 3 j plug ins that define this connection type I
176. Windows client 1 Ina DSView 3 software Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click an Action link 24 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 3 4 A window will open containing a link for downloading the JRE installer Download the JRE installer then close all browser windows Click on the JRE icon to launch the installer Restart the browser and click an Action link To install the JRE on a Linux or Solaris client NOTE Only one version of the JRE can be installed in the browser for DSView 3 software support Depending on your system s configuration you may have to log in as the root user to install the JRE Contact your system administrator if you need help with installing software as the root user 1 Ina DSView 3 software Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 3 4 118 click an Action link A window will open containing a link for downloading the JRE installer Download the JRE installer then close all browser windows Run the installer Restart the browser and click an Action link Avocent Viewer Plug in Installation On Windows clients the Video Viewer Telnet and VNC Viewers require the Avocent Viewer Plug in If you are using Firefox 2 or Internet Explorer the plug in downloads automatically from the browser window If you are using Firefox 3 additional set up is required To install the Avocent Viewer Plug in when using Firefox 3 on a Window
177. a target device connection 1 4 S In a Units View window containing target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the name of a target device Click Connections in the side navigation bar The Target Device Connections window will open Click the checkbox to the left of the target device connection s to delete To delete all target device connections on the page click the checkbox to the left of Connection at the top of the list Click Delete A confirmation dialog box will appear Confirm or cancel the deletion Merging virtual and physical target device connections From the DSView 3 software you can merge virtual device connections with physical target device connections Merging the unit connections allows all possible actions to be available from a single view while the physical and virtual target devices remain distinct entities within the DSView 3 database For example a MergePoint service processor SP manager may be connected to a blade server that hosts an ESX Server By merging the physical blade server connections with the virtual ESX Server connections you could launch a KVM session to the blade server or VI Client session to the ESX Server from the same view with the DSView 3 software To merge virtual and physical target device connections 1 5 In a Units View window containing Virtualization units click the name of a hypervisor manager or server The Unit Overview window
178. a type that was not previously defined it will appear under Target Devices in the side navigation bar To initiate a session with a target device from the Unit Overview window 1 Ina Units View window containing target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the name of a target device The Unit Overview window will open 2 Click on the icon or name of the session type you wish to start To change the power state of a target device from the Unit Overview window NOTE Auser must have power control access rights and the target device must be connected to and powered bya supported power device see Chapter 7 on page 187 1 Ina Units View window containing target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the name of a target device The Unit Overview window will open 2 Click the checkbox to the left of the power device outlet s To select all device outlets on the page click the checkbox to the left of Connection at the top of the list 3 Click On Off or Cycle to power up power down or power cycle power down and then power up the power device outlets To change the name of a managed appliance from the Unit Overview window 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the name of an appliance The Unit Overview window will open 2 Type a name for the managed appliance You cannot change the type 3 Click Save and th
179. a user is allowed to perform certain actions on a unit in the DSView 3 software system See About Access Rights on page 163 for detailed information and a list of actions that can be enabled disabled for target devices and managed appliances You may assign access control rights from a user perspective You select a user account specify the units for which rights will be assigned then indicate the permission to perform the action none allow deny or inherit for each unit That procedure is described in this section There are other ways to assign access rights From a user group perspective see User Group Access Rights on page 281 e From a unit perspective see Unit Access Rights on page 165 From a unit group perspective see Changing the unit group properties on page 245 To display a user s access rights 1 Click the Users tab 2 Click on a username The User Name window will open 3 Click Effective Rights in the side navigation bar and then click All Units Target Devices or Appliances The Target Device Effective Rights or Appliance Effective Rights window will open Columns indicate the available actions for the unit e Black check mark The user has been granted access for this right e Gray check mark A group to which the user belongs has been granted access for this right e Black X The user has been denied access for this right e Gray X A group to which the user belongs has been denied access for this rig
180. ability and launch sessions to target devices from a single point of access LANDesk Server Manager supports rack mounted and blade servers with low impact services that let users choose the level of management coverage from device discovery to extended performance analysis security and configuration control It enables enterprises to take inventory provision patch monitor and instantly assess server health and ensure optimum availability DSR switches DSR switches allow KVM signals to be transmitted over a standard TCP IP network connection Some DSR switches may be connected using a modem which provides benefits for branch offices such as low cost and dial up performance The DSView 3 software supports the following DSR switch models 800 1010 1020 1021 1022 1024 1030 1031 1161 2010 2020 2030 2035 2161 4010 4020 4030 4160 8020 8030 8035 These models contain a dedicated serial port for connecting an external modem for use with the DSR Remote Operations software For DSR switches a target device is first attached to an IQ module which is then attached to a DSR switch DSView 3 software clients communicate with target device ports using a Video Viewer connection between the client and the managed appliance The DSR switches allow the cascading of legacy analog KVM switches from DSR switch ports which may be managed in a DSView 3 software system Certain DSR switch models also allow the cascadi
181. access to it For example if a DSR1021 switch has not been added that type will not appear in the side navigation bar e Target Devices If target device types have been created their links in the side navigation bar are listed under Target Devices All e Unmanaged Appliances for DSR switches only Lists all DSR switches that have been automatically discovered These units will not be available from the Units View appliances window until they are moved to the managed appliance list See Managed Appliance Status on page 168 e Mixed Views Mixed view windows may contain managed appliances target devices or both Several links in the side navigation bar will open mixed view Units View windows e Recently Accessed Units that the user has accessed most recently e Groups Units that have been assigned to a personal or global unit group e Sites Units that have been assigned to a site e Departments Units that have been assigned to a department e Locations Units that have been assigned to a location e Custom fields Units that have been assigned to custom groups These group names may also have custom field labels See the Units View Windows on page 115 chapter for information about creating and managing groups Topology view Units View windows that contain managed appliances support a topology feature that can be enabled disabled A topology view is a series of parent child hierarchies A parent is a managed appliance
182. acenter Edition Windows Web Server 2008 Red Hat Enterprise Linux Version 4 AS ES and WS products Red Hat Enterprise Linux Version 5 Sun Solaris SPARC 9 and 10 Novell SUSE Linux x86 Enterprise Server 9 or 10 NOTE The DSView 3 software is also supported on any of these operating systems running as a guest OS ina virtual environment However while the DSView 3 software is expected to function properly on a guest OS in the virtual environment there may be unknown performance implications Before installing and configuring the DSView 3 software Before installing the DSView 3 management software install the managed appliance hardware If the computer will be a hub server you will need the license key obtained from Avocent and provide a username and password to use for initial log in If the computer will be a spoke server you will need to identify the associated hub server and provide the name password of the hub server s DSView 3 software administrator To prevent potential mouse conflicts you may configure certain settings on each server connected to a KVM switch or serial console appliance For details see the Mouse and Pointer Chapter 2 Installation 13 Settings Technical Brief which is available on the DSView 3 software DVD and on the Avocent web site Installing the DSView 3 Software The DSView 3 management software may be installed using the DSView 3 software DVD or by downloading the software in a sel
183. ackup If this parameter is omitted no overwriting will occur To display help information type DSViewBackupRestore sh help For example entering the following in a command prompt window will create a backup named dbasebackup zip with the password test 1 DSViewBackupRestore sh backup archive dbasebackup zip passwd testl Entering the following in a command prompt window will restore a backup named dbasebackup zip with the password test 1 DSViewBackupRestore sh restore archive dbasebackup zip passwd testl To manually back up a hub server using the Backup and Restore Utility dialog box on a supported Windows system 1 In the Start menu on your desktop select Start Programs Avocent DSView 3 Backup and Restore Utility The DSView 3 Backup Restore Utility dialog box will appear 2 Click Backup Database to a file 3 To password protect the backup file click Enabled and type a password in the Password field 4 Click Browse and use the Save As dialog box to specify a directory and name for the backup file Click Save when you are finished 5 Click Backup The DSView 3 software system backup files are saved 6 Click Close to close the DSView 3 Backup Restore Utility dialog box To manually restore a hub server using the Backup and Restore Utility on a supported Windows system 1 Inthe Start menu on your desktop select Start Programs Avocent DSView 3 Backup and Restore Utility The DSView 3 Backup Restore U
184. acro Groups dialog box expands to display an Edit Group area containing the information defined for the macro Enable the Active Group checkbox Click OK The changes are saved and the Configure Macro Groups dialog box returns to its abbreviated view To edit an existing macro group NOTE You must have DSView 3 software administrator privileges to edit global macro groups 1 Select Macros Configure Groups from the menu The Configure Macro Groups dialog box appears In the Macro Groups table select the macro group you wish to edit Click the Edit button The Configure Macro Groups dialog box expands to display an Edit Group area containing the information defined for the macro Edit the macro group properties as needed Click OK The changes are saved and the Configure Macro Groups dialog box returns to its abbreviated view Repeat steps 2 5 to edit additional macro groups Click OK to close the Configure Macro Groups dialog box Chapter 20 Using the Telnet Viewer 341 To delete a macro group NOTE You must have DSView 3 software administrator privileges to delete global macro groups 1 Select Macros Configure Groups from the menu The Configure Macro Groups dialog box appears 2 Select the macro group in the Macro Groups table that you wish to delete 3 Click the Delete button A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion 4 Confirm or cancel the deletion Logging The Telnet Viewe
185. ade process Detailed status acquired from the plug in Descriptive information acquired from the plug in Language information acquired from the plug in Appliance type information acquired from the plug in Owning vendor of the plug in according to information acquired from the plug in By default these fields are not displayed in the Plug ins window Use the Customize link to specify which fields you want to display see Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 These fields are always displayed in the individual plug ins overview windows Chapter 24 Plug ins 403 Managing Plug ins After a plug in has been added you may upgrade it to another generally newer version You may also disable a plug in if necessary for troubleshooting and then re activate it You may initiate an action only for plug ins on the DSView 3 server you are currently logged into The plug in must currently have an administrative status that allows the action for example you can activate a plug in only if its current administrative status is disabled Upgrading a plug in When you upgrade the existing version of a plug in follow the steps described in Recommended Sequence for Adding Upgrading Plug ins on page 399 To upgrade a plug in I ee ae NS sS 8 9 Click the System tab Click Plug ins in the top navigation bar The Plug ins window will open Click on the name of plug in to be upgraded The plug in overview window
186. aining target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on a target device Status field The Active Sessions window for that target device will open You may also display active session information for a target device by clicking on a target device name in a Units View window which will open the Unit Overview window Then click Active Sessions in the side navigation bar and the Active Sessions window for that target device will open The first method above saves a step Customizing a target device Active Sessions window The following fields are always displayed in the Active Sessions window e Duration Elapsed time since the session started in hours minutes seconds 204 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide User Name of current user This field will be blank for users who do not have Appliance Administrator or User Administrator access rights when the Video Viewer session property view identity of shared connections is not set See Video Viewer session properties on page 290 Type Session type which may be KVM virtual media or serial Connection Connection path from the managed appliance to the target device See Connections to Units on page 207 The following fields may be displayed in the Active Sessions window Use the Customize link to add or remove fields in the display See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 Owner Owner of the session when it is shared This field will be
187. al media The dialog box displays all the physical drives on the client s workstation that 322 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide can be mapped as virtual drives You may also add ISO and floppy image files and then map them using the Virtual Media dialog box After a device is mapped the Virtual Media dialog box Details View displays information about the amount of data transferred and the time elapsed since the device was mapped You may specify that the virtual media session is reserved When a session is reserved and the associated KVM session is closed another user cannot launch a KVM session to that target device If a session is not reserved another KVM session may be launched You may also reset the USB2 IQ module from the Virtual Media dialog box This action will reset every form of USB media on the target device and should therefore be used with caution and only when the target device is not responding Virtual media session settings Virtual media session settings include locking mapped drives access mode and encryption level See Managed Appliance Session Settings on page 195 Table 19 5 describes the virtual media session settings on the supported KVM switch Table 19 5 Virtual Media Session Settings Setting Description The locking option specifies whether a virtual media session is locked to the KVM session on the target device When locking is enabled which is the default and the KVM session is cl
188. aller User Guide Reports events and data logging actions in a zone Table 16 3 Reports Events and Data Logging Actions in a Zone User Status Required for Action Action Zone s Affected View system logs and events Any qualified user ee whichibeshas View or export data logs Any qualified user Active zone only View and modify email notifications Any qualified user Active zone only Modify log retention Super users only Allzones Modify events Super users only Allzones View usage and asset reports Any qualified user Active zone only Modifying system settings in a zone Chapter 16 DS Zones 259 Table 16 4 Modifying System Settings in a Zone User Status Required for Action Zone s Affected Action Modify DSView 3 server settings Super users only Allzones Modify global properties Super users only Allzones Backup the eyes R Super users only All zones database and system files Schedule power control Any qualified user All zones Export event log Any qualified user Active zone only Migrate units Any qualified user Active zone only Pull names from selected units Any qualified user Active zone only Test modem connection Any qualified user All zones Update topology Any qualified user Active zone only Upgrade firmware Any qualified user Active zone only Validate external authentication c carne a User acediin S Any qualified user Active zone only View appliance files Any qualified user Active zone only Manage
189. als if you wish to allow the LDAP server to refer DSView 3 software clients to additional directory servers Click Next If you selected Use SSL in Certificate based Trust Mode go to step 6 If you selected Do Not Use SSL or Use SSL in Trust All Mode go to step 10 6 The DSView 3 server will try to find a server that has a trusted certificate chain see System certificate policy and trust store on page 53 If no trusted certificate chain is found then the Accept Certificate window will open and list all servers that belong to the domain It will also list the reasons for rejection of the certificate chain 7 Click Next to accept the certificate 8 The Specify LDAP User Schema window will open a e Type the Base distinguished name DN from which to begin searches This is a required field unless the Directory Service has been configured to allow anonymous search Each Search DN value must be separated by a comma Type the key attribute The default value is common name cn Type the object class The default value is person Type the full name attribute The default value is surname sn Click Next 9 The Specify LDAP Group Schema window will open Chapter 6 Authentication Services 101 a Type the Base distinguished name DN from which to begin searches This is a required field unless the Directory Service has been configured to allow anonymous search Each Search DN value must be separated by a comma b Type
190. anagement software This is an SSL based protocol that uses X 509 certificates AIDP Avocent Install and Discover Protocol AIDP is a protocol used to install out of box appliances that do not have an IP address assigned and used to discover existing appliances that have an address assigned This UDP based protocol is not encrypted and only public information is passed over this link AIDP uses UDP port 3211 Port 3211 is non configurable Applet An applet is a program written in the Java language that runs within a web browser ASMP Avocent Secure Management Protocol ASMP is a protocol used to securely configure managed appliance settings This TCP based protocol uses an SSL encrypted communications link AMSP uses TCP port 3211 Port 3211 is non configurable Authentication Authentication is the validation of user login information Authentication is used to enforce selective permission to access resources or to perform an operation Authentication server An authentication server is a network device that provides authentication services 446 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Authorization Authorization is the process of granting or denying access to a resource Most computer security systems are based on a two step process The first stage is authentication which ensures that users are who they claim to be The second stage is authorization which allows the user access to various resources based on the user s identit
191. ance from a Units View window Scheduling or manually running the update topology task see Task Update topology for selected units on page 379 Automatic topology synchronization NOTE Automatic topology synchronization is not supported on some managed appliances including the LANDesk Server Manager Alternatively you may schedule the update topology task to keep these appliances synchronized with the DSView 3 software See Task Update topology for selected units on page 379 To enable or disable automatic topology synchronization T 2 3 4 Click the System tab Click Global Properties in the top navigation bar Click Units Synchronization in the side navigation bar then click Auto Topology The Automatic Topology Properties window will open To enable automatic topology synchronization enable the Update DSView with topology changes from appliances automatically checkbox 148 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To disable automatic topology synchronization disable the Update DSView with topology changes from appliances automatically checkbox and go to the last step 5 Ifyou enable the Allow target devices with the same name to be merged into a single target device checkbox the connection to a target device in the appliance will be merged with the connection s to an existing target device in the DSView 3 software database 6 Ifyou enable the Delete Target Devices that no longer have connections checkbox tar
192. and attributes PC Character Sequence Ctrl F7 Ctrl F8 Ctrl F9 Ctrl F10 Ctrl F11 Ctrl F12 Insert Home Delete End Up Arrow Down Arrow Left Arrow Right Arrow VT320 Keyboard Byte Sequence Esc 28 Esc 29 Esc 31 Esc 32 Esc 33 Esc 34 Esc 1 Esc 2 Hex 7 F Esc 5 Esc A Esc B Esc D Esc C VT320 Keyboard Byte Sequence Esc D EscE EscM Esc O Esc7 VT320 Keyboard Function Restore cursor and attributes Up Arrow Down Arrow Right Arrow Left Arrow Set cursor to home position Set cursor to home position Character Attributes Erase from cursor to end of line Erase from cursor to end of screen Programmable LEDs What are You Set Mode Delete 1 Character Insert 1 Line Delete 1 Line Up Arrow Down Arrow Right Arrow Left Arrow Fill Screen with Es Up Arrow amount specified by Pn Down Arrow amount specified by Pn Appendices VT320 Keyboard Byte Sequence Esc8 Esc A Esc B Esc C Esc D Esc H Esc f Esc m Esc K Esc J Esc q Esc c Esc Esc P Esc L Esc M EscOA EscOB EscOC EscOD Esc 8 Esc PnA Esc PnB 441 442 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide VT320 Keyboard Function VT320 Keyboard Byte Sequence Right Arrow amount specified by Pn Esc PnC Left Down Arrow amount specified by Pn Esc Pn D Erase parts of current line Esc PnK Erase parts of current screen Esc PnJ Direct Cursor Addressing Esc Pn H Direct Cursor Addressing Esc Pnf Programmable LEDs
193. and management the software can be used to reach and restart servers or other devices that are not functioning or responding to in band commands regardless of the state of the equipment s operating system Web based access and control The DSView 3 management software provides secure point and click browser based access to control virtually any data center device using managed appliances from DSView 3 software clients located anywhere in the world Secure authentication and communication Secure Socket Layer SSL encryption may be used to encrypt data traveling within the DSView 3 software system Users may be authenticated through internal or external services such as LDAP Active Directory NT Domain TACACS RADIUS and RSA SecurlID Unit and user management The DSView 3 management software provides centralized network access control and security for managed appliances A DSView 3 software administrator may add remove delete and change 2 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide settings for managed appliances and target devices including assigning permissions and per device contact information which are stored on the DSView 3 server A DSView 3 software administrator may also assign unique permissions which allow individual users or a group of users access to units or groups of units Proxy server access The proxy server feature allows keyboard video and mouse KVM and serial sessions to be proxied through the DS
194. are Telnet Viewer Avocent Session Viewer e Win32 PuTTY Telnet SSH application e Third party application NOTE If you use a third party Telnet application the first time you attempt to launch a session you will be prompted to confirm the use of that application If you do not confirm the use of that application the session will not be launched NOTE Only the DSView 3 software Telnet Viewer is supported on Macintosh system clients To specify the serial session application 1 Click the Profile tab 2 Click Applications in the side navigation bar 3 Check the checkbox for the application you want to use for serial sessions 4 If you check 3rd Party Application enter the path and executable name of the application maximum 256 characters in the Serial Application field Chapter 4 Basic Operations 43 Specify any of the following parameters up to 128 characters in the Command Line Arguments field When the serial session is launched the actual values will be substituted ADDRESS The IP address will be substituted PORT The port number will be substituted TNAME The target name will be substituted If the third party application does not automatically launch a command window check the Launch in Command Window checkbox 5 Click Save Specifying a user certificate This property may be changed only for internal authentication users See DSView 3 software internal authentication service on page 88 A user ma
195. arked page If you click BOOKMARK or the bookmark icon after the DSView 3 server session has timed out the User Login window will open and you must log in again After you log in you will be redirected to the bookmarked page Chapter 3 DSView 3 Explorer Windows 35 To bookmark a window 1 In the top option bar click BOOKMARK or the bookmark icon The Add Favorite dialog box will appear 2 Optionally type a name for the window You may also click Create in to create or specify a folder in which to place the window 3 Click OK to close the Add Favorite dialog box Printing a window All windows contain a print icon and text in the top option bar When you print a window all the information on the page is printed not just the visible portion To print a window 1 In the top option bar click PRINT or the print icon The Print dialog box will appear 2 Specify options to use then click Print to print the window and close the Print dialog box Refreshing a window A window may be refreshed at any time by clicking REFRESH or the refresh icon in the top option bar By default status information automatically refreshes every 30 seconds This interval may be changed or disabled See Changing user options on page 41 Using keyboard commands In addition to using a mouse certain keyboard commands may be used to select and change items in windows Table 3 5 General Keyboard Commands Key Description Tab Transfers
196. associated with a multi user cascade switch To merge cascade switches click the checkboxes to the left of the entries then click Merge To split a previously merged set of cascade switches click the checkbox to the left of the entry then click Split Click Next The Operation in Progress window will open followed by the Completed Successful window Click Finish Automatic Discovery NOTE Automatic discovery is only supported for DSR switches To be available for automatic discovery discovery settings on the DSR switch must be configured with the DSView 3 Server IP address For more information see the DSR Installer User Guide To enable or disable automatic discovery 1 Click the System tab Click Global Properties in the top navigation bar Click Units Synchronization in the side navigation bar then click Auto Discovery Enable the Enable Auto Discovery checkbox if you want the DSView 3 software to automatically discover supported appliances Chapter 9 Synchronizing the DSView 3 Software Database 153 Enable the Enable secure mode checkbox if you want the managed appliance to only be accessible by this DSView 3 system In non secure mode the managed appliance may be added to multiple DSView 3 systems If you enable the Allow target devices with the same name to be merged into a single target device checkbox by default the connection to a target device in the appliance will be merged with the connection s
197. atabase If the cascade switch in the DSView 3 software database has multiple appliance connections to the same appliance a multiuser cascade switch the cascade switch name will be pulled from the appliance connection with the lowest port number to update the cascade switch in the DSView 3 software database Multiuser cascade switches are treated as separate cascade switches by the appliance To enable or disable automatic name push 1 Click the System tab 2 Click Global Properties in the top navigation bar 3 Click Units Synchronization in the side navigation bar then click Auto Name Push Chapter 9 Synchronizing the DSView 3 Software Database 143 4 The Automatic Name Push Properties window will open To enable automatic name push enable the Push Names from DSView to appliances automatically checkbox To disable automatic name push disable the Push Names from DSView to appliances automatically checkbox and go to the last step 5 Enable the checkboxes for one or more appliance connection types The name in the DSView 3 software will be pushed to the appliance if the target device has a connection that matches the selected type 6 Click Save Automatic name pull When automatic name pull is enabled the name pull operation occurs automatically when an appliance name is changed Table 9 2 Automatic Name Pull Operation Effects Unit Appliance serial ports Power devices Power device sockets Effect If
198. ate s issuer Maximum allowable number of certificates inclusive between the leaf certificate and a trusted certificate Valid range is 1 16 Allows partial chains If disabled partial chains will be considered invalid even if the chain contains a trusted certificate A certificate may be used only for the reasons dictated in the certificate For example a certificate must be flagged as CA Certificate Authority to be considered a valid certificate issuer The current date and time on the server must be within the window on each certificate in the chain The signatures within the certificate chain are checked for validity If CRLs are available they are checked to determine a certificate s revocation status CRLs may be located using the distribution point certificate extension The DSView 3 software will reject a certificate chain ifa CRL is specified either in the certificate or the DSView 3 trust store and it cannot be read or is invalid Outbound SSL connections will verify server names The server names may match the certificate common name or one of the subject alternative names User certificates presented to the DSView 3 software are verified using the System Trust Store Chapter 4 Basic Operations 55 To display and manage the trust store 1 2 3 Click the System tab Click Global Properties in the top navigation bar In the side navigation bar click X 509 Certificates and then click Trust
199. ation Protocol MS CHAP v2 Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol Version 2 b In the Shared Secret field type the shared secret which is a password protected field Microsoft s implementation allows up to 128 ASCII characters for the shared secret other servers may have a different limit c Re enter the shared secret in the Confirm Shared Secret field Chapter 6 Authentication Services 107 d Click Save 6 Click Close The User Authentication Services dialog box will appear TACACS external authentication service DSView 3 software supports TACACS extemal authentication Once the TACACS authentication service is added you may map TACACS users to the DSView 3 software database by using the Add User Account wizard The username added in the DSView 3 software should match the username configured in the TACACS server For more information about adding users see Adding User Accounts on page 263 You may choose to associate users with internal DSView 3 software groups to control group level access rights Or you may choose to map users to external TACACS groups and control group level access rights using the TACACS service There are two types of external TACACS groups that can be used the TACACS standard privilege level attribute or a custom group name attribute To map users to extemal TACACS groups use the DSView 3 software Add User Group wizard and specify the group type For more information see Addi
200. automatically updated on the ACS console server e Inthe ISDN on hook time field specify the on hook interval in the range of 2 10 seconds The default value is 2 seconds The on hook interval is the amount of time after the initial dial up connection is dropped before the modems on the DSView 3 server will receive incoming calls NOTE If your DSView 3 server is on Windows the ACS console server username and password must be configured as a user in Windows before a dial back connection can be established 6 Email Click Save To specify email properties 1 25 Click the System tab Click Email in the side navigation bar The DSView Server Email Server Properties window will open Type a new address for the SMTP server that sends email notifications as a domain name or an IP address in standard dot notation xxx xxx XXX XXX If your SMTP server requires login credentials select Login required to access SMTP server and type a username and password then confirm the password Click Save to store DSView 3 software email property information in the DSView 3 software database on the host Unit status polling To use unit status polling 1 2 Click the System tab Click Unit Status Polling in the side navigation bar The DSView Server Unit Status Polling Properties window will open Select Enable unit status polling 6 Chapter 5 DSView 3 Servers 77 Type the number of seconds to wait between polling cy
201. ave unit configure or edit rights These operations are all performed in the DSView 3 Explorer To display KVM session profile names and settings 1 2 4 Click the Units tab Click Profiles in the top navigation bar The KVM Session Profiles window will open listing the profile names To view a profile s settings click the profile name then click General Cursor Toolbar or Video in the side navigation bar to view the settings Click Close To add a KVM session profile 1 ra 5 Click the Units tab Click Profiles in the top navigation bar The KVM Session Profiles window will open Click Add The Add KVM Session Profile window will open Enter a 1 64 character name for the new profile The name cannot be the same as the name of an existing KVM session profile Click Add The new profile will be created with all values set to Inherit Default Settings To change a KVM session profile 1 Pe ed S Click the Units tab Click Profiles in the top navigation bar The KVM Session Profiles window will open Click the profile name Change the desired settings For many settings the choices will include Inherit Default Settings if you are changing any profile other than the default profile When you select Inherit Default Settings the fields for that setting will automatically be filled with values from the Default KVM Session Profile these values cannot be changed 298 DSView 3 Software Insta
202. b and spoke servers See Backing up and Restoring Hub Servers Manually on page 77 It is advised that all DSView 3 backup files be stored on an external device or network drive Verify basic functionality by navigating to a few DSView 3 windows and launching sessions to a few target devices Run the DSView 3 installer for the new version on the hub server Run the DSView 3 installer on all spoke servers NOTE The hub server must be upgraded prior to the upgrading the spoke servers 8 10 11 12 Verify basic functionality again by navigating to a few DSView 3 windows and launching sessions to a few target devices Perform another backup of the hub and spoke servers to have a baseline database of the upgraded environment See Backing up and Restoring Hub Servers Manually on page 77 Run replication to validate that there are no errors Errors will either be displayed in the status panel for the replication task or in the Events Log See Replication on page 84 The firmware for the appliances may also need to be upgraded in order to support new functionality in the DSView 3 software See Upgrading firmware on page 358 Verify basic functionality one last time by navigating to a few DSView 3 window and launching sessions to a few target devices Configuring the DSView 3 Software After the DSView 3 software has been installed it must be configured using a web browser During configuration you specify whether the comput
203. be stored in files on the DSView 3 server The files may then be viewed e Events When a defined event occurs on the appliance a Syslog message is sent to the appliance and then to the DSView 3 software system event database for information about events see Events and Event Logs on page 387 Also when the appliance detects a port alert string on a serial port it can send a syslog event message Data session logging is enabled per connection on the appliance subject to license availability see Data log licenses on page 212 The DSView 3 server supports up to 2048 enabled data logging sessions on each DSView 3 server assuming sufficient licenses are available Data log files Syslog messages that contain data log session information are stored in individual ASCII files Syslog data messages that contain appliance and port values are linked with a target device those with only appliance values are linked with an appliance The maximum number of data log files that can be written simultaneously is determined by the number of data log session licenses available 212 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide A data log filename includes the name of the appliance and or target device plus the system data and time when the file was created Current files have a txt file name extension If a port supports session sharing concurrent sessions on that port will be written to a single log file Data log files are not backed up by the DSVi
204. bility select the Enable Modem Dial Up Connections checkbox If the main network connection is unavailable when trying to open an SSH Passthrough session you will be notified that the network is unreachable and a connection over modem dial up is being established Or To prevent connections through Modem Dial Up uncheck the Enable Modem Dial Up Connections checkbox If the main network connection fails the SSH Passthrough connection will fail without attempting an alternate connection NOTE Modem dial up connections are only available on supported ACS console servers 6 Click Save 7 Ifyou have not already done so click the SSH Server page link and enable the SSH server See Enabling SSH Passthrough on page 224 for more information Enabling or disabling SSH Passthrough will generate a DSView 3 software system event SSH port sharing SSH Passthrough sessions and or Avocent Session Viewer sessions can be shared to allow other users to view the session data You can also enable hub spoke forwarding to allow sessions from multiple DSView 3 servers to be shared simultaneously The first user to open an SSH Passthrough or Avocent Session Viewer session has read write access all subsequent users who share the session have read only access Users can enter a command to obtain read write access but only one user at a time can possess read write access To configure SSH Passthrough port sharing 1 Click the System tab Chapter 14 SSH
205. ble an alternate actions arrow will appear to the right of the action Clicking the alternate action arrow will display a list of other actions in descending order of priority which may be selected to launch the corresponding window type To open a Telnet Viewer session In a Units View window containing target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click Telnet Session or Serial Session in the Action field or the Alternate Action menu Altemative you can click the Telnet Session or Serial Session icon in the Unit Overview window for the target device see Unit Overview Windows on page 125 The Telnet Viewer window will open NOTE You can share a Telnet Viewer session with an SSH serial session See SSH Passthrough Sessions on page 223 Customizing the Telnet Viewer You may specify preferences that will be used for every Telnet Viewer session regardless of the device to which you connect These application preferences are entered from the Telnet Viewer window when you are connected to a device or port After the preferences are entered they are applied to devices ports during subsequent sessions To change the window background and or text color 1 Select Options Preferences from the menu The Preferences dialog box will appear 332 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 2 To change the background color click the Background Normal Mode box in the Colors section and select a color The default color is
206. ble 17 1 will appear to the left of the username Preemption Level Effective preemption level of a user See Preemption Levels on page 46 When a User Accounts window contains this column or a Group Preemption Level column values are not displayed for external users users validated with external authentication services To display an external user s effective and group preemption level select the user s name and then click Preemption Levels in the side navigation bar Authentication Server Name of the internal or external authentication server See Authentication Services on page 87 Business Address Business address defined in the user s properties See Address on page 271 Business Mobile Business mobile phone number defined in the user s properties See Phone contact on page 271 Chapter 17 Managing User Accounts 263 Business Phone Business phone number defined in the user s properties See Phone contact on page 271 Default E Mail Default email account defined in the user s properties See Email contact on page 272 E Mail 1 E Mail 5 Up to five additional email accounts defined in the user s properties See Email contact on page 272 Custom Field 1 Custom Field 6 Custom fields for the user If you have specified text for a custom field that text will display when you display the field See Custom field properties on page 272 Group Preemption Level Highest preemption level of all groups to
207. bnail Viewer features 2 2 2 0 0222 EEE ESASA EEE SEES EEE SEES E EE KESEK raene 311 Performing Thumbnail Viewer tasks 000222000 ccce eee e cece EEE AER K KA 313 MGCTOS 2250 kenan a kan a te 6 ive DONNA delta ck SE ea da YA SON oh Semen 2 to ReaD N Ne Soe OES 314 M CkO kOUl DS gt lt dida hy ae y n Del hissa GER a end od Pec A WENN BEN ck Peale 317 Power Control of Devices Attached to Power Devices LL LELE LAZEK SU 320 Using Virtual Medias 23 y llaabak van Da S58 Al sto Wa aie ah ns canan ah A asso eek Eset eels 320 Virtual Media dialog box 2 2 2 2 cece cece cece EE EEE AKAR KKS 321 Virtual media session settings 0 022220 0 cece ence eee EEE EE EEE KRA KAK KS 322 Opening a virtual media SeSSION 2 00 000 cece eee cece SEE EEE EEE KEKE cece eee 323 Closing a virtual media SeSSION 222222220000 eevee eee c cece cece cece ce eeeeeee 325 Usin SMALE Cards esaesa aaa RO NORE a ENO A E e 325 xii DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Video Viewer Troubleshooting 2 2 2 2 0000022 SEE EEE EEE EE EE cece EE EEE EKE KERA KAS 326 Using the Telnet Viewer class aa cece EK SEK KRE KK KK KK KK KK KK RR 327 About the Telnet Viewer 00020220220 ELSA eee EEE SE EEE EE SEE EEE SK KK KK KK KK 327 Telnet Viewer Window Features 0000020200 E SEZA E EE SEES EE EEE KERARA 328 Telnet Viewer window toolbar 00
208. bsequent calls must be made to find the group name and specific SIDs or Enable Use Windows 2003 Universal Group Caching if you wish to have the AD service access the domain controller for the specified domain name The search includes the TokenGroups attribute of the ObjectClass user This search is faster but only retrieves the nested groups SIDs subsequent calls must be made to find the group name and specific SIDs The Windows 2003 Universal Group Caching feature must be enabled in the Windows 2003 AD server Click Allow users and groups from newly discovered trusted forests to allow logins by users that belong to the authentication service forest or its discovered trusted forests If enabled the DSView 3 will discover all trusted forests in the Active Directory service Click Next 10 Chapter 6 Authentication Services 93 If you selected Use SSL in Certificate based Trust Mode go to step 6 If you selected Do Not Use SSL or Use SSL in Trust All Mode go to step 8 The DSView 3 server will try to find a server that has a trusted certificate chain see System certificate policy and trust store on page 53 If no trusted certificate chain is found then the Accept Certificate window will open and list all servers that belong to the domain It will also list the reasons for rejection of the certificate chain Click Next to accept the certificate The Select Browsing Method window will open Click Browse Anonymously to browse
209. bsequent files that you export will be incremented unitproperties 1 csv unitproperties 2 csv and so on or Click Save The Save As dialog box will appear Select a directory and filename and click Save to save the csv file 12 Click Finish The Units Tools window will open Exporting access rights The Export Access Rights tool will export permission information about units from the DSView 3 management software host The unit name and the user user group to which the unit has access rights will be exported Additionally the unit access right settings will be exported see About Access Rights on page 163 The output csv file may be viewed in a text editor or spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel To export access rights 1 ay es sa Click the Units tab Click Tools in the side navigation bar The Unit Tools window will open Click the Export Access Rights icon or link The Export Access Rights Wizard will appear Select either All Units Appliances Target Devices or Unit Groups for the unit type and click Next The Save Process window will open Read the text then click Next When prompted enter the location and filename where the exported access rights will be saved The Completed Successful window will open along with a File Download dialog box Click Open The file will download and open By default csv files are configured to open in Microsoft Excel If Microsoft Excel is not installed on
210. by the smart card icon at the far nght of the Video Viewer toolbar The following table describes the smart card status icons Table 19 6 Smart Card Icons Icon Description UE Disabled A smart card reader is not available the IQ module does not support smart card readers or smart card access is disabled in the DSView 3 software Not mapped A smart card reader is available but has not been mapped yet Available A smart card is mapped and available To map a smart card 1 Open a KVM session to display the Video Viewer window menu 2 Insert a smart card into the smart card reader attached to your client server 3 Click Tools Map Smart Card on the Video Viewer window menu 326 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 4 If no smart card is mapped to the target device the No Card Mapped option will have a dot beside it Select your smart card listed below this option to map the smart card To unmap a smart card Close out the KVM session by clicking X in the Video Viewer window menu or Select Tools No Card Mapped or Remove the smart card from the smart card reader or Disconnect the smart card reader from the client server Video Viewer Troubleshooting If the Video Viewer or the Virtual Media dialog box does not start the local Java cache may be corrupted You can easily clear the cache without losing any data To clear the local Java cache 1 Start the Java Control panel On supported Wi
211. cally log a user into the DSView 3 software using the Windows user s computer credentials Web browser settings may need to be modified to allow users to automatically log in using Integrated Windows Authentication see your web browser documentation To enable only DSView 3 software clients with IP addresses entered in the Address List to communicate with managed appliances check the Restrict by address range checkbox To disable address restrictions for logging into the DSView 3 software uncheck this checkbox Enable or disable Allow login when user is a member of more than one authentication service as desired The preset value is disabled When enabled if a user belongs to multiple authentication services the DSView 3 server uses the first authentication service found to log the user in When disabled if a user belongs to multiple authentication services the attempt to log in to the DSView 3 software fails When enabled if a user has different access rights within each authentication service he belongs to the user is granted access rights based on the first authentication service found by the DSView 3 server In this case a user may be granted different access rights at different login times NOTE The Allow login when user is amember of more than one authentication service setting does not replicate to spoke servers It is recommended that you uniformly enable or disable this setting on each DSView 3 hub and spoke server Click
212. cause LDAP is a simpler version of X 500 it is sometimes called X 500 lite Local port The local port is the physical connection through which a KVM switch or serial console appliance can be accessed without accessing a network connection For a KVM switch the local port is typically the KVM connection at which a keyboard mouse and monitor can be connected directly to the switch An onscreen display may be invoked to control the KVM switch and access switched KVM ports For a serial console appliance the local port is typically the serial connection at which a terminal can be connected directly to the appliance CCM appliances have a dedicated console port A command line interface CLI is used to control the appliance and access switched serial ports Managed appliance Managed appliances include KVM switches serial console appliances EVR1500 environmental monitor and control appliances and generic appliances such as routers Appendices 453 Other managed appliances may be supported by a plug in MIB Management Information Base MIB is a database of objects that can be monitored by a network management system NMS SNMP uses standardized MIB formats that allow any SNMP tools to monitor any device defined by an MIB NAT Network Address Translation NAT is an Internet standard that enables a local area network LAN to use one set of IP addresses for internal traffic and a second set of addresses for external traffic A NAT
213. ccess rights for a unit unit group select a unit or unit group from the Unit and Unit Groups list then enable or disable a checkbox in the Access Rights table for each access right Allow the access right is allowed for members of the user group Deny the access right is denied for members of the user group Inherit the access right is inherited from the unit group s to which the selected unit unit group belongs When Inherit is selected the Allow and Deny checkboxes will become gray and unchangeable and indicate the inherited value If the inherited settings indicated both Allow and Deny the inherited value is Deny which takes precedence To disable the inherit functionality uncheck the Inherit checkbox If none of the checkboxes are checked the access right is neither allowed nor denied Chapter 18 User Groups 283 9 Repeat the preceding step for other units unit groups 10 Click Save and then click Close 284 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 285 Using the Video Viewer The Video Viewer is used to conduct a KVM session with one or more target devices attached to one or more KVM switches You may optionally use KVM session profiles to control session behavior on target devices When you connect to a device using the Video Viewer the target device desktop appears in a separate window The Video Viewer window supports either a 3 or 5 button mouse Virtual media sessions which are supported on certain K
214. ce for Adding Upgrading Plug ins on page 399 During the add operation on the hub server new data types defined in the plug in are registered in the DSView 3 software database After the plug in is added to the spoke server and a replication operation is initiated the registration information on the hub server is propagated to the spoke server On the hub server a new plug in becomes active when it is added On a spoke server a new plug in becomes active only after the plug in is added to the hub and then to the spoke and a subsequent replication completes successfully For some plug ins you may need to add a license key to the DSView 3 software system before adding the plug in to any server See the documentation included with the plug in or contact your Avocent representative to determine if a key is needed To add a license see Licenses on page 60 To add a plug in 1 Click the System tab Click Plug ins in the top navigation bar Click Add The Add Plug in Wizard will open ae NS The Select Plug in window will open Enter the name or browse to the location of the plug in file then click Next 5 The Overview window will open This window contains read only information about the plug in Click Next 6 The Adding Plug in page will open while the plug in is added to the DSView 3 software system 7 The Completed Successful window will open Click Finish Chapter 24 Plug ins 401 NOTE If you added a plug in for a Cy
215. ce the network bandwidth Decreasing the value will make the size of these artifacts smaller e The Pixel Noise Threshold sets the minimum color change in a single pixel Decreasing the value will reduce the number of low contrast artifacts but will increase network bandwidth Automatic video adjustment NOTE You may also select Tools Automatic Video Adjust from the Video Viewer menu or click the Automatic Video Adjust toolbar icon to automatically adjust the video In most cases you will not need to alter the Video Settings from the default The system will automatically adjust and use the optimal video parameters The DSView 3 management software performs best when the video parameters are set such that no 0 video packets are transmitted for a static screen Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 309 You may easily adjust your video parameters by clicking on the Auto Adjust Video button in the Manual Video Adjust dialog box which instructs the KVM switch to optimize the video to ideal settings A green screen with yellow lettering may appear during auto adjustment Refresh image Clicking the Refresh Image button in the Manual Video Adjust dialog box will completely regenerate the digitized video image You may also select View Refresh from the Video Viewer menu to refresh the image Video test pattern Clicking the Video Test Pattern button in the Manual Video Adjust dialog box will toggle a display of a video test pattem Clic
216. ception of new trusted forests which are disabled by default 114 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To refresh trusted forests NOTE Refresh Trusted Forests is only applicable for Active Directory services for which discovering trusted forests was enabled 1 Click the User tab then click Authentication Services to open the User Authentication Services window 2 Select the checkbox next to the primary AD authentication service 3 Click Refresh Trusted Forests New trusted forests are displayed in the list 115 Units View Windows Units View windows display list of units that have been added to the DSView 3 software database A user must have unit view access rights to open Units View windows see About Access Rights on page 163 Also units will not display if they are hidden see Showing and hiding units on page 119 Each Units View window contains one or more information fields see Units View windows fields on page 120 Units are displayed in a table format with column headings Use the checkbox to the left of each unit name to select deselect the unit for an operation To select all the units on a page click the checkbox at the left of all the column headings at the top of the list this is usually to the left of the Name column Clicking this Select All checkbox will automatically enable the checkboxes for all units on that page To deselect items that were previously selected click on the checkbox When y
217. certain managed appliances you may specify whether a user or members of a user group are allowed to e View the appliance in Units View windows this right is enabled automatically if any other access right for the managed appliance is enabled e Reboot appliance and disconnect sessions see Importing data on page 355 and Active Sessions on page 201 e Flash upgrade appliance see Upgrading firmware on page 358 e Configure unit settings see Managed Appliance Settings on page 166 e Configure appliance local user accounts see Local Account Settings on page 178 this option will not appear for managed appliances that do not support local user accounts e View data logging this access right can be set only for appliances that support data logging see Chapter 10 on page 211 For example you may allow users to configure settings on a managed appliance but not allow them to reboot and disconnect sessions on it Instead you may allow a user who has appliance administrator privileges on the target devices to establish a Video Viewer session but not allow that user to perform power control operations Access rights may also be specified for all units in the DSView 3 software system or for a specific unit By default supported embedded units have the same access rights as generic units About target device access rights When you assign access rights to a target device any available session types may be selected even if the target device
218. cess rights are set for units to which the user has access as follows e A user with User rights to a target device in the DSView 2 x software will be assigned the Establish Viewer Sessions access right in the DSView 3 software e A user with Admin rights to a target device in the DSView 2 x software will be assigned the Configure Unit Settings Establish Viewer Sessions and Control Target Device Power access rights in the DSView 3 software e A user with User rights to a DS1800 digital switch CPS appliance or DSR switch in the DSView 2 x software will not be assigned any access rights in the DSView 3 software e A user with Admin rights to a DS1800 digital switch CPS appliance or DSR switch in the DSView 2 x software will be assigned the Reboot Appliance Flash Upgrade Appliance and Configure Appliance Settings access rights in the DSView 3 software Cascade switch types in the DSView 2 x software database cannot be determined during the import process and are added as Generic x lt n gt switches based on the number of Chapter 21 Using Tools 353 found switch channels After importing the DSView 2 x software database and running the Migrate DSView 2 X Units task you may run the Resyne Wizard on individual CPS appliances DS1800 digital switches and DSR switches to specify switch types and merge multiuser switches See Resynchronizing units on page 358 e Internal users and built in user groups with DSView 2 x software permissions re
219. cessful window will open along with a File Download dialog box Chapter 23 Events and Event Logs 397 From the File Download dialog box click Open The file will be downloaded and will open on the DSView 3 software client By default csv files are configured to open in Microsoft Excel If Microsoft Excel is not installed on your computer you will be prompted to select a text editor to open the csv file Or From the File Download dialog box click Save The Save As dialog box will appear Select a directory and filename and click Save to save the csv file Click Finish The Event Log Tools window will open 398 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 399 corre OO Plug ins A plug in provides support for a specific appliance type model in the DSView 3 software A plug in is packaged into a single archive file that can be shipped and added independently of the DSView 3 software You may add plug ins to the DSView 3 software version 3 3 or later Although plug ins are created independently a particular DSView 3 software release may include one or more plug ins that have already been added to the software The release notes will indicate if any plug ins are included If a plug in is included you will not need to add it to the hub or spoke servers This chapter describes how to add and manage plug ins in the DSView 3 software Once you successfully complete the sequence for adding a plug in you may add appliances of tha
220. ch or serial console appliance to use this command Optionally one or more managed appliances may be Flash upgraded as a task See Task Updating the firmware of an appliance type on page 377 1 5 In the Unit Overview window click the Upgrade Firmware icon or link The Upgrade Appliance Firmware Wizard will appear The Select Firmware Files window will open e To add one or more Flash files to the update list select the file s in the Available Firmware Files list then click Add The properties will be moved to the Firmware Files to Update list To remove one or more firmware files from the update list select the file s from the Firmware Files to Update list then click Remove The firmware files will be moved to the Available Firmware Files list The firmware on each managed appliance will be upgraded in the order shown in the Update list A reboot will be automatically performed between each firmware update To change the order in which firmware files are installed on the managed appliance select one or more firmware files in the Firmware Files to Update list and use the up and down arrows to move the selected firmware files up or down in the listing Click Next The Type in Task Name window will open Type a 1 64 character name for the upgrade firmware task then click Next The Completed Successful window will open To check the progress of the upgrade task click the Click here to view results link You may also
221. ch to other zones if they have access rights You can restrict a user s access to a zone preventing the user from viewing or accessing other zone s resources or you can grant a user access to multiple zones To prevent one zone from starving another of licenses manage the distribution of licenses and add on features by assigning a number of licenses to each zone Managing and Accessing Zones Enabling DS Zones Before you can create or access zones you must add a DS Zones license key to the DSView 3 software see Adding a new license key on page 63 The license key specifies the number of zones that can exist in the DSView 3 software This number cannot be exceeded if you need additional zones you must purchase another license key or delete existing zones to free licenses NOTE If you do not have a DS Zones license enabled the DSView 3 software does not display any windows or links related to zones Creating zones Once the DS Zones license key is enabled the DSView 3 software automatically includes a top level zone You can create up to two sublevels of zones below the top level zone but you cannot create additional top level zones You can create as many individual zones as your license key allows To create a new zone 1 Click the System tab then click Zones The Zones window opens and lists any previously created zones 250 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 2 Select the checkbox next to the zone to which you
222. charts are tiled on the screen you can change the size of the charts by dragging the triangle on the Size bar to the right or left To print a report in a printer friendly format click the printer icon Asset To view Asset reports 1 2 Click the Reports tab then click Asset in the top navigation bar Select one of the following reports in the side navigation bar Appliance Models Displays the number of units for each appliance model the user has added to the DSView 3 software Port Types Displays the number of ports for each type of port connected to the DSView 3 software Port types include KVM Keyboard Video Mouse Serial Power SPC an Avocent power control device SoL Serial over LAN and LDSM LANDesk Server Manager Appliance Versions Displays the firmware version s for each appliance model managed by the DSView 3 software Target Devices Displays the total number of target devices sorted by type Units Displays the total number of units sorted by type Click Export Data if you wish to export and save the report data as a csv file 4 Usage Chapter 10 Managing Units 185 Click Schedule Export Task if you wish to create a task that exports Asset Report data at specific intervals See Task Exporting an Asset Report to a csv file on page 371 To view Usage reports 1 2 Click the Reports tab then click Usage in the top navigation bar Select one of the following reports in the side
223. check the upgrade task progress while the task is running by clicking the System tab and then clicking Tasks in the top navigation bar however the upgrade task will be removed from the task list when it completes Click Finish The Unit Overview window will open Resynchronizing units When a unit changes its configuration it may not be properly represented in the DSView 3 software system For example a target device may be added removed or moved Chapter 21 Using Tools 359 Resynchronizing will update these and other changes made to the unit within the DSView 3 software system Resynchronizing will force a check of the entire DSView 3 software system The process requires a large amount of time and network bandwidth and should only be performed when necessary Altematively you may use the automatic topology synchronization feature or synchronize selected units manually from a Units View window See Topology Synchronization on page 146 To resynchronize a unit 1 In the Unit Overview window click the Resync icon or link The Resyne Unit Wizard will appear 2 The Select Resync Options window will open For more information about the resync options see Topology synchronization options in the Resync Wizard on page 149 a e Enable the Remove offline connections checkbox to remove from the DSView 3 software database any connections to target devices that are reported as offline in the appliance The Resync Wizard
224. ck Toolbar in the side navigation bar The Toolbar Settings window will open If this is not the default profile the Inherit Default Settings checkbox may be enabled or disabled When enabled no other settings in this window may be changed In the Hide Delay field select the number of seconds for the toolbar hide delay To add functions to be displayed in the toolbar select one or more functions from the Available Functions column then click Add The selected items will move to the Enabled Functions column To add macros to be displayed in the toolbar select one or more macros from the Available Macros column then click Add The selected items will move to the Enabled Macros column To remove functions or macros from display in the toolbar select one or more items from the Enabled Functions or Enabled Macros column then click Remove The selected items will move to the Available Functions or Available Macros column Enable or disable the Allow users to override these settings checkbox If you changed any settings click Save The enabled functions will be displayed first in the toolbar followed by the enabled macros To change video settings see Video profile settings on page 295 Click Video in the side navigation bar The Video Settings window will open In the Color Depth field choose the desired value Enable or disable the Allow users to override these settings checkbox If users are allowed to override this setting
225. clades appliance you must disable the Cyclades Web Manager to maintain security standards For information about how to disable the Cyclades Web Manager see the online help for the Cyclades appliance plug in Displaying Plug in Information You may display information about all plug ins that have been added as well as information about a single plug in on the DSView 3 server where you are logged in To display plug in information 1 Click the System tab 2 Click Plug ins in the top navigation bar The Plug ins window will open 3 To display information about one plug in click the plug in name The Plug in overview window will open Information in the Overview area is read only The DSView Servers table lists the status of the plug in on each DSView 3 server Each row includes the name of the server and the plug in version plus the administrative and operational status of the plug in on that server Table 24 1 Plug ins Display Information Field Description Name Plug in name acquired from the plug in Plug in version on this server acquired from the plug in when it was added or Version upgraded Same The plug in s operational status administrative status and version is the same Overall Status on all DSView 3 servers Mixed The plus in s operational status administrative status and version is not the same on all DSView 3 servers 402 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Field Administrative Status Op
226. cles from 30 999 seconds The default is 900 seconds 15 minutes A smaller value results in greater accuracy Type the number of managed appliances that may simultaneously be polled to obtain status information from 1 25 units The default is 5 A larger number results in faster speed Click Save to store unit status information in the DSView 3 software database on the host Backing up and Restoring Hub Servers Manually You may manually create a backup of your hub server Two methods are available From a command line in an MS DOS window This method may be used for DSView 3 software hub servers on supported Windows or Linux systems Using the Backup and Restore Utility delivered with the DSView 3 software The backup is saved as a zip file containing the files needed to restore the DSView 3 management software This method may be used for DSView 3 software hub servers on supported Windows systems only Client sessions will be temporarily disconnected during a manual backup The sessions will be automatically reconnected when the backup is completed Hub server backups may also be automatically created as a task within the DSView 3 software If you use the Backup DSView database and system files task client sessions will not be temporarily disconnected See Task Backup DSView 3 software database and system files on page 367 Manual backup and restore procedures require DSView 3 software administrator privileges To manually bac
227. click one of the appliance type links in the side navigation bar To display a list of units that you have accessed most recently click Recently Accessed in the side navigation bar To display units by groupings if available click the link in the side navigation bar e Click Sites to open the Units in Sites window Click Departments to open the Units in Departments window Click Locations to open the Units in Locations window e Click Custom Field Labels to display the Units in Custom Field window Showing and hiding units Hiding turns off the display of units in the window but does not remove the units from the DSView 3 software system To hide a unit 1 In a Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click Customize The Units View Customization window will open Click Visibility in the Available Fields column and then click Add Visibility will be moved to the Fields to Show column Enable the Show hidden items checkbox if you wish to display hidden units in the Units View Customization window with a transparent icon Click Save and then click Close The window will open containing the Visibility column The Visibility column will display Hide for each unit Click Hide for each unit The display of the selected unit will be tumed off in the Units View window if Show hidden items was not selected in the Units View Customization window If Show hidden items was selected the hidden unit
228. closes immediately If more than one connection exists to the target device the SSH connection attempt fails and the DSView 3 software informs the user of the failure reason To connect to a target device with multiple connections specify the appliance name and port instead of the target device name The appliance name must be identical to the appliance name in the DSView 3 software database and the port must be the exact port number that appears in the Units view in the DSView 3 software To connect to a target device with multiple connections open your SSH client and enter the following values in the provided text fields e lt zone1 username gt e lt zone2 appliancename gt port e host name or IP address of the DSView 3 server 228 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To connect to a target device with multiple connections using the Linux or Unix SSH command enter a command in the following format lt zone1 username gt lt zone2 appliance name port gt lt host name or IP address of DSView 3 server gt The SSH client attempts to establish an SSH connection to the appliance or target device If a successful connection is established the DSView 3 server acts as a proxy between the user and target device If an SSH Passthrough session to the same appliance or target device is already open your session is shared with the previously connected users You have read only access to the session but you may enter a command to ob
229. command to target devices from the drop down menu Type a 1 64 character name for the task Select a time to run the task see Specifying when to run tasks on page 364 Click Next The Select Unit Group window will open Select A Target Devices or select a particular unit group to configure from the menu See Grouping Units on page 233 Then click Next The Select Target Devices window will open Select one or more IPMI target devices to chassis control from the Available Target Devices list then click Add The IPMI target devices will be moved to the Target Devices to Control list Click Next The Select IPMI Control Function window will open Select the power control function you wish to perform on the IPMI target devices then click Next Turn Power On powers up the specified devices Turn Power Off powers down the specified devices Cycle Power powers down and then power up the specified devices Reset performs a hard reset of the specified devices Graceful Shutdown performs a graceful shutdown of the specified devices The availability of the Cycle Power and Graceful Shutdown options is dependent on the BMC implementation If one of these options is selected for a task but the BMC implementation does not support the option the task will fail when run and be reported in the Task Results window Click Finish Task Test modem connections to selected units This task tests modem connections to ACS console server
230. compatible with the DSView 3 management software The managed appliances should not be Flash upgraded from DSView 2 x firmware to firmware that supports DSView 3 software before using the Migrate Units command The recommended procedure is to first import the DSView 2 x software database to the new DSView 3 software system using the Import DSView 2 x Database tool see Importing DSView 2 x software databases on page 351 followed by running the Migrate Units task on each managed appliance A CPS appliance or DSR switch that has been migrated to DSView 3 software compatible firmware may be returned to DSView 2 x compatibility Migrating AlterPath Manager software units This task updates units that have been imported from the AlterPath Manager to be compatible with the DSView 3 management software The recommended procedure is to first export data from the AlterPath Manager into an XML format that can be read by DSView 3 software see the AlterPath Manager Data Migration Technical Bulletin Then import the AlterPath Manager data to the DSView 3 software system using the Import Data Wizard see Importing data on page 355 followed by running the Migrate Units task on each managed appliance When creating the Migrate Units task it is recommend that you select Enable Secure Mode for the units To add the task 1 Click the System tab Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open Click Add The Add Task Wizard will appea
231. converted hub server will replicate the data of the new specified hub server You may also change the properties of a spoke server or remove spoke servers from your system To display a list of spoke servers NOTE The Spoke Servers window is only available on the hub server 1 Click the System tab 2 Click DSView Server in the top navigation bar The side navigation bar will include the name of the server to which you are logged in 3 Click Properties in the side navigation bar and then click Spoke Servers The Spoke Servers window will open You may change the fields that display by using the Customize link See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 Each spoke server in the list includes status Chapter 5 DSView 3 Servers 81 Table 5 2 DSView 3 Software Spoke Server Status Status Cause Normal operation The hub and spoke servers are communicating with each other using Responding HTTPS The hub and spoke servers cannot communicate with each other using HTTPS This Not responding typically indicates a network communication error Ensure that network connectivity is occurring between the two servers HUB Spoke VOISINS The versions of DSView 3 software on the hub and spoke servers are not compatible Not Compatible k Certificates on the hub server and spoke servers do not match See Managing hub and Certificates Do Not Ge i Match Spoke server certificates on page 71 for information about updating
232. count is added to the DSView 3 software system the user may be assigned to any of the following built in user groups DSView 3 software administrators Appliance administrators User administrators Auditors Users Chapter 4 Basic Operations Table 4 1 lists the operations allowed for the built in user groups Table 4 1 Built In User Group Allowed Operations 45 Operation Configure DSView 3 software system level settings Add change import and delete DSView 3 software Backup and restore the DSView 3 software database Register a spoke server Add change and delete units Add change and delete unit groups Configure access rights Add change and delete sites departments and locations Add change and delete external authentication services Add change delete user accounts and user defined user groups Built In User Group Software Administrator Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Administrator No No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Appliance zZ fe zZz o No No Yes Yes No Yes No No Administrator Auditors No No No No No No No No Users No No No No No No No No No No 46 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Built In User Group 3 2 5 Operation a 4 3 D oD g9 2 I c a SE UI B E cE GE Z D ou 5 av OAL 2 lt lt lt k All event related opera
233. ct a time to run the task see Specifving when to run tasks on page 364 then click Next 6 The Select Unit Group window opens Select A Units or select a unit group then click Next 7 The Select Unit window opens Select the units to be included in the topology update click Add 8 Click Finish Task Update topology for selected units Automatic topology synchronization see Automatic topology synchronization on page 147 is not supported on some units supported by plug ins To keep these units synchronized with the DSView 3 software you may instead schedule the update topology task This task updates the DSView 3 software database when a change occurs in a units Examples of changes are the adding removing of an IQ adaptor cascade switch or power device This task performs the same operations as the Resync Unit Wizard see Resynchronizing units on page 358 Once this task is added you may run it on demand at any time see Running tasks manually on page 382 To add the task 1 Click the System tab 2 Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window opens 3 Click Add The Add Task Wizard appears 380 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 4 Select Update Topology for selected units from the drop down menu Type a 1 64 character name for the task 5 Select a time to run the task see Specifving when to run tasks on page 364 then click Next 6 The Select Unit Group window opens Select A Units o
234. cted in which case target devices may be shared and will not be skipped in the scan sequence No login error messages will appear After your interactive session is closed the thumbnail will be included in the scan sequence again Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 311 You may disable a device thumbnail from the scan sequence The thumbnail image remains but it is not updated until it is once again enabled When running scan mode it is recommended that logging of the following events enabled by default be disabled in the DSView 3 software system Each thumbnail scan will result in the logging of these events The event log could grow to a huge size if the following events are enabled and scan mode is run continuously for a lengthy amount of time Appliance Change Of State Viewer Session Stopped Viewer Session Started Appliance Viewer Session Stopped Appliance Viewer Session Started Thumbnail Viewer features Figure 19 3 shows the Thumbnail Viewer areas and descriptions follow in Table 19 4 312 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide I Scan Mode Avocent Session Viewer Thumbnail Options td slappy td speedy td tweety 3 td wile b 5 6 td slappy td speedy 432280 e td tvveety 3 td wile Figure 19 3 Thumbnail Viewer Table 19 4 Thumbnail Viewer Descriptions Number Description 1 Thumbtack Locks the display of the menu so that it is visible at all times 2 Menu A
235. ction View units Add or delete units Update unit properties Move units to another zone Use unit operations and tools View unit groups User Status Required for Action Any qualified user Any qualified user Any qualified user Any qualified user Any qualified user Any qualified user Zone s Affected Active zone only Active zone only Active zone only NOTE Appliance IP addresses must be unique across all zones To other zones for which he has access rights Active zone only NOTE If the operation or tool involves multiple units all units must be in the same zone Active zone only Chapter 16 DS Zones 255 User Status Required for Action Action Zone s Affected Active zone only NOTE The user group name must be unique within the active zone but can be duplicated in other zones When a zone is created three groups are automatically created global root unassigned and personal root Add unit groups Any qualified user Active zone only NOTE The globalroot unassigned and personal root groups cannot be deleted Delete unit groups Any qualified user Assign units to unit groups Any qualified user Active zone only Active zone only NOTE The site department or location name must be unique Add or remove sites departments c within the active zone but can be Any qualified user j or locations duplicated in other zones Ifa unit is moved to another z
236. ctions the DSView 3 software client uses HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol with SSL encryption to send a request to the DSView 3 server which then sends a command to the managed appliance The appliance then performs the requested function The DSView 3 software supports the managed appliances listed in this section Other appliances may be supported by plug ins see the Avocent web site www avocent com for a list of plug ins that may currently ship with the DSView 3 software and or that can be added to the DSView 3 software See Plug ins on page 399 for information about adding and managing plug ins in the DSView 3 software system Chapter 1 Product Overview 5 Cyclades ACS advanced console server ACS advanced console servers allow users to access serially attached devices over a standard TCP IP connection using the Avocent Telnet Viewer a third party Telnet viewer or a Secure Shell SSH client These serial sessions can be shared among multiple users across multiple DSView 3 servers For more information see the ACS console server plug in documentation LANDesk Server Manager The DSView 3 management software plug in for LANDesk Server Manager allows you to access the LANDesk Server Manager and its target devices from within the DSView 3 software This integrated system provides complete life cycle and systems management for multiplatform server infrastructures Use the browser based software to manage server performance and avail
237. ctory server to refer DSView 3 software clients to additional directory servers Specify the search mode Enable Use Recursion to search groups if you wish to have the AD service access the domain controller for the specified domain name This search includes the Member attribute of ObjectClass group This search is recursive and finds nested groups This search may be slow depending on the number of groups and levels of nesting or Enable Use an Active Directory Global Catalog to have the AD service access the global catalog for the specified domain name The search includes the TokenGroups attribute of the ObjectClass user This search is faster but only retrieves the nested groups SIDs subsequent calls must be made to find the group name and specific SIDs or Enable Use Windows 2003 Universal Group Caching if you wish to have the AD service access the domain controller for the specified domain name The search includes the TokenGroups attribute of the ObjectClass user This search is faster but only retrieves the nested groups SIDs subsequent calls must be made to find the group name and specific SIDs The Windows 2003 Universal Group Caching feature must be enabled in the Windows 2003 AD server Click Allow use of Users Groups from Trusted Forests to allow logins by users belonging to a forest that are assigned to groups in a different forest If enabled the DSView 3 will query all trusted forests in the Active Directory service
238. cts to the DSView 3 server that is set to an invalid time the following warming will appear in the Security Alert dialog box The security certificate date is invalid Serial session security alerts The Serial Session Viewer which is used during a serial session is a Java based applet Three certificate tests are performed by Java when the DSView 3 software connects to a serial device Does the serial device trust the certificate issuer Has the certificate expired Does the name on the serial device certificate match the name of the DSView 3 software hub server certificate Chapter 5 DSView 3 Servers 69 A warning dialog box will appear if the answer to all three questions is No To prevent this warning dialog box from appearing when you connect to a serial device all three questions must be answered Yes To correct certificate security alerts when connecting to a serial session 1 Ina Units View window that contains serial console appliance target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the Serial Session link in the Action field You can also access a Unit Overview window for a target device and click the Serial Session icon or link for the session type see Unit Overview Windows on page 125 2 Ifthe certificate is trusted and has not expired but there is a mismatch of the name on the DSView 3 software client certificate and the name on the DSView 3 software hub server certificate a Waming HTT
239. cuit card ICC is a pocket sized card with embedded integrated circuits which can process data Smart cards can be used for single sign on authentication SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a set of protocols for managing complex networks SNMP works by sending messages to different parts of a network SNMP compliant devices called agents store data about themselves in MIBs and return this data to the SNMP requesters SNMP manager The SNMP manager is an optional component outside of the DSView 3 software system that enables the monitoring of many cross platform devices using SNMP information SNMP managers are also called network management systems NMS SSH Passthrough session An SSH Passthrough session is a serial session opened to a unit by without the use of a web browser From an SSH client you can enter an SSH Passthrough command to establish a connection to any serial unit managed by the DSView 3 software if you have access rights 456 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide SSL Secure Sockets Layer SSL is a protocol that supplies secure data communication through data encryption and decryption SSL enables private communications over networks by using a combination of public key cryptography and bulk data encryption Target device A target device includes a wide range of data center components such as servers and routers that an administrator is able to virtually manage through the DSView 3 manage
240. d defined event occurs in the DSView 3software system it is saved in the event log You may display the event log content view details about an individual event log entry or delete an event log entry You may have an email notification sent to one or more addresses when an event occurs You may change the event log s retention period and export the event log s content NOTE You must be a member of the DSView 3 software administrator or auditor user group to access event configuration and display windows Event Severity and Categories Events are classified by severity and category Event severity Table 23 1 describes the event severity levels The icon appears in event log displays Table 23 1 Event Severity Levels Severity Icon Description Monitor gg Events that are periodic and expected Information i Events that are neither periodic nor problematic OK nv Events that are in a normal or cleared state This value typically appears at event start up or after leaving a previous event state Non critical amp Abnormal events that require correcting at a later time 388 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Severity Icon Description a Abnormal events of a more serious nature that may require quicker action Critical j SER such as the failure of a scheduled task or loss of communication Severe abnormal events impacting your DSView 3 management software Non recoverable cane session and requires immediat
241. d or select it using the menu 4 Click Save Creating an Event Log csv File All or selected columns of the event log can be exported as a comma separated values csv file The output event log file is named eventlog csv by default but you may change the name when it is saved The csv file may be viewed in a text editor or spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel NOTE To create a task to export the event log to a csv file see Task Exporting an event log csv file on page 370 To create an event log csv file 1 Click the Reports tab 2 Click Tools in the side navigation bar The Event Log Tools window will open 3 Click the Export Event Log icon or text The Export Event Log Wizard will appear 4 The Select Columns to Export window will open e To add one or more columns to export select the column s from the Available Columns list then click Add The columns will be moved to the Columns to Export list e To remove one or more columns select the column s from the Columns to Export list then click Remove The columns will be moved to the Available Columns list To change the order in which exported columns are listed in the output csv file select one or more columns in the Columns to Export list and use the up and down arrows to move the selected columns up or down in the listing Click Next 5 The Save Process window will open explaining how the file will be saved Click Next 6 The Completed Suc
242. d Off Modes to Set Auto Repeat On Encode Decode No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Control Sequence Esc 8l Esc 9h Esc 9I Esc 6n Esc P1 PcR Esc 5n Esc On Esc 3n Esc xorEsc 0c Esc 1 Psc Escc Esc 8 Esc 2 Psy Definition Modes to Reset Auto Repeat Off Modes to Set Interlace On Modes to Reset Interlace Off Report Cursor Position Invoked by Report Cursor Position Response is Status Report Invoked by Status Report Response is terminal OK Status Report Response is terminal not OK What are you Invoked by What are you Response is Reset Fillscreen with Es Invoke Test s Appendices 433 Encode Decode No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No Yes No No No Yes No No VT220 terminal emulation Table D 8 lists the keystroke mapping encoding for VT220 emulation Table D 8 VT220 Encoding VT220 Keyboard Byte VT220 Keyboard PC Keyboard Sequence Delete Delete Ox7F Left Arrow Left Arrow Esc D Right Arrow Right Arrow Esc C Up Arrow Up Arrow Esc A Down Arrow Down Arrow Esc B 434 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide VT220 Keyboard Byte VT220 Keyboard PC Keyboard Sequence Keypad Keypad Keypad Keypad i Keypad Keypad Keypad Keypad
243. d for the specified text string For example you may wish to perform filtering to list only DSR1031 switches in the Name column target devices with KVM connections in the Action column idle ACS console servers in the Status column and so on Additionally from a Units View window you can use the Custom Fields and Filter link to exclude columns from the filter and provide a more exact list of filtered items See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 When the topology feature is enabled in a Units View window both parent and child units will display in the filtered view For example if you filter for a child named target device 1 that is attached to a DSR1031 switch target device 1 will appear below the DSR1031 switch in the filtered view When filtering you may use an asterisk before and or after text strings as a wildcard For example typing emailserver and clicking Filter will display items with emailserver at the beginning such as emailserver emailserverbackup Typing emailserver and clicking Filter will display items containing emailserver in any part of the name such as emailserver emailserverstore tdemailserver tdemailserver Table 3 3 lists the ways you may specify text strings for filtering Table 3 3 Filter Text Strings Chapter 3 DSView 3 Explorer Windows 31 Typed in the Filter Field lt String gt lt String gt lt String1 gt AND lt String2 gt lt String1 gt OR lt String2 gt
244. d gt lt rspeed gt lt clkmul gt lt flags gt x Request Terminal Parameters Save Cursor Set Top and Bottom Margins Single Width Line Invoke Confidence Test Device Status Report Erase in Display Erase in Line Horizontal Tabulation Set Horizontal and Vertical Position Index Next Line Encode Decode No Yes No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No Yes Yes Yes No No No No No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Control Sequence EscM Escc Esc Ps Ps Ps 1 Esc A Esc A Esc B Esc B Esc 0 Esc 0 Esc 1 Esc 1 Esc 2 Esc 2 Esc Ps Psm Esc Ps Psh Esc Psg Esc Ps Ps Psm Esc Kor Esc 0K Esc 1K Esc 2K Esc J or Esc 0 J Definition Reverse Index Reset to Initial State Reset Mode Select Character Set GO U K Select Character Set G1 U K Select Character Set GO ASCII Select Character Set G1 ASCII Select Character Set GO Spec Graphics Select Character Set G1 Spec Graphics Select Character Set GO Alt Character ROM Standard Character Set Select Character Set G1 Alt Character ROM Standard Character Set Select Character Set GO Alt Character ROM Special Graphics Select Character Set G1 Alt Character ROM Special Graphics Select Graphic Rendition Set Mode Tabulation Clear Character Attributes 7 Reverse Video On Erase from cursor to end
245. d interval see Using the date filter on page 395 By default the display includes event log entries with a state of New see Event states on page 394 and the State column is not displayed To view events with an Acknowledged state in the display enable the Show All button The State column will be added to the display and the list will include events with any state New or Acknowledged Acknowledged events will be grayed out to differentiate them from New events but any event can be selected To remove events with an Acknowledged state from the display disable the Show All button The State column will be removed from the display and only unacknowledged state New events will appear NOTE You may also display a list of only the new non critical critical or non recoverable event log entries by clicking the appropriate icon in the right portion of the top navigation bar see Table 23 1 for pictures To display details of an event log entry 1 Click the Reports tab 394 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 2 In an Event Log window click on a link in the Severity column The Event Information window will open See Event log display fields on page 392 for descriptions of information in the Event Details section of the display The Event History table contains any state change information This includes when the state was changed the type of change for example Changed from New to Acknowledged and who username made th
246. d list Click Next 6 The Select Options window will open For more information about the options that affect adding target devices connected to the appliance see Topology Synchronization on page 146 For appliances that are supported by plug ins the content of this window may differ see the appropriate documentation a Click Enable secure mode if you want the managed appliance to only be accessible by this DSView 3 software system In non secure mode the managed appliance may be added to multiple DSView 3 software systems NOTE For appliances that require Secure mode this checkbox will not be visible and the appliance will enable Secure mode automatically b Click Allow target devices with the same name to be merged into a single target device if you wish to merge a target device that has multiple connections into a single target device Under Allow target devices that contain default names to be added for these type of connections you may enable one or more connection types Any target devices that contain default names in the managed appliance and support the enabled connection type in the managed appliance will be added to the DSView 3 software database This option has no effect when adding a DSI5100 appliance since default target device names are not supported A target device is named when it is added as a BMC port using the Add IPMI BMC Wizard Click Next Chapter 8 Adding and Deleting Units 137 The Add
247. d server or service which may not be the intended search The user may choose instead to change the order of precedence by grouping the search terms with parentheses such as email and server or service Preceding the string with NOT displays all items that do not contain the string For example typing not email will display all items except those containing email email email server email server 1 and so on will not display To filter the list in a window 1 Ina window containing a Filter field type a text string in the field Searches are not case sensitive 2 Click Filter A filtered list of the information in the window will be displayed 3 Click Clear to return to a non filtered list 32 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Saving information in a window When you change information in a window you must click Save in order to apply the changes By default a message box will appear if you click Close or try to exit the window by clicking a link in the top bar top navigation bar or side navigation bar without first clicking Save Clicking OK in the message box will exit the current window without saving the changes If you want to save the changes you have made click Cancel in the message box then click Save in the window You may choose whether you will be reminded to save changes made in windows before exiting them See Changing user options on page 41 Using the Customize link in windows Windows
248. d the other spoke servers will be advised of the changed configuration Replication Replication is a task that synchronizes the hub and spoke server databases By default replication runs every 12 hours on each spoke server A spoke server s first replication occurs automatically when the spoke server is added to the DSView 3 software system You may change the interval that the replication task runs on each spoke server or you may initiate an immediate replication During replication the spoke server sends all of its database changes since the last replication to the hub server The hub server then incorporates those changes and sends all of its database changes since the last replication to the spoke server excluding the changes that spoke server just sent to the hub server If an item is added on a spoke server and another item with the same name but perhaps with different configuration parameters is added on the hub server then after replication both items will appear on both the hub and spoke servers with a tilde and a number added to one of the names The administrator should handle the issue appropriately in some cases the duplicate item may need to be renamed in others the duplicate item should be deleted When different changes are made to one existing item two outcomes are possible For example assume an item is added and configured on the hub server and is then replicated to the spoke server Later an administra
249. d to prohibit the user from setting a higher value than the current setting Enabling this option can improve bandwidth management A KVM session profile contains general cursor toolbar and video settings General profile settings Name A KVM session profile name uniquely identifies the profile Profile names may contain 1 64 characters No two KVM session profiles may have the same name Default macro group The default macro group setting allows you to choose which global macro group will appear in the Video Viewer Macros menu See Macros on page 314 If you enable Allow users to override this setting or if no profile is assigned to the target device users may specify the default macro group using Video Viewer menu commands Keyboard pass through mode The keyboard pass through mode setting enables or disables keyboard pass through Keystrokes that a user enters may be interpreted in two ways depending on the screen mode of the Video Viewer window e Ifa Video Viewer window is in full screen mode keystrokes and keyboard combinations are sent to the remote server being viewed e Ifa Video Viewer window is in regular desktop mode keyboard pass through mode allows you to control whether the remote server or local computer will recognize certain keystrokes or keystroke combinations When keyboard pass through mode is enabled keystrokes and keystroke combinations are sent to the remote server being viewed when the Video Viewer w
250. d when restoring the backup To display help information type DSViewBackupRestore h or DSViewBackupRestore help For example entering the following in a command prompt window will create a backup named db zip with the password test DSViewBackupRestore exe backup archive db zip passwd test Entering the following in a command prompt window will restore a backup named db zip with the password test DSViewBackupRestore exe restore archive db zip passwd test To manually backup or restore a hub server using a command line on a supported Linux or Solaris system 1 2 Access the command prompt on your system Change directories to the directory where the DSView 3 software is installed which is typically usr local dsviewserver bin To backup the DSView 3 software hub server enter DSViewBackupRestore sh backup archive lt archive name gt passwd lt password gt overwrite To restore the DSView 3 software hub server enter DSViewBackupRestore sh restore archive lt archive name gt passwd lt password gt lt archive name gt Name of the archive The archive option and an archive name are required lt password gt A password that encrypts the archive The password is optional when creating a backup If a password is specified when creating the backup it will be required when restoring the backup Chapter 5 DSView 3 Servers 79 overwrite Enables overwriting of an existing archive during b
251. de Names to Ignore field f Click Next 4 The Import in Progress window will open displaying the current step being performed as the DSView 2 x software database is importing When the import completes the Completed Successful window will open with a summary of the import including the number of authentication services users user groups units and unit groups added 5 Click Finish The Units Tools window will open After running the Import DSView 2 x Database tool Units requiring migration will contain Migration Needed in the Migration Status field of Units View windows Although the managed appliances have been imported from the DSView 2 x software database into the DSView 3 software system they are not yet compatible with the DSView 3 software To complete the configuration and update the firmware on each type of managed appliance you must use the Migrate Units task See Task Migrating units on page 373 Importing data You can use the Import Data Wizard to migrate data from the AlterPath Manager to the DSView 3 software First you will need to export the data from the AlterPath Manager into an XML format that is recognized by DSView 3 software See the AlterPath Manager Data Migration Technical Bulletin for more information To import data 1 Click the Units tab Click Tools in the side navigation bar The Unit Tools window will open Click the Import Data icon or link The Import Data Wizard will appear en S In
252. de may also be specified in a KVM session profile see General profile settings on page 292 To specify a key for toggling activation of the menu and toolbar 1 Select Tools Session Options from the Video Viewer menu or click the Session Options button The Session Options dialog box appears Click the General tab In the Menu Activation Keystroke field select a keystroke from the menu Click OK When you disable the menu and toolbar display pressing the specified key reenables the display To enable keyboard pass through 1 Select Tools Session Options from the Video Viewer menu or click the Session Options button The Session Options dialog box appears Click the General tab Select Pass through all keystrokes in regular window mode Click OK 302 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To enable or disable full screen mode NOTE The View Full Screen command may only be used by the primary user The command is not available to non primary users who are sharing the session 1 To enable full screen mode click the Maximize button or select View Full Screen from the Video Viewer menu The desktop window will disappear and only the accessed device desktop will be visible The screen will be resized up to a maximum of 1024 x 768 If the desktop has a higher resolution then a black background will surround the full screen image The floating toolbar will appear 2 To disable full screen mode click the Fu
253. de navigation bar The site department location must also have at least one unit associated with it to be displayed in the side navigation bar To add a site department or location 1 Click the Units tab 234 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 3 4 To add a site click Sites in the top navigation bar The Sites window will open To add a department click Departments in the top navigation bar The Departments window will open To add a location click Locations in the top navigation bar The Locations window will open Click Add The Add Site Add Department or Add Location window will open Type a name then click Add The Sites Departments or Locations window will open A site department or location will not be listed in the side navigation bar until a unit has been associated with it To delete a site department or location 1 2 4 5 Click the Units tab To delete a site click Sites in the top navigation bar The Sites window will open To delete a department click Departments in the top navigation bar The Departments window will open To delete a location click Locations in the top navigation bar The Locations window will open Click the checkbox to the left of one or more sites departments locations To delete all sites departments locations in the page click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list Click Delete A confirmation dialog box will appear Confirm or cancel
254. de switches 000 000220cc cece EEE EEE ERKA SAS 152 Automatic Discovery 2 22 2 22 0022 c E E E E ee eee eee ee 152 Automatic Inheritance for Group Memberships and Properties 2 153 Managing Units l l lcs sas as ccc cece cece cece cece cece KK KK KK KK K RR 155 Appliance Configuration Templates LELE L LAL cece cece cece eee e cece EA A KAK KAKA 135 Saving appliance configuration templates 2 22 00 000 cece eee e cece eee KAS 155 Modifying appliance configuration template properties 2222222 220 156 Applying appliance configuration templates 2 0 000 LALES eee eee es 157 Unit POP eriless co DD noth MD 158 A DOUL ACCESS RIGN ARE AMA MH HBHFHBHFHHHHHHH HHE 163 How access rights can be assigned 200 000000 c cece ee ee eee eee eee eee 165 Unit Access n 3 fo 2 4oon e532 sccm Migs Seid tn ar Sed ies areas th guste teen aaea 165 Managed Appliance Settings 0000222220 cece eee c cece cece cc EKE AKA 166 Managed Appliance Status 0 000222 c cece eee cc cence eee ec ceeeeeeeeeee 168 Managed Appliance SNMP Settings 0 EE EEE EEE EEE EE EEE EEE EE EEE EKE ERKA 169 Target Device Services 2 sla su o e eee 170 Target Device Settings 0 22 00 2 22000 cece cece eee 172 Target Device Naming 2 022200022202 e eects 173 TO Mod le Setting 8 9 52 kuran Seis cae his hd ee alse
255. disable local echo 1 Select Options Session Properties from the menu or click the Session Settings icon in the toolbar The Session Properties dialog box will appear 2 Click the Terminal tab 3 When you are connected to a device that does not repeat or echo the data that you type you may enable Local Echo mode Otherwise the Telnet Viewer will not display the text you type However if you are connected to a device that echoes data and you are in Local Echo mode all of the data you type will appear on your terminal twice Enable or disable the Local echo checkbox The default value is disabled To enable disable 7 bit ASCII 1 Select Options Session Properties from the menu or click the Session Settings icon in the toolbar The Session Properties dialog box will appear 2 Click the Terminal tab 3 Enable or disable the Strip Sth bit checkbox The default value is disabled Login scripts The Telnet Viewer has a login scripting function that enables you to automatically log in to a device A login script is built with a sequence of expect and send strings and initial transmission characters that work with them To use a login script you must enable automatic login in a checkbox The first Initial character that is the first entry in the Initial character column specifies what is sent to the device as soon as the Telnet Viewer session is established This is selected from a list containing the choices None CR carriag
256. does not add offline connections to the DSView 3 software database Enable the Delete target devices that no longer have connections checkbox to delete those target devices permanently from the DSView 3 software database Enable the Allow target devices with the same name to be merged into a single target device checkbox to allow the DSView 3 software to treat multiple target devices with the same name as one unit with multiple access methods Enable the Allow target devices that contain default names to be added checkbox to allow target devices that have default names in the managed appliances to be added to the DSView 3 software database Click Next 3 Ifthe unit does not require resynchronizing the Completed Successful window will open If the unit requires resynchronizing the Changes Detected in Appliance window will open Click Next and go to step 7 If one or more cascade switches are attached to the KVM switch the Cascade Switch Configuration window will open Go to step 4 4 Select the type of each detected cascade switch 5 Type a name for each cascade switch 360 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 6 Optionally combine any multiuser cascade switches Click the checkboxes of the cascade switches that you wish to merge and then click Merge To unmerge any cascade switches that you have merged click the checkbox of the merged cascade switch and then click Split 7 Click Next The Completed Successful w
257. dow will open Click on a user group name The User Group Properties window will open 280 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 3 To change the name of the user group type a new 1 256 character name in the Name field NOTE Ifthe user group belongs to a TACACS service that uses the privilege level attribute method the Name field will be disabled 4 To change the preemption level type a number from 1 4 the higher the number the 6 higher the preemption level in the Preemption Level field or select a value from the menu See Preemption Levels on page 46 To change the role of the user group select a role from the menu If you do not wish to assign a role to the user group select None Click Save and then click Close The User Groups User Defined window will open Changing User Group Members When users are created they may be assigned to one or more built in or user defined user groups You may add or remove users to or from the built in and user defined user groups To add or remove user group members NOTE Members may only be assigned to or removed from user groups defined on the internal DSView 3 authentication service 1 Click the Users tab 2 Click Groups in the top navigation bar Built In will automatically be selected in the side navigation bar and the User Groups Built in window will open To display the User Groups User Defined window click User Defined in the side navigation bar 3 C
258. dows system 1 2 4 Select Start Settings Control Panel The Control Panel will appear From the Control Panel click Add Remove Programs The Add Remove Programs dialog box will appear Select Avocent DSView 3 and then click Change Remove The Uninstall Avocent DSView window will open Click Uninstall To uninstall the DSView 3 software on a supported Linux or Solaris system 1 2 Log in to the server as root Insert the DSView 3 software DVD into your DVD drive If AutoMount is supported and enabled open a command window and continue with step 3 Or If your system does not support AutoMount issue the following command to mount the DVD volume mount lt device gt lt mount point gt where lt device gt and lt mount point gt are the names of your server s DVD Linux or Solaris device and mount point directory respectively For example to mount a DVD which is the second IDE unit on media cdrom enter the command mount dev cdrom media cdrom Enter the following command to access the readme file less media cdrom DSView readme Follow the instructions in the readme file Chapter 2 Installation 23 Closing a DSView 3 Software Session Files are copied to DSView 3 software clients when you log in to the DSView 3 software When using Internet Explorer temporary files may be removed by selecting the Delete Temporary Internet Files command and active web components may be uninstalled by selectin
259. e 118 click Topology Although you can enable the topology view in all Units View windows it is only meaningful in windows that contain managed appliances parent units that have children If you enable topology view in a Units View window that contains only target devices the only change will be the addition of the Port column to the display 118 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To attach a device from a topology view 1 6 In a Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 enable the topology view by clicking Topology The Topology checkbox will appear pressed and the Port column will be added to the display Click the arrow next to the appliance If the port is located on a cascade switch click the arrow next to the cascade switch In the Action field of the port where you want to attach the target device click Attach Device The Attach Device Wizard will open The Select a Method for Attachment window will open e To create a new target device and attach it enable the Create a New Target Device radio button enter a unique name up to 64 characters in the Device Name field and then click Next e To attach a target device that has already been added to the DSView 3 software system enable the Attach to an Existing Target Device radio button enter the name in the Device Name field and then click Next To browse for a target device that has already been added to t
260. e DSView 3 Explorer The DSView 3 server is contacted which in turn contacts the target device connected to the appliance port and exchanges X 509 certificates with the target device The target device also supplies a session certificate private key and appliance certificate These certificates are then passed back to the SSH2 client which uses them to determine the SSH2 host key and the user SSH2 key The Telnet Viewer will then establish a session with the Chapter 20 Using the Telnet Viewer 331 target device or through the proxy server if there is a proxy server connection The Telnet Viewer then passes the RSA public key from the session certificate when establishing the SSH connection Finally the virtual terminal window will open using an SSH2 shell over SSH connection SSH2 settings may be viewed by clicking on an appliance name in the DSView 3 Explorer and selecting Appliance Settings Sessions Settings in the side navigation bar to display the Properties Sessions Settings window Opening a Session A DSView 3 management software Telnet Viewer session is opened using the DSView 3 Explorer by clicking on Telnet Session or Serial Session in the Action column of the target device If the target device is attached to an appliance port Telnet Session will appear If the target device is attached to an appliance that is also attached to a serial device Serial Session will appear NOTE If multiple connection methods are availa
261. e Installer User Guide To configure break sequences 1 2 3 Click the System tab Click DSView Server in the top navigation bar Click SSH Passthrough in the side navigation bar The SSH Passthrough Properties window opens In the Delay field you may enter the number of milliseconds to delay a command if d is entered Enter the break sequence description in the Description field then enter the break sequence in the Break Sequence field Descriptions and break sequences are limited to 64 characters Field numbers 0 9 are available for up to 10 break sequences To send a break sequence 1 From an SSH Passthrough session enter the escape sequence for the break sequence definition in the following format Ecl break sequence number 0 9 For example Ec15 The break sequence is sent to the target device and a confirmation message appears Or The SSH client indicates that the break sequence is invalid or contains a syntax error You can correct the error and resend the break sequence Transferring read write access Only one user at a time can have read write access to a shared SSH Passthrough or Avocent Session Viewer session The first user who opens the session has read write access If that user exits a shared session read write access is granted to a randomly selected user who is sharing the session A user with read only access can enter a command to obtain read write access To obtain read write access
262. e Merge Target EndPoints Wizard allows you to simultaneously merge multiple target devices and power outlets The target device endpoint is defined as the target device or power outlet at the end of the connection path For more information about connections see Connections to Units on page 207 To merge target device endpoints 1 2 3 T Importing NOT The Click the Units tab Click Tools in the side navigation bar The Unit Tools window will open Click the Merge Target EndPoints icon or link The Merge Target EndPoints window will appear From the Available Power Devices list select the power devices that contain power connections to be merged with target devices and click Add Click Refresh to display a list of power connections For each power connection you wish to merge type the name of the target device you wish to merge with the power connection The target device name entered must match the name of the target device in the DSView 3 database target device names are case sensitive and 1 64 characters long Click Merge DSView 2 x software databases E This procedure is available only when the DSView 3 software is installed on a supported Windows system Import DSView 2 x software database tool allows you to import an existing DSView 2 x software database into the DSView 3 software system When a database is imported the following items will be imported 352 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Unit
263. e Modem Sessions Custom Field Labels i Tools Operation Results Figure 15 1 Custom Fields Example Side Navigation Bar Table 15 2 Custom Fields Example Side Navigation Bar Descriptions Number Description 1 System wide first level custom field label 2 Unit first level custom field labels 3 Unit second level custom field labels Unit Groups Unit groups may be used to organize units You may create nested unit groups unit groups within unit groups to organize units hierarchically Units may belong to multiple groups For example you may have a DSR switch that belongs to two global groups and three personal groups There are two types of unit groups global and personal A global unit group can be viewed by any user logged into the DSView 3 software A personal unit group may only be viewed by the person who created it Up to 32 personal unit groups may be created by a user There are two top level system defined unit group containers global root and personal root These group containers cannot be deleted They can contain other unit groups but not 240 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide individual units All global unit groups are descendents of global root All personal unit groups are descendents of personal root There is also a system defined unit group named Unassigned which is a descendent of the global root This unit group automatically contains all units that are not assigned to any other global uni
264. e SNMP the managed appliance will log SNMP received messages over UDP User Datagram Protocol port 161 UDP port 162 is used to listen for incoming traps e Managers Stations that can manage the managed appliance e Community Communities to which the traps belong e Destinations Stations that can receive SNMP traps e Traps Available traps and enabled disabled traps The traps must be also configured on each managed appliance using the Command Line Interface CLI The address of the server running the DSView 3 software must be configured as a trap recipient the proper community must be set and each desired trap must be enabled SNMP traps are logged in the event log file See Displaying the Event Log on page 392 SNMP traps may also be configured from a system task See Task Configure SNMP trap settings on a managed appliance on page 368 To change SNMP settings for a managed appliance 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name 170 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 8 Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar and then click SNMP in the side navigation bar The Appliance SNMP System Settings window will open To enable SNMP select Enabled in the Enable SNMP menu If desired change the name and description of the managed appliance and type a contact Then click Save To enable SNMP manager settings click Managers in the
265. e accessible only by this DSView 3 server enable the Enable secure mode checkbox If you want the managed appliances you are migrating to be accessible by any DSView 3 software system disable the Enable secure mode checkbox Click Next NOTE If you are migrating units from the AlterPath Manager enabling secure mode is recommended 11 Click Finish The Tasks window will open You may display the current progress of the migration task by clicking on the name of the task 12 Repeat the preceding steps for each type of managed appliance that you wish to migrate Units successfully migrated into the DSView 3 software system will appear in Units View windows and the Migration Status field for these units will indicate Migration Completed Task Sending an IPMI chassis control command to target devices This command powers up powers down cycles the power power down and then power up performs a gentle shutdown or resets one or more IPMI target devices 376 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide You must have Control Target Device Power rights to send an IPMI chassis control command See About Access Rights on page 163 Once this task is added you may run it on demand at any time see Running tasks manually on page 382 To add the task 1 ees n 9 Click the System tab Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open Click Add The Add Task Wizard will appear Select Send IPMI chassis control
266. e buffer warnings events as SNMP 2222222020000002000 217 Specifying where data log files will be stored 00 00002 eee eee eeee eee e eee 217 Archiving and deleting data log files 00002222000 SEES EZE c cece eee e eee 218 Viewing Data Log Files i320 ook doi tdecen cane do Sekt ook oa W a Wa hind ode Qa h de ts dane Sowa 220 SSH Passthrough Sessions 2 20 22020 KK KK KK KK KK tees 223 Table of Contents ix Enabling SSH Passthrough 2 2 2 2 0000022 20cc cece eee e cece ESAS EK KRE KK KK KK 224 SSE Ort SHAVING 22 ed heck eieoo iia ied Sa tated gh sale a A O 224 SSH Passthrough Sessions 0222220200000 e cece cece eee EE EE SEES EEE KK KK KK KK KK KH 225 Establishing an SSH Passthrough connection to a unit 226 Escape key sequence 0 222222 0 ccc cece cece ES EE EE EE SEE EE EE SES EE EEE SEK KE KK KK KK 228 Break SCQUCHCES sana EH HH N n dey tdony a Gti s sluee nE a a 229 Transferring read write ACCOSS 0 222222 e EEE EEE EEE EE e EE SES EE KE SEES EEE cence 230 Disconnecting a S SSION 2 2 2 2 0020 SEES SEES ESAS eee eee 231 Displaying session output 2 2 2 22 2c ee eee eee SEES eee 231 Supported service processor commands 222200000c eevee cece eee EEE KERA 231 Grouping Units A a h ih aate e cece cece cece eeeeeeeeees 233 Site Department and Location Groups 2222 00 000s EEE ESAS EEE EEE KERARA AA
267. e corrective action Severity icons For users who are members of the DSView 3 software administrators or auditor user groups the non critical critical and non recoverable icons also appear near the right edge of the top navigation bar in the DSView Explorer window when events of that severity occur Each icon is accompanied by a total count of new events of that severity The counter is decremented when an event of that severity is deleted from the event log or when an event s state is changed from New to Acknowledged see Event states on page 394 The counter is incremented when a new event of that severity is added to the log or when an event s state is changed from Acknowledged to New Event categories Defined events can be classified in the following categories e Access control e Appliance e Authentication e Data logging e External PMI e Modem e Sessions SSH Passthrough e System e Tasks e Units e Unit status e Users Chapter 23 Events and Event Logs 389 Email Notifications The DSView 3 software may be configured to send one or more users an email notification when an enabled event occurs You may specify which events will trigger an email notification You may also specify one or more unit groups an email notification will be sent only when a specified unit related event occurs on a unit that is a member of the specified unit group s If a specified event that is not tied to a unit occurs for examp
268. e navigation bar Click Ports and then click Cascade Switches The Appliance Cascade Switches window will open 176 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To initiate a pull or push name operation see Name Synchronization on page 141 click the checkboxes to the left of one or more device name s To select all names on the page click the box to the left of Appliance Name at the top of the list e Fora pull operation click Pull Name e Fora push operation click Push Name To change the name in appliance for a cascade switch 1 5 6 In a Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the KVM switch name Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar Click Ports and then click Cascade Switches The Appliance Cascade Switches window will open Click on a cascade switch name The Cascade Switch Settings window will open Change the name in the appliance If the automatic name pull feature is enabled see Automatic name pull on page 143 for the effect If you changed the appliance name click Save Click Close when you are finished To change the Name in DSView for a cascade switch 1 In a Units View window containing appliances and using the topology feature see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 and Topology view on page 116 click on the name of a cascade switch The Unit Overview window will open In the Name field change the name that will
269. e of an IQ module in the EID column to display its upgrade status in the Appliance Settings Ports IQ Modules Settings window When the upgrade is completed a green circle will appear next to the modules and they may once again be selected To set the USB speed for IQ modules NOTE The USB speed may only be set for supported USB2 and PS2M IQ modules 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances click on the KVM switch name 2 Click Appliance Settings click Ports and then click JO Modules in the side navigation bar The Appliance IQ Modules window will open 3 Click the checkbox to the left of the IQ modules you wish to modify To select all IQ modules on the page click the checkbox to the left of EID at the top of the list NOTE If any IQ module in the list is not supported the set USB speed buttons will be disabled 4 Click Set USB 1 1 Speed or Set USB 2 0 Speed The USB speed for the selected IQ modules will be set Switch and Cascade Switch Settings e For information about the SPC ports and managing power devices see Power Devices on page 187 To merge or split multi user cascade switches from the same appliance see Merging or splitting cascade switches on page 152 To display cascade switch port settings and initiate a push pull name operation 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the KVM switch name 2 Click Appliance Settings in the sid
270. e return CR LF carriage return and linefeed ESC Escape and CTRL P Control and P The first Expect string indicates what the device will send as its first prompt The first Send string indicates what the login script will send to the device after it receives the first Expect string You may then build additional Expect and Send strings according to what the particular device will prompt for and what will be sent in response 336 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To build a login script and enable disable automatic login 1 Select Options Session Properties from the menu or click the Session Settings icon in the toolbar The Session Properties dialog box will appear 2 Click the Login Scripts tab 3 Enable or disable the Automate login checkbox The default value is disabled 4 In the Initial Character list select one option CR carriage return CR LF carriage return and linefeed ESC Escape CTRL P Control P sequence 0X10 in hex or None no initial transmission character 5 In the Expect box type the 1 32 alphanumeric character string that you expect from the device Spaces are allowed 6 In the Send box type the 0 32 alphanumeric character string that you wish to send in response to the Expect string Spaces are allowed and a blank field is valid A CR or CR LF is appended to the string based on the New Line Mode Outbound setting 7 Repeat the Expect and Send entries as needed to a maximum o
271. e state change 3 Click Close The Event Log window will open To delete one or more event log entries 1 In an Event Log window click the checkbox to the left of the event s to delete To select all events on the page click the checkbox to the left of Severity at the top of the list 2 Click Delete A confirmation dialog box will appear 3 Confirm or cancel the deletion Event states When an event first occurs and is placed in the event log it is considered to be in a New state You may delete the event which will remove it from displays and from the event log However if you wish to prevent an event from being displayed but not delete it from the event log you may acknowledge the event which will change its state from New to Acknowledged You may also change an event s state from Acknowledged to New again This can be useful if you mistakenly changed an event s state to Acknowledged The Event Information window for each event contains an Event History that indicates when that event s state was changed and by whom When you change a non recoverable critical or non critical event s state to Acknowledged the counter next to that severity icon in the top navigation bar will be decremented If you change one of these events from Acknowledged to New the counter is incremented In an event log display if the Show All button is not enabled the display will only include events with a New state If the Show All button is enabled
272. e the receiver with the means to encode a reply An individual wishing to send an encrypted message applies for a digital certificate from a Certificate Authority CA The CA issues an encrypted digital certificate containing the applicant s public key and a variety of other identification information The CA makes its own public key readily available through print publicity or perhaps on the Internet The recipient of an encrypted message uses the CA s public key to decode the digital certificate attached to the message verifies it as issued by the CA and then obtains the 447 448 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide sender s public key and identification information held within the certificate With this information the recipient can send an encrypted reply The most widely used standard for digital certificates is X 509 DSR switch The DSR switch is part of the Avocent digital KVM switch series of products that allows KVM signals to be transmitted over a standard TCP IP connection DSView 3 management software The DSView 3 management software is an Avocent software component installed on a PC The DSView 3 management software provides the IP based centralized services required for management of managed appliances and target devices including centralized authentication access control logging events monitoring license management and so on DSView 3 software clients interact with the software using the DSView 3 Explorer
273. ealth mode are excluded from this display Video Viewer session properties Session properties specify whether users may share Video Viewer sessions automatically and whether shared connections may be viewed with the Video Viewer View Connected Users command To change Video Viewer session properties You must have DSView 3 software administrator or user administrator privileges to configure Video Viewer session properties 1 2 Click the System tab in the DSView 3 Explorer Click Global Properties in the top navigation bar The Video Viewer Session Properties window will open To allow other users to share a Video Viewer session automatically enable the Allow shared connections automatically checkbox You will not be notified that they wish to connect to the session and will not be able to accept or reject the connection Disable the checkbox if you want to be notified when other users want to share the Video Viewer session When a user attempts to connect to the session you will be notified and prompted to accept or reject the connection request To display a list of shared connections using the View Connected Users command in the Video Viewer window enable the View identity of shared connections checkbox See Displaying Video Viewer Users on page 309 To specify if smart card connections can be used in Video Viewer sessions enable or disable Allow Smart Cards to be used in Video Viewer sessions Chapter 19 Using the
274. eated the template To change the name enter a new name and click Save 7 Click Close Applying appliance configuration templates Applying appliance configuration templates generates a DSView 3 event To apply an appliance configuration template to a new appliance 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 select the appliance for which you want to apply the appliance configuration template The Unit Overview window opens Click the Apply Configuration Template icon or link The Save Appliance Configuration Template Wizard opens or In a Units View window containing appliances select the checkbox next to the appliance for which you want to apply the appliance configuration template From the Operations menu select Apply Configuration Template 2 From the list select the appliance configuration template you want to apply Click Save or Select Apply Last Known Good Configuration Template or Select Apply Current Configuration Template 3 The Completed Successful window opens Click Finish Or to apply the appliance configuration template during the Add Unit Wizard see Adding Units on page 129 To replace a failed appliance 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 select the appliance for which you want to apply the appliance configuration template The Unit Overview window opens Click the Appliance Replacement icon
275. ect Authentication Service window will open This window lists all authentication services that may be used to authenticate the user group when the user logs in See Authentication Services on page 87 Click on the name of an authentication service and then click Next e Ifyou selected DSView Internal as the authentication service go to step 4 e If you selected any other type of authentication service go to step 5 NOTE If you are adding a group to the TACACS authentication service see TACACS external authentication services on page 278 for more information 4 The Type in Internal Group Name window will open Type the name for the new user group you wish to create User defined user group names may contain up to 256 characters User defined user group names are case preserving Go to step 6 The Specify External Group window opens Complete one of the following steps then click Next e Click Specify a group on external authentication service and type the name of the group in the field User group names may contain up to 256 non case sensitive characters User group names are case preserving if the user group on the extemal authentication server is case sensitive See Group naming in external authentication services on page 276 Click Import the external group Everyone to consider any user on the external authentication server as a member of this user group e Click Find a group on external authentication service to choose
276. ed Successful or Completed Unsuccessful window will open indicating the results of the addition or removal Click Finish To change power device settings 1 In a Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name Chapter 11 Power Devices and Power Device Sockets 189 2 Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar click Ports and then Power device in the side navigation bar The Power Devices Attached to Appliance window will open For DSR switches that have two SPC ports one row will appear for each power device 3 Click on the name of a power device The Power Device Settings window will open Some fields are read only For fields that can be modified enter or select new values If you change the appliance name and the automatic name pull feature is enabled see Automatic name pull on page 143 for the effect 4 Optional If the power management plug in is installed select a voltage and enter a power factor in the fields provided These values are required if you wish to monitor power data on a power device 5 Click Save and then click Close The Power Devices Attached to Appliances window will open 6 Click Close The Units View window will open Upgrading the firmware of a Cyclades power device You may upgrade the firmware of a Cyclades power device attached to a DSR switch There are two ways to do this e From a Unit Overview window usin
277. ed certificate You may either import the certificate into the DSView 3 software client web browser choosing to trust the certificate or obtain a server certificate from a Certificate Authority CA trusted by the web browser 16 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide e To configure the DSView 3 software at a later time click X Cancel in the top right corner of the window To install the DSView 3 software on a supported Linux or Solaris system 1 2 4 Log in to the server as root Insert the DSView 3 software DVD into your DVD drive If AutoMount is supported and enabled open a command window and continue with step 3 If your system does not support AutoMount issue the following command to mount the DVD volume mount lt device gt lt mount point gt where lt device gt and lt mount point gt are the names of your server s DVD Linux or Solaris device and mount point directory respectively For example to mount the first IDE cdrom on media cdrom enter the command mount dev cdrom media cdrom Enter the following command to access the readme file less lt mount point gt DSView readme For example the following command accesses the readme file on the media cdrom mount point less media cdrom DSView readme Follow the instructions in the readme file Upgrading the DSView 3 Software When upgrading to a newer version of the DSView 3 software all DSView 3 servers should be upgraded at the same time
278. ed domain name If you are changing the appliance IP address you should first change it in the Appliance Network Settings window before changing it in the Unit Network Properties window See Managed Appliance Settings on page 166 e Select the DSView 3 server in charge of the managed appliance 3 Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open To change the DSView 3 server network property for one or more units from a Units View window 1 Ina Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the checkbox next to the unit s To change the DSView 3 server property for all units in the Chapter 10 Managing Units 163 page click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list If the page contains units that do not support note properties they will not be affected 2 Click Operations then select Properties from the drop down menu 3 The Multiple Unit Properties window will open Click Network Select the DSView 3 server in charge of the units 4 Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open To change the network properties for an EVR1500 environmental monitor or generic appliance 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name 2 Click Properties in the side navigation bar and then click Network in the side navigation bar The Unit Network Properties window will open Type the address or
279. ed to access shared drive location checkbox Then type the username and password and confirm the password of a user account that has read write access to the network share location To encrypt the created system backup file enable the Encrypt Backup File checkbox then type a password to lock and unlock the encrypted file To append the date and time in military time to the end of the system backup filename enable the Use date and time for file naming checkbox For example if you are creating the backup file on October 1 2005 at 10 04 pm the file created will be named dsviewBackup1001052204 zip If a backup file already exists in the specified directory and the Use date and time for file naming option is not enabled the existing backup file will be overwritten when the new backup file is created Click Finish Task Restore Power Manager database This task restores the Power Manager database using the backup file created with Task Backup Power Manager database on page 380 The backup file contains everything necessary to fully 382 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide restore the Power Manager database if needed The backup file is named dsviewPluginBackup zip by default but you may also append the date and time to the end of the backup filename Once this task is added you may run it on demand at any time see Running tasks manually on page 382 NOTE Power management features require the Power Manager plug in For more
280. elays it to the RSA Authentication Manager The RSA Authentication Manager s validation results are then relayed to the user The DSView 3 software also supports new PIN operations next tokencode operations RSA Authentication Manager Replica functionality and name locking The DSView 3 software is the agent type Net OS Agent See RSA SecurlD login on page 21 for information about the login process when an RSA SecurlD external authentication service is used Consult the RSA Authentication Manager documentation for additional details For complete information about what is needed on the RSA server see the RSA Secured Partner Solutions Directory on the RSA web site rsasecurity com To add an RSA SecurlD external authentication service 1 On the RSA server that will be used as an external authentication service add the DSView 3 server as an RSA Agent Host 2 From the DSView 3 Explorer Click the Users tab 3 Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open 4 Click Add The Add Authentication Service Wizard will appear 5 The Provide Authentication Service Name and Type window will open a In the Name field type a 1 64 character name for the RSA authentication service b Select RSA SecurID from the Type menu c Click Next 6 The Specify RSA SecurID Connection Settings window will open Type the 1 512 character path to the sdconf rec file or browse to the file locati
281. elect Unmanaged Appliances Select one or more DSR switches Click Operations then select Move to Managed Devices The DSR switches are now available from Units View windows containing appliances Chapter 10 Managing Units 169 If an automatically discovered DSR switch that has been set as a managed appliance is deleted the DSView 3 software attempts to automatically discover the DSR switch again and add it to the Unmanaged Appliances list The automatic discovery process continues unless the DSR switch is tumed off or has the DSView 3 server address removed Managed Appliance SNMP Settings This procedure is valid for supported KVM switches and serial console appliances It may also be valid for appliances supported by a plug in see the appropriate documentation The SNMP protocol is used to communicate management information between network management applications and DSView 3 software managed appliances using TCP IP and IPX protocols Other external SNMP managers such as Tivoli and HP OpenView may communicate with your managed appliances by accessing MIB II Management Information Base and the public portion of the enterprise MIB MIB II is a standard MIB that many SNMP target devices support The managed appliances will send their traps directly to the external SNMP manager in addition to sending it to the server The following settings appear under SNMP in the side navigation bar e System Enables disables SNMP When you enabl
282. embership changes or the user is deleted externally the DSView 3 software will not see those changes until the next time that user logs in 266 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Deleting User Accounts To delete one or more user accounts 1 Click the Users tab 2 Click the checkbox to the left of the username s To delete all users on the page click the checkbox to the left of User Name at the top of the list 3 Click Delete A confirmation dialog box will appear 4 Confirm or cancel the deletion Unlocking User Accounts If lock out settings have been specified for the DSView 3 intemal authentication service and a user exceeds these settings the user will not be allowed to attempt another log in until a certain amount of time has passed Users that have been locked out will appear with a lock next to their name in the User Accounts window and Locked will appear in the Status column User administrators or administrators may manually unlock the user accounts To unlock one or more user accounts 1 Click the Users tab 2 Ina User Accounts window click the checkbox to the left of the username s 3 Click Unlock Resetting a User Account Password A DSView 3 software administrator or user administrator may reset a user s password When a password is reset the user will be required to login by typing password as their password then enter and verify a new password for their account the next time they start a
283. en Power Device Sockets To display information about power device sockets or initiate a push pull operation 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name 2 Click Appliance Settings click Ports and then Power devices in the side navigation bar The Power Devices Attached to Appliance window will open 3 Click on the name of a power device 4 Click Sockets in the side navigation bar The Power Device Sockets window will open If you change the IP address of a managed appliance that is attached to a power device the appliance may need rebooting In this case a Reboot Required icon will be displayed in the top left corner of the Power Device Sockets window Click the icon to reboot the managed appliance 5 To initiate a pull or push name operation see Name Synchronization on page 141 a Click the checkboxes to the left of one or more device name s To select all names on the page click the box to the left of Appliance Name at the top of the list b Fora pull operation click Pull Name c Fora push operation click Push Name Customizing the Power Device Sockets window The display fields and content of the Power Device Sockets window will differ according to the power device type and models For details see the product documentation Use the Customize link to add or remove fields in the display See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32
284. en 383 CeTang in g5a l8 5355 14 22352444441 aa Utada ek eee es Ne hey 383 Firmware Management 2 22 2220 00222 c eee eee 384 Events and Event L O05 lt 5 gt a XJ lAlala di dre ka hana ne e KUD Ken y BELE As ba WEDA EEA 387 Event Severity and Categories 22 0 00c 00 ee cece SEE EEE EEE EEE EEE SEKE KK 387 xiv DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide DAVA A AA AE AIEEE Woes oe et Bo eee be ponds eee Hanes Eek A A sade dels 387 227192191111224 A naa Goh 8 Ba UI a Be ERR ee 388 Email Notifications A AMD ma_ v vv 389 Enabling and Disabling Event Logging 222222020c0cc eee e EEE EEE EEE RAA KASA 391 Displaying the Event Log 0 022222 SEE EEE ESAS EE EEE EE EE EE SEE EE EEE KAK KK KEK KK KK KK 392 EVONESIALCS SN Serr h 394 Da date filter saree ei a aea E E n mm m mm 395 Changing the Event Log Retention Period LL EEE EE EEE EEE EEE ee eeees 395 Creating an Event Log csv File 0 2 2 2 00002 ccc ESASA EEE ESASA SEES EE EKA K KO 396 PIUG INS EAE E NE AEE es ac ites Gi i hh he tA Sat AS Stal EA 399 Recommended Sequence for Adding Upgrading Plug ins 00022222002 399 Adding Plug ins r eones eea a Set en SETS HH H HH HHHH HBHBHNHHBH Seek ye OEE DENE TE 400 Displaying Plug in Information 0002222200000 c cee eee EEE E EEE EE KESEK KK KAKA 401 Managing Plugins owed isons eos ida leencaon tn dnenc a aa oad tn teak beeen ies 403 Upgradi
285. en click Close The Units View window will open Unit Status Window To use the Unit Status window 1 Click the Units tab then click Unit Status in the side navigation bar 2 The Unit Status window opens 3 You can filter what units are displayed by selecting a status from the Filter menu Each unit status is color coded The default filtered status is Active Status which displays only currently active units 4 You can select how often the Unit Status is updated by selecting a time from the Interval menu 128 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 5 You can view the Unit Overview window by double clicking the unit name or right clicking the unit name and selecting Show Unit Overview 129 Adding and Deleting Units This chapter describes how to add and delete units in the DSView 3 management software Adding Units You may add A single managed appliance A single embedded appliance Multiple managed appliances based on a range of IP addresses A generic appliance or an EVR1500 environmental monitor A single target device that is not attached to a managed appliance When a managed appliance is added DSView 3 software administrator user administrator and appliance administrator privileges are automatically assigned to the managed appliance A user with any of these privileges may Reboot a managed appliance and disconnect sessions Administer local user accounts on the managed appliance Control target device pow
286. enu or click the Close button Macros NOTE Macros may not be created edited copied or deleted if the DSR Remote Operations software is being used to connect to the DSR appliance viewing the target device Three types of macros are available in the DSView 3 management software Exit macros are used by and located on DS1800 digital switches and DSR switches See Defining exit macros on page 199 The other two types global macros and personal macros are created and used by the Video Viewer Global macros are created and maintained by users with appliance administrator privileges and are stored on the hub server and any specified spoke servers See Managed Appliance Session Settings on page 195 Global and personal macros may also be created in the Telnet Viewer window Macros created using the Telnet Viewer window are not compatible with the Video Viewer and may only be used with target devices connected to serial console appliances Users may create personal macros for their own use These macros can be accessed on the local computer using the Video Viewer window Personal macros may be customized and grouped in any manner you wish with the exception of being included in a Global Macro group Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 315 When a session is started in the DSView 3 software global and personal macros are retrieved from the DSView 3 server Then when a Video Viewer window session is started the macros are loaded A user may choo
287. er Establish sessions with target devices from KVM switches serial console appliances or other supported units Appliance administrators and DSView 3 software administrators may also Flash upgrade a managed appliance and configure settings for a managed appliance Managed appliance rights may be changed See About Access Rights on page 163 When you add a KVM switch or serial console appliance attached target devices are also added 130 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide If you add a KVM switch or serial console appliance that has an attached power device the power device is automatically added to the DSView 3 software database Any target devices plugged into the power device outlets sockets are also added based on the options selected The applicable X 509 certificate is automatically copied from the DSView 3 software to the unit being added A certificate is a unique identifier of an individual managed appliance EVR1500 environmental monitors and generic appliances do not support certificates and may be added to multiple DSView 3 software systems IPv4 and IPv6 network protocols The DSView 3 software is a dual stack host that simultaneously supports both IPv4 and IPv6 network protocols For example the DSView 3 software can communicate with a DSR switch that has an IPv6 address and with an ACS console server that has an IPv4 address Several Avocent appliances support IPv6 including DSR switches ACS console servers Me
288. er will be a hub server or a spoke server If this is your first DSView 3 server installation hub should be selected in the Select DSView Server Role window The hub server should be installed before any spoke servers are added 18 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide What you will need If the computer will be a hub server you will need the license key obtained from Avocent and provide a username and password to use for initial log in If the computer will be a spoke server you will need to identify the associated hub server and provide the name password of the hub server s DSView 3 software administrator To configure the DSView 3 software 1 If you are configuring the DSView 3 software during the installation process you have already clicked Done in the Launch Default Browser window If you quit after installing the DSView 3 software installation process by closing the window select Start Programs Avocent DSView 3 DSView Software A security alert box will appear containing certificate information See Certificates on page 52 The Select DSView Server Role window opens e Click Hub to assign the dedicated server as the hub server then click Next Go to step 3 e Click Spoke to assign the dedicated server as a spoke server then click Next Go to step 8 The Type in Master License Key window opens Type the Avocent provided license key for the DSView 3 software hub server then click Next DSView 3 softwa
289. erational Status Detailed Operational Status Description Languages Appliance Type Vendor Description Administrative status on this server Valid values are DSView server not responding This value is valid only when a single plug in has been selected The DSView 3 software could not obtain plug in status on this server To examine server status click the System tab then DSView Server in the top navigation bar If you are on a hub server click Spoke Servers in the side navigation bar and then select the appropriate server If you are on a spoke server click Hub Server in the side navigation bar Replication needed The plug in has been added but replication is required before the plug in can be used Active The plug in is registered and operational Disabled The plug in has been disabled Not installed The plug in has not been added to this server If the DSView 3 software can obtain information from the status service about this plug in from other servers where it is installed the Name field will contain the plug in s name If the status service does not provide this information the Name field will contain the plug in s domain and ID Operational status on this server Valid values are Inactive The plug in is not running Active The plug in is running Initializing The plug in is starting up Shutting down The plug in is stopping Upgrading The plug in is in the upgr
290. erit window opens Select the groups to which the appliance will belong and click Add Attached target devices will inherit these group memberships Click Next For more information see Automatic Inheritance for Group Memberships and Properties on page 153 Or If you do not want to select groups at this time click Do not inherit group membership If one or more cascade switches are connected to the managed appliance the Configure Cascade Switches window will open a Select the type of cascade switch for each row from the menu in the Cascade Switch Type column b Optionally type a name for each row in the Name column c Iftwo or more rows of a multiuser cascade switch are discovered you can merge the rows by selecting the checkboxes of those rows and clicking Merge To undo the merge click the row of the merged switch and click Split For information about other methods for merging cascade switches see Topology Synchronization on page 146 d Click Next The Apply Configuration Template window opens If you want to apply a configuration template to the appliance select a template from the list and click Next Chapter 8 Adding and Deleting Units 133 Or If you do not want to apply a configuration template to the appliance select None and click Next NOTE For more information about configuration templates see Appliance Configuration Templates on page 155 8 Click Finish Adding a single embedded appliance
291. erties in the side navigation bar 3 Check the Allow user to set own SSH key checkbox 4 Click Save To specify an SSH key NOTE A user may access this procedure only if a DSView 3 software administrator has enabled it 1 Click the Profile tab Preferences will automatically be selected in the top navigation bar 2 Click Credentials in the side navigation bar then select SSH Key 3 Type the 1 256 character name of the file containing the public SSH key that was generated by a third party key generator or browse to the file location 4 Click Save An updated SSH Key window will open The SSH key file will be uploaded to the DSView 3 server for use in authenticating the user Enabling user credential caching User credential caching provides a single sign on method for accessing units supported by certain plug ins If enabled the credentials used to log in to the DSView 3 software are maintained in a secure internal cache A supported plug in such as the Virtualization plug in can retrieve these credentials to log in to connected units To enable user credential caching NOTE Only DSView 3 software administrators may access this procedure 1 Click the System tab 2 Click User Credential Properties in the side navigation bar 3 Check the Enable credential caching checkbox 4 Click Save Any currently logged in users must log out and log in again for their credentials to be cached Built in User Groups When a user ac
292. ervice The side navigation bar will change to include the name of the LDAP service at the top and below the name the information you may define 102 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 10 11 12 13 Click Connection in the side navigation bar The Authentication Service Connection Settings LDAP window will open Type a name in the Service Name field to change the name of the service that appears in the Name column of the User Authentication Services window Type the address of the LDAP host in dot notation format xxx xxx xxx xxx in the Host Address field Type the number of the port you wish to use for connecting to the LDAP host in the Port Number field Specify a Secure Socket Layer SSL Encryption mode e Click Do Not Use SSL to have authentication performed using unencrypted clear text instead of SSL encryption This method is the least secure and automatically sets the Port Number field to a default port number of 389 e Click Use SSL in Trust All Mode to use SSL encryption for data transmission All server certificates will be trusted and automatically accepted by the DSView 3 software for transmitting data This SSL method provides medium security and automatically sets the Port Number field to a default port number of 636 This encryption mode is not recommended for wide area networks WANs e Click Use SSL in Certificate based Trust Mode to use SSL encryption for data transmission The DSView 3 so
293. escription of certificate types and procedures to manage certificate policy and the system trust store Security alerts The DSView 3 software uses SSL Secure Sockets Layer to securely communicate between the DSView 3 software hub server and DSView 3 software clients SSL provides secure authentication using certificates which is data that identifies the PC with which communication will occur A certificate is typically verified by another certificate from a trusted certificate authority When the DSView 3 software is initially installed it generates a self signed certificate for use with DSView 3 software clients To replace this a DSView 3 software administrator may create a Certificate Signing Request CSR to submit to a trusted third party Certificate Authority CA for signature The administrator may then replace the generated certificate with the new one If the generated certificate is not replaced the web browser will prompt a user whether to trust the generated certificate when a DSView 3 software client session is started Three tests are performed on a certificate each time a DSView 3 software client connects to the DSView 3 software hub server e Does the client web browser trust the certificate issuer 68 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Has the certificate expired Does the name on the DSView 3 server certificate match the name the DSView 3 software client used to access the DSView 3 server A Security Ale
294. ess rights that allow a user to perform specific actions See User Groups on page 275 264 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide The preemption level for interrupting or disconnecting serial or KVM sessions See Preemption Levels on page 46 You must have DSView 3 software administrator or user administrator rights to add a user To add a user account 1 2 Click the Users tab Click Add The Add User Account Wizard will appear The Select Authentication Service window will open This window lists the DSView 3 software internal service and all the external authentication services that have been added which may be used to authenticate users when they log in See Authentication Services on page 87 Select an authentication service and then click Next e Ifyou selected DSView Internal go to step 4 e Ifyou selected any other authentication service go to step 5 The Type in User Credentials window will open a Type a username password and confirm the password of the user you are adding Usernames may contain up to 256 non case sensitive characters if a RADIUS external authentication service will be used the limit is 253 characters Usernames are case preserving For example if an account named JDoe is created it will be saved as JDoe in the DSView 3 server but a user may log in as JDoe jdoe JDOe and so on Passwords may contain 3 64 characters Passwords will never expire unless User must change password at next log
295. essful window will open Or Chapter 6 Authentication Services 109 If you selected any other option the Specify TACACS Server Group Authorization Settings window will open a In the Service field type the appropriate TACACS service If you selected the privilege level attribute method in step 8 the default value shell will appear in the field by default If you selected the group name custom attribute method in step 8 the default value raccess will appear in the field by default b Ifthe TACACS service requires a protocol for authorization requests type the protocol in the Protocol field c Inthe Attribute Name field type the attribute name that the DSView 3 server will receive after an authorization request If you selected the privilege level attribute method in step 8 the default value priv lvl will appear by default If you selected the group name custom attribute method in step 8 the default value group_name will appear by default NOTE The Cyclades ACS advanced console server uses the service raccess and the attribute group_name for TACACS group implementation 10 11 Click Next If the external authentication service is added successfully the Completed Successful window will open Click Finish The User Authentication Services window will open with the new service listed To change settings for the TACACS external authentication service 1 25 Click the Users tab Cl
296. ession will start in a Video Viewer window or a serial session will start in a Telnet Viewer window depending on the supported action for the managed appliance If the required ActiveX control could not be loaded a red X will appear in the Avocent Session Viewer message box The ActiveX control may fail to load for one of the following reasons The user did not select Always trust content from Avocent Huntsville Corporation e The DSView 3 software client security zone settings are not correct e The ActiveX control failed to properly install To download an ActiveX control on a DSView 3 software hub server using Windows XP with Service Pack 2 1 3 In a Units View window that contains target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the link in the Action field or select an alternate action if available You can also access a Unit Overview window for a target device and click the icon or link for the session type see Unit Overview Windows on page 125 If this is the first time the ActiveX control has been requested by the DSView 3 software an Avocent Session Viewer message box will appear Click in the top yellow bar A pop up menu will appear Click Install A Security Warning dialog box will appear Click Jnstall to install the ActiveX control Security zones Internet Explorer restricts actions performed by the web browser based on the security zone membership of the web site being accessed Each
297. ete button You are prompted to confirm the deletion Confirm or cancel the deletion Click Close To copy a macro group 1 7 Select Macros Configure Macro Groups from the Video Viewer menu or click the Macro Groups button The Macro Groups dialog box appears Select one of the following All displays both personal and global macros Personal displays only personal macros or Global displays only global macros Select the desired macro group from the Defined Groups list and then click Copy The Copy Macro Group dialog box will appear Type a 1 32 character name in the Name of copied macro group field Select whether you wish to make the copied macro group a personal or global macro from the Macro Type area Click OK to copy the macro group The Copy Macro Group dialog box is closed and the copied macro group will appear in the Macro Groups dialog box Click Close To change the macro group to be displayed in the Macros menu 1 Select Macros Configure Macro Groups from the Video Viewer menu or click the Macro Groups button The Macro Groups dialog box appears Select one of the following All displays both personal and global macro groups Personal displays only personal macro groups or Global displays only global macro groups Select the macro group to be displayed from the Defined Groups list box Select Display on Menu 320 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 5 Click Close to exit
298. eted when the replication task is run On a spoke server you may enable a replication task property that forces the spoke server to retrieve a snapshot of the hub database rather than synchronizing changes back and forth The snapshot is a copy of the hub at the time of the operation This feature is not normally used it is intended to help recover a system when replication has failed To display replication results and or change the replication schedule for a spoke server 1 On the spoke server click the System tab 2 Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open 3 Select the Database Replication task The Task Results Database Replication window will open This window contains the results of the most recent replication 4 To display or change the replication schedule click Schedule in the side navigation bar The Task Schedule Database Replication window will open By default the replication task runs every 12 hours You may change the schedule type start time date and interval 5 To force the spoke server to retrieve a snapshot of the hub database rather than synchronizing changes click Properties in the side navigation bar and then click the Perform a hub database snapshot the next time this task executes checkbox This setting will be reset to unchecked after the operation completes 6 Ifyou made any changes click Save and then Close You may also display the replication schedule from the hub se
299. etween components and to uniquely identify components in the system System certificate and SSH key The DSView 3 software system generates and manages a system certificate and SSH key The system certificate or SSH key may be exported to a local directory the certificate s public key may then be used to validate the signature of data log files See Verifving data log file digital signatures on page 221 To view or export the system certificate or SSH key 1 2 3 Click the System tab Click Global Properties in the top navigation bar In the side navigation bar click X 509 Certificates and then click System Certificate The System Certificate window will open To export the system certificate in PEM format to a local directory click Export Certificate A pop up window will open The content of this window is browser dependent but it will usually prompt you to confirm the export operation Confirm or cancel Or To export the SSH key in PUB format to a local directory click Export SSH Key A pop up window will open The content of this window is browser dependent but it will usually prompt you to confirm the export operation Confirm or cancel Server certificates A DSView 3 server certificate Uniquely identifies the DSView 3 server to DSView 3 software clients connecting to the server using web browsers Uniquely identifies the DSView 3 server to other DSView 3 servers in the system and provides for secure tran
300. ew 3 pth DSView 3 Software Client sO TOP aoe HTTPS yon ra aD GEN _ TCP IP Port 389 Talk LDAPIAD No SSL 4 m r TCP IP Port B36 g LDAPIAD lt Sa A UDP Part 58 AD Kerberas Zek UDP Por 1842 2 RADIUS TEPIP Port 49 External j TACACS Authentication usa Server Optional TCP IP Port 139 NT Figure B 6 External Authentication Server Ports SNMP ports A supported KVM switch or serial console appliance may be configured to send SNMP traps to the DSView 3 server in addition to an external SNMP manager DSView 3 Server KVM Switch or Senal Console Appliance UDP Part 162 414 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Figure B 7 Ports Used by SNMP No External SNMP Manager If an external SNMP manager has been added to your DSView 3 software system communication occurs between the SNMP manager and the KVM switch or serial console appliance as shown in Figure B 8 a SNMP Manager Optional i TORN KVM Switch or em TT Fen Serial Console Appliance l TCP IP Porti Figure B 8 Ports Used by SNMP with External SNMP Manager Appendices 415 Appendix C DSR Remote Operations Software NOTE The DSR Remote Operations software is supported only on the following DSR switches DSR1020 1021 1022 1024 1030 1031 2020 2030 2035 4020 4030 8020 8030 and 8035 switches The DSR Remote Operations software provides a subset of DSView 3
301. ew 3 software backup utility When a data log file is created a companion signature file with the same name is created but with a sig file name extension This file is digitally signed using the DSView 3 software private key When a user wants to display the content of a data log file the DSView 3 software will first verify the digital signature to ensure the file has not been altered You may also export the DSView 3 system X 509 certificate and use its public key to validate the signature of files using external tools See System certificate and SSH key on page 52 Data log licenses A data log license is used for each enabled data log port connection A direct SSH Telnet session to an appliance will not require or use a data log license for the DSView 3 software to capture data logs for that appliance session Only sessions related to appliance ports require a data log license A data log license is used when data logging is enabled on a port connection When data logging is disabled on a port connection that license is freed and returned to the available pool The DSView 3 software ships with 32 available data log licenses that is 32 data logging sessions may be enabled on appliance connections that support data logging An add on license key may be obtained to support a certain number of additional data logging sessions or an unlimited number of data logging sessions site license See Licenses on page 60 for more information C
302. ext from the menu or Click the Copy Text icon in the toolbar or Right click and select Copy Text from the pop up menu Chapter 20 Using the Telnet Viewer 345 The highlighted text will be copied to the system clipboard You may then paste the clipboard contents into a Telnet Viewer session or into another application To paste system clipboard contents 1 Place textual data on the system clipboard using a text editor or other application 2 Initiate a Telnet Viewer session 3 At the point where you wish to paste the clipboard contents select Options Paste from the menu or click the Paste icon in the toolbar To print a Telnet Viewer window screen 1 Select Options Print Screen from the menu or click the Print Screen icon in the toolbar 2 The operating system s print dialog box appears Make the appropriate settings The screen contents will then be sent to the printer Power Control of Devices Attached to Power Devices NOTE Auser must have DSView 3 software administrator privileges to control the power of a target device If a target device attached to an appliance port is connected to a power device outlet and the target device has been accessed in a serial session you may power up power down or cycle power down and then power up the target device using the Power Control dialog box NOTE This operation is valid only during serial sessions The Options Power menu option will not be available if the
303. f extracting zip file from the Avocent web site NOTE If you are upgrading the DSView 3 software from a previous version it is strongly recommended that you perform a database synchronization between the hub and spoke servers see Replication on page 84 You should also back up the hub server prior to upgrading the DSView 3 software see Backing up and Restoring Hub Servers Manually on page 77 Failure to perform synchronization and backup may have detrimental effects A backup should be performed both before the upgrade and immediately following the upgrade To install the DSView 3 software on a supported Windows system 1 2 Log on to the dedicated server as Administrator To install from a DVD a Insert the DSView 3 software DVD An autorun file opens a menu of installation options Click Install DSView 3 Software Or If autorun is not enabled type lt drive gt DSView win32 setup exe where lt drive gt is the letter of your DVD drive A dialog box will indicate that the server will be verified to ensure it meets the minimum requirements for installing the DSView 3 software To install from a downloaded file a Using your web browser download the DSView 3 software from the Avocent web site Go to www avocent com and click the Support link On the Technical Support page click the Product Upgrades link then select DS Software Upgrades Double click on the downloaded installation package setup exe A dialo
304. f four each Reviewing Session Data During a Telnet Viewer session you may review the accumulated screen contents by using the scroll bar or the Arrow keys To return to the current session location press Enter The size of the buffer containing session data that can be reviewed is configurable You may optionally choose to change the color of the text and or the background when you are reviewing session data When you retum to the current session location the colors will return to those specified in the Telnet Viewer s configuration see Customizing the Telnet Viewer on page 331 While you are reviewing collected data new incoming data is buffered but it will not be displayed until you return to the current session location You may not enter outgoing data To change the maximum number of lines in the session buffer 1 Select Options Session Properties from the menu or click the Session Settings icon in the toolbar The Session Properties dialog box will appear 2 Click the Terminal tab 3 In the History Buffer Size box type a value from 1 1000 The default value is 256 To change the background and or text color when reviewing session data 1 Select Options Preferences from the menu The Preferences dialog box will appear Chapter 20 Using the Telnet Viewer 337 2 To change the background color click the Background History Mode box in the Colors section and select a color The default color is blue 3 To change
305. f the current user s At this point you may request to share access to the port with the current user s You may be presented with one or more of the following options Actively share a connection When you are prompted to share a connection and you click Share with the other user but do not click Passive Share an active connection will be established When sharing access to a port actively all users may monitor the port and take control if no other user is currently active When you click OK the primary user who is currently active will receive a request to allow sharing unless Allow shared connections automatically has been enabled see Video Viewer session properties on page 290 If the user confirms then you will be given active access to the port Passively share a connection When you are prompted to share a connection and you click Share with the other user and also click Passive Share a passive connection will be established When sharing access to a port passively you may only view what occurs on the target device without controlling the keyboard or mouse When you click OK the primary user who is currently active will receive a request to allow sharing unless Allow shared connections automatically has been enabled see Video Viewer session properties on page 290 If the user confirms then you will be given passive access to the port Preempt a user s connection DSView 3 software administrators and user administrat
306. f the DSView 3 server host in the address bar of a web browser 2 Enter a valid username and password in the fields provided Chapter 16 DS Zones 251 3 Specify the highest level zone for which you have access rights by typing the zone in the Zone field Or Specify the highest level zone for which you have access rights by selecting a zone name from the Zone menu NOTE If you do not specify a zone DSView 3 software attempts to log you in to the top level zone If you do not have access rights to the top level zone the login attempt fails 4 Click Login To switch zones Click the System tab then click Zones The Zones window opens and lists all created zones Select the checkbox next to the zone to which you want to switch and click Switch Or In the top left corner of the window your username and the active zone list is displayed Click the name of the zone to open a pop up menu then select the zone to which you want to switch Transferring units to a zone You can transfer managed appliances blade chassis hypervisor managers or hypervisor servers to zones for which you have access rights All associated target devices are transferred with the unit and any merged target device connections are split You cannot independently move a target device NOTE If you are transferring units that require licenses such as a VMware ESX Server the zone to which you are moving the units must be assigned the appropriate licenses
307. f the external authentication service is added successfully the Completed Successful window will open Click Finish The User Authentication Services window will open with the new service listed To change settings for the RADIUS external authentication service 1 2 Click the Users tab Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open Click the name of the RADIUS service The side navigation bar will change to include the name of the RADIUS service at the top and below the name the information you may define Click Connection in the side navigation bar The Authentication Service Connection Settings RADIUS window will open a Type a 1 64 character name for the RADIUS authentication service b Type the address of the RADIUS host in dot notation format xxx xxx xxx xxx or type the DNS host name in the Server Address field c Type the number of the port from 1 65535 for connecting to the RADIUS host in the Port Number field The default is port 1812 d Click Save To change the authentication type and or shared secret click Settings in the side navigation bar The Authentication Service Authentication Settings RADIUS window will open a Select the authentication type from the Authentication Type menu PAP Password Authentication Protocol CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol default MS CHAP Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentic
308. ferent devices when the appliances are added to the DSView 3 software database For example a server may Chapter 9 Synchronizing the DSView 3 Software Database 147 have a serial console port connected to a serial console appliance which is used during the boot process The same server may also have a KVM connection to a KVM switch that is accessible after the server is up and running You may configure that target device to appear only once and the DSView 3 software will provide the valid Action choices for accessing the device Default target device names allowed for connection types If a target device has a default name you may indicate that it can be added to the DSView 3 software database only if it supports specific connection type s in the appliance for example KVM serial or power You may enable disable deleting target devices that no longer have connections from the DSView 3 software database You may enable or disable automatic topology synchronization You may also control topology synchronization manually by Enabling or disabling options when the Add Unit Wizard runs Enabling or disabling options when the Resync Wizard runs Initiating a target device or cascade switch merge operation from a Unit Overview window Initiate a target device merge operation from the Unit Tools window see Merging target devices on page 350 Initiating a cascade switch merge operation on two multiuser cascade switches in the same appli
309. first 15 characters or the last 15 characters 6 Ifyou want to prevent local users from configuring the DSR switch through the OSCAR interface select Disable Configuration under Local OSCAR Configuration 7 Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open 178 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To change modem port settings NOTE This procedure is valid for the following managed appliances DSR1020 1021 1022 1024 1030 2020 2030 2035 4020 4030 8020 8030 and 8035 switches 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the DSR switch name 2 Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar and then click Ports and then click Modems The Appliance Modem Settings window will open 3 Select Modem sessions can preempt digital sessions to enable a modem session to disconnect an existing Ethernet connection to the DSR switch 4 Type an authentication time out for the modem in the range of 30 300 seconds 5 Type an inactivity time out for the modem connection in the range of 1 60 minutes 6 Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open Local Account Settings This procedure is valid on KVM switches and serial console appliances that support local accounts Local accounts allow a user to log in to a managed appliance locally if it has a server configured as an authentication server You may assign the user administrator
310. for any additional ISO or floppy images you wish to add You may add any number of image files up to the limits imposed by memory but you may only have one virtual CD or virtual mass storage mapped concurrently If you attempt to map too many drives one CD and one mass storage device or too many drives of a particular type more than one CD or mass storage device a message will be displayed If you still wish to map a new drive you must first unmap an existing mapped drive then map the new drive After a physical drive or image is mapped it may be used on the target device To unmap a virtual media drive 1 In the Virtual Media dialog box uncheck the Mapped checkbox next to the drive you wish to unmap 2 You will be prompted to confirm Confirm or cancel the unmapping 3 Repeat for any additional virtual media drives you wish to unmap To display virtual media drive details In the Virtual Media dialog box click Details The dialog box expands to display the Details table Each row indicates e Target Drive Name used for the mapped drive such as Virtual CD 1 or Virtual CD 2 e Mapped to Identical to Drive information that appears in the Client View Drive column e Read Bytes and Write Bytes Amount of data transferred since the mapping e Duration Elapsed time since the drive was mapped To close the Details view click Details again To reset all USB devices on the target device NOTE The USB reset feature reset
311. formation for all target devices in the page click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list Click Operations then select Properties from the drop down menu The Multiple Unit Properties window will open Click Unit Overview Enter a new type for the target devices Select a new icon for the target devices using the arrows Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open If you added a type that was not previously defined it will appear under Target Devices in the side navigation bar To change the identity properties for a unit NOTE Identity properties are visual representations only Defining incorrect information may cause confusion for example mistyping a serial number 1 3 In a Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance or target device name Click Properties in the side navigation bar The Unit Identification Properties window will open To change information type a part number serial number model number and or asset tag number Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open To change the location properties for a unit NOTE Location properties are visual representations only Defining incorrect information may cause confusion for example a mistyped room number 160 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 3 4 In a Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appl
312. ftware will approve the server and then the certificate before transmitting data This SSL method provides maximum security and automatically sets the Port Number field to a default port number of 636 Click Save to save your changes If you selected Use SSL in Certificate based Trust Mode the Certificates heading will appear in the side navigation bar Go to step 8 If you selected Do Not Use SSL or Use SSL in Trust All Mode go to step 15 Click Certificates The Authentication Service Certificate Management LDAP window will open and list all servers that belong to the domain A status of Trusted indicates the certificate is trusted based on the certificate policy see System certificate policy and trust store on page 53 Untrusted indicates the certificate cannot be trusted To register certificates click the checkbox to the left of the server IP address es To select all server IP addresses on the page click the checkbox to the left of the IP Address heading Click Register to register the certificates The Accept SSL Certificate window will appear Click Save to store the certificate values to the DSView 3 software database on the host 14 15 16 17 Chapter 6 Authentication Services 103 The Certificate Management window will open if only one certificate was selected If more than one certificate was selected each will appear in order in subsequent Accept SSL Certificate windows To unregister one or more certif
313. fving when to run tasks on page 364 then click Next 6 The Select Unit Group window will open Select 4 Appliances or select a unit group then click Next 7 The Select Appliance Type window will open Select the type of managed appliance for which to configure SNMP traps then click Next 8 The Select Appliances window will open Select one or more managed appliances from the Available Appliances list then click Add The unit s will be moved to the Appliances to Configure list Then click Next 9 The Configure SNMP Traps window will open Change the trap state by selecting one of the following from each trap menu then click Next e No Change uses the trap on off state already configured e Enable turns the trap on e Disable tums the trap off or Click one of the following buttons e No Change All uses the on off states already configured e Enable All turns all traps on e Disable All turns all traps off 10 Click Finish Task Power control a target device This task powers up powers down or cycles the power powers down and then powers up of one or more target devices Once this task is added you may run it on demand at any time see Running tasks manually on page 382 There are other ways to power control a target device see Power Control of Devices Attached to Power Devices on page 192 To add the task 1 Click the System tab 370 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 9 Click Tasks i
314. g a sub domain See To add an Active Directory external authentication service on page 90 for an explanation of the valid forms Specify a Secure Socket Layer SSL Encryption mode e Click Do Not Use SSL to have authentication performed using unencrypted clear text instead of SSL encryption This method is the least secure e Click Use SSL in Trust All Mode to use SSL encryption for data transmission All server certificates will be trusted and automatically accepted by the DSView 3 software for transmitting data This SSL method provides medium security This encryption mode is not recommended for wide area networks WANs e Click Use SSL in Certificate based Trust Mode to use SSL encryption for data transmission The DSView 3 software will approve the server and then the certificate before transmitting data This SSL method provides maximum security Click Use Kerberos for User Authentication to use the Kerberos protocol for authentication requests including the browsing If enabled you must use DES encryption types for this account If an account was created prior to Active Directory the user s password must be 11 12 13 14 Chapter 6 Authentication Services 95 changed after this setting is changed In addition the Active Directory server addresses must be resolvable to their host names via DNS When this is not checked the LDAP protocol will be used Click Enable Chasing of Referrals to allow the Active Dire
315. g box will indicate that the server will be verified to ensure it meets the minimum requirements for installing the DSView 3 management software If the current or an earlier version of the DSView 3 software is already installed the Installed Product Found Same Version message box will appear Click OK to reinstall the DSView 3 software or Cancel to exit setup 14 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 4 The Check for an UPDATED version window will open If the DSView 3 software is already installed on the dedicated server a message box will display Click OK to close the box a b Click Next to reinstall the software or click Cancel to stop the reinstallation Click Check for UPDATES and then click Next to check the Avocent web site for the most recent DSView 3 software installation package Go to step 5 Or Click Next to install the DVD or downloaded version of the DSView 3 software Go to step 6 5 Ifa newer version of the DSView 3 software is found an Update Available message appears a Click OK to download the latest DSView 3 software installation package The installation will be cancelled and the server s default web browser will launch and open in the Product Upgrades and Options page of the Avocent web site or Click Cancel to resume installation of the older version of the DSView 3 software Go to step 6 Type your email address and password and then click Submit to log in to the web site
316. g the Linux or Unix SSH command enter a command in the following format lt username gt lt appliance name gt lt host name or IP address of DSView 3 server gt For example a command to open an SSH session to an appliance console may look like this ssh p 4122 zonel jsmith zone2 ACS Lab 172 30 19 101 NOTE The colon is used to delimit different arguments however if a colon is contained within the name then a double backslash may be used as an escape sequence to include the colon in the name For example if the username is sanders a command to open an SSH session to a target device may look like this ssh p 4122 zonel sanders zone2 Boston 5 172 26 5 100 2 If a user SSH key has been configured the session is automatically authenticated based on the key The user SSH key must be stored on the DSView 3 server specified in See To connect to a target device or appliance console open your SSH client and enter the following values in the provided text fields on page 226 Or When prompted enter the password for the username If you enter an incorrect password three times the login failed event will be generated and the SSH session will be closed The user credentials for the target device are validated by the DSView 3 server If the user is valid the DSView 3 software database determines the IP address of the appliance and the X 509 certificate for establishing the connection If the user is invalid the session
317. g the Remove Objects command See the Internet Explorer documentation for more information To close a DSView 3 software session From the DSView 3 Explorer click LOGOUT or the logout icon Java Installation On non Windows clients the Video Viewer Telnet and VNC Viewers require Java version 1 5 The Telnet SSH applet may work with other versions the Video Viewer requires that version On Windows clients Java is required to run the Avocent Telnet SSH Viewer If the Win32 PuTTY Telnet SSH Viewer is selected in the user s profile then Java is not required on the client On a Windows client it is recommended that the JRE Java Runtime Environment be installed in the C Program Files location If your system automatically installs programs in another location you may not be able to launch the Video Viewer In this case you can configure Java to find the JRE To configure Java to find the JRE 1 Access the Java Control Panel Select the Java tab In the Java Application Runtime Settings panel click View Change the path to the installed JRE Click OK Se nale ME LA For Windows Linux and Solaris operating systems the DSView 3 software client automatically downloads and installs the JRE the first time it is needed For Macintosh operating systems you must update Java and install the JRE using the Macintosh software updates Refer to the Macintosh operating system documentation for more information To install the JRE on a
318. g the Tasks window The following fields may be displayed in the Tasks window Use the Customize link to add or remove fields in the display See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 Runs On Server s on which the task will run Next Run Next date and time on which the task is scheduled to run This field will be blank for a task scheduled on a remote DSView 3 server e Last Run Date and time of the last run of the task This field will be blank for a task scheduled on a remote DSView 3 server e Schedule How often and when the task is scheduled e Status Status of a task An icon in the Name column also indicates the task status Table 22 1 Task Status Icons Icon Task f lay Idle Taskis not currently running 364 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Icon Task vi Running Taskis currently running vi Stopping Task has run but has not completely stopped _ x Disabled Task was prevented from executing Remote Task is scheduled on a remote DSView 3 server Adding tasks You may use the Add Task Wizard to run the following tasks Backup the DSView 3 software database and system files Configure SNMP trap settings on appliance Control power of target devices Export event log to comma separated values csv file Migrate units configures and upgrades DSView 2 x or AlterPath Manager software units Send IPMI chassis control command to target devices Test modem connections to selected u
319. g the Upgrade Firmware wizard see Upgrading firmware on page 358 e Using the Task wizard see Task Updating the firmware of an appliance type on page 377 e In the Select Task to Add window select Upgrade firmware of selected units e In the Select Unit Type window you may select by product family Cyclades Power Devices or unit type specific power device types If multiple power devices are installed in a daisy chain configuration the most remote power device will be upgraded first Power Device Input Feed The ability to display and change power device input feed information is currently supported on Avocent SPC power control devices Server Technology power devices and Cyclades PM Intelligent Power Distribution Units IPDU 190 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To display power device input feed information 1 In a Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar click Ports and then Power device in the side navigation bar The Power Devices Attached to Appliance window will open For DSR switches that have two SPC ports one row will appear for each power device Click on the name of a power device Click Input Feeds in the side navigation bar The Power Device Input Feeds window will open Customizing the Power Device Input Feeds window The following fields may be displayed in
320. ge 116 138 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To add a power device see Power Devices on page 187 To add BMCs see the DSI5100 Operations for the DSView 3 Software Technical Bulletin available on the Avocent web site To add a target device 1 Ina Units View window containing target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click Add If you are in a target device view window the Add Target Device Wizard will open If you are in a mixed view window the Add Unit Wizard will open 2 Ifyou were in a mixed view window when you clicked Add the Select Add Unit Procedure window will open Click Add a single target device Click Next If you were in a target device view window when you clicked Add go to the next step 3 The Type in Device Settings window will open where you may enter optional information name address or fully qualified domain name Telnet port and web browser URL 4 Click Finish Deleting Units When you delete a unit it is removed from the DSView 3 software database and all associated connections will also be deleted You may also choose to delete target devices that are no longer connected when you run the Resync Wizard see Topology synchronization options in the Resync Wizard on page 149 To delete a power device see Power Devices on page 187 To delete a unit 1 Ina Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the checkbox next to the unit name
321. ged appliance authentication 1 3 In a Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar and then click Authentication Servers The Appliance Authentication Servers Settings window will open To change information type an IP address in standard dot notation xxx xxx xxx xxx for up to four DSView 3 servers the managed appliance will use for authentication Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open To display version information for one or more managed appliances from a Units View window 1 In a Units View window containing appliances see 4ccessing Units Yiew windows on page 118 click the checkbox next to the unit s To display information about all units in the page click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list Click Operations then select Show Versions from the drop down menu A Multiple Unit Operation window will open containing a link to view results see Multiple unit operations from a Units View window on page 124 168 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide The results window includes the unit name type and when the version information retrieval began The Appliance Version field will contain the main firmware version if a unit did not or cannot report a firmware version dashes are displayed The Boot Version field contains the boot firmware vers
322. get devices that no longer have connections will be permanently deleted from the DSView 3 software database 7 Ifyou enable the Add a target device to new connections checkbox a target device in the appliance will be added to a new unit appliance power device or cascade switch connection in the DSView 3 software database If you disable this checkbox the target device in the appliance will not be added automatically to a new unit connection in the DSView 3 software database However you can add it manually see Topology view on page 116 8 Ifyou enable the Allow target devices that contain default names to be added for these type of connections checkbox you may then enable one or more connection type checkboxes Any target devices that contain default names in the appliance will be added to the DSView 3 software database only if the connection type in the appliance matches an enabled connection type in this window 9 Click Save Topology synchronization options in the Add Unit Wizard The Select Options window in the Add Unit Wizard allows you to specify the access mode and certain topology synchronization options e Enable disable secure mode e Merge target device names e Default target names allowed for connection types This window is described in Adding Units on page 129 Each of these options has a default value which you may change To change the default values of the options in the Add Unit Wizard 1 Click the System
323. ght group for a zone specified users in this zone and sublevel zones can perform the associated actions The next layers of access rights are user groups and users Within a zone you can assign specific access rights to user groups For example for a zone with Firmware Management allowed you could choose to only allow the administrative user group to manage firmware and prevent other user groups from managing firmware by restricting the group access rights To further control user access rights you can also assign access rights to individual users An administrative user in the top level zone is considered a super user and can manage access rights for any user in any zone Administrative users in sublevel zones with appropriate access rights can manage user access rights for their zone and other zones for which they have access When enabled for a zone these access right groups permit qualified users to perform the following actions e Zone Management Create zones and modify zone properties from the System Zones window Users with access rights can also switch to other zones e User and User Groups Management Add or delete users and user groups and perform other user and user group management operations from the Users tab e Unit and Unit Groups Management Add or delete units and unit groups and perform other unit and unit group management operations from the Units tab e File Management Add or delete appliance files from the
324. ghts in the side navigation bar and then Port Select the ports in the Available list and then click Add The selected ports will be moved to the Assigned list e To change local user account access by group click Access Rights in the side navigation bar and then Group Select the groups in the Available list and then click Add The selected groups will be moved to the Assigned list 6 Click Save and then click Close The Appliance Local User Accounts window will open Embedded Units The IBM ASM RSA II and the DRAC 4 embedded units have one target port and one appliance for each embedded appliance The NEC IPF embedded unit has nine target ports and one appliance for each embedded appliance Port names default to Blade plus the port number The HP iLO embedded unit has one target device In the DSView 3 software each of these appliance types will contain specific information about the target as well as the embedded appliance itself All KVM connections are initiated through the target port device After an embedded appliance type is added to the DSView 3 software an appliance type is added under the Appliances link in the side navigation bar 182 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Updating firmware changing device settings and rebooting embedded units must be done manually See the embedded unit documentation for further information Launching embedded unit sessions From the Target Devices window users may launch
325. hange To change the default values of the options in the Resyne Wizard 1 D SL iN Click the System tab Click Global Properties in the top navigation bar Click Wizard Defaults in the side navigation bar then click Resync Wizard The Resyne Wizard Default Options window will open e Ifyou enable the Remove offline connections checkbox by default any appliance connections that are reported as offline in the appliance will be deleted from the DSView 3 software database The Resync Wizard does not add offline connections to the DSView 3 software database 150 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 5 If you enable the Delete target devices that no longer have connections checkbox by default any target devices that no longer have connections are permanently deleted from the DSView 3 software database If you enable the Allow target devices with the same name to be merged into a single target device checkbox by default the connection to a target device in the appliance will be merged with the connection s to an existing target device in the DSView 3 software database If a target device has a default name you may indicate that by default it can be added to the DSView 3 software database only if it supports specific connection type s in the appliance Enable the checkboxes for the specific connection types Click Save Merging target devices Merging target devices may be necessary if a target device is connected
326. hange information e Inthe Appliance Name field type a 1 64 character appliance name The name is not case sensitive In the Port field type a TCP port number in the range 0 65535 where the appliance will listen Inthe Usemame field type a 1 64 character username to be used to log in to the embedded appliance Usernames are case sensitive e In the Password field type a 1 64 character password to be used to log in to the embedded appliance Passwords are case sensitive Click Save and then click Close To change login credentials for an NEC IPF embedded appliance 1 2 3 Click the Units tab Click Appliances in the side navigation bar Click the embedded appliance name 184 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Click the Credentials link in the side navigation bar and then click Credentials in the side navigation bar The NEC IPF Settings window will open To change information In the Name field type a 1 64 character appliance name The name is not case sensitive In the Usemame field type a 1 64 character username to be used to log in to the embedded appliance Usernames are case sensitive In the Password field type a 1 64 character password to be used to log in to the embedded appliance Passwords are case sensitive Click Save and then click Close Asset and Usage Reports You can view Asset and Usage reports as a pie chart bar chart or table by clicking the appropriate button If multiple
327. he DSView 3 management software valid only when the DSView 3 software is installed on supported Windows systems Import data in an XML format into the DSView 3 software database To display the Units Tools window 1 Click the Units tab 2 Click Tools in the side navigation bar The Unit Tools window will open Exporting units The Export Units tool will export information about units into a csv file Unit names are always exported The following unit properties may be selected for export Action default action Primary contact phone Browser URL Secondary contact Custom field 1 3 Secondary contact phone Department Serial number DSView server name Site IP address Status at time of export 348 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Location Telnet port Model number Type Part number Visibility show or hide Primary contact You may also export a topology report regardless of any properties selected for export A topology report contains the following columns Port target devices or cascade switches only Port number on the appliance to which the target device or cascade switch is connected Type managed appliances only Appliance type if known Level Level of connection from the appliance A managed appliance is level 0 A target device attached to a managed appliance is 1 and so on The output csv file may be viewed in a text editor or spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel To export units
328. he DSView 3 software system enable the Browse for an Existing Target Device radio button The Browse for an Existing Target Device window will open listing all target devices or the first 2000 sorted alphabetically To tailor the list enter a valid filter string and click Filter Select a target device from the list and then click Next The Completed Successful window will open Click Finish Accessing Units View windows To enable a topology view in a Units View window click Topology see Topology view on page 116 To access Units View windows Click the Units tab To display target devices a Click Target Devices in the side navigation bar The Target Devices All window will open This window lists all target devices in the system b Click one of the target device type links if available in the side navigation bar Target device types are user defined If a type has been assigned to a target device the Chapter 7 Units View Windows 119 type name will appear under Target Devices in the side navigation bar For example if you assign a type of Windows 2000 to three target devices a Windows 2000 link will appear in the side navigation bar Clicking on the link will display the three target devices as well as any other target devices assigned that type To display managed appliances a Click Appliances in the side navigation bar The Appliances All window will open b To display an Appliance Type window
329. he LDAP external authentication service F 2 Click the Users tab Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open Click the name of the LDAP service The side navigation bar will change to include the name of the LDAP service at the top and below the name the information you may define 104 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 9 Click Schema in the side navigation bar and then click Groups The Authentication Service Group Schema LDAP window will open Type the Base distinguished name DN from which to begin searches This is a required field unless the Directory Service has been configured to allow anonymous search Type the object class The default value is groupOfNames Type the members attribute The default value is member Type the username member attribute only the username not the full LDAP object DN The user s group membership will be located using this attribute in addition to the member attribute This attribute is primarily used with NIS like schemas Click Save and then click Close The User Authentication Services dialog box will appear To change user browsing settings for the LDAP external authentication service 1 2 6 Click the Users tab Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open Click the name of the LDAP service The side navigation bar will change to
330. he changes When changing the network settings ensure that a port mismatch does not occur between the hub server and the spoke server 1 2 On the hub server click the System tab Click DSView Server in the top navigation bar The side navigation bar will include the name of the server to which you are logged in Click Properties in the side navigation bar and then click Spoke Servers The Spoke Servers window will open Click on the name of the spoke server whose network properties you wish to change The Spoke Server Network Properties window will open Change any of the following network settings e Type a new computer name to use as the spoke server Chapter 5 DSView 3 Servers 83 e Type a new address in standard dot notation xxx xxx xxx xxx for the spoke server e Type a new port number for the spoke server 6 Click Save and then click Close The Spoke Servers window will open To delete a spoke server 1 On the hub server click the System tab 2 Click DSView Server in the top navigation bar The side navigation bar will include the name of the server to which you are logged in 3 Click Properties in the side navigation bar and then click Spoke Servers The Spoke Servers window will open 4 Click the checkbox to the left of the spoke servers you wish to delete To delete all spoke servers click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list 5 Click Delete A confirmation dialog box will appear
331. he data log Or If you do not have access rights or if a data log was not created an error message is displayed Supported service processor commands NOTE SSH Passthrough port sharing is not supported if a server processor command is included at the end of the SSH command When opening an SSH Passthrough session to a target device connected to a supported MergePoint manager you may include a service processor SP command at the end of the SSH command If the SP command is not present at the end of the SSH command the appliance may provide the user with a menu of SP commands to choose from To include an SP command open your SSH client and enter a command in the following format 232 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide lt username gt lt target device name gt lt host name or IP address of the DSView 3 server gt spcommand NOTE Enter a space between lt host name or IP address of the DSView 3 server gt and spcommand The first part of the command will establish an SSH session to the MergePoint SP manager If a supported SP command is present at the end of the SSH command the SP command will be passed through to the service processor on the appliance The appliance will validate and execute the command For example a command to open an SSH session to a MergePoint SP manager and execute an SP command may look like this ssh p 4122 zonel jsmith zone2 MGP 172 30 19 122 poweron For more information and a list
332. he data log file and creates a signature file with the name cisco router session 2006 04 02 12 12 01 sig e The DSView 3 software system certificate has been exported with the name sun jdoe p10 The OpenSSL command to verify the signature and a successful response is 222 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide c gt openssl dgst shal verify sun jdoe pl10 signature cisco router session 2006 04 02 12 12 01 sig cisco router session 2006 04 02 12 12 01 txt c gt Verification OK 223 SSH Passthrough Sessions An SSH Passthrough session is a serial session opened to a unit without the use of a web browser From an SSH client a user with access rights can establish a connection to any serial unit managed by the DSView 3 software that supports Secure Shell 2 SSH2 and Avocent DS Authentication 2 Protocol ADSAP2 protocol The DSView 3 server provides user authentication and if events are enabled logs SSH Passthrough session events You can also share SSH Passthrough sessions with multiple users across multiple DSView 3 servers Serial sessions initiated from the DSView 3 client software may also be shared if the Avocent Session Viewer is preconfigured as the serial viewer Shared serial sessions provide server redundancy If a DSView 3 server is no longer available a user may establish an SSH Passthrough session to a different DSView 3 server Client licenses A client license is required for each user operating SSH Passthr
333. he target device name will be pushed to the appliance If the target device for the serial port in the DSView 3 software database has multiple appliance connections the target device name will be pushed to the appliance for each appliance connection for connection type s enabled in the Automatic Name Push Properties window The power device name in the DSView 3 software database will be pushed to the appliance If the target device for the power device socket in the DSView 3 software database has a single appliance connection the target device name will be pushed to the appliance If the target device for the power device socket in the DSView 3 software database has multiple appliance connections the target device name will be pushed to each appliance for each appliance connection for connection type s enabled in the Automatic Name Push Properties window If the target device in the DSView 3 software database has a single appliance connection the target device name will be pushed to the appliance If the target device in the DSView 3 software database has multiple appliance connections the target device name will be pushed to the appliance for each appliance connection for connection type s enabled in the Automatic Name Push Properties window If the cascade switch in the DSView 3 software database has a single appliance connection the name will be pulled from the appliance to update the cascade switch name in the DSView 3 software d
334. he up and down arrows to move the selected target devices up or down in the listing Once the order has been specified select Merge missing properties to the target device based on the order of the devices in the Target Devices to Merge list The merged target devices will contain the name of the first target device in the Target Device to Merge list For example if you are merging two target devices named TD1 and TD2 and TD2 is listed before TD1 the merged target device will be named TD2 Click Next The Confirm Target Device Merge window will open Click Next to confirm merging the connection paths into the specified destination target device See Connections to Units on page 207 The Completed Successful window will open Click Finish To merge target devices from a Units View window 1 In a Units View window containing target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 select the checkbox next to the target devices that you want to merge From the Operations menu select Merge Target Devices The Merge Target Devices window opens Select the target devices to be merged from the Available Targets list The merged target devices will contain the name of the first target device in the Target Device to Merge list For example if you are merging two target devices named TD1 and TD2 and TD2 is listed before TD1 the merged target device will be named TD2 The Connection Path s list displays the appliance and
335. hines from the DSView 3 software Supported unit types include VMware VirtualCenters ESX Servers and virtual machines as well as Citrix XenServers and virtual machines You can launch a Virtual Network Computing VNC Remote Desktop RDP Secure Shell 2 SSH or VMware viewer session to supported virtual machines from a single point of access For more information see the Virtualization plug in documentation Licenses may be required see your Avocent representative or www avocent com for more information Blade chassis The DSView 3 software plug in for Blade Chassis allows you to access multi vendor blade chassis and blades from the DSView 3 software You can launch a KVM session to any managed blade from a single point of access For a list of supported blade chassis and other information see the Blade Chassis plug in documentation Generic appliances Generic appliances manage data center devices such as routers These devices may be managed within a DSView 3 software system by launching a standard web browser to the device URL or by opening a Telnet session Chapter 1 Product Overview 7 Embedded units Using the DSView 3 software you may add delete configure display properties and launch video sessions to the following versions of third party embedded units IBM ASM Advanced System Management RSA II Remote Supervisor Adapter II Version 5 Build GRE132AUS DRAC 4 Dell Remote Access Controller Version
336. ht e Allow the access right is allowed for the user user group e Deny the access right is denied for the user user group e Inherit the access right is inherited from the unit group s to which the selected user user group belongs When Inherit is selected the Allow and Deny checkboxes will become gray and unchangeable and indicate the inherited value If the inherited settings indicated both Allow and Deny the inherited value is Deny which takes precedence To disable the inherit functionality uncheck the Inherit checkbox If none of the checkboxes are checked the access right is neither allowed nor denied If the unit group contains both appliances and target devices all rights will be displayed and may be enabled even though they may not necessarily be valid for the unit Repeat the preceding steps to change access rights for other users or user groups Click Save and then click Close If a connection or power control action is enabled the appropriate link will appear in the Action column of Units Views windows containing that group or units in that group 248 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 249 corre ce DS Zones DS Zones provide virtual segregation of data center resources including appliances target devices and virtual machines Each zone operates as an independent subset of the DSView 3 software system and units can be transferred to different zones Users belong to a single zone but may swit
337. ht e No check mark No access has been granted or denied for this right The access rights display for a target device may contain information that appears invalid For example virtual media access can be enabled to a target device that does not support it Similarly virtual media access to a target device could be enabled but KVM Video Viewer access may be disabled See About target device access rights on page 164 for more information 4 Click Close when you are finished reviewing the access rights The User Accounts window will open 274 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Customizing Appliance and Target Device Access Rights windows The Name field is always displayed in the Target Device Access Rights and Appliance Access Rights windows The action fields may also be displayed see About Access Rights on page 163 Use the Customize link to add or remove fields in the display See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 To add or remove access rights through a user account 1 PATS Click the Users tab Click on a username Click Access Rights in the side navigation bar The User Access Rights window will open To add or remove a unit or unit group from the Unit and Unit Groups list click Edit List The User Access Rights Unit Selection window will open e To add one or more units unit groups select the units groups in the Available list then click Add The units unit groups will be moved to the Li
338. iance or target device name Click Properties in the side navigation bar and then click Location in the side navigation bar The Unit Location Properties window will open Type or use the menus to select the site department and or location for the unit Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open To change the location properties for one or more units from a Units View window 1 Oe ne TEE gi In a Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the checkbox next to the unit s To change location properties for all units in the page click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list If the page contains units that do not support location properties they will not be affected Click Operations then select Properties from the drop down menu The Multiple Unit Properties window will open Click Location Type or use the menus to specify the site department and or location for the units Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open To change the contact properties for a unit 1 3 In a Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance or target device name Click Properties in the side navigation bar and then click Contacts in the side navigation bar The Unit Contacts window will open Type the names and phone numbers of the primary and secondary contacts Click Save and then click Close The Units View
339. ic adjustment features will optimize the video for the best possible view However users may fine tune the video with the help of Avocent Technical Support by using the Tools Manual Video Adjust command in the Video Viewer menu or clicking the Manual Video Adjust button This displays the Manual Video Adjust dialog box Video adjustment is a per target setting and applies to each target device you access Modified video settings are written to the KVM switch Settings are also stored per port channel session on a system when they are made and saved so they may be used during a non shared session as follows e If sharing is not enabled the video settings made on the local KVM switch during the session are used e If sharing is enabled for the non primary user video settings are read from the KVM switch See Connecting to an existing session on page 289 for information about session sharing Users may verify the level of packets per second required to support a static screen by observing the packet rate which is located in the lower left hand comer of the dialog box To manually adjust the video quality of the window NOTE The following video adjustments should be made only on the advice and with the help of Avocent T echnical Support 1 Select Tools Manual Video Adjust from the Video Viewer menu or click the Manual Video Adjust button The Manual Video Adjust dialog box appears 2 Click the icon for the feature you wish to adj
340. icates check the checkbox to the left of the server IP address es To select all server IP addresses on the page click the checkbox to the left of the IP Address heading Click Unregister to unregister the certificates A confirmation message box will appear Confirm or cancel the operation Click Close The User Authentication Services window will open To change user schema settings for the LDAP external authentication service 1 2 en a09 CN CN Click the Users tab Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open Click the name of the LDAP service The side navigation bar will change to include the name of the LDAP service at the top and below the name the information you may define Click Schema in the side navigation bar Users will automatically be selected and the Authentication Service User Schema LDAP window will open Type the Base distinguished name DN from which to begin searches This is a required field unless the Directory Service has been configured to allow anonymous search Each Search DN value must be separated by a comma Type the key attribute The default value is common name cn Type the object class The default value is person Type the full name attribute for the user The default value is surname sn Click Save and then click Close The User Authentication Services dialog box will appear To change group schema settings for t
341. ication Service Name and Type window will open a Type aname for the external authentication service b Select LDAP from the Type menu c Click Next The Specify LDAP Connection Settings window will open a Type the address of the LDAP host in dot notation format xxx xxx xxx xxx or type the DNS host name in the Host Address field b Type the number of the port for connecting to the LDAP host in the Port Number field c Specify an SSL encryption mode 100 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide e Click Do Not Use SSL to have authentication performed using unencrypted clear text instead of SSL encryption This method is the least secure and automatically sets the Port Number field to a default port number of 389 Click Use SSL in Trust All Mode to use SSL encryption for data transmission All server certificates will be trusted and automatically accepted by the DSView 3 software for transmitting data This SSL method provides medium security and automatically sets the Port Number field to a default port number of 636 This encryption mode is not recommended for wide area networks WANs Click Use SSL in Certificate based Trust Mode to use SSL encryption for data transmission The DSView 3 software will approve the server and then the certificate before transmitting data This SSL method provides maximum security and automatically sets the Port Number field to a default port number of 636 Click Enable Chasing of Referr
342. ick Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open Click the name of the TACACS service The side navigation bar will change to include the name of the TACACS service at the top and below the name the information you may define Click Connection in the side navigation bar The Authentication Service Connection Settings TACACS window will open a Type a 1 64 character name for the TACACS authentication service b Type the address of the TACACS host in dot notation format xxx xxx xxx xxx or type the DNS host name in the Server Address field 110 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide C d Type the number of the port from 1 65535 for connecting to the TACACS host in the Port Number field The default is port 49 Click Save 5 To change the authentication type and or shared secret click Settings in the side navigation bar The Authentication Service Authentication Settings TACACS window will open a Select the authentication type from the Authentication Type menu PAP Password Authentication Protocol CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol default MS CHAP Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol In the Shared Secret field type the shared secret which is a password protected field For the shared secret Microsoft s implementation allows up to 128 ASCII characters and Cisco s implementation allows up to 32 ASC
343. ide navigation bar The DSView 3 System Logon Legal Notice window will open To enable the legal notice display a Check the Enable Legal Notice checkbox b Enter up to 80 characters in the Caption field This is a required field c Enter up to 512 characters in the Text field Carriage returns may be used to separate lines This is a required field d Click Save To disable the legal notice display uncheck the Enable Legal Notice checkbox and then click Save PCI Compliance Configuration The DSView 3 software may be configured as Payment Card Industry PCI compliant When PCI compliance is enabled three settings are affected Browser caching of secure web pages is disabled This setting prevents the potential loss of confidential client data however this setting may not work effectively if older browsers are used The browser prompt to save passwords is disabled This setting prevents the potential loss of confidential client data 40 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide e Weak SSL ciphers are disabled This setting prevents the potential loss of data integrity These three settings may be enabled at once on the Global Properties page or may be enabled disabled individually NOTE When PCI compliance is enabled the exporting of the DSView 3 server CSR files PEM certificates and SSH keys does not submit the request to the client s browser instead the files are saved in the DSView 3 server user s home directory
344. ideo Viewer menu commands You may also enable disable full screen mode See General commands on page 301 Menu activation keystroke The menu activation keystroke setting specifies the keystroke that can be used to activate the Video Viewer menu When the menu and toolbar display are hidden pressing this key re enables the display If you enable Allow users to override this setting or if no profile is assigned to the target device users may specify the menu activation keystroke using Video Viewer menu commands See General commands on page 301 Cursor profile settings To prevent potential mouse conflicts you may configure certain settings on each server connected to a managed appliance For details see the Mouse and Pointer Settings Technical Brief which is available on the DSView 3 software DVD and on the Avocent web site Local cursor The local cursor setting specifies the appearance of the local mouse cursor There are five appearance choices You may also choose no cursor or the default cursor If you enable Allow users to override this setting or if no profile is assigned to the target device users may specify the local cursor setting using Video Viewer menu commands See Cursor commands on page 302 Single cursor mode session startup NOTE Single cursor mode is available only on supported Windows system clients The single cursor mode session startup setting indicates whether the Video Viewer starts up in single cur
345. igation bar The Active Modem Sessions window will open Click the checkbox to the left of the sessions To disconnect all sessions click the checkbox to the left of Duration at the top of the list If you do not have permission to disconnect an active session you will not be able to select its checkbox or the checkbox at the top of the list Click Disconnect A confirmation dialog box will appear Confirm or cancel the disconnect Connections to Units The Connections link displays either target device or managed appliance connections The Target Device Connections window lists all connections to the target device You may also use this window to add or delete a connection to or from the target device The Appliance Connections window lists all connections from the managed appliance to cascade switches or target devices You may rename the units which are part of the connection path through this window NOTE Merged target devices appear as separate connections in the Connections window Connection display format Connections typically appear in a format similar to the following for connections to target devices cascade switches and power devices lt Managed appliance name gt lt Port gt gt lt EID Number gt lt target device gt lt Managed appliance name gt lt Port gt gt lt EID Number gt switch one lt Port gt gt lt target device gt lt Managed appliance name gt lt Port gt gt lt
346. ight comer click the link A View Customization window will open 2 Add remove or move fields in the window display Chapter 3 DSView 3 Explorer Windows 33 e To add one or more fields to the window display select the fields in the Available Fields list then click Add The fields will be moved to the Fields to Show list To remove one or more fields from the window display select the fields in the Fields to Show list then click Remove The fields will be moved to the Available Fields list e To change the order that fields display from left to right in the window select one or more fields in the Fields to Show list Use the up or down arrow to change its order in the list 3 To specify the number of items that appear in a window use the arrow keys in the Items per Page field to select a number or type a number 1 2000 In Units View windows that have the topology view enabled the number of items per page includes children even if the display is collapsed and the children are not visible 4 To show hidden items in a Units View window see Showing and hiding units on page 119 a Check the Show hidden items checkbox b Select Visibility from the Available Fields column and then click Add Visibility will move to the Fields to Show list 5 To show group descendants in windows that display unit groups see Unit group hierarchy on page 241 click the Show group descendants checkbox 6 To expand a topology view automa
347. in is selected in the Unit Password window or Passwords Expire information is specified in the Authentication Service User Account Policies window A DSView 3 software administrator may specify a different minimum character length and change expiration criteria See Authentication Services on page 87 b To enable users to set their own passwords when they log in to the DSView 3 software click User must change password at next login c To designate the account as a service account select the Service Account checkbox A service account cannot be used to log in to the DSView 3 software A service account can be used to impersonate another user over the Web Services API or GUI Access API For more information see the DSView 3 software SDK online help Chapter 17 Managing User Accounts 265 NOTE Aservice account may only be created if you selected the DSView 3 software internal authentication service in step 3 d Click Next Go to step 6 5 The Specify User Name window will open If you selected RADIUS TACACS or RSA SecurlD in step 3 a Enable the Specify user on external authentication service radio button b Type the username that is configured on the RADIUS TACACS or RSA SecurID server c Click Next If you selected any other type of external authentication service in step 3 you may either specify the username or find the user on the external authentication service e To specify the user enable the Specify user on exter
348. in place by the thumbtack If you enable Allow users to override this setting or if no profile is assigned to the target device users may specify the hide delay using Video Viewer menu commands See Toolbar commands on page 303 Available enabled items lists The Available items and Enabled items columns indicate which toolbar functions and macros can and will be displayed in the Video Viewer window If you enable Allow users to override this setting or if no profile is assigned to the target device users may specify the items to display using Video Viewer menu commands See Toolbar commands on page 303 Video profile settings Color depth The color depth setting indicates the color depth the Video Viewer will use The Dambrackas Video Compression DVC algorithm allows you to display more colors for the best fidelity or fewer colors to reduce the volume of data transferred on the network The choices are in descending color quantity Best Color Medium Color Medium Compression Low Color High Compression or Gray Scale Best Compression If you enable Allow users to override this setting you may also control whether they may select a value higher than the profile setting For example when this control is enabled if the color depth setting in the profile is Low Color High Compression users on a target device 296 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide using that profile will not be able to select Best Color However the
349. in the toolbar The Session Properties dialog box will appear Click the Logging tab Enable the Logging checkbox The Default Directory field displays the current default location for logfiles If that is the desired directory click OK You may change the default directory Automatic logging will begin when you initiate the next Telnet Viewer session to that device At that time the Logging Status label will indicate Logging To disable automatic logging 1 Select Options Session Properties from the menu or click the Session Settings icon in the toolbar The Session Properties dialog box will appear Click the Logging tab Disable the Logging checkbox Click OK Chapter 20 Using the Telnet Viewer 343 Automatic logging will stop when you close the Telnet Viewer session When logging stops the Logging Status label disappears To start dynamic logging 1 Select Options Logging Start from the menu The Log dialog box appears 2 The Look in list contains the default log file directory and the Filename field contains the default log filename Using this filename format is recommended however you may change it for the duration of this Telnet Viewer session If you choose to use the default log filename skip to step 4 3 To change the default log filename for the duration of the dynamic logging session you may select a directory from the Look in list The directory list may contain directories and files To create
350. indow is active For Windows Linux and Solaris operating systems all keystrokes and keystroke combinations are supported except Ctrl Alt Del For Macintosh operating systems the following table lists keystrokes and keystroke combinations that are not supported Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 293 Table 19 2 Macintosh Keys and Keystrokes Not Supported in Keyboard Pass Through Keystrokes and Keystroke Combinations F13 F14 F15 F16 Command Option Eject Command Control Eject Command Option Control Eject Option Command D Description Function Key Brightness Up Brightness Down Function Key Volume Down Volume Up Mute Eject Sleep Immediately Restart Shut Down Display Hide Dock When the local desktop is active keystrokes and keystroke combinations entered by the user affect the local computer In full screen mode keystrokes are always passed to the target device regardless of the keyboard pass through mode setting The Ctrl Alt Delete keyboard combination can only be sent to a remote server by using a macro See Macros on page 314 The Japanese keyboard ALT Han Zen keystroke combination is always sent to a remote server regardless of the screen mode or keyboard pass through setting 294 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide If you enable Allow users to override this setting or if no profile is assigned to the target device users may enable disable pass through mode using V
351. indow will open 8 Click Finish The Unit Overview window will open Saving a managed appliance configuration You may save the configuration of a KVM switch or serial console appliance to a file The configuration file will contain information about the managed appliance including the following e Global settings e Port settings e SNMP trap settings SNMP manager settings e The names of connected target devices For information on restoring a configuration file see Restoring a managed appliance configuration on page 360 To save a managed appliance configuration to a file 1 In the Unit Overview window click the Save Configuration icon or link The Save Appliance Configuration Wizard will appear 2 Type a description of the configuration that will be saved and may be used if you wish to restore the configuration at a later time and then click Next 3 The Completed Successful window will open 4 Click Finish The Unit Overview window will open Restoring a managed appliance configuration You may restore the configuration of a KVM switch or serial console appliance To restore the configuration a previously saved configuration file must exist See Saving a managed appliance configuration on page 360 Appliance configuration files are stored in the DSView 3 server appliance files repository You may display the available configuration files by clicking the System tab clicking Appliance Files in the top navigation
352. ing Appliances window will open while the selected managed appliances are added to the DSView 3 software system The Apply Configuration Template window opens If you want to apply a configuration template to the appliance select a template from the list and click Next Or If you do not want to apply a configuration template to the appliance select None and click Next NOTE For more information about configuration templates see Appliance Configuration Templates on page 155 9 Click Finish Adding a generic appliance or an EVR1500 environmental monitor To add a single EVR1500 environmental monitor or generic appliance 1 2 5 Click Add in a Units View window The Add Unit Wizard will open The Select Add Unit Procedure window will open Click Add a single appliance then click Next The Select Appliance Type window will open Select EVR 500 or Generic from the product list then click Next A Configure Generic Appliance Settings window will open a Type the name b Type either the address or the fully qualified domain name c Type the Telnet port d Type the web browser URL e Click Next Click Finish Adding a target device You may add a target device using the Add Target Device Wizard which is described in this section You may also add a target device using the Attach Target Device Wizard which is available from a Units View window that has the topology view enabled See Topology view on pa
353. ings on a managed appliance 368 Task Power control a target device 000022 cece cece eee cece eee eee A KAS 369 Task Exporting an event log csv fil LALES 0000 cece cece e cence eee cece eee eee 370 Task Exporting an Asset Report to a csv file LALE EEE ALA KAS 371 Task Exporting a Usage Report to a csv file LEE EEE EEE KAS 372 Task Migraine unites 225 28 fx hecee Shoes les oda da s feat avee ss UL B aS Bu bl Wala 373 Task Sending an IPMI chassis control command to target devices 375 Task Test modem connections to selected units 2222200000 cece eee eee eee 376 Task Updating the firmware of an appliance type 222222220200eee ee eee 377 Task Validating user accounts on an external authentication server 378 Task Pull names from selected units 0 0 00222000 EEE EEE cece eee eeeeeeeeee 378 Task Update topology for selected units LL sa EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE eeeeeee 379 Task Backup Power Manager database 22220000cce EEE EEE EEE EKA KAS 380 Task Restore Power Manager database cc ca ca E EEE EEE EEE EEE KERA KAS 341 Running tasks manually 000 0220 ESASA EEE SES EE EE EEE EE EEE KAKE K KK KK 382 Displaying task res lts c55 Xaaidak Ka H na dek kd 5na n Aa deni n a 5D KA Yaa che DON a e kn 382 Delene tasks ae iis Blot ise a dp te wee AN y u Ghd apy alate aN Li Bk
354. inish Deleting User defined User Groups You may delete any user defined user groups that have been created in the DSView 3 software system You must have DSView 3 software administrator or user administrator rights to delete user defined user groups To delete a user defined user group 1 3 4 Click the Users tab Click Groups in the top navigation bar Click User Defined in the side navigation bar The User Groups User Defined window will open Click the checkbox to the left of the user group s to be deleted To delete all user groups listed in the window click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list Click Delete A confirmation dialog box will appear Confirm or cancel the deletion User Group Properties To display the properties of a built in user group 1 3 Click the Users tab Click Groups in the top navigation bar Built In will automatically be selected in the side navigation bar and the User Groups Built in window will open Click on a user group name The User Group Properties window will open The display includes read only properties for each group name type and preemption level Click Close when you are finished The User Groups Built in window will open To display or change the properties of a user defined user group 1 2 Click the Users tab Click Groups in the top navigation bar Click User Defined in the side navigation bar The User Groups User Defined win
355. ints 22 22 0000 c EEE cece cece eee SEKE ERKA ASAS 351 Importing DSView 2 x software databases 0000022 cc EE EEE EEE EEE KAKA 351 TMPOTHNS d tans 28 AHORA IO SE BE USE r Sth PBS DEE A PE IOS ES NS os 355 Using the Managed Appliance Tools aa EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EE EEE KAKA KAS 356 TV A HH HHHH 357 Upgrading firmware cn 5 5 sc A520 Saziye nagah ees ken SPOS SSB GR Daka 42We a ee GIRD D Ga 3548 RESVNCHVONIZING UNIS sa zura nz Zala y cy W by b SIN Re a A AE WL d 358 Saving a managed appliance configuration 00000000ceeecee eee e cece eee 360 Table of Contents xiii Restoring a managed appliance configuration 22222200000 0 eee eee eee eee 360 Saving a managed appliance user database 0 000000 EE EEE cece eee KAS 361 Restoring a managed appliance user database 0020220000eeee seen eee 361 USING TASKS sexx cte may een fo aa ech ihe ae eda BBRR N 363 Using the Tasks Window 0002200000 c 2k e eee e eee ccc cece E EEEE 363 AA GING AAS KSinR SAPO MD oe ahd RANSON E ES Ge Sis ot hha Spratt ahd DOS Siete 364 Specifying when to run tasks 2 2 000 cece eee cece SE SES cece cece cece cece ees 364 Adding Tasks Using the Add Task Wizard 222 00 000000 cece ec ccce ence cece ee 367 Task Backup DSView 3 software database and system files 22222 367 Task Configure SNMP trap sett
356. ion Length of the DSView 3 software session User Name of user who initiated the DSView 3 software session KVM switches that support virtual media Type Session type KVM or Virtual Media KVM switches that support virtual media Lock Status When there is a KVM and a virtual media session to the same target device and the appliance setting Virtual Media Locked to KVM Session is enabled Locked will be displayed in this field KVM switches Channel Channel being used by the managed appliance to connect to the DSView 3 software session KVM switches Client Proxy address if the proxy is enabled KVM switches IQ Module EID of the target device IQ module KVM switches Mode Mode of the session which may change during the session Available modes are 196 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide e Normal An interactive session that may be shared with other users When two or more users are sharing the session the mode will change to Sharing Interactive e Exclusive A private session that does not allow sharing by other users e Sharing Interactive A session that is being shared by two or more users Interactive users have full control of the video mouse and keyboard Passive users may also share the session but may only display the session and have a mode of Sharing Passive A user may display the usernames of other users sharing the session if View identity of shared connections is checked in the Video Vie
357. ion If a unit does not support a boot version but has an appliance version N A will be displayed Dashes will be displayed if a unit does not support either appliance or boot firmware The Status field indicates the result of the display for example Show Versions complete or Show Versions not supported To display version information for a managed appliance 1 3 In a Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on an appliance name Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar and then Versions The Appliance Version Information window will open containing the following information e For KVM switches application boot and video FPGA May also include application boot video FPGA matrix FPGA UART FPGA digital application digital digitizer digital FPGA and OSCAR FPGA e For serial console appliances bootstrap and application versions Click Close The Units View window will open To enable or disable secure mode on an appliance 1 2 In a Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the checkbox next to the unit s Click Operations then select Enable Secure Mode from the drop down menu Managed Appliance Status All DSR switches that have been automatically discovered are initially listed as Unmanaged Units To move a DSR switch to the managed units list 1 2 3 In a Units View window s
358. ion Services window will open To change custom field labels for user accounts that use internal authentication 1 Click the Users tab 90 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 5 6 Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open Click DSView Internal The side navigation bar will change to include DSView Internal at the top and below the name information you may define Click Custom Field Labels in the side navigation bar The Authentication Service User Account Custom Field Labels DSView Internal window will open Type the text that you wish to appear in each of the six custom field labels Click Save and then click Close The User Authentication Services window will open By default the custom field labels do not display in the User Accounts All window but they may be added to the display or added to the default display by an administrator using the Customize link See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 Active Directory external authentication service NOTE When adding an Active Directory external authentication service you can allow trusted forests to be discovered A forest is a group of domains and a forest may have a trusted relationship with other forests In some configurations a user may belong to one forest but be assigned to groups in another forest The DSView 3 server needs access to both forests to authenticate and authorize this
359. ion bar The DSView Server Trap Destinations window will open In each address field type the IP addresses in standard dot notation xxx xxx XxX XxX or the domain name for the computer that handles traps Up to four computers may be specified Click Save to store the trap information in the DSView 3 software database on the host Client session information To specify client session information 1 2 Click the System tab Click DSView Client Sessions in the side navigation bar The DSView Server Client Session Properties window opens The number of client sessions currently in use is displayed Use the arrows to specify a time out value from 5 60 minutes for inactivity of a DSView 3 user client session The default is 15 minutes When the time out value has been exceeded the session will end and the user must log in again Check the Enable certificate authentication checkbox to allow the DSView 3 software to automatically log in internal users if the user certificate X 509 digital ID installed in the 74 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide DSView 3 software client web browser matches the certificate configured for the user Certificates for users may be modified See User certificates on page 268 Web browser settings may need to be modified to allow users to automatically log in using certificates see your web browser documentation Or Check the Enable Integrated Windows Authentication checkbox to automati
360. ion can be closed but the virtual media session will remain active This could be desirable if a user is performing a time intensive task using the virtual media session such as an operating system load and wants to establish a KVM session with a different target device to perform other functions while the operating system load progresses Once a target device has an active virtual media session without an associated active KVM session two situations can occur the original user User A can reconnect or a different user User B can connect to that channel You may set an option in the Virtual Media dialog box Reserved that allows only the User A to access that channel with a KVM session If User B is allowed to access that session the Reserved option is not enabled User B could control the media that is being used in the virtual media session In some environments this may not be desirable By using the Reserved option in a tiered environment only User A could access the lower switch and the KVM channel between the upper switch and lower switch would be reserved for User A Preemption levels offer additional flexibility of combinations See Opening an exclusive KVM session on page 288 and Connecting to an existing session on page 289 The preemption modes described in those sections also apply to virtual media session Virtual Media dialog box The Virtual Media dialog box is a program that manages the mapping and unmapping of virtu
361. ion to perform the action none allow deny or inherit for each unit That procedure is described in this section There are other ways to assign access rights e From a user perspective see User Access Rights on page 273 e From a unit perspective see Unit Access Rights on page 165 From a unit group perspective see Changing the unit group properties on page 245 To display user group access rights 1 Click the Users tab 2 Click Groups in the top navigation bar Built In will automatically be selected in the side navigation bar and the User Groups Built in window will open To display the User Groups User Defined window click User Defined in the side navigation bar 3 Click on a user group name The User Group Properties window will open 4 Click Effective Rights in the side navigation bar and then click All Units Target Devices or Appliances The Target Devices Effective Rights window or Appliance Effective Rights window will open Columns indicate the available actions for the unit e Black check mark the user has been granted access for this right e Gray check mark a group to which the user belongs has been granted access for this right e Black X the user has been denied access for this right e Gray X a group to which the user belongs has been denied access for this right e No check mark no access has been granted or denied for this right The access rights display may contain information that appears in
362. ions Pause Scan from the Thumbnail Viewer menu The scan sequence will pause at the current thumbnail if the Thumbnail Viewer has a scan in progress or will restart the scan if currently paused To change the thumbnail size Select Options Thumbnail Size from the Thumbnail Viewer menu Choose the desired thumbnail size from the cascade menu To disable a device thumbnail in the scan sequence Select a device thumbnail Select Thumbnail lt device name gt Disable from the Thumbnail Viewer menu or right click on a device thumbnail and select Disable from the pop up menu 314 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Updating of the thumbnail image will stop until it is enabled To enable a device thumbnail in the scan sequence Select a device thumbnail Select Thumbnail lt device name gt Enable from the Thumbnail Viewer menu or right click on a device thumbnail and select Enable from the pop up menu Updating of that thumbnail image will resume To launch a session to a device from the Thumbnail Viewer Select a device thumbnail Select Thumbnail lt device name gt View Interactive Session from the Thumbnail Viewer menu Or Right click on a device thumbnail and select View Interactive Session from the Thumbnail Viewer menu That target device desktop will appear in a Video Viewer window Or Double click on the thumbnail image To exit the Thumbnail Viewer Select File Exit from the Thumbnail Viewer m
363. ital switch or DSR1161 DSR2161 DSR4160 or DSR800 switch You may restore the local user database of a KVM switch or serial console appliance To restore the user database a previously saved user database file must exist See Saving a managed appliance user database on page 361 User database files are stored in the DSView 3 server appliance files repository You may display the available database files by clicking the System tab clicking Appliance Files in the top navigation bar and clicking User Database in the side navigation bar 362 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To restore the user database of a managed appliance 1 In the Unit Overview window click the Resfore User Database icon or link The Restore Appliance User Database Wizard will appear Click the radio button to the left of the managed appliance user database you wish to restore and then click Next The Completed Successful window will open Click Finish The Unit Overview window will open Reboot the managed appliance to enable the restored user database See Importing data on page 355 363 Using Tasks You may add delete and change tasks from the Tasks window The Tasks window lists all tasks configured in the DSView 3 management software system and allows you to manually run tasks Using the Tasks Window To display the Tasks window 1 Click the System tab 2 Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open Customizin
364. iza an W l su lll n pa ae ae nl can DU R 266 Resetting a User Account Password 2022202000000 cece cece eee c eee e cece ee ees 266 Changing User Account Properties 2222 00 000000 cece SEE EEE SE EEE EEE ERKEK KAS 267 WSCINOMN AAE AES EATA Beh 88 Boos ha Shoe ae J _ ee eA tI hs oo ONES G8 EAT 267 User certificates 0 0 02 0 ccc cee EEE SELE EE EE EE EE EE EEE KEK KK KK KK KK 268 DWA keV rasrasan aaa aaee aaa a se aaa a a a 268 U SCR DASSWOTG xa yeke LER E EA EE O E TE E AE ek Aa dt 269 User account restrictions and expiration settings a 00000000000000000000000000 269 User group membership 2 22 2 0000222 c cece even eee eee cece cece cece KK KK KK 270 Preemption level 2222 00 ELSA SEES EE cece EE EE SE EE EE SEES KE ESER KK KK KH 271 Address ea ee e e e eee 7 5 ewwee_ aeoe mon 271 PHONG CONTAC in oe Sele est aden es eda HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH Se Bes 271 EMGUSCONTACE seb Sie OE sek on ee eS bat ak O KA A Bkn ot wea KARZAN 272 Usernotes Ionia a es A Set PI hal slate Nol tet SN Sta stn teal ied BA La ted BD BOS Leta tote tds fe 272 Custom field properties LL ca EEE EEE EEE EEE ESSA EE SEE EE EE SEE EEE SARA K KS 272 User Access Rights u aa LAL ALLE AA AE SAS cece EE EE SE SE SES SEE SEK KK KS KK ee KK KK KK KK 273 User Groups 2002 neces setters salya na Wa b ede e pects ala a ee ky e tM EONS kh 275 Adding User defined User Group5 2 0 SEE E EEE E
365. jyyym0a3 294 Toolbar profile settings 2 0 EEE EE SEE EEE EEE EE EE SE ee eee eee ence eee ee KK KK KK 295 Video profile Settings lt as m nalle ba kan na DANO Na oad 2202 DA KURE Q 2L RE WE A ADO Wen Sees 295 Managing KVM session profiles j j LAL ALE L ESLE E EEE EEE EEE cece cece cece eceees 297 Using Menu Commands to Manage Session Settings cs cece eee 301 General COmMMANAS MB gt N P D DM DZ N RR gt D gt gt gt B gt Y gt P NBpnP BB B B B B D DB gt eee eee 301 Cursor commands 0 022222 N NNNNNMNNNHNHEHnHEnEnNR NN EENNHNEN N NN DZDM 302 Toolbar cOmmMands exis se 5355 Za Xi E heka 2522 WEAR oe Side a aa Na take AO S Sada naka 303 Video COMMANAS s z zann ca az dank An ta ac Walle data lak shakes dea WA ds 2 5ala eee 304 Mouse scaling command 2 2 2 2 000 eee SEES ELE EE EE EE SEE EE EE SEE EKE ESER KAKA 304 Avocent Mouse SYNG oer MD n Mn HH iio OCR ed hoe HHH D DZ 305 Manual Video Adjustment 0000222220 ESASA EEE SEE EEE EEE EEE EE ERKEK nunan 306 Saving the View 2 2 0 ccc cece cece cece EEE EEE EE SEK KK SK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK K IR 309 Displaying Video Viewer UsSers 00 00000000 c eevee SEES E SEE SEES eee 309 Scan MOD Gs ub ep cited SANA y k d set SO DASAN ANY yS 00K ANO As Ae nish utd ba sald D2N 310 About Ye A DR N DD MM A OSE RAE HHHH HHEBRHRHHH HH em 310 Thum
366. k Add The selected services will be moved to the Services to Assign list To remove services from the Services to Assign list select the services then click Remove The selected services will be moved to the Available Services or Services Found list Click Next 7 The Completed Successful window will open Click Close To change service options 1 Ina Units View window containing target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on a target device name 2 In the side navigation bar click Properties then click Services The Unit Services window will open 3 Click on a service name 4 Enable the radio buttons to enable options then click Save To remove support for a service on a target device 1 Ina Units View window containing target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on a target device name 172 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 2 In the side navigation bar click Properties then click Services The Unit Services window will open listing the services that are supported 3 Click the checkbox next to the services to be removed To remove all services on the page click the checkbox to the left of Service at the top of the list 4 Click Delete A confirmation dialog box will appear 5 Confirm or cancel the deletion Target Device Settings For information about power device settings see Power Devices on page 187 To display a list of target devices that a
367. k the Video Test Pattern button again to toggle back to a normal video image Saving the View The display of a Video Viewer window may be saved to a file or to the clipboard for pasting into another program NOTE Saving the view is only supported on Windows clients The Capture to File menu option and link are disabled on non Windows clients To capture the Video Viewer window to a file 1 Select File Capture to File from the Video Viewer menu or click the Capture to File button The Save As dialog box appears 2 Enter a filename and choose a location to save the file 3 Click Save To capture the Video Viewer window to your clipboard Select File Capture to Clipboard from the Video Viewer menu or click the Capture to Clipboard button The image data is saved to the clipboard Displaying Video Viewer Users NOTE This procedure is not available if the DSR Remote Operations software is being used 310 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To display current Video Viewer users 1 Select View Connected Users from the Video Viewer menu or click the Connected Users button The Users Connected to lt device Video Session number gt dialog box appears containing a list of all users connected to the Video Viewer window session 2 Click OK to close the dialog box To display a list of users sharing a port or channel Select View List of Shared Users in the Video Viewer menu Users in stealth mode are excluded fro
368. keypad definitions Encoding of each listed keypad key is supported decoding is not applicable Table D 12 VT52 ANSI Mode Auxiliary Keypad Definitions Keys Keypad Numeric Code VT52 Keypad ANSI Keyboard 0 0 Esc p EscOp 1 1 Esc q EscOq 2 2 Esc r EscOr 3 3 Esc s EscOs 4 4 Esc t EscOt 5 5 Esc u EscOu 6 6 Esc v EscOv 7 7 Esc w EscOw 8 8 Esc x EscOx 9 9 Esc y EscOy Appendices 439 Keys Keypad Numeric Code dash dash Esc m comma comma Esc period period Esc n Enter Same as Return key Esc m VT320 terminal emulation VT52 Keypad ANSI Keyboard EscOm Esc Ol EscOn EscOm Table D 13 lists the keystroke mapping encoding for VT320 terminal emulation Table D 13 VT320 Encoding VT320 Keyboard Escape Key Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 PC Character Sequence Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Ctrl F5 Ctrl F6 VT320 Keyboard Byte Sequence 0x1B EscOP EscOQ EscOR EscOS Esc 17 Esc 18 Esc 19 Esc 20 Esc 21 Esc 23 Esc 24 Esc 25 Esc 26 440 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide VT320 Keyboard F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 Insert Home Delete End Up Arrow Down Arrow Left Arrow Right Arrow Table D 14 lists the decoding for VT320 terminal emulation Table D 14 VT320 Decoding VT320 Keyboard Function Index New Line Reverse Index Escape O Save cursor
369. kup file contains everything necessary to fully restore the Power Manager database if needed The backup file is named dsviewPluginBackup zip by default but you may also append the date and time to the end of the backup filename Once this task is added you may run it on demand at any time see Running tasks manually on page 382 Chapter 22 Using Tasks 381 NOTE Power management features require the Power Manager plug in For more information about using power management see the Power Manager Plug in help To add the task 1 R E S2 7 Click the System tab Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open Click Add The Add Task Wizard will appear Select Backup Power Manager database from the drop down menu Type a 1 64 character name for the task Select a time to run the task then click Next See Specifying when to run tasks on page 364 The Specify Power Manager Database Backup Properties window will open a Type the directory location in which to create the backup file which may be a physical local drive on the DSView 3 server or a shared network location specified by a UNC Universal Naming Convention path The Location field cannot be set to a mapped network drive The directory name must be entered in case sensitive text if your operating system supports case sensitive filenames If the specified directory location is a network path that requires a login enable the Login requir
370. kup or restore a hub server using a command line on a supported Windows system 1 In the Start menu on your desktop select Start Programs Accessories Command Prompt A command prompt window will open Change directories to the directory in which the DSView 3 software is installed typically C Program Files Avocent DSView 3 bin Enter DSViewBackupRestore to display the DSView 3 Backup Restore Utility dialog box Follow the directions in To manually back up a hub server using the Backup and Restore Utility dialog box to back up the hub server using the dialog box or To manually restore a hub server using the Backup and Restore Utility dialog box to restore the hub server using the dialog box These procedures are described later in this section Or 78 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To backup the DSView 3 software hub server enter DSViewBackupRestore backup archive lt archive name gt passwd lt password gt or To restore the DSView 3 software hub server enter DSViewBackupRestore restore archive lt archive name gt passwd lt password gt lt archive name gt Name of the archive which must be enclosed by quotation marks for example myarchive The archive option and an archive name are required lt password gt A password that encrypts the archive The password is optional when creating a backup If a password is specified when creating the backup it will be require
371. l b Select the type of Proxy Invocation e Click Disable the proxy server to allow all internal and external DSView 3 software clients to communicate directly with the managed appliances This is the default e Click Use the proxy server for all KVM serial and virtual media sessions to enable all DSView 3 clients to communicate with the managed appliances using the DSView 3 software proxy server Chapter 5 DSView 3 Servers 73 e Click Use the proxy server only for clients not on the same network as this DSView Server to enable all external and internal clients on a different network than the current DSView 3 server to communicate with the managed appliances using the DSView 3 proxy server All other external and internal clients will communicate directly with the managed appliances e Click Use the proxy server only for clients connecting with the following addresses to enable only DSView 3 software clients with IP addresses entered in the Address List to communicate with the managed appliances using the DSView 3 proxy server All other clients communicate directly with the managed appliances NOTE Changing the Proxy Port or Proxy Invocation setting will disconnect active DSView 3 client sessions 3 4 Click Save A confirmation dialog box will appear Confirm or cancel the action Server trap destinations To specify trap destinations 1 2i 4 Click the System tab Click Trap Destinations in the side navigat
372. l be assigned then allow deny the permission to perform the action for each user user group See Unit Access Rights on page 165 e You may also assign access control rights from a unit group perspective This is similar to assigning access control rights for a unit except all units that belong to the selected unit group will be affected See Changing the unit group properties on page 245 e You may also assign access control rights from a user perspective You select a user account specify the units for which rights will be assigned then indicate the permission to perform the action none allow deny or inherit for each unit See User Access Rights on page 273 e You may assign access control rights from a user group perspective This is similar to assigning access control rights for a user except all users who are members of the selected user group will be affected See User Group Access Rights on page 281 Unit Access Rights DSView 3 software administrators may assign unit access rights To add or remove access rights from a Units View window 1 Ina Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 To add remove access to one or more units click the checkboxes next to the units and then click Rights e To add remove access to all units on the page click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list and then click Rights 166 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 4 gt The Unit Access
373. l be displayed in the side navigation bar 1 Click the Units tab 2 Click Groups in the side navigation bar The Groups Global Root window will open e Ifa unit group has subgroups children an arrow will be displayed next to its name When a selected group has subgroups the window will display either the immediate children of the unit group or all descendents of the unit group depending on the Show group descendants setting e Ifa unit group does not have subgroups a document icon will be displayed next to its name in the side navigation bar When you click on a unit group in the side navigation bar that has a document icon that is it has no subgroups a window will open listing the units in the group This window can include the same fields as other Units View windows see Units View windows fields on page 120 You may enable or disable a field display using the Customize link See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 When you customize this window you may also enable disable the display of descendants When enabled and a unit group is selected in a side navigation bar the window will display all descendants of the group When disabled only the immediate children of the selected group will be displayed To display information about a unit group 1 Click the Units tab 2 Click Groups in the top navigation bar 244 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 6 Click the group container or the parent group
374. la tet OOO Ee tes aks 40 Changing user Options 0 000000 oon KK KH 41 Changing the color scheme LL ccc cece cece eee eee eee eens 41 Changing your Password 2 2 02 00000 c eee eee KK K KH 42 Choosing the serial session application 0000000000 0000 ccc 42 Specifying a user Certificate 0000s 43 Specifying an SSH Key 2 2 ka A1 05d na ka a be kh Ab eee uan tal ha Do dd 43 Enabling user credential caching 00000 000 ccc eee AKA 44 Built in User Groups ya ose Sa eels cance wed RAN DEDA AA adden Nes DENA Ea Kab b Ann n Aaaa os Ss 45 Preemption Level a Hi nA aye tits Aves eves ann ahd ai dka eon ost tN ts dail doe tte nied 46 Internet Explorer Considerations 2 02000 000000 e cece eee eee ee 48 Managing ActiveX controls j 00000 ccc eens 48 Sec rity Zones og EAH Bont oa Meh Se eda bao Gee GE SOS 49 Advanced Internet Options 2 2 22 000000 0c eee eee eee 51 Table of Contents v ZI MD DD DD ce sage Sa Net 52 System certificate policy and trust StOPe 0 00 00 0 ccc 53 Integrated Windows Authentication 2 2 2 22 55 PIVGWOUS AAR MM E E AA EET E AAEE bah AEAEE EEE ATE 56 VENST SEDEME DD O E a a a a a Re he eth a D see 57 NAT Devices 52 20 Send eaaa ec outst Monit Sh aae ea AA R a a 59 VESET AEE E 85s et E ES E E OEE N E 60 Adding a new license key 2 2 2 2 22020 000000 LSA LAL ALSA ASAS eee eee 63 System Information
375. le DSView server started an email notification will be sent regardless of the any specified unit groups NOTE A mail server that supports Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP must be configured to receive email event notifications Customizing the Email Notifications window The Email Subject column is always displayed in the Email Notifications window The display may include From Address and To Address fields Use the Customize link to add or remove fields in the display See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 To configure an email notification 1 2 Click the Reports tab Click Email Notifications in the side navigation bar The Email Notifications window will open Click Add The Add Email Notification Wizard will appear The Specify Email Properties window will open a Inthe Send To field type the email addresses of the persons you want to notify Separate multiple addresses with a comma This field has a limit of 1024 characters b In the From field type the email address up to 64 characters of the person you wish to designate as the sender of the notification c In the Subject field type a subject heading up to 64 characters for the notification d Click Next The Select Events to Trigger Email Notification window will open e To add one or more events select the event s from the Available Events list then click Add The event s will be moved to the Events To Notify list 390 DS
376. lete your own macro groups A user with software administrator or user administrator privileges may also change the predefined macro groups Macro group settings are device specific that is they may be set differently for each device To send a macro 1 Select Macros lt desired macro gt from the Video Viewer menu or Select Macros Configure Macros this menu item is not available if you are using the DSR Remote Operations software Or Click the Macros button The Macros dialog box appears 316 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 3 4 Select one of the following All displays both personal and global macros Personal displays only personal macros or Global displays only global macros Select the desired macro from the Defined Macros list and then click Run Click Close To create or edit a macro 1 Select Macros Configure Macros from the Video Viewer menu or click the Macros button The Macros dialog box appears To create a macro click Create The Create Macro dialog box appears To edit a macro click Edit The Edit Macro dialog box appears If you are creating a macro type a 1 32 character name in the Macro Name field Select whether you wish to edit or create a personal or global macro from the Macro Type area Select the type of keyboard to create or edit the macro from the Keyboard Type menu Available keyboard types are U S English Dutch Danish German French Italian S
377. lick on a user group name The User Group Properties window will open 4 Click Members in the side navigation bar The User Group Members window will open 5 Click Assign The Assign Users to User Group window will open 6 To add one or more users to the user group select the user s in the Available Users list then click Add The users will be moved to the Members list 7 To remove one or more users from the user group select the user s in the Members list then click Remove The users will be moved to the Available Users list 8 Click Save and then click Close The User Group Members window will open 9 Click Close The User Groups Built In or User Groups User Defined window will open depending on which groups you were working with Chapter 18 User Groups 281 You may also add or remove a user from a built in or user defined user group by clicking on a username in a User Accounts window and changing its user group membership See Changing User Group Members on page 280 User Group Access Rights Access rights indicate whether a user is allowed to perform certain actions on a unit in the DSView 3 software system See About Access Rights on page 163 for detailed information and a list of actions that are available for target devices and managed appliances You may assign access control rights from a user group perspective You select a user group specify the units for which rights will be assigned then indicate the permiss
378. ling DSView 3 help on a local server on page 38 4 Click Save 38 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide NOTE If your DSView 3 software version is several versions prior to the current version the help may not be available on the Avocent web site In this case when you access the help from the web you are prompted to save a zip file of the help to the local device Complete the nstalling DSView 3 help on a local server on page 38 procedure Installing DSView 3 help on a local server You can automatically download the help from the Avocent web site using the DSView 3 software or you can visit www avocent com dsview3help to browse for the appropriate version and save a zip file of the help to local media To download or update DSView 3 help on the local server 1 Click the System tab then click DSView 3 Server 2 Click Properties Help Configuration in the side navigation bar 3 Click the Download Latest Help button The DSView 3 Help Download Wizard opens 4 Select From the Avocent web site to download the latest help for your DSView 3 software version from the Avocent web site Or Select From a local device to retrieve the help from local media To specify the location click Browse or type the path in the field 5 Click Next 6 The Completed Successful window opens Click Finish NOTE If you reinstall or upgrade the DSView 3 software the DSView 3 help location is reset to From the Avocent web site Comple
379. ll Screen Mode button on the floating toolbar to return to the desktop window Cursor commands The mouse cursor and key for exiting single cursor mode commands may also be specified in a KVM session profile see Cursor profile settings on page 294 The commands to enter and exit single cursor mode and the command to align the mouse cursors cannot be set in a KVM session profile NOTE If the target device does not support the ability to disconnect and reconnect the mouse almost all newer PCs do then the mouse will become disabled and the device will have to be rebooted To prevent potential mouse conflicts you may configure certain settings on each server connected to a managed appliance For details see the Mouse and Pointer Settings Technical Brief which is available on the DSView 3 software DVD and on the Avocent web site To change the mouse cursor setting 1 Select Tools Session Options from the Video Viewer menu or click the Session Options button The Session Options dialog box appears 2 Click the Mouse tab 3 Inthe Local Cursor panel select a mouse cursor type 4 Click OK To enter single cursor mode Select Tools Single Cursor Mode from the Video Viewer menu or click the Single Cursor Mode button The local cursor will not appear and all movements will be relative to the target device NOTE Single cursor mode is only available on supported Windows system clients Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 303
380. ll open Click Properties in the side navigation bar then click Location From the menus select the site department and or location to associate with the unit If you do not wish to associate the unit with any site department or location choose the top empty item from the menu Click Save and then click Close To display the units associated with a site department or location 1 2 Click the Units tab To display units associated with a site click Sites in the side navigation bar The Units in Site window will open with a list of units associated with the first alphabetically listed site To display units associated with a department click Departments in the side navigation bar The Units in Departments window will open with a list of units associated with the first alphabetically listed department 236 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To display units associated with a location click Locations in the side navigation bar The Units in Location window will open with a list of units associated with the first alphabetically listed location Click on a site department location link in the side navigation bar to display another entry in the unit list Custom Fields Ten custom fields are available To use the custom fields first change the default labels on the fields Custom Field 1 Custom Field 2 and Custom Field 3 and then associate a custom label with a unit The custom fields may be displayed in Units
381. lled by the software and spoke servers allowed on a system Managed devices include physical servers routers switches firewalls blade chassis hypervisor managers hypervisor servers virtual machines and any other target device that can be managed by the DSView 3 software If a managed device is available through multiple connection methods the managed device requires only one license as long as it is merged into a single connection in the DSView 3 software Licenses may also be required to enable additional features See Table 4 8 for more information Chapter 4 Basic Operations 61 A demonstration demo license key may also be used for a trial period When the trial elapses login attempts will fail A demo license key may be replaced with another demo license key or a permanent license If additional license keys are added during the trial and the demo key expires the add on keys will have to be re entered when a new license key is installed Contact Avocent for information about obtaining licenses To display license information 1 Click the System tab 2 Click Licenses in the top navigation bar 3 Click Summary in the side navigation bar The License Summary window will open Table 4 8 describes the window fields 62 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Table 4 8 License Summary Fields Section Installation Key or Demo Install Key Managed Devices Spoke Servers Third Party Power Devices Plug ins
382. ller User Guide Several settings also allow you to enable disable an Allow users to override these settings checkbox When enabled users may override that profile setting using a Video Viewer menu command or button When disabled users cannot override the setting For all profiles other than the default profile if a setting is configured with Inherit Default Settings the Allow users to override these settings checkbox for that setting will not be available it will be disabled 5 To change general settings see General profile settings on page 292 f Click General in the side navigation bar The General Settings window will open In the Name field enter a 1 64 character name This cannot be the same name as an existing KVM session profile In the Default Macro Group field select the macro group that will appear in the Video Viewer Macros menu Enable or disable the 4 ow users to override this setting checkbox In the Keyboard Pass Through Mode field enable or disable keyboard pass through Enable or disable the 4 ow users to override this setting checkbox As noted in the window in full screen mode keystrokes are always passed to the target device regardless of this setting In the Menu Activation Keystroke field select the keystroke that will activate the Video Viewer menu Enable or disable the Allow users to override this setting checkbox If you changed any settings click Save 6 To change cursor settings see
383. llows access to Thumbnail Viewer features The menu will be in a show hide state if the thumbtack has not been used Place your cursor over the toolbar to display the menu Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 313 Number Description Minimize button Minimizes the display of the Thumbnail Viewer window into the toolbar at the bottom of the local computer Close button Closes the Thumbnail Viewer and all thumbnails being viewed The Close button may not be present on all operating systems Status indicator The device name and status indicator appear below each thumbnail A green LED indicates that a device is currently being scanned Ared X indicates that the last scan of the device was not successful The scan may have failed due to a credential or path failure for example the device path on the appliance was not available The tool tip for the LED indicates the reason for the failure 6 Thumbnail image Interacts with your device through this window Performing Thumbnail Viewer tasks To set scan preferences 1 Select Options Preferences from the Thumbnail Viewer menu The Scan Mode Preferences dialog box appears 2 Inthe View Time Per Server field enter the time each thumbnail will be active during the scan in the range 10 60 seconds 3 In the Time Between Server field enter the time the scan will stop between each device in the range 5 60 seconds 4 Click OK To pause or restart a scan sequence Select Opt
384. lnet Port Port number used for a Telnet connection to a target device See Unit Properties on page 158 e Visibility Whether to display Show or not display Hide a unit in the Units View windows See Showing and hiding units on page 119 e Secure Mode Displays a locked icon if secure mode is enabled on an appliance or an unlocked icon if it is not Secure mode is set when an appliance is added see Adding Units on page 129 and can be changed from the Operations menu see Managed Appliance Settings on page 166 NOTE OSCAR status and DCHP status fields are also available for supported DSR switches see the DSR switch plug in help for more information Multiple unit operations from a Units View window From a Units View window you may delete one or more units see Deleting Units on page 138 or assign access rights for one or more units see About Access Rights on page 163 You may also use the Operations button menu to initiate certain actions on one or more units e Hiding units from view see Showing and hiding units on page 119 e Reboot see Importing data on page 355 e Show version see Managed Appliance Settings on page 166 e Push or pull names to from the appliance see Manual name push on page 145 and Manual name pull on page 145 e Wall power on off or cycle see Power Device Sockets on page 191 e Change unit properties see Unit Properties on page 158 Custom operations defined in plug ins may also be listed in
385. logging settings for each connection After enabling data logging on the appliance verify that DSView Data Log is enabled for each connection To check the data logging settings for connections 1 2 3 In a Units View window click on the appliance name Click Appliance Settings click Ports and then Serial in the side navigation bar The Serial window will open Click on the appropriate port NOTE Ifthe Status is Disabled you will not be able to click on the connection To change the status to Enabled see Enabling and disabling data logging on units on page 214 4 5 In the side navigation bar click Data Logging If not already selected click the radio button next to Enable DSView Data Log Any previous data logging settings will be lost 216 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 6 If available click the Flash Required button to ensure that these settings remain even if power is interrupted If the Flash Required button is not displayed the settings have been saved to non volatile Flash memory on the appliance Viewing and customizing the SSH server settings To view and customize the SSH server settings F 2 In a Units View window click on the appliance name Click Appliance Settings click Data Logging and then Syslog SSH Server in the side navigation bar In the DSView Server IP field enter the IP address for the DSView 3 server that will receive data logs This may be either the hub o
386. lues The Authentication Service Certificate Management window will open if only one certificate was selected If more than one certificate was selected each will appear in order in subsequent Accept SSL Certificate windows To unregister certificates a To select one or more certificates click the checkbox to the left of the server IP addresses To unregister all certificates click the checkbox to the left of the IP Address heading b Click Unregister to unregister the certificates c A confirmation message box will appear Confirm or cancel the operation Click Close The User Authentication Services window will open To change user browsing settings for the Active Directory external authentication service 1 2 Click the Users tab Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open Click the name of the AD service The side navigation bar will change to include the name of the AD service at the top and below the name the information you may define From the side navigation bar click User Browsing The Authentication Service User Browsing AD window will open Chapter 6 Authentication Services 97 Click Browse Anonymously to browse users on the external Active Directory authentication server Or Click Browse with User Credentials to browse users on the external Active Directory authentication based on credentials configured on the server If this op
387. lug in documentation for specific requirements Click Licenses in the top navigation bar Chapter 4 Basic Operations 63 Click License Keys in the side navigation bar The License Keys window will open and list each installed license key and a description of the key One of the following descriptions will display beside each key e Adds lt number gt Backup Server s Adds lt N gt backup spoke DSView 3 servers e Adds lt number gt Backup Server s and Unlimited Client Sessions Combines the keys for Adds lt N gt Backup Server s and Client Session Site License e Installation Key Enables first use of the DSView 3 software and sets the initial number of backup DSView 3 servers Demo License Key Enables first use of the DSView 3 software for a certain period of time e Third Party Power Devices Site License Increases the number of third party power devices that can be added to unlimited e Add lt number gt Third Party Power Devices Increases the number of third party power devices e Add lt number gt Managed Devices Increases the number of licensed managed devices e Plug in Id lt number gt License Key Enables use of a plug in for a specific appliance type Adding a new license key To add a new license key 1 an z r 289 Click the System tab Click Licenses in the top navigation bar Click License Keys in the side navigation bar The License Keys window will open Click Add The Add
388. m this display Scan Mode To start scan mode In a Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 select two or more target devices that support KVM connections then click Scan Scan mode will start and the Video Viewer windows will appear in the Thumbnail Viewer A series of thumbnail frames appear in the Thumbnail Viewer each containing a small scaled non interactive version of a target device screen image About scan mode Scan mode moves from one thumbnail image to the next logging into a device and displaying an updated device image for a specified length of time View Time Per Server before logging out of that device and moving on to the next thumbnail image You may specify a scan delay between thumbnails Time Between Servers During the delay you will see the last thumbnail image for all devices in the scan sequence though you won t be logged into any devices When you first launch the Thumbnail Viewer each frame will be filled with a white background until a device image is displayed An indicator light at the bottom of each frame displays the device status The default thumbnail size is based on the number of devices in the scan list Scan mode has a lower priority than an active connection If you or another user are connected to a device that device will be skipped in the scan sequence and scan mode will proceed to the next device unless the Shared Connections Automatically option has been sele
389. ment software Target device session A target device session is a connection through a KVM serial Telnet or web browser Target device sessions do not include power management functionality TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol TCP is one of the main protocols in TCP IP networks The IP protocol deals only with packets TCP enables two hosts to establish a connection and exchange streams of data TCP guarantees delivery of data and that packets will be delivered in the same order in which they were sent Telnet session A Telnet Viewer session is a type of target device session in which the target device supports Telnet and the DSView 3 software client connects directly to the target device using Telnet Telnet Viewer This applet is a software component that provides the user interface needed to display a remote target device through serial over IP sessions Tiered switch A tiered switch is also known as a cascade switch See the definition of cascade switch UDP User Datagram Protocol UDP is a connectionless protocol that runs on top of IP networks like TCP Unlike TCP IP UDP IP provides very few error recovery services offering instead a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IP network UDP is primarily used for broadcasting messages over a network Appendices 457 Unit Unit is a generic term that refers to either a target device managed appliance blade chassis or a component in a virtual environmen
390. ments the spinner number by one Decrements the spinner number by one 37 Basic Operations This chapter describes basic operations and settings including global system properties profiles built in user groups and preemption levels DSView 3 Help NOTE The DSView 3 Help on page 37 section only applies to DSView 3 software versions 3 5 or later The DSView 3 help is hosted on the Avocent web site If you do not have continuous access to the Internet you may wish to install the help on the local DSView 3 server NOTE Help for DSView 3 software plug ins is automatically installed on your local server and is not available from the Avocent web site Configuring the DSView 3 help location DSView 3 administrators can change the DSView 3 help location at any time Help is configured independently for each DSView 3 hub and spoke server To configure the DSView 3 help location 1 Click the System tab then click DSView 3 Server 2 Click Properties Help Configuration in the side navigation bar 3 Specify the location of the help that will be accessed each time Help DSView 3 Management Software Help is clicked Select View help from the Avocent web site to access the latest help for your DSView 3 software version from the Avocent web site Internet connection required or Select View help from this DSView 3 server help location to access the downloaded help from your local server Complete the following procedure for Instal
391. mple 3 with sub domain ou myusers ou sun dc mktg dc sunrise dc mycompany dc com In the Group Container field specify the name of the container to search for user groups This will limit the search scope to that container The name may be entered in several forms optionally including a sub domain Valid forms are explained in step 5b above In the Usemame Type menu select the type of usemame Each choice in the menu contains an example A Full Windows 2000 username is specified as username domain A Partial Windows 2000 username is specified as username A Full Pre Windows 2000 username is specified as domain username A Partial Pre Windows 2000 username is specified as username This option may only be configured for new authentication servers it cannot be modified Existing authentication servers are set to the Partial Windows 2000 Username type for compatibility Specify a Secure Socket Layer SSL encryption mode e Click Do Not Use SSL to have authentication performed using unencrypted clear text instead of SSL encryption This method is the least secure e Click Use SSL in Trust All Mode to use SSL encryption for data transmission All server certificates will be trusted and automatically accepted by the DSView 3 software for transmitting data This SSL method provides medium security This encryption mode is not recommended for wide area networks WANs 92 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide e Click Use
392. must be entered in case sensitive text if your operating system supports case sensitive filenames b Ifthe specified directory location is a network drive that requires a log in enable the Login required to access shared drive location checkbox Then type the username and password and confirm the password of a user account that has read write access to the network share location c To append the date and time in military time to the end of the file name enable the Use date and time for file naming checkbox For example if you are creating the file on October 1 2010 at 10 04 pm the file created will be named usagereport1001102204 csv If an exported report file exists in the specified directory and you do not enable this option it will be overwritten when the new file is created d Click Next 7 The Select Last Number of Days to Export window opens Specify the number of days in the field provided 8 Click Finish 374 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Task Migrating units NOTE This task is valid only when the DSView 3 software is installed on a supported Windows system This task may be used to migrate units from a DSView 2 x software database or from the AlterPath Manager Migrating DSView 2 x software units This task updates DS1800 digital switches CPS appliances or DSR switches within the unit group or any of those managed appliances using firmware compatible with DSView 2 x software to firmware that is
393. must be unique within the active zone but can be duplicated in other zones When using the Add User Group Wizard only authentication services that belong to the active zone can be selected View or export authentication services Any qualified user Active zone only Action Add authentication services Move authentication services Assign unit access rights to users Assign users to groups View effective rights for users User Status Required for Action Any qualified user Not permitted for any user Any qualified user Any qualified user Any qualified user Chapter 16 DS Zones 257 Zone s Affected Active zone only The same authentication service cannot be reused in multiple zones The authentication service must be added to each zone where it will be used As a result virtual users may end up in multiple zones but each instance of the user in a zone is treated as unique user in the DSView 3 software system An authentication service cannot be moved to another zone NOTE An authentication service is permanently owned by the zone that was active when the authentication services was added If necessary you can delete an authentication service from its zone and recreate it in another zone Active zone only Both the user and unit must belong to the active zone Active zone only Both the user and group must belong to the active zone Active zone only 258 DSView 3 Software Inst
394. n The DSView 3 management software is delivered with six predefined user groups Appliance Administrators Auditors DSView 3 software administrators Everyone User Administrators and Users All users are automatically included in the Everyone user group when they are added to the DSView 3 software system Users may be added to any of the other user groups The privileges that a user has to perform tasks on the DSView 3 software system is dependent on the built in user group to which the user is a member See Built in User Groups on page 45 e User defined You may also define custom groups based on any criteria you wish For example you may want to define groups based on user administrators with read only access software developers at a specific location global network infrastructure personnel based on job title and so on Built in user groups appear in the User Groups Built in window and user defined user groups appear in the User Groups User Defined window The Preemption Level column will indicate the preemption level of each user group The windows may also display the following fields Use the Customize link to add or remove fields in the display See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 e Authentication Server Name of the authentication server assigned to the user See Authentication Services on page 87 e Role Role of a user defined user group which may be None User Auditor Appliance Administrator User Adminis
395. n addition to the units listed in this column one or more of these connection types may be valid for units supported by plug ins See the plug in documentation for details Site See Site Department and Location Groups on page 233 Browser URL URL that may be used to access a target device EVR1500 environmental monitor or generic appliance This field will be empty if a URL is not available Custom Field 1 3 Custom fields assigned to units If these fields have been defined with new names the defined names will appear instead of the place holder names Custom Field 1 Custom Field 2 and so on See Custom Fields on page 236 Department See Site Department and Location Groups on page 233 DSView Software Server Name of the server associated with the units Location Location assigned to the units See Site Department and Location Groups on page 233 Migration Status Whether units imported from a DSView 2 x database or AlterPath Manager software require migration to be operational in the DSView 3 software See Task Migrating units on page 373 Model Number See Unit Properties on page 158 Part Number See Unit Properties on page 158 Primary Contact Primary Contact Phone Secondary Contact and Secondary Contact Phone Name and phone number of person s responsible for a unit See Unit Properties on page 158 Serial Number See Unit Properties on page 158 124 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Te
396. n data to the system clipboard e Paste the contents of the system clipboard into a Telnet Viewer session or into another application e Print a screen of the Telnet Viewer session data Information that is copied from a DSView 3 software Telnet Viewer session may be pasted into other applications Similarly information copied from other applications may be pasted into a Telnet Viewer session NOTE Only textual data may be copied and pasted in the DSView 3 software Telnet Viewer To copy a Telnet Viewer session window screen Select Options Copy Screen from the menu or click the Copy Screen icon in the toolbar The screen contents will be saved to the system clipboard You may then paste the clipboard contents into a Telnet Viewer session or into another application To copy all of the Telnet Viewer session buffer contents Select Options Copy Buffer from the menu or click the Copy Buffer icon in the toolbar The entire buffer will be copied to the system clipboard regardless of the amount of data in it You may then paste the clipboard contents into a Telnet Viewer session or into another application To highlight and copy a portion of a Telnet Viewer window screen NOTE When autoscaling has been enabled and the window has been scaled you will not be able to highlight text until you click the Restore icon in the toolbar 1 Use the mouse to drag select the portion of the screen text you wish to copy 2 Select Options Copy T
397. n the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open Click Add The Add Task Wizard will appear Select Control power of Target Devices from the drop down menu Type a 1 64 character name for the task Select a time to run the task see Specifying when to run tasks on page 364 then click Next The Select Unit Group window will open Select All Target Devices to configure the power control settings on all target devices or select a particular unit group to configure See Unit Groups on page 239 Then click Next The Select Target Devices window will open Select one or more target devices in the Available Target Devices list then click Add The target device s will be moved to the Target Devices to Control list Then click Next The Select Power Control Function window will open Select the power control function to be performed on the target devices and then click Next Turn Power On powers up the specified target devices Turn Power Off powers down the specified target devices Cycle Power powers down and then powers up the specified target devices Click Finish Task Exporting an event log csv file This task exports selected fields from the DSView 3 software system event log to a csv file The exported event log may be stored on a local or network drive The event log is named eventlog csv by default but you may also append the date and time to the end of the event log The output csv file may be viewed in a text edi
398. nal authentication service radio button and type the name of the user Then click Next Usernames may contain up to 256 characters Usernames may or may not be case sensitive depending on the requirements of the external authentication server To find the user enable the Find user on external authentication service radio button The Select User from External Authentication Service window will open If the list of users contains more than 5000 entries a message will indicate that not all items are displayed You may filter the list by using the Filter button and the adjacent text field Specifying a username in the text field will return all valid matches If filtering on another item such as full name you must include a wildcard See Filtering information in a window on page 30 Select one or more users from the list then click Next 6 Assign the user to user groups from the Available Groups list which includes all built in and user defined groups Select one or more groups and click Add The group names will move to the Member Of list and the new user s will be added to those groups Click Next 7 From the Preemption Levels menu select a preemption level from 1 4 the higher the number the higher the preemption level See Preemption Levels on page 46 8 Click Finish The user s have been added The DSView 3 software obtains external group membership and external user information when a user logs in If a user s group m
399. nclude in Menu box is checked indicating the macro will appear in the Macros menu If you do not wish to include the macro in the Macros menu uncheck this box In this case if the macro definition includes a hotkey you will still be able to use the hotkey to run the macro even if the macro s name does not appear in the Macros menu Type the macro string in the Keystrokes box For non printing and special character code sequences use the following escape sequences New line n Carriage return r Form feed f Horizontal tab t Backspace b Delay character 500 ms d Hexadecimal code sequence Ox lt NN gt where lt NN gt is the hexadecimal byte For example the Ctrl D character sequence may be sent by using 0x04 Octal code sequence O lt NNN gt where lt NNN gt is the octal byte For example the Ctrl D character sequence may be sent by using 0004 From the Control Code menu select the sequence to invoke with the selected characters In the Access Rights area specify whether you wish for the macro to be a global macro available to all users or a personal macro available only to the current user You must have DSView 3 software administrator privileges to use the Access Rights area Click OK The Configure Macros dialog box retums to its abbreviated display and the macro appears in the Macros area 10 Click OK to close the Configure Macros dialog box To edit an existing macro NOTE You must have DS
400. ndows and Macintosh systems this will be an item in the Control Panel On supported Linux systems from a shell prompt change directory to the bin directory where Java is installed Then type ControlPanel For example cd usr java avocent jrel 5 0_02 bin ControlPanel Select the General tab Click the Settings button Click the View Applications button Select any DSView Video Viewer Application items DY SS Click the Remove Selected Entries button this button may also be named Remove Selected Application If this does not solve the problem repeat step 1 then click the Delete Files button NOTE Clicking the Delete Files button will remove all applications installed with Java Web Start 327 Using the Telnet Viewer The DSView 3 management software ships bundled with a built in proprietary Telnet Viewer that provides features unavailable in many other Telnet programs These features include configurable session properties tailored for each device configurable user preferences for all sessions a scripting function for automatic device login a macro function and a logging function About the Telnet Viewer DSView 3 software clients may use the DSView 3 management software Telnet Viewer to access CPS810 and 1610 appliances and their ports CCM 850 1650 and 4850 appliances and their ports or any generic appliance that supports Telnet Viewer connections NOTE Throughout this chapter the term appliance or
401. ne number and or pager number of the user 272 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 5 Click Save and then click Close Email contact Email contacts may be changed only for internal authentication users To specify email contact information for user 1 Click the Users tab 2 Ina User Accounts window click on a username The User Name window will open 3 Click E Mail Addresses in the side navigation bar The User E Mail Properties window will open 4 Type the primary email address of the user and up to five additional email addresses 5 Click Save and then click Close User notes User notes may be changed only for internal authentication users To specify notes about a user 1 SR ee ye ES Click the Users tab Click on a username The User Name window will open Click Notes in the side navigation bar The User Notes window will open Type any information you wish Click Save and then click Close Custom field properties You may specify any information you wish in the six custom fields Custom field properties may be changed only for internal authentication users To change the custom fields 1 2 3 Click the Users tab Click on a username Click Custom Fields in the side navigation bar The User Custom Fields window will open Type information in the fields Click Save and then click Close Chapter 17 Managing User Accounts 273 User Access Rights Access rights indicate whether
402. ned as a text file using the default text viewer on the DSView 3 software client s computer Before the file is transferred to the browser the DSView 3 software will verify the file s digital signature If the computed digital signature does not match the actual file s digital signature the content of the file will be preceded with a waming indicating that digital signature verification failed and the file content may have been altered If you select a log file that does not reside on the DSView 3 server to which you re logged in the log file is transferred from the appropriate server You may also validate the signature of data log files by exporting the system certificate see System certificate and SSH key on page 52 and Verifying data log file digital signatures on page 221 Verifying data log file digital signatures The DSView 3 software computes hashes for data log files using the SHA1 digest algorithm After a hash is computed for a file it is signed using the RSA public key algorithm and the DSView 3 software X 509 system certificate private key To verify the signature you may use standard tools such as OpenSSL and the DSView 3 software system X 509 certificate public key To view or export the system certificate see System certificate and SSH key on page 52 For example assume the following e A data log file is created with the name cisco router session 2006 04 02 12 12 01 txt e The DSView 3 software signs t
403. new DSView 3 software session To reset a user account password 1 Click the Users tab Click the checkbox to the left of the user s to reset the password Click Reset Password A confirmation dialog box will appear ee es Confirm or cancel the reset Chapter 17 Managing User Accounts 267 Changing User Account Properties If you have DSView 3 software administrator or user administrator privileges you may change the following account properties for a user The user login name and full name e The certificate associated with the user e The SSH key associated with the user e Login password e Account login restrictions and expiration settings e The user groups to which the user is assigned e User preemption levels Home and business addresses e Home business mobile and pager phone numbers e Primary email address and up to five additional email addresses e Notes you wish to add about the user e Up to six custom fields Some properties may be changed only if the user account will be using the DSView 3 software internal authentication service See Authentication Services on page 87 Username The username information that you may specify for a user includes e User Name The name that the DSView 3 software uses to log in and identify the user e Full Name The actual name of the user For example you may use Engrl0 as the username and Jonathan Z Smith as the full name to identify the person associated with the
404. ng Programmable LEDs Scrolling Region Clear tabs Device status report What are you Sat Mode DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide VT220 Keyboard Byte Sequence Esc Esc P Esc L Esc M Esc OA Esc OB Esc OC Esc OD Esc 8 Esc PnA Esc PnB Esc PnC Esc PnD Esc PnkK Esc Pn J Esc PnH Esc Pnf Esc Pnq Esc Pnr Esc Png Esc Pnn Esc Pnc Esc Pnh Appendices 437 VT220 Keyboard Function Delete Pn Characters Insert Pn Characters Delete Pn Lines Insert Character Erase Pn Characters VT52 terminal emulation VT220 Keyboard Byte Sequence Esc PnP Esc Pn L Esc Pn M Esc Pn Esc Pn X Table D 10 lists the keystroke mapping encoding for VT52 terminal emulation Table D 10 VT52 Encoding VT52 Keyboard Delete Up Arrow Down Arrow Right Arrow Left Arrow Shift F 1 Shift F2 Shift F3 Shift F4 Table D 11 lists the decoding for VT52 terminal emulation PC Character Sequence Delete Up Arrow Down Arrow Right Arrow Left Arrow PF1 PF2 PF3 PF4 VT52 Keyboard Byte Sequence Ox7F EscA EscB EscC Esc D EscP EscQ EscR EscS 438 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Table D 11 VT52 Decoding VT52 Keyboard Function VT52 Keyboard Byte Sequence Cursor Up EscA Cursor Down EscB Cursor Right EscC Cursor Left EscD Cursor Home EscH Reverse Linefeed Escl Erase to end of screen Esc J Erase to end of line EscK Table D 12 lists the VT52 and ANSI auxiliary
405. ng User defined User Groups on page 276 To add a TACACS external authentication service 1 On the TACACS server that will be used as an external authentication service add the DSView 3 server as a TACACS client Make a note of the configured shared secret and the available authentication type s on the TACACS server 2 From the DSView 3 Explorer Click the Users tab 3 Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open 4 Click Add The Add Authentication Service Wizard will appear 5 The Provide Authentication Service Name and Type window will open a Type a 1 64 character name for the TACACS authentication service b Select TACACS from the Type menu c Click Next 6 The Specify TACACS Connection Settings window will open a Type the address of the TACACS host or type the DNS host name in the Server Address field b Type the number of the port from 1 65535 connecting to the TACACS host in the Port Number field The default port is 49 108 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide c Click Next 7 The Establish Connection with Authentication Service window will open briefly If the external authentication service is contacted successfully the Specify TACACS Authentication Settings window will open a Select the authentication type from the Authentication Type menu Make sure it is one of the available authentication types noted in step 1
406. ng d Dlu zriT xa zs zy suna lalalhtk di balsa W ae a als sa S da BE salak bada sbi dala 403 Disabling and activating a plug in 00 A LALES EEE eee eee SEE EEE KAKA SA 403 Appendix A Technical Support 2 2222 00 22 sS KK eee eee 405 Appendix B TCP and UDP Ports 2 2 22 saa sas e eee 407 Appendix C DSR Remote Operations Software 222222 22 415 Appendix D Terminal Emulation 22 22 KK KK k66 425 Appendix E Regaining Access to the DSView 3 Software 2 2 22 443 Appendix F Glossary 322 502 lt 8 cidec2 a Soa Xa bab ia Sind se nek be A Ee aki deh 445 Product Overview The DSView 3 management software version 3 7 is a secure web browser based centralized enterprise management solution that allows users to remotely access manage monitor and control target devices through Avocent managed appliances A session may be launched to a target device with a single point of access Features and Benefits Network rebooting and troubleshooting The DSView 3 software uses industry standard IP connections so that you can easily troubleshoot a server or even reboot it from the Network Operations Center NOC from your desk or from any location in the world With the DSView 3 software you can access all of your data center devices from a single screen making complex network access and control remarkably easy Using out of b
407. ng enabled no other user in the system may switch to that port To open an exclusive non shared KVM session from the DSView 3 Explorer 1 Ina Units View window containing the target device you want to access see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the alternate actions arrow in the Action column of the target device A list of actions will appear 2 Click the Exclusive KVM Session link The Video Viewer launches in a new window A yellow dot will appear next to the icon of the target device in the Units View windows to indicate an Exclusive KVM connection Other users may not share that session To open an exclusive non shared KVM session in the Unit Overview window 1 Ina Units View window containing the target device you want to access see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the name of the target device The Unit Overview window will open 2 Click Exclusive KVM Session Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 289 Click the KVM Session icon or link in the Unit Overview window The Video Viewer launches in a new window A yellow dot will appear next to the icon of the target device in the Units View windows to indicate an Exclusive KVM connection Other users may not share the session Connecting to an existing session When you attempt to connect to a port already in use by another user the Cannot connect to the server dialog box displays and states that the port is in use along with the name o
408. ng is paused or stopped To ensure the log file is up to date either pause or stop the logging To change the default log file directory 1 Select Options Session Properties from the menu or click the Session Settings icon in the toolbar The Session Properties dialog box will appear 342 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Click the Logging tab The Default Directory field displays the current default location for logfiles Click the Browse button The Set Directory dialog box appears Select a directory from the Look in list or create a new directory To create a new directory a Click the Create New Folder button A new directory named New Folder appears in the directory list b Click the New Folder entry in the directory list to highlight it Then click the entry again to edit its name Type in a new name Press Enter The directory appears in alphabetical order in the directory list c Select the newly created directory in the directory list The Filename field will now contain the name of the new directory Click the Set Directory button to select the newly created or selected directory as the default log file directory The Set Directory dialog box will close The Default Directory field now contains the name of the newly created or selected directory Click OK to save the new information To enable automatic logging 1 Select Options Session Properties from the menu or click the Session Settings icon
409. ng of another switch For more information see the DSR Switch Installer User Guide NOTE PEM cascade devices are not supported 6 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide MergePoint service processor SP manager The MergePoint service processor manager is a secure centralized enterprise management solution for target devices equipped with IPMI HP iLO and Dell DRAC service processors You can use the DSView 3 software to access monitor and control the MergePoint SP manager and attached target devices The MergePoint SP manager provides a standardized interface independent of the management protocols used to manage each target device Management operations can be performed either by using commands or scripts over a Telnet or SSH version 2 session or by using the appliance s web interface from a standard web browser For more information see the MergePoint appliance plug in documentation Cyclades OnSite branch office appliance OnSite branch office appliances may be used to access multiple traditional or headless servers networking devices infrastructure components or any other device with a serial console or KVM port You can use the DSView 3 software to access monitor and control the OnSite appliance and attached target devices For more information see the OnSite appliance plug in documentation Virtual environments The DSView 3 management software plug in for Virtualization allows you to access and control virtual mac
410. nge the properties of a task 1 Click the System tab Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open Click on the name of the task Click Properties in the side navigation bar The Task Properties window will open E ERN J9 Change the properties of the task See the operating sequence for the task type in Adding Tasks Using the Add Task Wizard on page 367 Firmware Management The Flash firmware files for DS1800 digital switches DSIS100 CPS and CCM appliances and DSR switches may be added viewed and deleted using the Appliance Firmware Files window Once a Flash firmware file s has been added you may use the file s to upgrade the managed appliance To display the Appliance Firmware Files window 1 Click the System tab 2 Chapter 22 Using Tasks 385 Click 4ppliance Files in the top navigation bar The Appliance Firmware Files window will open Customizing the Appliance Firmware Files window The Version firmware Type Appliance Type Creation Date and Time Description Language and Count y fields may appear in the display Use the Customize link to add or remove fields in the display See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 To add a firmware file 1 2 6 7 Click the System tab Click Appliance Files in the top navigation bar The Appliance Firmware Files window will open Click Add The Add Firmware File Wizard will appear Enter the directory and filename or br
411. nge unit information Name in DSView Name of the unit as defined in the DSView 3 software database Type Type of target device or managed appliance model Managed appliance types cannot be changed to assign a type to a target device see Unit Overview Windows on page 125 Status Current activity level of a unit Table 7 1 lists and describes the possible values Table 7 1 Unit Status Values Unit type Status and Icon Icon Description Any unit Idle N A The unit is powered up with no connection Chapter 7 Units View Windows 121 Unit type Any unit Any unit Target devices Target devices Target devices Target devices Managed appliances Status and Icon InUse Status Unknown No Power KVM Blocked No device attached topology view only Partial Power Not Responding Icon N A Description The unit has at least one active connection The status of the unit was reported to the software but cannot be obtained for an unknown reason The target device is powered down The connection path to the target device is blocked because a cascade switch is already in use The port does not have a target device attached The DSView 3 software cannot determine the power state of the target device or the software received a mixed power state from the target device For example if a target device has a KVM connection and a power device connection the software will prompt for a power
412. nitial Configuration since it has not yet been verified for the final configuration The administrator will associate the DSR1021 switch managed by John Smith to the custom fields as follows a b C Click Appliances in the side navigation bar The Appliances All window will open Click on the DSR1021 switch The Unit Overview window will open Click Properties in the side navigation bar and then click Custom Fields The Unit Custom Fields window will open including the custom field names defined in step 1 In the Test Configuration field type Initial Configuration In the Appliances and target devices field type DSR1021 Switches In the Manager field type John Smith 238 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide g Click Save and then click Close The Appliance All window will open The side navigation bar will now include Test Configuration instead of Custom Field Labels 3 The test configuration will also include an EVR1500 environmental monitor that is managed by Mary Jones The EVR1500 environmental monitor has also not been verified for the final configuration so the administrator will include it in the Initial Configuration category a e f In the Appliances All window click on the EVR1500 environmental monitor The Unit Overview window will open Click Properties in the side navigation bar and then click Custom Fields The Unit Custom Fields window will open including the custom field names defined
413. nits Upgrade firmware of selected appliances of the same type Validate external authentication server user accounts Pull names from selected units Update topology for selected units Backup the Power Manager database Restore the Power Manager database Specifying when to run tasks You may choose to run tasks at the following times Chapter 22 Using Tasks 365 Run task now Runs the task immediately after you click Finish when adding the task in the Add Task Wizard The Status column will indicate Running and the running icon will appear to the left of the task name One time only Runs the task once at a specific time on a specific date Periodic Runs the task a certain number of times per hour or day beginning at a specific time on a specific date Daily Runs the task once every day once Monday Friday or regularly for a certain number of days every 2 days every 3 days and so on beginning at a specific time on a specific date Weekly Runs the task once each week or regularly over a certain number of weeks every 2 weeks every 3 weeks and so on beginning at a specific time on a specific date You may also specify which days you wish for the task to run Monthly Runs the task once each month or regularly over a certain number of months every 2 months every 3 months and so on beginning at a specific time on a specific date You may also specify specific months for the task to run To run a task periodically
414. nits View window by clicking the link in the Action column See Units View Windows on page 115 You may also initiate a session with a target device from a Unit Overview window See Unit Overview Windows on page 125 For information about controlling the power of target devices attached to power devices see Power Control of Devices Attached to Power Devices on page 192 Using the Side Navigation Bar The side navigation bar is used to display windows that specify settings or perform operations The contents of the side navigation bar varies depending on the tab and top navigation bar selections and the window that is displayed Chapter 3 DSView 3 Explorer Windows 29 y Unit Views Target Devices Y Appliances 0 All G Acs48 O DSR1031 DB DSR8035 j Recently Accessed J Active Sessions w Figure 3 2 Example Side Navigation Bar Table 3 2 Side Navigation Bar Descriptions Number Arrow Description x Expand All Nodes Click this arrow in the upper right corner to expand all nodes and display additional links Collapse All Nodes Click this arrow in the upper right corner to collapse all nodes and amp 2 their links 3 Vv Collapse Node Click this arrow to collapse an opened tree branch and its links 4 gt Expand Node Click this arrow to expand a closed tree branch and display its links You may choose whether an expanded node will collapse when another Expand Node arrow is
415. nization feature will push and or pull names You may enable the name push and name pull operations to run automatically You may also push and pull names manually Name push When the name of a target device or cascade device is changed in the DSView 3 software database a push operation will update the target device cascade device serial port and power device socket names in the appliance You may also rename units associated with a single connection to a target device in the DSView 3 software database The name push operation will then push the new unit names to the appliance Name pull When the name of a target device cascade device serial port or power device socket is changed in a managed appliance a pull operation will update the target device and cascade device names in the DSView 3 software database You may enable disable automatic name push and automatic name pull You may also manually initiate a push or pull operation at any time 142 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Automatic name push When automatic name push is enabled the name push operation occurs automatically when a name is changed in the DSView 3 software Table 9 1 Automatic Name Push Operation Effects Unit Appliance serial ports Power devices Power device sockets Target devices Cascade switches Effect If the target device for the serial port in the DSView 3 software database has a single appliance connection t
416. nk see Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 If a page s content cannot fit vertically and or horizontally in the window scroll bars will appear The current page and total number of pages appear in the top left corner of the window Many operations allow you to select all items on a page by enabling a checkbox located to the left of the column headings in the window Enabling this checkbox selects all the items listed on a page whether or not the entire page is visible However for multi page displays items listed on other pages will not be included in the selection The only time you can select all items on all pages of a multipage display in one step is when you are setting access rights from a Units View windows For this operation if you click Rights in a Units View window with no units selected all units on all pages will be affected by the operation Bookmarking a window Many windows contain a bookmark icon and text in the top option bar Bookmarking a window will add a link to the window in the Favorites menu You may select the link at any time to quickly access the bookmarked window If you bookmark a window and information related to the window changes this new information will appear in the window when you next display the bookmarked window For example if you bookmark the Recently Accessed window and then access other units the bookmarked window will contain these other units the next time you display the bookm
417. ns Session Properties from the menu or click the Session Settings icon in the toolbar The Session Properties dialog box will appear Click the Terminal tab When connecting to devices that do not insert a carriage retum in incoming or outgoing data automatically inserting a line after each line of data can prevent overwriting data when a new line is received If the New Line Mode Inbound box is checked an inbound carriage return from the device will be treated as if both a carriage retum and a linefeed were received If not checked a linefeed is not added to an inbound carriage return If the New Line Mode Outbound box is checked an outbound carriage return to the device will always be followed by a linefeed character If not checked a linefeed is not sent with a carriage retum The default value is disabled for inbound and outbound To enable disable line wrap 1 Select Options Session Properties from the menu or click the Session Settings icon in the toolbar The Session Properties dialog box will appear Click the Terminal tab Enable or disable the Auto wrap line checkbox When line wrap is enabled characters wrap onto the next line when a new character is received and the cursor is at the end of the Chapter 20 Using the Telnet Viewer 335 line When disabled new characters will overwrite the last character on the current line when the cursor is at the end of the line The default value is enabled To enable
418. ntication Previously known as Windows NT Challenge Response NT CR or NT LAN Manager NTLM Integrated Windows Authentication is a secure form of web browser authentication using either the Kerberos V5 authentication protocol or its own challenge response authentication protocol This authentication method works best in an intranet environment where the types of web browsers that your network users access may be controlled If you are already logged on to Windows Integrated Windows Authentication uses your logon information for authentication so it will not prompt for a username and password known as Single Sign On SSO Integrated Windows Authentication only works with Internet Explorer and does not work with an HTTP proxy Integrated Windows Authentication must be explicitly enabled under the Advance Internet Options dialog box of Internet Explorer version 6 0 SPI and above IQ module An IQ smart module uses CAT 5 cabling to attach a target device to a KVM switch The IQ module significantly reduces cable bulk in the rack and is well suited for high density installations An IQ module is connected to a DSR switch or other supported KVM switch Java Java is an environment for developing and deploying distributed scalable enterprise level applications designed to run on networks the Internet and the WWW The Java platform consists of a set of services Application Program Interfaces APIs and protocols that provide functionali
419. o more than one macro group or belong to both personal and global macro groups however a macro does not have to belong to a macro group Selecting Macros Configure Groups takes you to the Configure Macro Groups dialog box which contains a list of defined macro groups from which you may select one group or all defined groups The macros in the selected group s are then available for use during subsequent Telnet Viewer sessions with that device port After defining a macro or a macro group you may edit or delete it at any time When you delete a macro or macro group you are prompted for confirmation When you change a macro group name each macro belonging to the changed macro group is updated but the change is not visible until the next Telnet Viewer session is established When you delete a macro group you delete only its name the individual macros in the group are not affected To create a macro 1 Select Macros Configure Macros from the menu The Configure Macros dialog box appears 2 Click Create The Configure Macros dialog box expands to display an Edit Macro area 338 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide In the Macro Name field Type a 1 64 character name for the macro To define a hotkey for the macro choose one from the Key list To add a modifier to the hotkey check the Control Shift or Alt boxes A macro s hotkey is accessible only when the macro belongs to the active macro group By default the I
420. o restore the installation directory to the default C Program Files Avocent DSView 3 DSR Remote Operations b Click Next Appendices 419 The Installing window will open and displays the progress of the installation The software will be installed in the specified folder and a Start Programs Avocent DSView 3 DSR Remote Operations shortcut menu will be created If a previous version of the DSR Remote Operations software already exists on the Client computer message boxes may appear asking if you want to overwrite existing files Click Yes to All When the software has finished installing the DSR Remote Operations Installation window will open a To start the DSR Remote Operations select Click here to invoke the DSR Remote Operations application b Click Done when you are finished Using the DSR Remote Operations software To start the DSR Remote Operations software 1 Establish a dial up connection to the switch from the PC containing the DSR remote operations software Windows displays a dialog box that prompts the user for a username and password when a dial up connection is established It is not necessary to enter a username or password in the dialog box When this dialog box appears click OK to close the dialog box Once the connection has been established select Start Programs Avocent DSView 3 DSR Remote Operations to start the DSR Remote Operations software on the PC The Login dialog box will ap
421. ocedure is valid for supported KVM switches and serial console appliances It may also be valid for appliances supported by a plug in see the appropriate documentation You must have the Reboot Appliance and Disconnect Sessions unit access right See About Access Rights on page 163 Additionally your preemption level must be higher than the preemption level of the active session user See Preemption Levels on page 46 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name 2 Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar Then click Sessions in the side navigation bar then Active The Appliance Sessions window will open 3 To disconnect one or more sessions click the checkbox to the left of the sessions To disconnect all sessions on the page click the checkbox to the left of Start Date Time at the top of the list 4 Click Disconnect A confirmation dialog box will appear For virtual media sessions on supported KVM switches If you attempt to disconnect an active virtual media session or a KVM session that is locked to a virtual media session a confirmation message is displayed indicating that any virtual media mappings will be disconnected Confirm or cancel See Using Virtual Media on page 320 5 Confirm or cancel the disconnect Active sessions on a target device To display information about active sessions on a target device In a Units View window cont
422. of supported SP commands see the documentation included with the MergePoint SP manager 233 Grouping Units The DSView 3 Explorer automatically groups managed appliances by the type of appliance DSR switch ACS console server and so on Target devices are automatically grouped based on the type to which they are assigned You may also add and change the following types of groups Sites Departments e Locations e Custom fields Custom fields allow a user to create groupings of units which are accessed by all DSView 3 software users e Personal and global unit groups Global unit groups may be seen by all users personal unit groups are visible only to the user who created the group Site Department and Location Groups You may create one or more site department and location names and then associate units with them For example you could create sites names such as Austin and Sunrise department names such as Software Development and Human Resources or location names such as Lab Room 101 and System Administrator s Office Site Department and or Location columns may be included in a Units View window display using the Customize link See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 To group units by site department or location you first create a site department location then associate units with it Sites departments locations that contain units to which a user does not have access rights will not appear in the si
423. of the auditors group this user would also be able to preempt the session of a user belonging to the administrators or appliance administrators user groups An administrator or user administrator may also specify an OSCAR graphical user interface preemption level that is applied to users accessing target devices through the OSCAR interface See KVM Switch and Cascade Switch Settings on page 175 48 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Internet Explorer Considerations When the Internet Explorer web browser is used specific settings are required to enable the DSView 3 software to operate correctly e SSL Secure Sockets Layer certificates Used for secure authentication between the DSView 3 software client and DSView 3 software hub server see Certificates on page 52 e ActiveX controls Used to display Telnet application serial and KVM sessions e Security Zones Used to control the actions that may be performed within Internet Explorer For example the operation of JavaScript which is used by the DSView 3 software is dependent on security zone settings e Advanced Internet options Used for miscellaneous settings that enhance the use of the DSView 3 software Managing ActiveX controls The DSView 3 software uses ActiveX controls to provide interactive content for viewers The Avocent Telnet Viewer uses Java see Java Installation on page 23 for information The functionality of the ActiveX controls is determined by
424. of the unit group you want to display information about Click on the unit group name The side navigation bar will contain information links about the selected unit group e Click Name in the side navigation bar to display the unit group name e Click Members in the side navigation bar to display the unit group members Click Groups to display a list of groups that are members of the unit group e Click Units to display a list of units that are members of the unit group e Click Access Rights in the side navigation bar to display the unit group access rights Click Close Adding or deleting a unit group To add a unit group 1 2 3 Click the Units tab Click Groups in the top navigation bar The Unit Groups window will open Click the checkbox next to the group container Global Root or Personal Root or the group name that you want to be the parent of the new unit group Click Add The Add Unit Group window will open Type a 1 64 character name for the unit group The name must be unique within the parent group For example two groups can be named development but they cannot both be members of the unit group Huntsville This unique name restriction does not apply to personal unit groups that are owned by different users If you do not want the unit group or any of its child unit groups to appear in the side navigation bar enable the Do not display this unit group nor any child unit groups as unit views
425. oftware uses an SSL based connection to the DSR switch to authenticate the user NOTE Users may be managed within the internal database of the DSR switch using the PPP Configuration menu See the installer user guide for your DSR switch for more information 416 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Figure C 1 Using the DSR Remote Operations Software with a DSR Switch Table C 1 System Configuration Descriptions Number Description Number Description 1 CAT 5 Connection 7 Modem 2 KVM Connection to Switch 8 Analog User OSCAR Interface 3 Remote IP Connection 9 Ethernet 4 AC Power Cord 10 Telephone Network 5 Power Device 11 DSR Remote Operations Client 6 DSR Switch 12 DSView 3 Software Server Authentication Appendices 417 Before using the DSR Remote Operations software The following actions should be performed before using the DSR Remote Operations software Ensure that the switch is configured See the installer user guide for the DSR switch for more information Ensure that users have been added to the internal database of the DSR switch If the DSView 3 server is not available the appliance database is used for appliance authentication If neither are available authentication cannot be performed for the switch and an error will be displayed by the DSR Remote Operations software See the installer user guide for the DSR switch for more information An external modem must be attached to the PPP modem
426. omatic Name Pull Properties window will open To enable automatic name pull enable the Pull Names from appliances to DSView automatically checkbox To disable automatic name pull disable the Pull Names from appliances to DSView automatically checkbox and go to the last step For target devices that have multiple connections you may set the connection type priority by using the arrows to re order the available types This order determines which target device name will be pulled from one or more appliances to update the DSView 3 software database The name will be pulled from only one appliance Click Save Chapter 9 Synchronizing the DSView 3 Software Database 145 Manual name push You may initiate a manual name push from a Units View window see below and from the following windows e Target Devices window see Target Device Settings on page 172 e Power Device window see Power Devices on page 187 e Power Device Sockets window see Power Device Sockets on page 191 e Appliance cascade switches window see KVM Switch and Cascade Switch Settings on page 175 To initiate a name push operation from a Units View window 1 Ina Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the checkboxes next to one or more units To select all units on the page click the checkbox to the left of the heading at the top of the list 2 Click Operations then select Push Names to Appliance from the drop down menu 3 The M
427. on This file is created by the RSA Authentication Manager but is located on the DSView 3 software client machine Then click Next 112 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide The sdconf rec file will be uploaded from the DSView 3 software client to the DSView 3 server This file will be used as the initial RSA configuration file for all DSView 3 software servers If some DSView 3 servers require a different configuration a different sdconf rec file must be configured Additionally some installations may require an advanced option file sdopts rec for load balancing You may specify these files using the procedure to change settings for the RSA SecurID external authentication service 7 The Establish Connection with Authentication Service window will open briefly If the external authentication service is added successfully the Completed Successful window will open Click Finish The User Authentication Services window will open with the new service listed After the service is added one or more RSA user accounts must be added to the DSView 3 software NOTE The node secret file for the server will not be created until the first RSA user logs into the DSView 3 software To change settings for the RSA SecurlD external authentication service 1 Click the Users tab 2 Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open 3 Click on the name of the SecurlD service
428. on such as Microsoft Excel Once this task is added you may run it on demand at any time see Running tasks manually on page 382 To add the task 1 haz BEYA 7 Click the System tab Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open Click Add The Add Task Wizard will appear Select Export Asset Report to a comma separated values CSV file from the drop down menu Type a 1 64 character name for the task Select a time to run the task see Specifying when to run tasks on page 364 then click Next The Specify Export Asset Report Properties window opens a Type the directory in which to create the file which may be a physical local drive on the DSView 3 server or at a shared network location specified by a UNC path The location cannot be set to a mapped network drive The directory name must be entered in case sensitive text if your operating system supports case sensitive filenames If the specified directory location is a network drive that requires a log in enable the Login required to access shared drive location checkbox Then type the username and password and confirm the password of a user account that has read write access to the network share location To append the date and time in military time to the end of the file name enable the Use date and time for file naming checkbox For example if you are creating the file on October 1 2010 at 10 04 pm the file created will be named
429. on profile to a target device 1 Ina Units View window containing target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the target device name 2 Click Properties in the side navigation bar then click Profiles in the side navigation bar The Profiles window will open 3 Select the desired profile 4 Click Save and then click Close Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 301 To assign a KVM session profile to multiple target devices 1 ae a area X In a Units View window containing target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the checkbox next to one or more target devices To change the KVM session profile for all target devices in the page click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list Click Operations then select Properties from the drop down menu The Multiple Unit Properties window will open Click Profile Select a KVM session profile from the menu Click Save and then click Close Using Menu Commands to Manage Session Settings KVM session profiles contain settings for the many following operations In a profile if the Allow users to override this setting checkbox is enabled for a setting or if a profile has not been assigned to a target device Video Viewer users connected to that target device may use the Video Viewer menu commands buttons described in this section General commands All of the following commands except enabling disabling full screen mo
430. on version hardware version interface type and USB speed 3 To display an individual module s settings click on an IQ module The Appliance IQ Module Settings window will open To delete offline IQ modules NOTE Any offline module will have a red circle and an X to the left of its EID An online module will have a green circle to the left of its EID 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the KVM switch name 2 Click Appliance Settings click Ports and then click JO Modules in the side navigation bar The Appliance IQ Modules window will open 3 Click Delete Offline A confirmation dialog box will appear 4 Confirm or cancel the deletion To upgrade IQ modules NOTE Offline IQ modules may not be selected for upgrading 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances click on the KVM switch name KVM Chapter 10 Managing Units 175 2 Click Appliance Settings click Ports and then click JO Modules in the side navigation bar The Appliance IQ Modules window will open 3 Click the checkbox to the left of the IQ modules you wish to upgrade To select all IQ modules on the page click the checkbox to the left of EID at the top of the list 4 Click Upgrade A confirmation dialog box will appear 5 Confirm or cancel the upgrade If the upgrade is confirmed a yellow LED icon will appear to the left of the upgrading modules You may click on the nam
431. one any associated sites departments or locations are deleted Import or export units unit groups users user groups and associated Any qualified user Toor from the active zone only relationships User actions in a zone Table 16 2 User Actions in a Zone Ka ZE E DZ DR DD II EE E CE NE E EE GGWJSWJWESCQCGQSELWE SEE W K User Status Required for Action Action Zone s Affected View user accounts Any qualified user Active zone only 256 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Action User Status Required for Action Zone s Affected Active zone only Add or delete users Any qualified user NOTE When adding a user the username must be unique within the active zone but can be duplicated in other zones When using the Add User Wizard only authentication services and groups that belong to the active zone can be selected Users and user groups cannot be Move users or user groups to a zone Not permitted for any user Any qualified user moved user to another zone NOTE Auser or user group is permanently owned by the zone that was active when the user was added but a user can visit switch to other zones If necessary you can delete a user or user group from its zone and recreate it in another zone Active zone only View user groups Add or delete user groups Any qualified user NOTE Built in user groups cannot be deleted Active zone only NOTE The user group name
432. onfiguring Data Logging Complete the following steps to configure DSView 3 software data logging e Make sure you have sufficient data log licenses one per port connection for which you want to log session data see Data log licenses on page 212 e Enable the SSH server see Enabling the SSH server on page 213 e Enable the Syslog server see Enabling the Syslog server on page 214 e Enable data logging on appliance and or target device connections see Enabling and disabling data logging on units on page 214 Chapter 13 Data Logging 213 Verify the data logging settings for each connection see Verifying the data logging settings for each connection on page 215 Customize the SSH server settings see Viewing and customizing the SSH server settings on page 216 Configure the notification mode for buffer warning events as SNMP see Configuring the buffer warnings events as SNMP on page 217 Specify where the data log files will be stored see Specifying where data log files will be stored on page 217 Specify archiving properties see Archiving and deleting data log files on page 218 Only DSView 3 software administrators may enable the SSH and Syslog servers specify where the data log files will be stored and specify archiving properties You must have the Configure Unit Settings access right to enable disable data logging Enabling the SSH server The SSH server must be enabled in the DSView 3 software to use the data logging
433. onnect to the hub server using the Trusted Sites security zone The Trusted Sites zone contains very low security settings and ensures successful communication between the client and the hub server To display or change the restrictions of a security zone 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options The Internet Options dialog box appears Click the Security tab Select the security zone you wish to view Click Custom Level The Security Settings dialog box appears ee Cage SE NS Ensure that the following security settings are set to Enabled or Prompt The Active Scripting setting should be set to Enabled e Download Signed ActiveX Controls e Run ActiveX Controls and Plug Ins e Launching Programs and Files in an IFRAME e Active Scripting 6 Click OK to save the settings and close the Security Settings dialog box 7 Click OK to close the Intemet Options dialog box To add a hub server to the Trusted Sites list NOTE If Trusted Sites security zone settings have been modified from their defaults ensure that the correct settings required for the DSView 3 software are specified as indicated above OO SS Oy opi Chapter 4 Basic Operations 51 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options The Internet Options dialog box appears Click the Security tab Click Trusted Sites then click Sites The Trusted Sites dialog box appears Type the web site address in standard dot notation xxx xxx xxx xxx for
434. open Click Password in the side navigation bar The User Password window will open Type the new password for the user and verify the new password To force a user to define a new password during the next login enable the User must change password at next login checkbox Click Save and then click Close User account restrictions and expiration settings Account restriction and expiration settings may be changed only for internal authentication users To change user account restrictions and expiration settings 1 2 3 Click the Users tab Click on a username The User Name window will open Click Restrictions in the side navigation bar The User Account Restrictions window will open To change account restrictions e To prevent the user from logging into the DSView 3 software enable the Disable user account checkbox Users with open sessions will remain logged in To re enable the user account uncheck the Disable user account checkbox To force a user to define a new password during the next login enable the User must change password at next login checkbox 270 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide e To prevent the user from changing the password enable the User cannot change password checkbox To prevent a user s password from expiring enable the Click Password never expires checkbox e To designate the account as a service account enable the Service Account checkbox A service account cannot be
435. opriate documentation To add a managed appliance from a range or list of IP addresses 1 In a Units View window containing managed appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click Add The Add Appliance Wizard will open The Select Add Unit Procedure window will open To enter IP addresses as a delimited list click Add multiple appliances then click Next Enter IPv4 and or IPv6 addresses separated by either a comma or a semi colon Or To enter an IP address range click Discover appliances on the network from an IPv4 address range or an IPv6 subnet then click Next Select Use IPv4 address range and type the IP address from which to begin and end the search in the corresponding fields or select Use IPv6 subnet and type the IPv6 network prefix in the corresponding field Click Next 136 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 4 The DSView 3 software will search for managed appliances within the IP address range When the search is completed the Select Appliances to Add window will open listing the results 5 Add or remove appliances To add one or more managed appliances select the managed appliances in the Appliances found list then click Add The managed appliances will be moved to the Appliances to Add list To remove one or more managed appliances select the managed appliances in the Appliances to Add list then click Remove The managed appliances will be moved to the Appliances foun
436. or link The Save Appliance Configuration Template Wizard opens Or 158 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 3 4 In a Units View window containing appliances select the checkbox next to the appliance for which you want to apply the appliance configuration template From the Operations menu select Appliance Replacement Enter the IP address of the failed appliance From the list select the appliance configuration template you want to apply Click Save The Completed Successful window opens Click Finish Unit Properties A user with access rights may change the following properties for a unit Overview Specify the type and icon for a target device Identity May be helpful for quickly identifying information about a unit Location site department and location May be helpful for identifying where a unit is See Site Department and Location Groups on page 233 Contacts Identify the primary and secondary contacts may be helpful for quickly identifying the people to notify if an issue or question arises about a particular unit Custom fields Ten custom fields are available in which you may specify any information you wish For example you may wish to define custom fields such as Program Manager Building Number and so on See Custom Fields on page 236 Notes Network KVM session profile See Managing KVM session profiles on page 297 You may specify which properties display in a Units View window by
437. or Global displays only global macros Select the desired macro from the Defined Macros list and then click Delete You are prompted to confirm the deletion Confirm or cancel the deletion Click Close To copy a macro 1 7 Select Macros Configure Macros from the Video Viewer menu or click the Macros button The Macros dialog box appears Select one of the following All displays both personal and global macros Personal displays only personal macros or Global displays only global macros Select the desired macro from the Defined Macros list and then click Copy The Copy Macro dialog box will appear Type a 1 32 character name in the Name of copied macro field Select whether you wish to make the copied macro a personal or global macro from the Macro Type area Click OK to copy the macro The Copy Macro dialog box is closed and the copied macro will appear in the Macros dialog box Click Close Macro groups Macro groups may not be displayed created edited renamed copied or deleted if you are using the DSR Remote Operations software To create a macro group 1 Select Macros Configure Macro Groups from the Video Viewer menu or click the Macro Groups button The Macro Groups dialog box appears Click Create The Create Edit Macro Group dialog box will appear In the Macro Group Name field enter a 1 32 character unique macro group name 318 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide
438. ors only see Built in User Groups on page 45 When you are prompted to preempt the user s session and you click Preempt the other user the user requesting access to the target device will be connected and existing user s will lose their connection to the target device The existing user s will be notified that their sessions have been preempted You cannot preempt a local user who is in broadcast mode See the DSR Installer User Guide for more information 290 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Make a stealth connection DSView 3 software administrators appliance administrators and user administrators only see Built in User Groups on page 45 When you are prompted to connect using Stealth mode and you click Stealth mode a Video Viewer window session will be started but you will only be able to view what occurs on the target device without controlling the keyboard or mouse The user who is currently active will not be notified that access is being shared and no request to authorize sharing will be made If the user s preemption level is higher than or equal to yours the stealth connection may not be permitted see Preemption Levels on page 46 Up to 12 users may share a single port at one time If a 13th user attempts to connect an error message will inform the user that no sessions are available To display a list of users sharing their port or channel select View List of Shared Users in the Video Viewer window Users in st
439. ose one of the following actions e Select a socket that has not been powered up and select Tools Power On from the menu bar e Select a socket that has not been powered up and click the Power On toolbar button e Right click on a socket that has not been powered up and select Power On from the shortcut menu The socket will power up and the icon for the socket in the content area will change 3 To power down a device attached to a power device socket choose one of the following actions e Select a socket that has not been powered down and select Tools Power Off from the menu bar 424 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide e Select a socket that has not been powered down and click the Power Off toolbar button e Right click on a socket that has not been powered down and select Power Off from the shortcut menu The socket will power down and the icon for the socket in the content area will change 4 To cycle the power of a device attached to a power device socket choose one of the following actions e Select a socket that is powered up and select Tools Cycle Power from the menu bar e Select a socket that is powered up and click the Cycle Power toolbar button e Right click on a socket that is powered up and select Cycle Power from the shortcut menu The socket will power down then power up and the icon for the socket in the content area will change accordingly 5 To lock or unlock the current state of a po
440. osed the virtual media session will also be closed When locking is disabled and the KVM session is closed the virtual media session will remain active Locking You may set the access mode for mapped drives to read only or read write When the access mode is read only the user will not be able to write data to the mapped drive on the client workstation When the access mode is read write the user will be Mapped drivesaccess able to read and write data from to the mapped drive If the mapped drive is read only mode by design for example certain CD DVD drives or ISO images the configured read write access mode will be ignored Setting the read only mode can be helpful when a read write drive such as a mass storage device or a USB removable media is mapped and you wish to prevent the user from writing data to it You may configure up to three encryption levels or none for virtual media sessions Encryption level Any combination is valid The choices are DES 3DES 128 bit SSL and AES The default is no encryption no encryption levels selected Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 323 Opening a virtual media session To launch a virtual media session Select Tools Virtual Media from the Video Viewer menu The Virtual Media dialog box will appear To make this a reserved session click Details then enable the Reserved checkbox To map a virtual media drives 1 Open a virtual media session from the Video Viewer menu by
441. ou can also create appliance configuration templates that are specific to a single unit For example once the unit is configured you may wish to use the Save Last Known Good Configuration Template operation to create an appliance configuration template of the unit in that state You can also use the Save Current Configuration Template to create an appliance configuration template of the unit in its current state These templates can later be applied to the unit if needed NOTE For appliances that do not support appliance configuration templates the related buttons and links are not displayed Saving appliance configuration templates Saving an appliance configuration template generates a DSView 3 event 156 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To save an appliance configuration template NOTE This procedure creates an appliance configuration template than can be applied to any unit of the same family as the model unit 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 select the appliance you want to use as the model for the appliance configuration template The Unit Overview window opens 2 Click the Save Configuration Template icon or link The Save Appliance Configuration Template Wizard opens 3 Enter a name for the appliance configuration template Click Next 4 The Completed Successful window opens Click Finish To save the last known good or current configuration template
442. ou click the checkbox at the top of the list all units on the current page are selected or deselected if they were previously all selected If the list of units spans more than one page units on subsequent pages will not be selected You can specify how many items will appear on a Units View page that is the number of rows see Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 Types of Units View windows There are four types of Units View windows which are accessed by clicking tabs and side navigation bar links Additional Units View windows such as Virtualization or Blade Chassis may be added by plug ins see the plug in documentation for more information For information about using the collapse expand icons in the side navigation bar see Using the Side Navigation Bar on page 28 Any Units View window that contains managed appliances may also be viewed using the topology feature which displays a hierarchical structure see Topology view on page 116 e All Appliances The Appliances All window lists all managed appliances 116 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide e Appliance Type Appliance Type windows list all managed appliances of a particular type for example DSR1031 switches The Appliance Type links in the side navigation bar are listed under Appliances All An appliance type will only be listed in the side navigation bar if an appliance of that type has been added to the DSView 3 software database and the user has
443. ou may change the port using the DSView Server Network Properties window NOTE The port used for the HTTPS connection may be changed using the DSView Server Network Properties window The HTTPS port must be specified in the web browser URL if changed from the default port 443 See Server Properties on page 65 DSView 3 software clients may communicate with the DSView 3 server through a standard connection or using a proxy server By default TCP IP port 1078 is used for proxied connections If a proxy connection has not been created TCP ports 22 2068 and 8192 must be configured as open on your firewall When data logging is used the SSH server port 4122 and the Syslog server port 4514 must be configured as open on your firewall NOTE You can change the SSH server port and Syslog server port See Enabling the SSH server on page 213 and Enabling the Syslog server on page 214 KVM switch ports A user may initiate a KVM session with a target device on a KVM switch by clicking KVM Session for the appropriate target device or by clicking the KVM Session icon or text from a Unit Overview window The client contacts the DSView 3 server which checks the permissions of the target device If the logged in user has permissions to establish Video Viewer sessions to the selected target device the server will establish a connection to the KVM switch using TCP IP port 3871 to authorize the session The KVM data is sent to the KVM switch using po
444. ough sessions However a user can open any number of SSH Passthrough sessions without increasing the license counter provided the username is identical and resides on the same DSView 3 server and network source address for each SSH Passthrough session Once the user closes all SSH Passthrough sessions the client session license is freed If the available number of client session licenses is exceeded three times users will be prevented from establishing a new SSH Passthrough session See Licenses on page 60 for more information Configuring SSH Passthrough e Enable the SSH server see Enabling the SSH server on page 213 e Enable SSH Passthrough see Enabling SSH Passthrough on page 224 e Optional Enable SSH port sharing see SSH port sharing on page 224 Only DSView 3 software administrators may enable the SSH servers SSH Passthrough and SSH port sharing 224 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Enabling SSH Passthrough To enable or disable SSH Passthrough 1 Click the System tab 2 Click DSView Server in the top navigation bar 3 Click SSH Passthrough in the side navigation bar The SSH Passthrough Properties window opens 4 To enable SSH Passthrough select the Enable SSH Passthrough checkbox Or To disable SSH Passthrough uncheck the Enable SSH Passthrough checkbox 5 In the event of a network failure you may establish an SSH Passthrough session to the target device through Modem Dial Up To allow this capa
445. oup 1 Select Macros Configure Groups from the menu The Configure Macro Groups dialog box appears 2 Click the Create button The Configure Macros dialog box expands to display a Create Group area 3 Inthe Group Name field type a 1 64 character name for the macro group 4 To add one or more macros to the macro group select the macro s from the Macros Available list then click Add The macros will be moved to the Macros In Group list 340 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 7 8 To remove one or more macros from the macro group select the macro s from the Macros In Group list then click Remove The macros will be moved to the Macros Available list In the Access Rights area specify whether you want the macro group to be a Global Macro group available to all users or a Personal Macro group available only to the current user You must have DSView 3 software administrator privileges to assign access rights Click OK The Configure Macro Groups dialog box returns to its abbreviated view Click OK to close the Configure Macro Groups dialog box To enable a macro group for use during Telnet Viewer sessions NOTE You must have DSView 3 software administrator privileges to enable a macro group 1 Select Macros Configure Groups from the menu The Configure Macro Groups dialog box appears In the Macro Groups table select the macro group you wish to enable Click the Edit button The Configure M
446. oup member of the unit group click Members in the side navigation bar and then click Groups To add or remove a unit member of the unit group click Members in the side navigation bar and then click Units NOTE If you select a group container Global Root or Personal Root you can only add unit groups as members you cannot add units therefore when you click Members in the side navigation bar Groups is the only choice You cannot add units or groups to the global unassigned unit group 4 The Unit Group Members Units or Unit Group Members Groups window will open Click Assign 5 The Assign Units to Unit Group window will open NOTE Once a unit is added to an exclusive unit group it cannot be added to any other groups If a unit is already a member of a non exclusive group and is then added to an exclusive group the unit is automatically removed from the non exclusive group e To add one or more units to the unit group select the unit s from the Available Units list then click Add The units will be moved to the Units to Assign list e To remove one or more units already assigned to the unit group select the unit s from the Units to Assign list then click Remove The units will be moved to the Available Units list 6 Click Save and then click Close The Unit Group Members window will open 7 Click Close The Unit Groups window will open To add or remove access rights for one or more unit groups 1 Click the Units
447. owing Dial Back Settings a In the Analog phone number field type the analog phone number for the appliance to dial back to the DSView 3 server This number will be stored in the DSView 3 software database and automatically updated on the ACS console server In the Analog on hook time field specify the on hook interval in the range of 0 25 seconds The default value is 4 seconds The on hook interval is the amount of time after the initial dial up connection is dropped before the modems on the DSView 3 server will receive incoming calls Use the ISDN controller map field to define the map of Multiple Subscriber Numbers MSNs to ISDN channels Enter the controller map definition for each port sequentially on a separate row in the text field Use the following format lt port number gt lt MSN1 gt lt MSN2 gt For example if an Eicon card has one port and MSN 21 is assigned to ISDN channel on port 1 and MSN 22 is assigned to ISDN channel 2 on port 1 the text in the ISDN controller map field would be 1 21 22 76 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide A controller map definition must be provided for each ISDN dial back phone number d In the ISDN phone number field enter the Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN phone number for the appliance to dial back to the DSView 3 server You may enter multiple dial back phone numbers each separated by a comma The number s will be stored in the DSView 3 software database and
448. owse to the location of the firmware file you want to add to the DSView 3 software appliance files repository Type a description of the firmware file in the Description field Click Next The firmware is added and the Completed Successful window appears Click Finish The Appliance Firmware Files window will open NOTE Once the file is uploaded it is no longer needed on the DSView 3 software client from which it was uploaded To display firmware information 1 2 Click the System tab Click Appliance Files in the top navigation bar The Appliance Firmware Files window will open Click on the version of a firmware file The Firmware File Properties window will open The display includes the firmware version appliance type firmware creation date country and language of the firmware If you wish you may change the description of the firmware file in the Description field Click Save and then click Close The Appliance Firmware All window will open and contain the firmware information if you saved the changes To delete firmware 1 Click the System tab 386 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 2 Click Appliance Files in the top navigation bar The Appliance Firmware Files window will open 3 Click the checkbox next to the firmware you want to delete 4 Click Delete A confirmation dialog box will appear 5 Confirm or cancel the deletion 387 cone JJJ Events and Event Logs When an enable
449. ox to the left of the sessions To disconnect all sessions click the checkbox to the left of Duration at the top of the list If you do not have permission to disconnect an active session you will not be able to select its checkbox or the checkbox at the top of the list 3 Click Disconnect A confirmation dialog box will appear For virtual media sessions on supported KVM switches If you attempt to disconnect an active virtual media session or a KVM session that is locked to a virtual media session a confirmation message is displayed indicating that any virtual media mappings will be disconnected Confirm or cancel See Using Virtual Media on page 320 4 Confirm or cancel the disconnect Active modem sessions In the event the primary network fails you may establish a session to an ACS console server through a modem ISDN dial up connection method This connection may be established using the SSH Passthrough client or the ACS console server plug in To configure the SSH Passthrough settings see Enabling SSH Passthrough on page 224 To configure the ACS console server plug in settings see the ACS console server plug in online help Secure connections During the initial dial up connection attempt the DSView 3 DialUp service will authenticate the ACS console server and establish a connection using a Point to Point Protocol PPP Password Authentication Protocol PAP and Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP are suppor
450. panish and Japanese Select an icon to associate with the macro from the Macro Icon menu To build the macro click the keys on the virtual keyboard in the dialog box The keys of the virtual keyboard operate like a physical keyboard As a key is clicked it will appear in the Keystrokes list box to the left of the virtual keyboard You may type or press the arrow keys to specify a delay between keys First click the key in the list box after which you wish to place a delay Next click Delay to insert the delay in the list box Keystrokes unique to Sun keyboards may be added to the macro by selecting the key type from the menu to the right of the Sun Key button and clicking the button If necessary use the following keys to change the entries in the Keystrokes list box e Click Reset to remove all entries from the list box e Click on an entry and then click Remove to remove it from the list box e Click on an entry and then click Move Up to promote the entry in the list box e Click on an entry and then click Move Down to demote the entry in the list box Click OK to accept the changes and retum to the Macros dialog box Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 317 To delete a macro 1 4 5 Select Macros Configure Macros from the Video Viewer menu or click the Macros button The Macros dialog box appears Select one of the following All displays both personal and global macros Personal displays only personal macros
451. pear Log in using a valid username and password to establish a DSR Remote Operations software session with the DSR switch over the modem link The switch will disconnect the modem connection if a user does not log in within the time period specified by the authentication time out value The default authentication time out value 120 seconds may be changed using the Terminal Applications menu See the installer user guide for the DSR switch for more information The DSR switch will attempt to contact the DSView 3 server to authenticate the user If the DSView 3 server is unavailable the switch will use its internal database to authenticate the user Type the username and password to which you wish to connect and then click OK If authentication is successful the DSR Remote Operations window will open 420 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide NOTE The switch will disconnect the modem connection if there is no activity on the modem connection for the time period specified by the inactivity time out value The default inactivity time out value 15 minutes may be changed using the Terminal Applications menu See the installer user guide for the DSR switch for more information To exit the DSR Remote Operations software Select File Exit from the menu Window features When you have launched the software and successfully logged in the DSR Remote Operations window will display the list of DSView 3 servers connected to the DSR switch Figure
452. pliance or initiate a push pull name operation 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name 2 Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar and then click Ports and then click Power device The Power Devices Attached to Appliance window will open For DSR switches that have two SPC ports one row will appear for each power device 3 To initiate a pull or push name operation see Name Synchronization on page 141 click the checkboxes to the left of one or more device name s To select all names on the page click the box to the left of Appliance Name at the top of the list e Fora pull operation click Pull Name e Fora push operation click Push Name Customizing the Power Devices Attached to Appliance window The display fields and content of the Power Devices Attached to Appliance window will differ according to the power device type and models For details see the product documentation Use the Customize link to add or remove fields in the display see Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 The following fields are always displayed regardless of the power device type and model e Name in Appliance Name of the power device in the appliance e Name in DSView Name of the power device in the DSView 3 software database 188 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Status To add or remove a power device NOTE To successfully add
453. plug ins Super users only Allzones Configure SNMP trap settings Any qualified user Active zone only Import system settings Super users only To the top level zone only The top level zone must be active at the time of import 260 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 261 Managing User Accounts This chapter describes how to manage user accounts The DSView 3 software allows you to e Add change and delete user accounts e Unlock user accounts e Specify user account restrictions e Change user group membership e Display user and user group access rights to target devices and managed appliances e Add and delete user defined user groups e Display assign and remove user group members from built in or user defined user groups User Accounts Windows User accounts are displayed and managed through User Accounts windows To display the User Accounts window 1 Click the Users tab The User Accounts All window will open 2 To display the names of users in a built in or user defined user group click the group name link under User Accounts in the side navigation bar The User Accounts window for that group will open listing all the users in the group 3 To select a user click on a username in a User Accounts window Customizing the User Accounts window The User Name field is usually displayed in the User Accounts window One of the icons in Table 17 1 will appear to the left of the usernames and represent the statu
454. procedures Serial session A serial session is a type of target device session in which the target device contains a serial connection typically a Linux server TTY port or a router and is connected through a serial console appliance A Telnet Viewer connection exists between the DSView 3 software client and the serial console appliance The appliance converts the Telnet information to serial information Server A server is a computer or device on a network that manages network resources For example Appendices 455 e A file server is a computer and storage device dedicated to storing files Any user on the network can store files on the server e A print server is a computer that manages one or more printers e A network server is a computer that manages network traffic e A database server is a computer system that processes database queries Servers are often dedicated meaning that they perform no other tasks besides their server tasks However on multiprocessing operating systems a single computer can execute several programs at once In this case a server may refer to the program that is managing resources rather than the entire computer Session When used alone a session refers to a target device session See the definition of a target device session for details Site A site is a location that contains a managed appliance DSView 3 server or both Smart card A smart card common access card CAC or integrated cir
455. r Select Migrate Units from the drop down menu Type a 1 64 character name for the task OAS ad ORS nS Select a time to run the task see Specifying when to run tasks on page 364 then click Next Chapter 22 Using Tasks 375 6 The Select Unit Group window will open Select Units Needing Migration or a particular unit group from the menu 7 Click Select by Product Family then select a family from the menu or Click Select by Unit Type then select a type from the menu Click Next You must create a separate task for each product family or type of managed appliance you wish to migrate 8 The Select Units window will open The Available Units list will contain only units with a status of Migration Needed that match the selected type found in the unit group specified in the previous step Select one or more managed appliance to migrate from the Available Appliances list then Click Add The switches or appliances will be moved to the Appliances to Configure list Click Next 9 Ifyou are migrating DSView 2 x software units select the firmware files for migration a Type the host name or the address of the TFTP server in standard dot notation XXX XXX XXX XXX containing the DS1800 digital switch CPS appliance or DSR switch firmware files required for migration to DSView 3 management software compatibility b Type the name of each firmware image c Click Next 10 If you want the managed appliances you are migrating to b
456. r see Enabling SSH Passthrough on page 224 1 To connect to a target device or appliance console open your SSH client and enter the following values in the provided text fields e lt zone1 username gt Specify the highest level zone for which you have access rights If a zone is not specified for the username the top level zone is assumed If you do not have access to this zone the connection attempt fails e lt zone2 targetdevicename gt to connect to a target device Or lt zone2 appliancename gt to connect to an appliance console If the appliance resides in a zone below your highest level zone specify a zone If a zone is not specified it is assumed that unit belongs to the zone specified for the username If the unit does not reside in this zone the connection attempt fails e host name or IP address of the DSView 3 server NOTE If DS Zones are not enabled you do not need to specify a zone for the username or appliance For more information about zones see DS Zones on page 249 To connect to a target device using the Linux or Unix SSH command enter a command in the following format lt zone1 username gt lt zone2 target device name gt lt host name or IP address of DSView 3 server gt Chapter 14 SSH Passthrough Sessions 227 For example a command to open an SSH session to a target device may look like this ssh p 4122 zonel jsmith zone2 Boston 172 30 19 101 To connect to an appliance console usin
457. r Guide Power device An Avocent or supported third party cascade device that allows the remote controlling of target device power Positive hysteresis Positive hysteresis is the unsigned number of counts subtracted from the raw threshold value which creates the re arm point for all sensor thresholds that are greater than zero 0 A positive hysteresis value of 0 indicates that any thresholds greater than zero do not contain hysteresis PPP Point to Point Protocol PPP is a set of industry standard framing and authentication protocols included with Windows NT Remote Access Service to ensure interoperability with third party remote access software PPP negotiates configuration parameters for multiple layers of the OSI Open Systems Interconnection model SDR repository device An SDR repository device is the logical management device that provides a sensor data records SDR system interface which in tum provides a set of SDR storage and retrieval commands Serial console appliance Serial console appliance refers to a unit that allows serial sessions to a target device and is supported by the DSView 3 software Serial console appliances include the ACS console server the legacy CCM and CPS appliances and other units supported by plug ins The ACS console server is supported by a plug in for detailed procedures and what DSView 3 operations the ACS console server supports see the corresponding plug in documentation for detailed
458. r a spoke server In the Syslog Server Port field enter the Syslog port that you set in Enabling the Syslog server on page 214 In the SSH Server Port field enter the SSH port that you set in Enabling the SSH server on page 213 NOTE It is recommended that no more than 2048 data logging and SSH Passthrough sessions be open concurrently 6 The Appliance Configuration Section contains several fields for managing the SSH sessions and buffer warning events Each field contains the Avocent recommended value but you may change these values if needed e SSH Idle Timeout seconds If the SSH session is inactive for the specified amount of time it will be closed The default time out is 15 seconds SSH Start Threshold bytes The appliance will log data in its local memory Once it meets the threshold specified in this field it will attempt to open an SSH session to the DSView 3 server The default threshold is 10 KB SSH Tunnel Buffer Size bytes If the SSH session cannot be opened the appliance will continue to store data logs in its local memory until it reaches the size specified in this field The default buffer size is 1 MB NOTE The appliance may be prevented from opening an SSH session if a firewall is blocking traffic the DSView SSH service is disabled or the IP address and TCP port settings are incorrect e Buffer Full First Warning bytes If an SSH session cannot be opened a first warning will be sent once the
459. r all the cursor keys listed Table D 5 VT100 ANSI Set and Reset Mode Cursor Keys Cursor Key Mode Reset Mode Set Up Esc A EscOA Down Esc B EscOB Right Esc C EscOC Left Esc D EscOD Table D 6 lists the VT100 PF1 PF4 key definitions Encoding of each listed key is supported decoding is not applicable Table D 6 VT100 PF1 PF4 Key Definitions Key Code Sequence F1 Esc OP F2 Esc OQ F3 Esc OR F4 Esc OS Table D 7 lists the ANSI mode control sequences for VT100 terminal emulation and indicates Avocent encoding decoding support where Yes supported and No not supported Table D 7 VT100 ANSI Mode Control Sequences Control Sequence Definition Encode Decode Esc Pn PnR Cursor Position Report No No Esc PnD Cursor Backward No Yes Esc PnB Cursor Down No Yes Esc PnC Cursor Forward No Yes Esc Pn PnH Cursor Position No Yes 430 Control Sequence Esc PnA Esc Pnc Esc 8 Esc 3 Esc 4 Esc 6 EscZ Esc Esc gt Esc Psq Esc8 Esc lt sol gt lt par gt Esc lt sol gt x Esc7 Esc Pn Pnr Esc 5 Esc 2 Psy Esc Psn Esc PsJ Esc PsK Esc H Esc Pn Pn f Esc D Esc E DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Definition Cursor Up Device Attributes Screen Alignment Display Double Height Line Top Half Double Height Line Bottom Half Double Width Line Identify Terminal Keypad Application Mode Keypad Numeric Mode Load LEDs Restore Cursor Report Terminal Parameters lt nbits gt lt xspee
460. r and select a year e Click on the month name and select a month or use the arrows at the top of the calendar to move forward and backward by month e Click on a day in the calendar to close the calendar and fill the field to the left of the calendar with the date you have selected To run a task weekly In the Select When to Run the Task window of the Add Task Wizard click Weekly 1 2 The Specify Weekly Schedule window will open a b C Select the hour minute and AM or PM to indicate when to begin running the task Click Every weeks and select the number of consecutive weeks 1 52 Select the day of week to run the task from the list box Multiple weeks may be selected by pressing Ctrl while clicking on the weeks Click on the calendar button or the field to the left of the calendar button and select a date to begin running the task To use the calendar e Click on the year and select a year e Click on the month name and select a month or use the arrows at the top of the calendar to move forward and backward by month e Click on a day in the calendar The calendar will close and fill the field to the left of the calendar with the selected date To run a task monthly In the Select When to Run the Task window of the Add Task Wizard click Monthly 1 2 The Specify Monthly Schedule window will open a b Select the hour minute and AM or PM to indicate when to begin running the task Click Day
461. r appliance name The name is not case sensitive In the Address field type a 1 256 character IP address in dot notation form or a DNS name The address is not case sensitive Click Next Go to step 8 7 For NEC IPF embedded appliances 8 Chapter 8 Adding and Deleting Units 135 a The Configure NEC IPF Settings window will open b In the Address field type a 1 256 character IP address in dot notation form or a DNS name The address is not case sensitive c Inthe Username field type a 1 64 character username to be used to log in to the embedded appliance Usernames are case sensitive d Inthe Password field type a 1 64 character password to be used to log in to the embedded appliance Passwords are case sensitive e Click Next f The embedded device discovery will verify that the embedded appliance s product ID matches the appliance type If successful the Select Options window will open g The Appliance Name field contains the name stored in the embedded appliance You may change this to a 1 256 character unique name Names are not case sensitive h Enable or disable the Allow target devices with the same name to be merged into a single target device checkbox i Click Next Click Finish Adding managed appliances from a range or list of IP addresses This procedure is valid for supported KVM switches and serial console appliances It may also be valid for appliances supported by a plug in see the appr
462. r email notifications See Email Notifications in the DSView 3 software online help for more information Specifying where data log files will be stored To specify where data log files will be stored 1 2 3 Click the System tab Click DSView Server in the top navigation bar In the side navigation bar click Data Logging then Location The Data Logging Location Properties window will open In the Location field enter a local or network shared location using a UNC Universal Naming Convention path of up to 256 characters You cannot specify a mapped network drive If the operating system supports case sensitive file names use case sensitive text The default location is lt DSView 3 software installation directory gt datalogs 218 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide If you change the location at a later time any data log files in the previous location will no longer be viewable or accessible through the DSView 3 software Data log files are not backed up by the DSView 3 software backup utility 5 Ifa login will not be required to access the file location disable the Login required to access shared drive location checkbox If a login will be required to access the file location a Enable the Login required to access shared drive location checkbox b In the Username field enter the username up to 256 characters to access the file location c Inthe Password field enter the password up to 64 charac
463. r has a logging function that saves the contents of a Telnet Viewer session to a file You may enable automatic logging or dynamically start logging at any time Additionally you may pause resume and stop logging regardless of whether it was started automatically or dynamically While logging is occurring or when it is paused a Logging Status label appears in the status panel at the bottom of the DSView 3 management software Telnet Viewer window NOTE When you enable or disable automatic logging the logging will begin or end at the start of the next DSView 3 software Telnet Viewer session to that device If you change the default log file directory used for automatic logging the change does not take effect until the next session to that device Log files The format of log filenames is shown below where lt mmddyy gt represents the month day and year and lt hhmmss gt represents the current hour minute and second in military time scvTelnet lt mmddyy gt _ lt hhmmss gt log The default log directory is session specific that is each Telnet Viewer session may have its own location for storing logfiles You may change the name of the file and the location of the directory that stores the logfiles If you do not change the default directory logfiles are stored in your home directory You may display a log file at any time using a standard text editor The screen buffer is written to the log file when the buffer is full or when loggi
464. r select a unit group then click Next 7 The Select Unit window opens Select the units to be included in the topology update click Add then click Next 8 The Select Options window opens a If you enable the Remove offline connections checkbox any units connections that are reported as offline in the unit will be deleted from the DSView 3 software database The Update topology for selected units task does not add offline connections to the DSView 3 software database If you enable the Delete target devices that no longer have connections checkbox target devices that no longer have connections will be permanently deleted from the DSView 3 software database If you enable the Allow target devices with the same name to be merged into a single target device checkbox the connection to a target device in the unit will be merged with the connection s to an existing target device in the DSView 3 software database If you enable the Allow target devices that contain default names to be added for these type of connections checkbox you may then enable one or more connection type checkboxes Any target devices that contain default names in the unit will be added to the DSView 3 software database only if the connection type in the unit matches an enabled connection type in this window 9 Click Finish Task Backup Power Manager database This task creates a compressed zip file containing a backup of the Power Manager database The bac
465. r window will open In the Hub Server window click Certificate The Hub Server Certificate window will open including information about the spoke server certificate Actual Certificate and the certificate registered for this spoke server on the hub server Registered Certificate If the DSView 3 software cannot obtain the certificate information from the hub server a message will appear at the bottom of the DSView Server Certificate Hub Server window The message states Remote server is not responding Information displayed may not match remote side If the certificate information does not match go to step 4 Click Update The hub server certificate information will be updated on the spoke server Avocent proxy server The Avocent proxy server is valid on supported KVM switches or serial console appliances NOTE The Avocent proxy server is not supported when using the IPv6 network protocol on Windows platforms To specify the Avocent proxy server 1 2 Click the System tab Click Proxy Server in the side navigation bar The DSView Server Proxy Properties window will open a The preset port 1078 is used for DSView 3 software client communication with the Avocent proxy to the logged in DSView 3 server If you wish to change the port enter a port value in the range 1 65535 in the Port field If DSView 3 software clients are located on an external connection the specified TCP IP proxy port must be opened on your firewal
466. re For increased security DSView 3 administrators can disable switch configuration through the OSCAR interface and only allow specified DSView 3 user groups to configure DSR switches From the DSView 3 Units View windows you can see if OSCAR interface configuration is enabled or disabled on a DSR switch see the DSR switch plug in help for more information To change local OSCAR interface settings NOTE This procedure is valid for the following managed appliances all DSR switches except the DSR 800 1161 2161 and 4160 switches 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the DSR switch name 2 Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar then click Ports and then click OSCAR The Appliance OSCAR Settings window will open 3 Click Disable OSCAR Authentication to prevent the supported DSR switch from performing internal or external authentication If the Disable OSCAR Authentication checkbox is not selected the supported DSR switch will attempt external authentication using the list of authentication servers that reside in the switch If the authentication fails the supported DSR switch will use its internal user tables 4 Specify a preemption level for the DSR switch 1 4 5 The Long Name Display Mode is used when cascade switch or target device names contain more than 15 characters Select the radio button to specify whether the OSCAR interface will display the
467. re attached to a managed appliance or initiate a push pull name operation 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the name of an appliance 2 Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar then click Target Devices 3 The Target Devices window will open 4 To initiate a pull or push name operation see Name Synchronization on page 141 click the checkboxes to the left of one or more device names To select all names on the page click the box to the left of Appliance Name at the top of the list e Fora pull operation click Pull Name e Fora push operation click Push Name Customizing the Target Devices window The following fields may be displayed in the Target Devices window Use the Customize link to add or remove fields in the display See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 e Name in Appliance Name of the target device in the appliance e Name in DSView Name of the target device in the DSView 3 software database e Connection Connection path to the target device in the appliance To change the appliance name for a target device 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances click on the name of an appliance 2 Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar then click Target Devices 3 The Target Devices window will open Click on a target device name 4 Chapter 10 Managing Units 173 Change the appliance name for the target
468. re checkbox to require a user to change the password after a certain number of days Specify a number from 1 365 in the Maximum Expiration days field or select a number c Select Passwords must contain both alpha and numeric characters if new passwords must contain at least one letter and one number d Select Passwords must contain both lower and upper case characters if new passwords must contain at least one uppercase and one lowercase letter 6 Specify the lockout policy for the authentication service To assign a specific number of user login attempts check the Lockout users after invalid login attempts checkbox then continue with step a If you leave this checkbox unchecked unlimited user login attempts will be allowed Skip to the last step a Type the number of allowable user login failures from 1 25 in the Maximum Login Failures field or select it from the menu b To permit user logins after a certain period of time check the Automatically unlock users after the lockout period checkbox Specify the lockout period in minutes by typing a number from 1 1 440 in the Maximum Lockout Period minutes field or choose a value from the menu 1 440 minutes is equivalent to 24 hours If you leave this checkbox unchecked locked user accounts must be manually unlocked by a DSView 3 software administrator or user administrator See Unlocking User Accounts on page 266 7 Click Save and then click Close The User Authenticat
469. re license keys prior to version 3 0 are not valid If you did not receive a license key click the Attp www avocent com activation link to obtain a license key If the entered license is already in use on another server a license violation will occur when you log in and you must configure the server as a spoke server The Type in Initial Administrator Account window opens Type a username a password and confirm the password of the user to whom you wish to give administrator privileges Usernames are case sensitive and may contain up to 64 characters Click Next A Request in Progress message will appear The license key will be installed and a DSView 3 software administrator account will be created The built in user groups will also be created The Completed Successful window will open when configuration is completed Click Finish The User Login window will open in the DSView 3 Explorer Chapter 2 Installation 19 You may now log in using the username and password specified during configuration If you chose to configure the server as a spoke server in the Select DSView Server Role window or if you entered a duplicate software license key in the Type in Master License Key window continue with the following steps NOTE The DSView 3 software versions of the spoke server and the hub server must match in order to register the spoke server For example you may not register a spoke server running DSView 3 software version 3 0 with
470. ress of the DSView 3 software client computer connected to the appliance in a non proxied connection The IP address of the DSView 3 proxy will display in this column if the client is connected to the appliance using a proxy connection Chapter 12 Unit Sessions and Connections 197 serial console appliances Interface Interface to which to the session is connected which is either a serial port or the network CLI To display session information This procedure is valid for supported KVM switches and serial console appliances It may also be valid for appliances supported by a plug in see the appropriate documentation 1 4 5 In a Units View window containing appliances see 4ccessing Units Yiew windows on page 118 click on the appliance name Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar and then click Sessions The Appliance Sessions window will open To display information about a specific session click on the name of the KVM virtual media or serial session The Active Session Information window will open including information about the active session Click Close The Appliance Sessions window will open Click Close The Units View window will open To display or change the session settings for a serial console appliance l In a Units View window containing appliances see 4ccessing Units Yiew windows on page 118 click on the serial console appliance name Click Appliance Settings in the side na
471. rgePoint SP managers and OnBoard appliances NOTE IPv6 is not supported by all appliance models See the corresponding product or plug in documentation for a list of specific appliance models that support IPv6 Wizards that add units In a Units View window clicking Add invokes a wizard that guides you through the process of adding managed appliances and target devices to the DSView 3 software system The units that are visible in the current Units View window determines which wizard will be invoked when you click Add e If you are in the Appliances All window you can add managed appliances of any type You cannot add target devices from that window e If you are in the Units View window for a specific appliance type such as Appliances DSR4030 you can only add more appliances of that type DSR4030 appliances You cannot add appliances of any other type or any target devices e If you are in the Target Devices All window or any of the target device type windows such as Target Devices Linux Servers you can add target devices You cannot add appliances from that window e Ifyou are in the Recently Accessed window you can add a managed appliance or a target device When a unit is added to the DSView 3 software database it is also added to the current Units View For example if you are viewing units in the department named Accounting and click Add the newly added unit will automatically be added to the Accounting department
472. router A DSView 3 software client is connected to the NAT device as shown in Figure 1 6 which then connects to the corporate network using a VPN Figure 4 3 Single NAT Configuration Client Only Table 4 6 Single NAT Configuration Client Only Descriptions Number 1 Description DSView 3 Software Client Private NAT Device Client Public VPN Number 7 8 9 10 11 Description Firewall Private DSView 3 Server Managed Appliance Corporate 60 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Another scenario shown in Figure 4 4 is when the corporate site also uses a NAT device to save IP addresses double NAT Since the DSView 3 software client is trying to access a private resource inside the corporate site the TCP IP ports used for HTTPS and the proxy server must be configured to be exposed on the corporate NAT device Figure 4 4 Double NAT Configuration Client and Corporate Table 4 7 Double NAT Configuration Client and Corporate Descriptions Number Description Number Description 1 DSView 3 Software Client 7 NAT Device 2 Private 8 Private 3 NAT Device 9 DSView 3 Software Server 4 Client 10 Managed Appliance 5 Public 11 Corporate 6 VPN NOTE NAT devices may not be connected between the DSView 3 server and any managed appliances Licenses License keys permit the operation of the DSView 3 management software on the hub server They also specify the number of managed devices that may be contro
473. rt dialog box will appear if the answer to any of the three questions is No To prevent the Security Alert message box from appearing when you connect to a the DSView 3 software hub server all three questions must be answered Yes When a Security Alert dialog box appears you have the following choices If you click Yes a connection will be made with the DSView 3 software hub server and the DSView 3 software login window will appear but the Security Alert dialog box will continue to appear each time you connect to the hub server If you click No a connection will not be made with the DSView 3 software hub server If you click View Certificate you may install the certificate see below To correct certificate security alerts for client and hub server connections 1 From the DSView 3 software client open a client session see Opening a client session on page 20 The Security Alert dialog box will appear Click View Certificate The Certificate dialog box will appear Click Install Certificate See the Internet Explorer documentation for more information Once the certificate is installed ensure that the time setting on the DSView 3 software client PC is within the Valid from to dates and that the Issued to and Issued by fields exactly match Invalid to from dates typically occur when the DSView 3 software is installed on a server that is set to an invalid time When a DSView 3 software client that is set to a valid time conne
474. rt will provide you with a reset code 7 Ina terminal window enter resetpassword bat lt reset code gt A Message reset performed successfully message will appear in the terminal window along with the Administrator username and password for the DSView 3 management software 8 From the Control Panel select Administrative Tools Services and restart the Avocent DSView 3 software service 9 You may now log into the DSView 3 management software 444 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Appendices 445 Appendix F Glossary Access control Access control refers to mechanisms and policies that restrict access to computer resources Active Directory Active Directory is the directory service included with Microsoft Windows 2000 and later versions of Windows operating systems It extends the features of previous Windows based directory services and contains new features that ease the navigation and management of large amounts of information which may generate savings for both administrators and end users Active Directory is secure distributed partitioned and replicated It is designed to work well in any size installation from a single server with a few hundred objects to thousands of servers and millions of objects ADSAP Avocent DS Authentication Protocol or ADSAP2 The ADSAP or ADSAP2 is a protocol used for authentication and authorization of KVM switch and serial console appliance target device sessions in the DSView 3 m
475. rts 8192 and 3871 Port 8192 contains the video portion of the KVM data Port 2068 contains the keyboard and mouse portion of the KVM data In a non proxied connection the video data from port 8192 and the keyboard and mouse data from port 2068 are sent directly from the client to the KVM switch Figure B 1 illustrates the ports used with a non proxied KVM switch connection UDP port 3211 is used by the DSView 3 server to initialize the IP configuration of KVM switches TCP IP port 3211 is also used by the DSView 3 server to perform management functions on KVM switches such as configuring settings 408 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide NOTE When using a non proxied connection video performance over a slower network connection may be less than optimal Since certain color settings such as grayscale use less network bandwidth than others such as Best Color changing the color settings may increase video performance For optimal video performance over a slower network connection a color setting such as grayscale Best Compression or Low Color High Compression is recommended See Color depth on page 295 DSView 3 Software Client DSView 3 Server TCRIP 7 HTTPS Port443 end TCPAP TEPIP TEPIP Port 2068 Port e192 HTTPS Keyboard Video Port 443 r Port 3217 TCP IP l Pon3211 Firewall E an ov e 1 rk TCP IP Tunnel i an y i J Router A i gt
476. rver but you cannot change it To initiate an immediate replication on a spoke server 1 On the spoke server click the System tab 2 Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open 3 Check the checkbox to the left of the Database Replication task and then click Run Now To display the replication schedule for a spoke server from the hub server 1 On the hub server click the System tab 2 Click Tasks in the top navigation bar 86 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 3 Select the Database Replication task for the spoke server you wish to view The Task Schedule Database Replication window will open 87 Authentication Services Users must be authenticated before they may access or perform any tasks in the DSView 3 management software system When users log in they will be prompted for a username and password The DSView 3 software will look up the login determine the authentication service to use and forward the login credentials to the appropriate authentication service for verification All authentication is performed over an HTTPS SSL encrypted link Some web browsers may store password information see your web browser documentation Supported Authentication Services The DSView 3 software is delivered with the DSView internal authentication service which verifies a log in and password against user account information stored in the database on the DSView 3 software server The DSView 3
477. ry code for the country where the organization is located Click Next Go to step 7 The Select Certificate to Import window will open Type the full directory and filename for the SSL certificate file you wish to import to the DSView 3 server or browse to the file location Chapter 5 DSView 3 Servers 71 The name of the SSL certificate file must be entered in case sensitive text if your operating system supports case sensitive filenames Imported certificates must have been generated from a CSR created on the same DSView 3 server to which you are importing the certificate h Click Next The Completed Successful window will open Click Finish The DSView Server Certificate Properties window will open containing updated certificate information Managing hub and spoke server certificates When a spoke server is registered with a hub server a certificate trust relationship is established between the two servers Certificate information must match on the hub server and the spoke servers for communication to take place between the servers If the spoke server certificate is subsequently changed a certificate mismatch will occur To update the certificate of a spoke server on the hub server NOTE Certificates may only be viewed by DSView 3 software administrators and user administrators 1 On the hub server click the System tab DSView Server will automatically be selected in the top navigation bar and the name of the DSView
478. ry mouse input the mouse movements are multiplied by the respective X and Y scaling factors Valid input ranges are 0 25 3 00 Avocent Mouse Sync Enabling Avocent Mouse Sync in the KVM session profile provides improved mouse tracking on the target device If Avocent Mouse Sync is enabled it is not necessary to disable mouse acceleration on the target device If overrides are allowed see Managing KVM session profiles on page 297 the primary user can require the Video Viewer to override the profile settings NOTE Avocent Mouse Syncis supported on Windows or Macintosh target devices connected with a USB2 IQ module To set Avocent Mouse Sync from the Video Viewer 1 Select Tools Session Options from the Video Viewer menu or click the Session Options button The Session Options dialog box appears 2 Click the Mouse tab 3 Inthe Avocent Mouse Sync section the current status is shown Enable or disable the Enable Synchronization checkbox NOTE On supported system configurations the Avocent Mouse Sync status is Available If the target device is running a supported operating system but is not connected with a USB2 IQ module the status is Not Supported If the target device is connected with USB2 IQ module but is not running a Windows or Macintosh operating system the status is Unavailable 4 Click OK 306 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Manual Video Adjustment Generally the Video Viewer window automat
479. s ina v n ola dala tate yan aA s n de nae Petes ocjed i dels POSS EE ENDES 64 ASV PIN CVS e800 28 a a bas ON oe eh aa Re BE SE 64 DSView 3 Servers 2 2 22 ee 65 Servet Properties 20 422 200344 285 So be Seed ilhe oo 2228 Sade Vues 2 222 18S Dds soe A EES CK 65 Server Certificates 0 0200 oo QAQ eee ele a WAN ees B eens bod Q Vu sw LARA WE k 67 YZ S0020242 no DD D cc ccce ccgcgDg cc 72 Server trap destinations 2 2 2 2200000 c cece eee ee EEE ESASA EEE KASEK KASEK KAK KK KH 73 Client session information 0000000 00 coven 73 DSView 3 software modem SeSSIONS cee eee eee eee eee eee 74 Email PAE I EAS US SS 76 Unit status polling HHHH 76 Backing up and Restoring Hub Servers Manually 00000000 0000 cece eee 77 SPOKE SCY VEPS a3 a pact Passe Galt LNs sats Mee E Sd he ekla U ante oR us ads ok Behan 80 REPIICATON dea 88 3 AILRG N SSE ON B80 Et DR SISA E SERIE ENS DD 84 Authentication Services 22 22 nk kk kk k kk 6666 87 Supported Authentication Services 2 220 0000000 L cece eee 87 DSView 3 software internal authentication service 00002000000e cece ee eee 88 Active Directory external authentication service LALE eee 90 Windows NT external authentication service l LELE LSER ee 97 LDAP external authentication Service 200 000000 e eevee eevee es 99 RADIUS external authentication service LALES ASA eee EAR AA 104
480. s including attached cascade switches power devices and target devices Users and user groups with unit access rights Authentication services including Windows NT domains LDAP and local accounts System settings including the ability to display connected users connection sharing status polling and delay rates and when the event log is deleted The following actions occur when a DSView 2 x software database is imported into the DSView 3 management software system A global unit group is created in the system for each group found in the DSView 2 x software database The DSView 3 software does not provide DSView 2 x software Topology unit group nesting Unit group names added to the system are a concatenation of the hierarchical names found in the DSView 2 x software including the truncation of names when necessary If a user had Admin rights in the DSView 2 x software for all nodes in the tree including the Topology node the user will be added as a member and inherit the access rights of a DSView administrator user group member in the DSView 3 software If a user had Admin rights in the DSView 2 x software for all nodes in the tree except for the Topology node the user will be added as a member and inherit the access rights of an appliance administrator user group member in the DSView 3 software If a user had any other type rights in the DSView 2 x software the user will be added as a member of the user group in the DSView 3 software Ac
481. s Single Sign On SSO and is disabled by default When running Windows Server 2003 or 2008 with Kerberos and NTLM authentication protocols SSO is supported but it must first be configured in the web browser and AD server see the documentation included with your browser and AD server or contact an Avocent technical support representative for assistance NOTE When accessing the DSView 3 client using Integrated Windows Authentication the browser URL must include the DSView 3 intranet name 56 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To use Integrated Windows Authentication for authentication a DSView 3 software administrator must first enable it See Client session information on page 73 Firewalls In a typical network configuration as shown in Figure 4 1 the DSView 3 software client is located outside of the firewall and the DSView 3 server and managed appliances reside inside the firewall In this case the firewall must be configured to allow two TCP IP ports inside the firewall One TCP port default 443 is used for the HTTPS web browser connection between the DSView 3 software client and the DSView 3 server The other TCP port default 1078 is used for the Avocent Proxy Protocol to tunnel video and Telnet traffic Both ports are configurable If you are using the DSView 3 management software through a firewall we recommend the following e Place the DSView 3 server and all managed appliances within the same firewall Demilitari
482. s client ie 3 4 In a Units View window containing the target device you want to access see 4ccessing Units Yiew windows on page 118 click an Action link The Installing Avocent Viewer Plug in pop up window opens Click Download 4vocent Yiewer Plug in Click Save then open the saved file The Firefox downloads window opens Click OK the follow the instructions in the installer wizard to install the file Once the installation is complete the viewer session starts automatically Installing the DSR Remote Operations Software NOTE Installing and using the DSR Remote Operations software is optional If your DSView 3 software system includes DSR1021 1022 1024 1020 1030 1031 2020 2030 2035 4020 4030 8020 8030 or 8035 switches you may use the DSR Remote Chapter 2 Installation 25 Operations software for switch access using a dial up point to point protocol PPP modem connection when an Ethernet connection is unavailable See DSR Remote Operations Software on page 415 for information about installing and using the DSR Remote Operations software 26 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 27 DSView 3 Explorer Windows When a user has been logged in and authenticated the Avocent DSView 3 Explorer window opens From the DSView 3 Explorer window you may view access and manage units Avocent DSView 3 Explorer User Accounts All Microsoft Internet Explorer Jog Ble Est yew Favomies Jode be
483. s every USB device on the target device including the mouse and keyboard It should only be used when the target device is not responding 1 In the Virtual Media dialog box click Details 2 The Details View will appear Click USB Reset 3 A warming message will appear indicating the possible effects of the reset Confirm or cancel the reset 4 To close the Details view click Details again Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 325 Closing a virtual media session To close the Virtual Media dialog box 1 Click Exit 2 Ifyou have any mapped drives a message is displayed indicating that the drives will be unmapped Confirm or cancel the operation If a user attempts to disconnect a virtual media session or an active KVM session that has an associated locked virtual media session a confirmation message is displayed indicating that any virtual media mappings will be lost See Sharing and preemption considerations on page 321 and Active Sessions on page 201 for information about other factors that may affect virtual media session closings Using Smart Cards You can connect a smart card reader to the client server and access attached target devices on a supported KVM switch system You can then launch a KVM session to open the Video Viewer and map a smart card NOTE To specify smart card session and mapping options for Video Viewer sessions see Video Viewer session properties on page 290 The smart card status is indicated
484. s many of the features in the Video Viewer window The menu and toolbar will be in a show hide state if the thumbtack has not been used Place your cursor over the toolbar to display the menu and toolbar Up to ten commands and or macro group 3 buttons may be displayed on the toolbar By default the Single Cursor Mode Refresh Automatic Video Adjust and Align Local Cursor buttons appear on the toolbar The Macro button displays when a user specifies icons for macros and indicates that the icons should appear on the toolbar See Toolbar profile settings on page 295 and Macros on page 314 Minimize button Minimizes the display of the Video Viewer window into the task bar at the bottom 4 of the local computer Maximize button Changes the window to Full Screen mode which expands the accessed device desktop to fill the entire screen When you expand the window the following occurs The title bar disappears 5 The server name appears between the menu and toolbar The Maximize button is changed to a Normal Window Mode button and it appears on the toolbar Clicking the button will toggle the Video Viewer window to Normal Window mode The Close button appears on the toolbar 6 Close button Closes the Video Viewer window This button may not be present on all operating systems 7 Accessed device desktop Interacts with your device through this window 8 Frame Resizes the Video Viewer window by clicking and holding on the frame NOTE On
485. s of each DSView 3 software user 262 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Table 17 1 User Status Icons Face witha clock Authentication Icon Method Status Face All Enabled The user can log in and use the DSView 3 software Face with a Disabled The user cannot log in to the DSView 3 software See User Internal pps za red X account restrictions and expiration settings on page 269 Locked The user account has been locked the user cannot log in to the Padlock Iht r nal DSView 3 software because the maximum number of log in failures has been exceeded See Authentication Services on page 87 and Unlocking User Accounts on page 266 Question External Suspicious The user account exists but the external authentication server mark no longer contains the account Expired The user account is configured with an expiration date which has All passed Expired user accounts remain in the system until deleted See User account restrictions and expiration settings on page 269 The following fields may be displayed in the User Accounts window Use the Customize link to add or remove fields in the display See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 Full Name Another name for a user For example a user may have a username of Sunrise1 and a full name defined as Mary Jones See Username on page 267 Status User account status Enabled Disabled Locked Suspicious or Expired One of the user status icons in Ta
486. s that have been configured to support modem dial up or modem dial back For more information about modem connections see Active modem sessions on page 205 Chapter 22 Using Tasks 377 To add the task 1 Click the System tab Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open Click Add The Add Task Wizard will appear Row oN Select Test modem connections to selected units from the drop down menu Type a 1 64 character name for the task 5 Select a time to run the task see Specifying when to run tasks on page 364 and then click Next 6 The Select Unit Group window will open Select a group from the menu 7 Click Select by Product Family and select ACS Firmware from the drop down menu or Click Select by Unit Type and choose a specific ACS console server model from the drop down menu Then click Next 8 The Select Unit window will open Select the units that you wish to test and click Add 9 Click Finish Task Updating the firmware of an appliance type This task upgrades the firmware of selected DS1800 digital switches DSIS5100 CPS or CCM appliances or DSR switches To upgrade other types of managed appliances you must create additional tasks Firmware must be available before using this command See Firmware Management on page 384 Once this task is added you may run it on demand at any time see Running tasks manually on page 382 To add the task 1 Click the System tab Click Tasks
487. s to the merge list select the target device s in the Available Target Devices list then click Add The target devices will be moved to the Target Devices to Merge list e To remove one or more target devices from the merge list select the target device s from the Target Devices to Merge list then click Remove The target devices will be moved to the Available Target Devices list e To merge target devices in a particular order select one or more target devices in the Target Devices to Merge list and use the up and down arrows to move the selected target devices up or down in the listing Once the order has been specified select Merge missing properties to the target device based on the order of the devices in the Target Devices to Merge list The merged target devices will contain the name of the first target device in the Target Device to Merge list For example if you are merging two target 6 7 Merging t Chapter 21 Using Tools 351 devices named TD1 and TD2 and TD2 is listed before TD1 the merged target device will be named TD2 Click Next The Confirm Target Device Merge window will open Click Next to confirm merging the connection paths into the specified destination target device See Connections to Units on page 207 The Completed Successful window will open Click Finish The Units Tools window will open arget device endpoints As an alternative to merging target device connections one at a time th
488. sactions between them Provides for secure transactions between DSView 3 software clients and the DSView 3 software server Chapter 4 Basic Operations 53 A Security Alert dialog box may appear if there are server certificate issues See Server certificates on page 67 for information about certificate alerts and updating server certificates Client certificates DSView 3 software client certificates also known as user certificates are used to authenticate client users during login when the DSView 3 software internal authentication service is configured in their user accounts See Adding User Accounts on page 263 To use DSView 3 software client certificates for authentication a DSView 3 software administrator must first enable certificate authentication see Client session information on page 73 Once this is enabled the DSView 3 server will prompt the client web browser to send its user certificates The DSView 3 software client certificate must first be loaded into the client web browser and be associated with a user account There are two ways to do this e The certificate location can be specified in a user account see User certificates on page 268 e The DSView 3 software administrator may enable user settable certificates then the user may specify the certificate location see Specifying a user certificate on page 43 If the system certificate policy see below is enabled for user certificates the certificate used at login m
489. se to use either personal macros or global macros and switch between using them at any time during the session Both personal and global macros may be added to the Video Viewer window toolbar A user may then execute the macro by clicking the button on the toolbar See Toolbar profile settings on page 295 The Video Viewer window macro function allows you to e Send multiple keystrokes to a device including keystrokes that you cannot generate without affecting your local system such as Ctrl Alt Delete e Send a macro from a predefined macro group Macro groups for Windows Novell Sun and Linux are already defined e Create edit and delete your own macros When you create or edit a macro you may type the desired keystrokes or you may select from among several available categories of keystrokes Each category contains a set of keystroke combinations Selecting from the available categories and keystrokes saves time and eliminates the risk of typographical errors Since the DSView 3 software may be used to access different computer platforms you may find it helpful to assign distinct macro groups to Global Macros or Personal Macros on individual systems You may specify the macro group to display in the Macro Groups dialog box The Macro Groups dialog box may also be used to switch between using Global and Personal Macros at any time during a session The Video Viewer window contains grouping commands that allow you to create edit and de
490. see Assigning zone licenses on page 252 If the zone does not have sufficient licenses the transfer fails 1 Ina Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the checkbox next to the unit s you wish to move 2 Click Operations then select Move Units to Zone from the drop down menu The Move Units Wizard opens 3 From the list provided select the zone to which you wish to move the unit s Click Next 4 The Completed Successful window opens Click Finish You can access the units and associated target devices when you are active in the zone that owns the units 252 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Managing zone properties Once you have created a zone you can modify the zone name license distribution and access rights To modify the zone name 1 Click the System tab then click Global Properties 2 Select Zones in the side navigation bar 3 Click the name of zone you wish to modify 4 Click Name in the side navigation bar 5 Enter a unique zone name in the field The current zone path in relation to higher level zones is displayed 6 Click Save Assigning zone licenses You can manage the distribution of licenses among zones Assigning licenses to each zone prevents one zone from starving other zones of licenses You can control which add on features a zone may use how many licenses of each feature a zone may use and how many sublevel zones can be created You must specify
491. ser Guide 1 The embedded device discovery will verify that a web server exists at the specified IP address If successful the Select Option window will open Enable or disable the Allow target devices with the same name to be merged into a single target device checkbox Click Next Go to step 8 5 For DRAC 4 embedded appliances a b j The Configure DELL DRAC4 Settings window will open In the Appliance Name field type a 1 64 character appliance name The name is not case sensitive In the Address field type a 1 256 character IP address in dot notation form or a DNS name The address is not case sensitive In the Port field type a TCP port number in the range 0 65535 where the appliance will listen In the Usemame field type a 1 64 character username to be used to log in to the embedded appliance Usernames are case sensitive In the Password field type a 1 64 character password to be used to log in to the embedded appliance Passwords are case sensitive Click Next The embedded device discovery will verify that a web server exists at the specified IP address If successful the Select Option window will open Enable or disable the Allow target devices with the same name to be merged into a single target device checkbox Click Next Go to step 8 6 For HP iLO embedded appliances a b d The Configure HP iLO Settings window will open In the Appliance Name field type a 1 64 characte
492. session the authentication service configured in the DSView 3 software by the DSView 3 software administrator verifies the credentials of the user Security alerts related to the certificates on the DSView 3 software host may appear See Certificates on page 52 Minimum client requirements The following are the minimum requirements for a DSView 3 software client e 1 GHz Pentium or equivalent processor 20 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide e 512 MB of RAM e 10 or 100BaseT NIC 100 recommended e XGA video with graphics accelerator e Desktop size setting of at least 800 x 600 e Color palette of at least 256 colors e One of the following operating systems e Windows XP Home Edition or Professional e Windows 2003 Server Standard Enterprise or Web Edition e Windows Vista Ultimate or Business e Red Hat Enterprise Linux Version 4 AS ES and WS products e Red Hat Enterprise Linux Version 5 Sun Solaris SPARC 9 and 10 Novell SUSE Linux x86 Enterprise Server 9 or 10 e Macintosh OS X version 10 4 and later 32 bit OS only e Adobe Flash Player version 9 0 or later e One of the following browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or 7 Firefox 2 or 3 Install the latest updates and service packs available for your browser If you are using Firefox the Video Viewer and the Telnet Viewer clients require Java see Java Installation on page 23 Opening a client session Before opening a client session e Enable cookies and
493. sets the control field of the selected socket s to the specified value users other than administrators cannot change the state The default value is Unlock To control power from a Units View window 1 In a Units View window containing power devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the checkbox next to the power device s To select all power devices in the page click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list If any of the selected units are not power devices the operation will be ignored for them Click Operations then select Wall Power On Wall Power Off or Wall Power Cycle from the drop down menu A Multiple Unit Operation window will open containing a link to view results see Multiple unit operations from a Units View window on page 124 194 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 195 Unit Sessions and Connections This chapter describes how to view and manage unit sessions and connections in the DSView 3 software Managed Appliance Session Settings From the Appliance Sessions window you may display session information and change appliance session settings Exit macros may be used by and reside on certain switches Customizing the Appliance Sessions window The following fields may be displayed in the Appliance Sessions window for managed appliances Use the Customize link to add or remove fields in the display See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 Durat
494. side navigation bar The Appliance SNMP Manager Settings window will open Type the IP addresses in standard dot notation xxx xxx xxx xxx for up to four SNMP managers Then click Save To specify SNMP community settings click Community in the side navigation bar The Appliance SNMP Community Settings window will open Type the SNMP community names for reading writing and SNMP traps Then click Save To specify SNMP destination settings click Destinations in the side navigation bar The Appliance SNMP Destination Settings window will open Type the IP addresses in standard dot notation xxx xxx xxx xxx for up to four SNMP destinations Then click Save To enable or disable SNMP traps click Traps in the side navigation bar The Appliance SNMP Trap Settings window will open Select one of the following Enabled tums a trap on Disabled turns a trap off e Enable All turns all traps on Disable All turns all traps off Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open Target Device Services You may add or remove support on a target device for third party services such as Terminal Services and VNC Before adding support for a service the service must be properly installed and configured on the target device Once support for a service has been added you can launch a session for that service using several methods Clicking the name or icon for the service in the target device s Unit Overview window
495. siding on the computer that ran the DSAuth server will be imported into the DSView 3 software system An external NT authentication service with the same name as the DSAuth server will be added to the DSView 3 software system The DSView 2 x software users and user groups will be associated with the authentication service added to the DSView 3 software system e The DSView 2 x software Everyone user group cannot be imported into DSView 3 software systems Before using the Import DSView 2 x Software Database tool To use the Import DSView 2 x Software Database tool you must create a backup of the database using the DSAuth Migration Utility The database is saved as a zip file which may then be imported into the DSView 3 software system using the Import DSView 2 x Database tool The DSAuth Migration Utility will shut down the DSView 2 x DSAuth service as it runs and will restart the service upon completion To backup the database 1 On the computer containing the DSView 2 x software database that is the DSAuth Server that you wish to migrate insert the DSView 3 software DVD An autorun file will display the DSView 3 management software screen 2 Click Run DSView 2 x Migration Or If autorun is not enabled type lt drive gt Migration Utility DSMigration exe where lt drive gt is the letter of your DVD drive The DSAuth Migration Utility dialog box will appear 3 Click Backup The Save As dialog box will appear 4 Select
496. sions window for all sessions The Start Date Time field which indicates when the target device session was started is always displayed in the Active Modem Sessions window The Unit field which indicates the units that are connected by dial up is always displayed in the Active Modem Sessions window The following fields may be displayed in the Active Modem Sessions window Use the Customize link to add or remove fields in the display See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 e Duration Length of the DSView 3 software dial up connection to the unit IP Address IP address of the dial up connection to the unit e Status Status of the dial up connection Status values include Established indicating that a dial up connection is established or Establish Primary indicating that a dial up connection is established but the primary network connection is also available or Disconnecting which indicates that a DSView 3 software administrator is closing the session e Dial back Identifies if the connection used a dial back connection Unit Phone Number Phone number dialed to connect the unit To disconnect one or more target device active modem sessions NOTE Only DSView 3 software administrators may disconnect active modem sessions Chapter 12 Unit Sessions and Connections 207 In a Units View window containing target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click Active Modem Sessions in the side nav
497. software also supports the following external authentication services Microsoft Active Directory IBM SecureWay Directory Server Novell LDAP Services e Sun Solaris R9 LDAP Directory Server e Sun ONE LDAP Directory Server e Microsoft Windows NT domain Cisco Secure ACS 3 3 for Windows 2000 2003 server e Microsoft IAS for Windows 2000 2003 server e FreeRADIUS for Red Hat RHL3 e Cisco Secure ACS 3 3 for Windows 2000 2003 server 88 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide RSA SecurID Uses LDAP V3 If the DSView 3 server is configured for external authentication login requests are re directed to the configured extemal authentication server The DSView 3 software obtains external group membership and external user information when a user logs in If a user s group membership changes or the user is deleted externally the DSView 3 software will not see these changes until the next time the user logs in You may schedule a task that will automatically verify LDAP Active Directory and NT external authentication servers to ensure that accounts are still valid see Task Validating user accounts on an external authentication server on page 378 Authentication services may be managed only by DSView 3 software administrators and user administrators To display configured authentication services 1 Click the Users tab 2 Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication
498. software database will increase WAN VPN traffic but provide steady data reception at the local sites Infrequent database replication made at the various sites decreases the WAN VPN traffic but delays the reception of changes at the local site In addition the methods used to access devices affects network speed VPN access of a managed appliance is always slower than local access The DSView 3 management software supports VPNs that provide full transparency for IP addresses as well as ports between sites and many VPNs that perform network address translation NAT between sites For example the VPN in Figure 4 2 could use NAT if Site A and Site B are separate companies that merged but have not resolved their IP addresses See NAT Devices on page 59 HOO 4 PEEVE 11 Figure 4 2 DSView 3 Software System on a VPN Table 4 5 Typical DSView 3 Software System Firewall Configuration Descriptions Number Description Number Description 1 DSView 3 Software Client 7 Replication 2 Firewall 8 VPN Chapter 4 Basic Operations 59 Number NAT Devices Description Site A Target Devices Hub Server Spoke Server Number 9 10 11 Description DSView 3 Software Client Site B Target Devices NAT devices enable a company to use more internal IP addresses than they have assigned to managed appliances The IP addresses are not exposed outside of the NAT device NAT devices are typically used with a DSL broadband
499. sor mode In single cursor mode the display of the local second cursor in the Video Viewer window is turned off and only the target device mouse pointer will be visible The only mouse movements that will appear are those of the target device remote cursor Single cursor mode is used when there is no need for a local cursor The cursor mode status of the Video Viewer window displays in the title bar including the keystroke that can be used to exit single cursor mode If you enable Allow users to override this setting or if no profile is assigned to the target device users may enter and exit single cursor mode using Video Viewer menu commands See Cursor commands on page 302 Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 295 Single cursor mode release keystroke The single cursor mode release keystroke setting indicates the keystroke that can be used to release the Video Viewer single cursor mode When using a device that captures keystrokes before they reach the client you should avoid using those keys to restore the mouse pointer If you enable Allow users to override this setting or if no profile is assigned to the target device users may specify the cursor release keystroke using Video Viewer menu commands See Cursor commands on page 302 Toolbar profile settings Hide delay The hide delay setting indicates the number of seconds before the toolbar hides in the Video Viewer window when it is in show hide state that is not locked
500. ss storage device For additional information see Understanding and Using Virtual Media which is available on the DSView 3 software DVD and on the Avocent web site Requirements The target device must be connected to the KVM switch that supports virtual media with an IQ module that supports virtual media Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 321 The target device must be intrinsically able to use the types of USB2 compatible media that you virtually map In other words if the target device does not support a portable USB memory device you cannot map that on the client machine as a virtual media drive on the target device The user or user group to which the user belongs must have permission to establish virtual media sessions and or reserved virtual media sessions to the target device See About Access Rights on page 163 Only one virtual media session may be active to a target device at one time You may not use the virtual media feature with the DSR Remote Operations software Sharing and preemption considerations The KVM and virtual media sessions are separate therefore there are many options for sharing reserving or preempting sessions The DSView 3 software has the flexibility to accommodate the system needs For example the KVM and virtual media sessions may be locked together In this mode when a KVM session is disconnected so is the associated virtual media session If the sessions are not locked together the KVM sess
501. ssion Type Session type which may be KVM virtual media or serial Client IP address of the client computer connected to the session for a non proxy connection For a proxy connection the IP address of the DSView 3 proxy will appear in this field Connection Connection path from the target device to the managed appliance See Connections to Units on page 207 Mode Session mode which may change during the session See Customizing the Appliance Sessions window on page 195 for a description of the available modes Owner Name of the user who launched the session which may be a user a local port user or a user with a local user account Preemption Level Effective user preemption level for the user that is connected to the target device session See Preemption Levels on page 46 To remove an active session from the all Active Sessions window NOTE Removing an active session from the Active Sessions window does not disconnect the session 1 2 3 Click the Units tab Click Active Sessions in the side navigation bar The Active Sessions window will open Click the checkbox to the left of the session To remove all active sessions on the page click the checkbox to the left of Start Date Time at the top of the list Click Remove A confirmation dialog box will appear Confirm or cancel the removal Chapter 12 Unit Sessions and Connections 203 To disconnect an active session from an appliance window This pr
502. ssion properties that will be stored and reused every time you connect to the selected appliance or port When you select Options Session Properties in the DSView 3 software Telnet Viewer the Session Properties dialog box will appear containing Terminal Login Scripts and Logging tabs To change the terminal window size 1 Select Options Session Properties from the menu or click the Session Settings icon in the toolbar The Session Properties dialog box will appear 2 Click the Terminal tab 3 In the Rows list choose a value of 24 or 48 The default value is 24 4 Inthe Columns list choose a value of 80 or 132 The default value is 80 Chapter 20 Using the Telnet Viewer 333 To change the terminal emulation mode 1 Select Options Session Properties from the menu or click the Session Settings icon in the toolbar The Session Properties dialog box will appear Click the Terminal tab From the Terminal Emulation list choose one option The default value is VT100 Terminal Emulation on page 425 contains encoding and decoding information for each of the terminal emulation types NOTE When connecting to an appliance the terminal type setting must match the terminal emulation type To change the Telnet Viewer Arrow key sequences When the Terminal Emulation mode is VT100 VT100 VT102 VT52 VT220 or VT320 you may specify either VT100 or ANSI Arrow key sequences Table 20 3 Arrow Key Sequences 2 3 Key V
503. st box to the left of the keyboard graphic You may type or use the arrow buttons to specify a delay between buttons you selected from the keyboard graphic First click the button in the list box after which you want to insert a delay Then click Delay to insert the delay in the list box 8 To specify one or more target devices on which you wish to use the macro select the device s in the Available list then click Add The target devices will be moved to the Assigned list Chapter 12 Unit Sessions and Connections 201 To remove one or more target devices on which you wish to use the macro select the device s from the Assigned list then click Remove The target devices will be moved to the Available list 10 Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open Example Creating a macro The following example creates an exit macro where the Ctrl key is held while F1 F2 F3 are typed 1 Type ControlF1 F2 F3 in the Name field This is the name of the macro that will appear in the Appliance Exit Macros window 2 Click the left or right Ctrl key in the keyboard graphic in the window Ctrl Left PRESS or Ctrl Right PRESS will appear in the list box to the left of the keyboard graphic 3 Click 7 F2 and F3 in the keyboard graphic in the window The keystrokes will appear in the list box to the left of the keyboard graphic 4 Click the same left or right Ctrl key in the graphic that you pressed in step 2 Ctrl Left
504. st to Update list e To remove one or more units unit groups select the units groups in the List to Update list then click Remove The units unit groups will be moved to the Available list Inherited users and user groups can only be removed from the first unit group that specified any access rights other than inherit Click OK The User Access Rights window will display the current list of units unit groups To add remove access rights for a unit unit group select a unit or unit group from the Unit and Unit Groups list then enable or disable a checkbox in the Access Rights table for each access right e Allow the access right is allowed for the user Deny the access right is denied for the user e Inherit the access right is inherited from the unit group s to which the selected unit unit group belongs When Inherit is selected the Allow and Deny checkboxes will become gray and unchangeable and indicate the inherited value If the inherited settings indicated both Allow and Deny the inherited value is Deny which takes precedence To disable the inherit functionality uncheck the Inherit checkbox e If none of the checkboxes are checked the access right is neither allowed nor denied Repeat the preceding step for other units unit groups Click Save and then click Close 275 User Groups Users that have been added to the DSView 3 software system may be added to the following two types of user groups e Built I
505. staller User Guide 10 11 a Type the IP address of the hub server in standard dot notation xxx xxx xxx xxx or the domain name of the hub server b Type the port number for the hub server If the default hub server port value 443 is modified you must specify it when registering a spoke server so that register requests will be sent to the correct port on the hub server For example if the IP address of the hub server is 10 0 0 1 and the port number is changed to 444 type https 10 0 0 1 444 dsview in the Address field of the Register Spoke Server Wizard c Click Next The Operation in Progress window will open briefly followed by the Accept Hub DSView Server Certificate window Click Next The Type in Hub DSView Server Administrator Credentials window will open Click Next Type the name of a user with DSView 3 software administrator privileges on the hub server Type a password for the user Click Next The Operation In Progress window will open The configuration of the spoke server will be saved to the database of the hub server and the spoke server s certificates will be installed on the hub server The Completed Successful window will open when the spoke server has been added Click Finish To change spoke server network properties NOTE Spoke server network settings may need to be changed by DSView 3 software administrators when network settings are changed and the hub server did not automatically detect t
506. subgroup B by default any access rights you assign to group A will be propagated to group B There are other ways to assign access rights see How access rights can be assigned on page 165 To change unit group properties 1 Click the Units tab Click Groups in the top navigation bar The Unit Groups window will open Click on the name of a unit group The Unit Group Name window will open ao WEN Type a new 1 64 character name in the Group field The name must be unique within the parent group For example two groups can be named development but they cannot both be members of the unit group Huntsville This unique name restriction does not apply to personal unit groups that are owned by different users 5 Ifyou do not want the unit group or any of its child unit groups to appear in the side navigation bar enable the Do not display this unit group nor any child unit groups as unit views checkbox 6 Ifyou do not want the units in the unit group to belong to any other unit group select Exclusive 246 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 7 Click Save and then click Close To add or remove members in a unit group NOTE Removing a unit group or unit member from a unit group does not delete the group unit from the DSView 3 software system or any other group to which it belongs 1 Click the Units tab 2 Click Groups in the top navigation bar The Unit Groups window will open 3 To add or remove a gr
507. supported Macintosh system clients the placement of some buttons is different The Minimize Maximize and Close buttons are located on the left side of the screen and the frame can be resized by clicking in the lower right corner NOTE On supported Macintosh system clients the Video Viewer opens in a self contained window and is not included in the Macintosh Application Menu 288 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Opening a KVM Session See Connecting to an existing session on page 289 for information about what occurs if the device you are attempting to access is currently being viewed by another user To open a KVM session from the DSView 3 Explorer In a Units View window containing the target device you want to access see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the KVM Session link in the Action column of the target device you wish to view The Video Viewer launches in a new window To open a KVM session using the Unit Overview window 1 Ina Units View window containing the target device you want to access see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the name of the target device The Unit Overview window will open 2 Click on the KVM Session name or icon The Video Viewer launches in a new window Opening an exclusive KVM session An exclusive KVM connection is used when you need to access a port while excluding all other users When a port is selected with the Exclusive KVM connection setti
508. t For example the Unit List may contain both target devices and managed appliances Video Viewer The Video Viewer is a software component that provides the user interface needed to display a remote target device through KVM over IP sessions VPN Virtual Private Network VPN is a means of implementing a private network on a public network such as the Internet By encrypting data and assigning addresses the impression is given to networks at each end of the VPN that they are connected by a private physical network instead of across a public network WAN Wide Area Network WAN typically refers to a network that is distributed at multiple sites and connected by a relatively slow link between the sites The WAN is frequently implemented using a VPN on the Internet WAS Web Application Server WAS is software that runs on a server that is capable of executing web applications The WAS software typically contains or works with a web HTTP server Webapp Web Application Webapps are groups of server side Web resources that make up an interactive online application The web resources include Java servlets JavaServer Pages JSPs static documents such as HTML documents and applets that can be deployed in a DSView 3 software client web browser Web applications must run in the context of a web application server such as the DSView 3 server Web server A web server is a computer equipped with server software to respond to HT
509. t groups This group cannot be deleted and you cannot add subgroups children to the Unassigned unit group Global unit groups may only be created modified or deleted by users with DSView 3 software administrator user administrator or appliance administrator privileges The global root personal root and unassigned unit groups cannot be deleted Global Root System Defined Can change rights Can create subgroups Can add groups as children but not units Unassigned User Defined j System Defined Global Groups Can change rights Can change rights Cannot ceate subgroups Can create subgroups Cannot add units as members Can add units as members Ifa unitis notassigned to any other glonal group it automatically becomes 2 mamber of this group Figure 15 2 Unit Groups Structure Personal Root System Defined No rights associated with personal groups Can create subgroups Can add groups as children but not units User Defined Personal Groups Na rights associated with personal groups Can create subgroups Can add units as members Table 15 3 Unit Groups Features Chapter 15 Grouping Units 241 Can change Group Type rights System Defined Global Root Yes Unassigned Yes Personal Root No User Defined Global Groups Yes Personal Groups No Unit group hierarchy There are two primary ways to view unit groups Can have subgroups Yes No Yes Yes Yes
510. t of IQ modules may require multiple pages you can filter the list by column or click the arrows to move to a page You can also click Customize to specify what is displayed in this section For information about filtering and customizing see Using Windows on page 30 Select the checkbox next to each IQ module for which you want to enable disable virtual media and click Enable VM or Disable VM respectively The preset virtual media status is enabled NOTE If the KVM switch does not support virtual media the Virtual Media Access Per IQ module and associated buttons and links are not displayed 8 Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open Defining exit macros Since clients are running remotely on PCs certain commands must be sent to the controlled target device using keyboard macros For example pressing Ctrl Alt Delete on your keyboard resets the PC running the client rather than resetting the target device To reset the target device a macro is needed The DSView 3 management software provides numerous sequences pre configured for ease of operation 200 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Three kinds of macros are available personal global and exit Personal macros and global macros are created using the Video Viewer window See Macros on page 314 Exit macros are supported on DS1800 digital switches and the following DSR switches DSR1010 1021 1022 1024 1030 1031 2010 2020 2030 2035 4010 4020
511. t type and initiate other operations from the DSView 3 software that are supported in that plug in NOTE You must have DSView 3 software administrator access rights to view add and manage plug ins Plug ins are created using the Plug in API in the DSView 3 Software Development Kit SDK Recommended Sequence for Adding Upgrading Plug ins To add or upgrade a plug in 1 Ensure that scheduled replication will not occur during the adding or upgrading of plug ins you may need to change the replication schedule temporarily 2 Perform a replication operation on every spoke server See Replication on page 84 3 Perform a backup of the DSView 3 software database See Backing up and Restoring Hub Servers Manually on page 77 4 Add or upgrade the plug in on the hub server e To add a plug in see Adding Plug ins on page 400 e To upgrade a plug in see Upgrading a plug in on page 403 400 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 5 Add or upgrade the plug in on each spoke server All spoke servers should have the same plug ins at the same version 6 Perform a replication operation on every spoke server 7 Perform a backup of the DSView 3 software database 8 Ifyou changed the replication schedule in step 1 you may change it back to its original values Adding Plug ins For optimal operation the hub and all of the spoke servers should have the same version of a plug in installed Follow the steps described in Recommended Sequen
512. t unit will open The display lists all connections The Status field may contain the following values 3 4 Chapter 13 Data Logging 215 Enabled Data logging is enabled in the appliance for the corresponding port connection and a data log license has been allocated for it data logging for a direct session to an appliance does not require or use a license Disabled Data logging is disabled in the appliance for the corresponding port Unlicensed Data logging is enabled in the appliance for the corresponding port connection but there is no data log license allocated for it To enable data logging on one or more connections a Click the checkbox next to the connection name s To select all connections on the page click the checkbox at the top of the list Click Enable If sufficient data log licenses are available logging will be enabled on the selected connections and the Status field will indicate Enabled If insufficient licenses are available a warning will be displayed and the Status field will indicate either Enabled or Unlicensed To disable data logging on one or more connections a a Click the checkbox next to the connection name s To select all connections on the page click the checkbox at the top of the list Click Disable Data logging will be stopped on the selected connections and the data log licenses used by those connections will be returned to the available pool Verifying the data
513. tab 2 Click Global Properties in the top navigation bar 3 Click Wizard Defaults in the side navigation bar then click Add Unit Wizard 8 Chapter 9 Synchronizing the DSView 3 Software Database 149 The Add Unit Wizard Default Options window will open If you enable the Enable secure mode checkbox by default the unit will only be accessible by this DSView 3 software system In non secure mode the unit may be added to multiple DSView 3 software systems If you enable the Allow target devices with the same name to be merged into a single target device checkbox by default the connection to a target device in the appliance will be merged with the connection s to an existing target device in the DSView 3 software database If a target device has a default name you may indicate that by default it can be added to the DSView 3 software database only if it supports specific connection type s in the appliance Enable the checkboxes for the specific connection types Click Save Topology synchronization options in the Resync Wizard The Select Resync Options window in the Resync Wizard allows you to specify certain topology synchronization options Remove offline connections Delete target devices that no longer have connections Merge target device names Default target names allowed for connection types This window is described in Resynchronizing units on page 358 Each of these options has a default value which you may c
514. tain read write access See Transferring read write access on page 230 If the console port on the target device requires additional authentication the user is prompted to log in Escape key sequence An escape key sequence is a combination of characters that can be sent to the DSView 3 server to affect an SSH Passthrough or Avocent Session Viewer session The default escape sequence is Ec which can be followed by an escape key to send a command to a target device Some escape key sequences are limited to only the user with read write access In this chapter the preset escape Sequence Ec is used in all examples to indicate the configured escape sequence Table 14 1 DSView 3 Software Supported SSH Passthrough Session Escape Keys Escape PRE Escape bada Keys Description Keys Description Disconnect Print this message A ab Change escape sequence the preset a Attach read write rights e NIN value is Ec 1 Displays break sequence list 0 9 Send specific break sequence r Replay last 30 lines of log lt cr gt Ignore abort command Only users with read write access can send these escape key sequences To modify the escape sequence From an SSH Passthrough session enter the following command AEce new escape sequence Chapter 14 SSH Passthrough Sessions 229 For example Ece Ac changes the escape sequence from Ec to Ac To enter an escape key sequence From an SSH Passthrough session enter a command in
515. target device cannot be power controlled using the DSView 3 software or if the user does not have power control access rights The current state of the power device outlet appears in the Current Power Status area of the dialog box As you change the power state the information is updated in real time Depending on the configuration of a power device outlet it may not immediately respond to a power change request for example it may be configured to remain off for a specific period of time To power up power down or power cycle a target device 1 Select Options Power from the Telnet Viewer main window The Power Control dialog box will appear 2 Click On Off or Cycle 3 Click Close to close the dialog box 346 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Closing a Telnet Viewer Session To close a Telnet Viewer session Select File Exit from the Telnet Viewer window 347 Using Tools The DSView 3 management software contains tools that may be used to perform various actions on units This chapter describes the available tools and how to use them Using Unit Tools The Unit Tools window contains tools that allow a user to e Export unit information to a csv comma separated value file Export unit access rights information to a csv file e Merge two or more target devices into a single target device e Simultaneously merge multiple target devices and power outlets e Import a DSView 2 x software database into t
516. te the nstalling DSView 3 help on a local server on page 38 procedure if you want to access the help from the local server Global System Properties Global system properties affect all DSView 3 servers in the system That is when global system properties are changed on a DSView 3 server the next replication operation will apply those changes to all other DSView 3 servers in the system see Replication on page 84 Global system properties include e Video session properties see Video Viewer session properties on page 290 e User credential properties see Specifying a user certificate on page 43 and Specifying an SSH key on page 43 e Legal notice see Legal Notice on page 39 e Target device naming see Target Device Naming on page 173 Chapter 4 Basic Operations 39 Automatic inheritance see Automatic Inheritance for Group Memberships and Properties on page 153 Legal Notice You may enable or disable the display of a legal caption and disclaimer prior to users logging in to the DSView 3 software When enabled the legal disclaimer is displayed every time a user logs in The legal notice feature affects all DSView 3 servers in the system after replication see Replication on page 84 Only DSView 3 software administrators may configure the legal notice To enable or disable and configure the legal notice 1 2 3 Click the System tab Click Global Properties in the top navigation bar Click Legal Notice in the s
517. ted In addition to the PAP and CHAP methods a One Time Password OTP authentication may also be used for analog modem dial up connections OTP is not supported on ISDN modems A secret password will be generated for every dial up request and each password will only be valid for a single attempt Once authenticated a secure connection will be established For added security the ACS console server plug in may also be configured for dial back connections Once authenticated the dial up connection will be dropped and the ACS console server will dial back to the DSView 3 server to establish a secure connection This method does not support OTP To configure dial back settings on the DSView 3 server see DSView 3 software modem sessions on page 74 Only DSView 3 software administrators may access the Active Modem Sessions window 206 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Supported modems The following modems and serial PCI cards are supported by the DSView 3 software provided the modems are supported on the DSView 3 server operating system e Perle PCI RAS 4 and PCI RAS 8 which are backwards compatible with Perle V90 Modem e Equinox SST MM 4p Modem e Equinox SST 4p Serial e Eicon DS series ISDN BRI 2M Eicon DS series ISDN 4BRI 8M The DSView 3 software also supports the USR3453B Courier 56k external modem NOTE The modems listed are not supported on Sun Solaris SPARC operating systems Customizing the Active Modem Ses
518. ters d Repeat the password in the Confirm Password field 6 Click Save Archiving and deleting data log files Data log files are archived at specified intervals or when a file reaches a specified size You may also archive files dynamically Archived files retain the same name with a zip file name extension Each time a file is archived it is considered a version for that particular connection port You may indicate the number of versions that will be retained in the file system when this value is exceeded for a connection port the oldest archived file version will automatically be deleted You may also delete archived files dynamically If an appliance or target device name is changed any current log files associated with the original name will be closed and archived with their original name Those files will be viewable only from the Reports Data Log Session Files window Subsequent incoming data log messages will be written to a new file that has the new unit name Similarly if a target device or appliance is deleted from the DSView 3 software system any current log files associated with the unit and its target devices if the deleted unit is an appliance will be closed and archived These files will be viewable only from the Reports Data Log Session Files window To specify archiving properties 1 Click the System tab 2 Click DSView Server in the top navigation bar 2 Chapter 13 Data Logging 219 In the side
519. that contain a Customize or Customize Fields and Filter link allow you to change the following information The number of items displayed per page in the window e Which columns of information are displayed in Units View windows e Which columns are included in a filter from a Units View window available from the Customize Fields and Filter link only By clicking the Customize link you can also show units that have been hidden in a Units View window NOTE If you are in a Units View window the link is displayed as Custom Fields and Filter and this window contains additional filtering options On any other window the link is displayed as Customize The term Customize link is used throughout this document to refer to both links The items available for customizing and methods for changing them will vary depending on the window being customized Although the items that appear in windows may vary the items that do appear are modified identically regardless of the window in which you clicked the Customize link DSView 3 software administrators may also configure the default display for customizable windows that is which columns will be displayed and how many items will be displayed per page by default The default values will be used by all new users and by existing users who have not already customized their views To customize a window using the Customize link 1 Ina window containing a Customize link in the upper r
520. the DSView 3 software database If the target device in the DSView 3 Target devices software database has multiple appliance connections the target device name will be pulled from one of the appliance connections based on the configured connection type priority to update the target device name in the DSView 3 software database If the cascade switch in the DSView 3 software database has a single appliance connection the name will be pulled from the appliance to update the cascade switch name in the DSView 3 software database If the cascade switch in the DSView 3 software database has multiple appliance connections to the same appliance a multiuser cascade switch the cascade switch name will be pulled from the appliance connection with the lowest port number to update the cascade switch in the DSView 3 software database Multiuser cascade switches are treated as separate cascade switches by the appliance The following sections describe how to change a unit s Name in Appliance Power device see Power Devices on page 187 Power device socket see Power Device Sockets on page 191 Cascade switch see KVM Switch and Cascade Switch Settings on page 175 Target device see Target Device Settings on page 172 To enable or disable automatic name pull 1 2 3 4 Click the System tab Click Global Properties in the top navigation bar Click Units Synchronization in the side navigation bar then click Auto Name Pull The Aut
521. the Macro Groups dialog box Macros in the selected group will appear in the Video Viewer window Macros menu To display a predefined macro group Select Macros Display on Menu and then select one of the macro groups Sun or Windows Power Control of Devices Attached to Power Devices NOTE You must have Appliance Administrator privileges to issue a power control command If a target device is connected to a power device outlet socket you may power up power down or cycle power up and then power down the target device using the Power Control dialog box To power up power down or power cycle a target device 1 Select Tools Power Control from the Video Viewer menu The Power Control dialog box will appear 2 Click the Power On the Server Power Off the Server or Power Cycle the Server button 3 A warning dialog box will appear Confirm or cancel the operation 4 Click Close to close the dialog box Using Virtual Media The virtual media feature allows the user on the client workstation to map a physical drive on that machine as a virtual drive on a target device The client may also add and map an ISO or floppy image file as a virtual drive on the target device You may have one CD drive and one mass storage device mapped concurrently e A CD DVD drive disk image file such as an ISO or floppy image file is mapped as a virtual CD drive A floppy drive USB memory device or other media type is mapped as a virtual ma
522. the Macros Available list Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the Macros in Group list contains all the desired macros Click OK to accept the macro group and retum to the Macro Groups dialog box Click Close To rename a macro group 1 Select Macros Configure Macro Groups from the Video Viewer menu or click the Macro Groups button The Macro Groups dialog box appears Select one of the following All displays both personal and global macro groups Personal displays only personal macro groups or Global displays only global macro groups Select the macro group to be altered from the Defined Groups list box Windows and Sun are the default macro groups If you have created new groups they will also be displayed Click Edit The Create Edit Macro Groups dialog box will appear In the Macro Group Name field enter a 1 32 character unique macro group name 6 ve Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 319 Click OK to save the name and return to the Macro Groups dialog box Click Close To delete a macro group 1 ON ON cz oP Select Macros Configure Macro Groups from the Video Viewer menu or click the Macro Groups button The Macro Groups dialog box appears Select one of the following All displays both personal and global macro groups Personal displays only personal macro groups or Global displays only global macro groups Select the macro group to be deleted from the Defined Groups list box Click the Del
523. the Operations menu A given action will be available only if at least one of the selected units supports the action If a selected unit does not support the operation it will be reported as such in the results window When one of these multiple unit operations is initiated and confirmed if needed a system task is created that will perform the operation on each unit The Multiple Unit Operation window will open indicating the operation has been submitted This window contains a link that directs the user to the Operations Results window for the task To initiate and view results from multiple unit operations from a Units View window 1 Ina Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 initiate the multiple unit operation as described in the procedures referenced above If prompted Chapter 7 Units View Windows 125 confirm the operation 2 The Multiple Unit Operation window will open indicating the operation has been submitted If you do not want to view the results of the operation click Close and skip the rest of this procedure To view the results of the operation click Click here to view results 3 The Operations Results window will open listing all multiple unit operations and any unit tasks that have been initiated see Using Tasks on page 363 The entry for each operation includes e Name of the operation When the operation started e When the operation finished blank if not yet complete
524. the category link in the side navigation bar Click the checkbox to the left of one or more events To select all events on the page click the checkbox to the left of Log Event at the top of the list Click Enable or Disable Events cannot be enabled unless they are already disabled Similarly events cannot be disabled unless they are already enabled The Enabled Log Events window will refresh with the new information Displaying the Event Log There are several ways to customize event log displays You may display all events or at least the most recent 5000 in the log You may display events of a particular severity or a particular category You may display events that occurred during a specified interval You may display events based on their state see Event states on page 394 Event log display fields The following fields are always displayed in the Event Log window Severity See Event severity on page 387 Clicking this field will display the Event Information window which contains details about the event Date Time Displays the date and time of an event in the client computer s time zone Description Short description of an event The following fields may be displayed Use the Customize link to add or remove fields in the display See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 State New or Acknowledged See Event states on page 394 This field is displayed only when the Show All button is enabled Its
525. the deletion To change the name of a site department or location 1 2 Click the Units tab To change the name of a site click Sites in the top navigation bar The Sites window will open To change the name of a department click Departments in the top navigation bar The Departments window will open To change the name of a location click Locations in the top navigation bar The Locations window will open Click on the name of a site department location The Site Department Location Name window will open Type a new 1 64 character name 5 Chapter 15 Grouping Units 235 Click Save and then click Close The Sites Departments or Locations window will open To associate or change the association of an existing unit to a site department or location 1 2 Click the Units tab Click one of the links listed in Table 15 1 in the side navigation bar to display the corresponding window for the units you wish to associate change or remove the association Table 15 1 Links for Managing Sites Departments or Location Associations 6 Link Window Changes Site Associations For Alink under Target Devices Target Devices Target devices only Alink under Appliances Appliances Managed appliances only Sites Units in Site Units Groups Units in Group Units A link under Custom Field Units in Custom Fields Units Recently Accessed Recently Accessed Units Units Click on the name of a unit The Unit Overview window wi
526. the following format AEc escape key For example Ec1 displays the break sequence list After entering an escape key sequence the SSH client displays a message indicating success or failure Break sequences NOTE SSH port sharing must be enabled before you can configure break sequences A break sequence is a user defined combination of characters that can be sent as a command to a target device during an SSH Passthrough or Avocent Session Viewer session A break sequence is sent when the corresponding escape key sequence is typed by the user The DSView 3 software supports ASCII and UTF 8 characters and special break keys Only the user with read write access to the SSH session can send a break sequence to a target device You can configure up to 10 break sequences to be used in SSH Passthrough sessions The following special break keys are supported Table 14 2 DSView 3 Software Supported SSH Passthrough Session Break Keys Break Description Break Description Character P Character P Ya Alert z Serial break defined as Telnet break IAC 337 BREAK 363 b Backspace Backslash d Delay preset value is 250 milliseconds Circumflex Octal representation of a character f Form feed ooo ae where ooo is one to three octal digits n New line c Character c r Carriage return A Delete t Tab Ac Control character cis and ed with 0x1f v Vertical tab UTF 8 Any utf8 character 230 DSView 3 Softwar
527. the fully qualified domain name Type a Telnet port number e Type a web browser address e Select the DSView 3 server in charge of the EVR1500 environmental monitor or generic appliance 3 Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open About Access Rights Access rights indicate which users and user groups may access units in the DSView 3 software system Access rights also indicate which actions are allowed For target devices you may specify whether a user or members of a user group are allowed to View the unit in a Units View window this right is enabled automatically if any other access right for the target device is enabled Establish viewer sessions Video Viewer or serial as supported on the device Control target device power Establish virtual media sessions to target devices since virtual media sessions are launched from a Video Viewer session if you select this option you should also select Establish Viewer Sessions 164 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide e Establish reserved virtual media sessions to target devices since virtual media sessions are launched from a Video Viewer session if you select this option you should also select Establish Viewer Sessions e Configure unit settings see Target Device Settings on page 172 e View data logging this access night can be set only for target devices connected to appliances that support data logging see Chapter 10 on page 211 For
528. the object class The default value is group c Type the member attribute The default value is member d Type the username member attribute only the username not the full LDAP object DN The user s group membership will be located using this attribute in addition to the member attribute This attribute is primarily used with NIS like schemas e Click Next 10 The Select Browsing Method window will open Click Browse Anonymously to browse users on the external LDAP authentication server or Click Browse with user credentials to browse users on the external LDAP authentication based on credentials configured on the server If this option is selected do the following a Type a log in ID in the User Name field in one of two forms a fully qualified distinguished name or the username of an account in the base user DN b Type the password for the LDAP user account in the Password field c Click Next 11 The Establish Connection with Authentication Service window will open briefly If the external authentication service is added successfully the Completed Successful window will open 12 Click Finish The User Authentication Services window will open with the new service listed To change connection settings for the LDAP external authentication service 1 Click the Users tab 2 Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open 3 Click the name of the LDAP s
529. the server certificates so that they will match A server responded but it is not compatible with the DSView 3 software This typically occurs when communication is attempted with a server that does not contain the software or if either server contains an older version of the software Ensure that both servers are running the same DSView 3 software version Invalid Server or Versions Not Compatible To add a spoke server 1 Install the DSView 3 software on the computer that will be used as a spoke server See Installing the DSView 3 Software on page 13 2 Configure the computer as a spoke server See Configuring the DSView 3 Software on page 17 To register a hub server as a spoke server Only DSView 3 software administrators may access this procedure NOTE When registering a hub server as a spoke server on another DSView 3 software system the information on the hub server being registered will be lost Its database will be updated to match the new hub server to which it is being registered 1 Click the System tab 2 Click DSView Server in the top navigation bar The side navigation bar will include the name of the server to which you are logged in 3 Select Tools in the side navigation bar The DSView Server Tools window will open 4 Click the Register as Spoke Server icon or text The Register Spoke Server Wizard will appear 5 The Type in Hub DSView Server Address window will open 82 DSView 3 Software In
530. the settings for the security zone being used by the DSView 3 software See Security zones on page 49 Administrators may prevent users from installing software on their computers In this case the Windows domain administrators may choose to push an MSI installer using a Group Policy This will silently install the Avocent Session Viewers without requiring the user to install the software themselves This will install only the viewers for Internet Explorer The MSI file is located on the DSView 3 software DVD and in the webapp applets directory on the DSView 3 server Use the following procedures if you are permitted to install software To download an ActiveX control on a DSView 3 software hub server using Windows all operating systems except Windows XP with Service Pack 2 1 Ina Units View window that contains target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the link in the Action field or select an alternate action if available You can also access a Unit Overview window for a target device and click the icon or link for the session type If this is the first time the ActiveX control has been requested by the DSView 3 software an Avocent Session Viewer message box will appear followed by a Security Warning dialog box 2 Select Always trust content from Avocent Huntsville Corporation Chapter 4 Basic Operations 49 Click Yes to download the ActiveX control When the control has been downloaded a KVM s
531. the specified destination target device Optional To merge target devices in a particular order select one or more target devices in the Target Devices to Merge list and use the up and down arrows to move the selected target devices up or down in the listing Once the order has been specified select Merge missing properties to the target device based on the order of the devices in the Target Devices to Merge list Click Merge 152 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Merging or splitting cascade switches You may use the Merge Cascade Switch wizard to modify the name type of one or more cascade switches that belong to the same appliance in the DSView 3 software database You may also merge or split two or more multi user cascade switches from the same appliance To merge or split cascade switches 1 8 In a Units View window containing cascade switches see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the cascade switch name The Unit Overview window will open Click the Merge Target Devices icon or link The Merge Cascade Switches Wizard will appear The Cascade Switch Configuration window will open The Appliance Port column lists the ports in the appliance that are connected to cascade switches You may change the cascade switch type by selecting from the drop down menu If you change the cascade switch name it must contain 1 64 characters and must not exist in the DSView 3 software database unless it is
532. the target device for the serial port in the DSView 3 software database has a single appliance connection the target device name will be pulled from the appliance to update the target device name in the DSView 3 software database If the target device for the serial port in the DSView 3 software database has multiple appliance connections the target device name will be pulled from one of the appliance connections based on the configured connection type priority to update the target device name in the DSView 3 software database The power device name will be pulled from the appliance to update the power device name in the DSView 3 software database If the target device for the power device socket in the DSView 3 software database has a single appliance connection the target device name will be pulled from the appliance to update the target device name in the DSView 3 software database If the target device for the power device socket in the DSView 3 software database has multiple appliance connections the target device name will be pulled from one of the appliance connections based on the configured connection type priority to update the target device name in the DSView 3 software database 144 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Cascade switches Unit Effect If the target device in the DSView 3 software database has a single appliance connection the name will be pulled from the appliance to update the target device name in
533. the text color click the Text History Mode box in the Colors section and select a color The default color is white Macros NOTE Three additional types of macros are available in the DSView 3 management software Exit macros created within the DSView 3 Explorer reside on DS1800 digital switches and DSR switches and are used by these switches Global macros and personal macros are created using the Video Viewer window and are used with KVM sessions with target devices attached to DS1800 digital switches and DSR switches None of these macros may be used or are compatible with a Telnet Viewer The DSView 3 software Telnet Viewer has a macro function that allows you to create and use macros during Telnet Viewer sessions A macro comprises a series of keystrokes that you define Additionally you may specify a hotkey in the macro s definition When you define a macro and enable its inclusion in the Macros menu you may execute the macro during a Telnet Viewer session either by selecting it from the Macros menu or by pressing the defined hotkey on your keyboard You may also define one or more global macro or personal macro groups then add macros to the groups Personal macro groups may be created by any user and are only available for use on the target device on which they are created Global macros may only be created by a DSView 3 software administrator and are available for use by any user on the DSView 3 software system A macro may belong t
534. tiating sessions with the target device At the beginning of a session the RDP viewer allows users to map local resources for use with virtual media NOTE RDP is only available on supported Windows system clients Partner products Environmental monitoring with Uptime Devices DSView 3 software can help you access Uptime Devices SensorHub environmental monitoring equipment so you can quickly detect environmental conditions equipment to track temperature humidity airflow water voltage and contact closures that could adversely affect operation of servers and other network devices Visit www uptimedevices com for ordering information Proactive Network Security with NetClarity Auditor Enterprise Integrate NetClarity Auditor Enterprise with the DSView 3 software and manage one or more Auditor appliances to alert block and correct critical IT security and compliance problems in your data center and entire enterprise network Visit www netclarity net for ordering information Avocent DSView 3 Connector for HP Software The DSView 3 Connector for HP Software extends the capabilities of HP Software Network Node Manager NNM and Operations for Windows OVOW Seamless access and control allows critical management functions for dispersed IT environments Out of band connectivity offers solutions for lights out data centers and ensures quick and efficient troubleshooting and repair from the HP console Supported Units For management fun
535. tically in a Units View window see Topology view on page 116 click the Expand view automatically checkbox 7 Units View windows only To specify which fields are included in a filter select the field s from the Available Fields list and click the Add button To remove fields from a filter select the fields from the Filter on these fields list and click Remove 8 To set the Fields to Show and List Items as the default click Set as Default This button will appear only if you are a DSView 3 software administrator You will be prompted to confirm setting these values as the default Confirm or cancel 9 Click Save and then click Finish The window being customized will open with the changes Displaying pages Multiple page windows contain navigation buttons which may be used to quickly move among pages 34 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Table 3 4 DSView 3 Explorer Page Navigation Buttons Button Description lt First Page Navigates to the beginning of a list displayed in a window lt lt Previous Page Navigates to the previous page of a list displayed in a window gt gt Next Page Navigates to the next page of a list displayed in a window gt Last Page Navigates to the end of a list displayed in a window The page navigation buttons are enabled only if there are enough pages available to make them necessary The number of items that display in a window page is specified by using the Customize li
536. tility dialog box will appear 2 From the DSView 3 Backup Restore Utility dialog box click Restore the database from a file 3 Ifthe backup file is password protected click Enabled and type its password in the Password field 4 Click Browse and use the Save As dialog box to find the backup file 5 Click Restore The DSView 3 software system is restored from the backup files 6 Click Close to close the DSView 3 Backup Restore Utility dialog box 80 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Spoke Servers Information on the hub server is replicated on one or more spoke servers Information about each spoke server such as IP address port number and certificate is stored in the hub server s database You may specify up to 15 computers as spoke servers Contact Avocent for information about spoke server licenses To install licenses see Licenses on page 60 NOTE The DSView 3 management software versions of the spoke server and hub server must match in order to register a spoke server For example you may not register a spoke server running DSView 3 software version 3 1 with a hub server running DSView 3 software version 3 2 A spoke server may be created by e Specifying a spoke server when installing the DSView 3 software e Converting a hub server to a spoke server by registering it as a spoke to another DSView 3 software hub server The DSView 3 software system data on the hub server being converted will be lost and the
537. tion video performance over a slower network connection may be less than optimal Since certain color settings use less network bandwidth than others changing the color settings may increase video performance For optimal video performance over a slower network connection a color setting such as Grayscale Best Compression or Low Color High Compression is recommended See Color depth on page 295 The Video Viewer client requires Java when launched from Mozilla or Firefox browsers The supported Java version is 1 5 0 02 The Video Viewer requires this version The DSView 3 software client automatically downloads and installs the JRE Java Runtime Environment the first time the Video Viewer or Telnet Viewer is launched See Java Installation on page 23 See the DSR Installer User Guide for information about how the keys on a standard Type 5 Sun keyboard are emulated on a PS 2 keyboard Window Features 2 11 543 Del TWE Spoko Avocent Session Viewer Sii Figure 19 1 Video Viewer Window Normal Windows Mode Windows OS Shown Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 287 Table 19 1 Video Viewer Window Descriptions Number Description Title Bar Displays the name of the server being viewed When in Full Screen mode the title bar disappears and the server name appears between the menu and toolbar 2 Thumbtack Locks the display of the menu and toolbar so that it is visible at all times Menu and toolbar Allows you to acces
538. tion Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Change your own password In addition to the built in user groups the DSView 3 software supports user defined user groups see Grouping Units on page 233 Preemption Levels The preemption level of users determines whether they may interrupt or disconnect another user s serial or video KVM session with a target device This also applies to virtual media sessions which are initiated from the Video Viewer DSView 3 software administrators and user administrators may specify the preemption level for user accounts or user defined user groups when an account or group is created The preemption level may be changed later See Preemption level on page 271 or User Group Properties on page 279 By default the preemption level used by the DSView 3 management software the effective user preemption level is the highest level of all of the user groups to which the user belongs Preemption levels range from 1 4 with 4 being the highest level For example a user or a user group with a preemption level of 4 may preempt other level 4 users or user groups as well as those with a level 1 2 or 3 setting Chapter 4 Basic Operations 47 Table 4 2 User and User Group Preemption Levels Preemption Level Description The default preemption level for a new local user of a KVM switch or serial console appliance The default preemption level for the DSView 3 software administrator and appliance adminis
539. tion is selected do the following a Type the username for an Active Directory account that has browse rights in the User Name field The log in ID must be entered in case sensitive text if the Active Directory server is set up to use Kerberos b Type the password for an Active Directory account that has browse rights in the Password field NOTE The DSView 3 server verifies that the new credentials are valid for the AD service If the credentials are invalid an error message is displayed 6 Click Save and then click Close The User Authentication Services dialog box will appear Windows NT external authentication service To add a Windows NT external authentication service 1 2i Click the Users tab Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open Click Add The Add Authentication Service Wizard will appear The Provide Authentication Service Name and Type window will open a Type a name for the external authentication service b Select Windows NT Domain from the menu c Click Next The Specify Windows NT Connection Settings window will open Type the Windows NT domain name you wish to add in the Domain Name field and then click Next The Select Browsing Method window will open Click Browse Anonymously to browse users on the external Windows NT authentication server Or 98 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Click Browse with user
540. tion is updated User Authentication Services Window Once added the authentication services are listed in the User Authentication Services window To view the window click the User tab then click Authentication Services The authentication service name type enabled status and host name are displayed in the list If Allow users and groups from newly discovered trusted forests is enabled for an AD service the discovered forests are displayed as a subset of the primary authentication service in the User Authentication Services window The type is displayed as Active Directory Trusted Forest The Enabled column displays a value of Yes or No If the value is Yes the users and groups of the the authentication service are considered when the DSView 3 server attempts to authenticate and authorize a user if the value is No the authentication service is ignored If the same username exists in multiple authentication services you can use the Enabled status to control which authentication service will be used to find a user To enable or disable an authentication service 1 Click the User tab then click Authentication Services to open the User Authentication Services window 2 Select the checkbox next to the authentication service you want to enable or disable 3 To enable the trusted forest click Enable or To disable the trusted forest service click Disable NOTE Allnew authentication services are enabled by default with the ex
541. to one or more managed appliances For example if a target device is connected to both a DSR switch and an ACS console server this tool will merge the target devices that were created when the managed appliances were added into a single target device that contains all of the target actions You may also merge target devices from a Unit Tools window see Merging target devices on page 350 To merge target devices from a Units View window 1 In a Units View window containing target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the target device name The Unit Overview window will open Click the Merge Target Devices icon or link The Merge Target Devices Wizard will appear The Select Target Devices to Merge window will open The selected target device will be listed in the Target Devices to Merge list To add one or more target devices to the merge list select the target device s in the Available Target Devices list then click Add The target devices will be moved to the Target Devices to Merge list To remove one or more target devices from the merge list select the target device s from the Target Devices to Merge list then click Remove The target devices will be moved to the Available Target Devices list 5 6 Chapter 9 Synchronizing the DSView 3 Software Database 151 e To merge target devices in a particular order select one or more target devices in the Target Devices to Merge list and use t
542. tor changes something about the item on the spoke server Another administrator then changes something about the item on the hub server When the replication task runs two things may happen In a few instances where no conflict occurs both changes will be incorporated and replicated For example if the hub server s administrator adds username JaneDoe to the existing user defined user group Accounting and the spoke server s administrator adds username JohnDoe to the Accounting user group both names will be added and replicated In most other instances where the changes are mutually exclusive or some other conflict occurs the most recent change will be the only change accepted and replicated For example if the hub server s administrator associates a unit with the Miami site and the spoke server s administrator associates the same unit with the Chicago site the change that was made closest to the time of replication that is the most recent change will be accepted and replicated This emphasizes the importance of ensuring the hub and spoke servers clocks are synchronized Chapter 5 DSView 3 Servers 85 The exception to the last change rule is when one of the actions deletes an item in that case the deletion is accepted and replicated regardless of timing For example if a unit was deleted on the hub server and then the contact information for the same unit was changed on the spoke server a minute later the unit will be del
543. tor or spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel Once this task is added you may run it on demand at any time see Running tasks manually on page 382 You may also save an event log using the Export Event Log tool See Creating an Event Log csv File on page 396 To add the task 1 2 3 Click the System tab Click Tasks in the top navigation bar The Tasks window will open Click Add The Add Task Wizard will appear Chapter 22 Using Tasks 371 4 Select Export event log to a comma separated values CSV file from the drop down menu Type a 1 64 character name for the task 5 Select a time to run the task see Specifving when to run tasks on page 364 then click Next 6 The Specify Export Event Log Properties window will open a Type the directory in which to create the event log which may be a physical local drive on the DSView 3 server or at a shared network location specified by a UNC path The location cannot be set to a mapped network drive The directory name must be entered in case sensitive text if your operating system supports case sensitive filenames b Ifthe specified directory location is a network drive that requires a log in enable the Login required to access shared drive location checkbox Then type the username and password and confirm the password of a user account that has read write access to the network share location c To append the date and time in military time to the end of the
544. trator or DSView Administrator The role column for a built in user group or a user defined user group with a role of None will be empty e Type Type of user group which will be built in or user defined To display user groups 1 Click the Users tab 276 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 2 Click Groups in the top navigation bar Built In will automatically be selected in the side navigation bar and the User Groups Built in window will open To display the user defined groups click User Defined in the side navigation bar The User Groups User Defined window will open Group naming in external authentication services Groups in Active Directory AD external authentication services are specified using a combination of their Active Directory folder and group name minus the group container specified in the DSView 3 software The group container defaults to the AD domain root if it is unspecified For example if you have an AD external authentication service for the sw eng mydomain com domain with no group container specified the Domain Users group in the sw eng mydomain com Users folder will have a DSView 3 software equivalent of Users Domain Users Using the same example but with a group container of Users the DSView 3 software equivalent is Domain Users Using the same example but with a group container of mydomain com the DSView 3 software equivalent is eng sw Users
545. trator user groups The default preemption level for the user administrator user group The default preemption level for the users and auditors groups The preemption levels may be used in the following ways User preemption level This is the preemption level assigned to a user by a DSView 3 software administrator or user administrator If this value is larger than the highest preemption level of the user group to which the user belongs the value will be used as the effective user preemption level Group preemption level This is the preemption level assigned to user groups to which the user belongs If the user is assigned to multiple user groups with different preemption levels this will be the preemption level of the user group with the highest level For example if a user belongs to the administrators level 3 and auditors level 1 user groups this value will be defined as 3 If this value is larger than the highest preemption level of the user the value will be used as the effective user preemption level Effective user preemption level This is the largest value between the user and group preemption level and is the actual preemption level that will be recognized by the DSView 3 software when the user attempts to preempt another user s session For example if user belongs to the auditors group level 1 but is assigned a user preemption level of 4 the user will have an effective user preemption level of 4 Although a member
546. ts e To add one or more events select the event s from the Available Events list then click Add The events will be moved to the Events To Notify list e To remove one or more events select the event s from the Events To Notify list then click Remove The events will be moved to the Available Events list To change the unit groups Chapter 23 Events and Event Logs 391 e To add one or more unit groups select the unit group s from the Available Unit Groups list then click Add The unit group s will be moved to the Selected Unit Groups list e To remove one or more unit groups select the unit group s from the Selected Unit Groups list then click Remove The unit group s will be moved to the Available Unit Groups list 6 Click Save and then click Close The Email Notifications window will open To test an email notification Once an email notification has been created you may send a test message to ensure that the notification is delivered to the specified recipients 1 Click Email Notifications in the side navigation bar The Email Notifications window will open 2 Click the checkbox to the left of the notification s to be tested To select all notifications on the page click the checkbox to the left of Email Subject at the top of the list 3 Click Test You will be prompted to confirm the test 4 Confirm or cancel the test To delete an email notification 1 Click Email Notifications in the side navigation
547. ty for developing multitiered web based applications KVM KVM is an abbreviation of Keyboard Video Mouse 452 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide KVM session A KVM session is a type of target device session in which the target device contains a KVM connection typically a server KVM sessions are connected through a KVM switch Tiered analog switches may also be part of the connection A KVM Video Viewer connection exists between the DSView 3 software client and the target device KVM session profiles KVM session profiles control KVM session behavior on a target device A profile contains Video Viewer settings in general cursor toolbar video and mouse scaling categories There is a default KVM session profile which a target device will use if no other profile is assigned to it Appliance administrators may create and modify profiles Appliance administrators or users with unit configure or unit edit rights may assign a profile to a target device KVM switch KVM switch refers to a unit that allows KVM sessions to a target device and is supported by the DSView 3 software KVM switches include the DSR switch and other switches supported by plug ins LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP is a set of protocols for accessing information directories LDAP is based on standards contained in the X 500 standard but is significantly simpler Unlike X 500 LDAP supports TCP IP which is necessary for Internet access Be
548. u or click the Session Options button The Session Options dialog box appears 2 Click the Toolbar tab 3 Use the arrow keys to specify the number of seconds to delay the hiding of the toolbar 4 Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box To add or remove items in the toolbar 1 Select Tools Session Options from the Video Viewer menu or click the Session Options button The Session Options dialog box appears 2 Click the Toolbar tab 304 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 3 Enable the checkboxes for the items to display in the toolbar Disable the checkboxes for the items to remove from the toolbar 4 Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box Video commands The color depth scaling and background refresh commands may also be specified in a KVM session profile see Video profile settings on page 295 The refresh image button command cannot be set in a KVM session profile To adjust the color depth Select View Color Depth from the Video Viewer menu then select the desired depth To change the Video Viewer window resolution NOTE The View Scaling command is not available if the Video Viewer window is in full screen mode or to non primary users of a shared session Select the View Scaling command then select the desired resolution The default is 1024 x 768 To enable or disable background refresh 1 Select Tools Session Options from the Video Viewer menu or click the Session
549. ultiple Unit Operations window will open containing a link to the Operation Results window see Multiple unit operations from a Units View window on page 124 Manual name pull Table 9 3 describes what occurs when a name pull operation is initiated Table 9 3 Manual Name Pull Operation Effects When pull is initiated for one or The effect is more Appliance serial OOS The target device name will be pulled from the appliance to update the target device PP P name in the DSView 3 software database The power device name will be pulled from the appliance to update the power device F ower devigas name in the DSView 3 software database Power device s ckets The target device name will be pulled from the appliance to update the target device name in the DSView 3 software database Target devices The target device name will be pulled from the appliance to update the target device name in the DSView 3 software database 146 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide When pull is initiated for one or The effect is more The cascade switch name will be pulled from the appliance to update the cascade switch name in the DSView 3 software database If the cascade switch in the DSView 3 software database has multiple appliance connections to the same appliance a Cascade switches multiuser cascade switch the cascade switch name will be pulled from the appliance connection with the lowest port number to update the cascade switch in the
550. urrently positioned As Delete Line DL lines are deleted lines below the cursor position move up VT100 terminal emulation Table D 4 lists the VT100 special key and control Ctrl key combinations and indicates Avocent encoding decoding support where Yes supported and No not supported Table D 4 VT100 Special Keys and Control Keys Keys Hex Code Function Mnemonic Encode Decode Return 0D CR Yes Yes Linefeed 0A LF Yes Yes Backspace 08 BS Yes Yes Tab 09 HT Yes Yes Spacebar 20 SP Yes Yes Esc 1B Esc Yes No Ctrl Spacebar 00 NUL Yes No Ctrl A 01 SOH Yes No Ctrl B 02 STX Yes No Ctrl C 03 ETX Yes No Ctrl D 04 EOT Yes No Ctrl E 05 ENO Yes No Ctrl F 06 ACK Yes No Ctrl G 07 BELL Yes Yes Ctrl H 08 BS Yes Yes 428 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Keys Hex Code Function Mnemonic Encode Decode Ctrl l 09 HT Yes Yes Ctrl J 0A LF Yes Yes Ctrl K 0B VT Yes No Ctrl L 0C FF Yes No Ctrl M 0D CR Yes No Ctrl N OE SO Yes No Ctrl O OF Sl Yes No Ctrl P 10 DLE Yes No Ctrl Q 11 DC1 or XON Yes No Ctrl R 12 DC2 Yes No Ctrl S 13 DC3 or XOFF Yes No Ctrl T 14 DO4 Yes No Ctrl U 15 NAK Yes No Ctrl V 16 SYN Yes No Ctrl W 17 ETB Yes No Ctrl X 18 CAN Yes No Ctrl Y 19 EM Yes No Ctrl Z 1A SUB Yes No Ctrl 1B Esc Yes No Ctrl 1C FS Yes No Ctrl 1D GS Yes No Ctrl 1E RS Yes No Ctrl _ 1F US Yes No Appendices 429 Table D 5 lists the VT100 ANSI mode and cursor keys for set and reset modes Encoding and decoding is supported fo
551. used to log in to the DSView 3 software A service account can be used to impersonate another user over the Web Services API or GUI Access API For more information see the DSView 3 software SDK online help NOTE Aservice account may only be created if you are using the DSView 3 software internal authentication service 5 6 To change account expiration settings e To indicate no expiration date enable the Never radio button e To specify an expiration date enable the End of radio button Then click the button to the right of the adjacent field and a calendar will be displayed Select the date when the user account will expire When a user account expires it remains in the DSView 3 software system until the account is deleted Click Save and then click Close User group membership See User Groups on page 275 To change the group membership of a user 1 2 3 Click the Users tab Click on a username The User Name window will open Click User Groups in the side navigation bar The User Group Membership window will open To add a user to one or more groups select the group s in the Available Groups list then click Add The columns will be moved to the Member Of list To remove the user from one or more groups select the group s in the Member Of list then click Remove The groups will be moved to the Available Groups list Click Save and then click Close Chapter 17 Managing User Accounts 271 The D
552. user To add an Active Directory external authentication service 1 2 Click the Users tab Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open Click Add The Add Authentication Service Wizard will appear The Provide Authentication Service Name and Type window will open a Type a name for the external authentication service b Select Active Directory from the menu c Click Next The Specify Active Directory Connection Settings window will open a Type the Active Directory domain name for the domain you wish to add in the AD Domain Name field b In the User Container field specify the name of the container to search for user accounts This will limit the search scope to that container The name may be entered Chapter 6 Authentication Services 91 in several forms optionally including a sub domain Valid forms are explained below by example Assume an Active Directory domain name of sunrise mycompany com with users in subfolder sun myusers The User Container field may be entered as Example 1 no sub domain sun myusers Example 2 no sub domain ou myusers ou sun If users are contained in a sub domain such as mktg sunrise mycompany com valid forms are Example 1 with sub domain mktg sunrise mycompany com sun myusers Example 2 with sub domain and no container specified mktg sunrise mycompany com Exa
553. username To change the name of a user 1 Click the Users tab Click on a username The User Name window will open Type the username for the user hard ee Type the full name of the user 268 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 5 Click Save and then click Close User certificates Certificates may be changed only for internal authentication users If the system certificate policy is enabled for user certificates see System certificate policy and trust store on page 53 the user certificate used at login must meet the policy requirements As an alternative to using this method the user may change the certificate in the profile settings but only if the administrator has enabled a global setting to allow it See Specifying a user certificate on page 43 To change the certificate associated with a user 1 2 3 4 5 Click the Users tab Click on a username The User Name window will open Click Credentials in the side navigation bar and then click Certificate The User Certificate window will open Ifa certificate has failed a test required in the system certificate policy the failure information is displayed Type the path and name of the certificate or browse to the certificate location Click Save and then click Close User SSH key A configurable SSH key may be used by a serial console appliance to authenticate a DSView 3 software user who is using an out of band client for example someone
554. users on the external Active Directory authentication server Or Click Browse with user credentials to browse users on the external Active Directory authentication based on credentials configured on the server If this option is selected do the following a Type the username for an Active Directory account that has browse rights in the User Name field The login ID must be entered in case sensitive text if the Active Directory server is set up to use Kerberos When using Kerberos the browse account cannot be specified in the Full Pre Windows 2000 Username form domain username If the username is in a sub domain of the Active Directory domain specified in step 3a then the username should be specified as lt username gt lt subdomain gt b Type the password for an Active Directory account that has browse rights in the Password field c Click Next The Establish Connection with Authentication Service window will open briefly If the external authentication service is added successfully the Completed Successful window will open Click Finish The User Authentication Services window will open with the new service listed NOTE If the authentication service has trusted forests the settings configured for the authentication service in the Add Authentication Service Wizard will be applied to the discovered trusted forests However the settings for each trusted forest can later be changed in the Authentication Service Connection
555. using a PuTTY SSH client that was not started by the DSView 3 software The user supplies the public private SSH key when connecting to the serial console appliance only RSA keys with a maximum length of 1024 bits are allowed The appliance then verifies the public key against the one stored for the user in the DSView 3 software As an alternative to using this method the user may specify the SSH key in the profile settings but only if the administrator has enabled a global setting to allow it See Specifying an SSH key on page 43 To specify a user SSH key 1 2 3 Click the Users tab Click on a username The User Name window will open Click Credentials in the side navigation bar and then click SSH Key The User SSH Key window will open Chapter 17 Managing User Accounts 269 4 Type the 1 256 character name of the file containing the public SSH key that was generated by a third party key generator or browse to the file location 5 Click Save and then click Close The SSH key file will be uploaded to the DSView 3 server for use in authenticating the user User password A user s password may be changed or you may specify that a user must enter a new password during the next login The password may be changed only for internal authentication users To change a user password or force a new password 1 n gt En ta oe 6 Click the Users tab In a User Accounts window click on a username The User Name window will
556. using the Customize link See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 You may change a single property for one or more units at a time or you may change multiple properties for multiple units by using the Properties Bulk Edit operation To change multiple properties for multiple units using the Properties Bulk Edit operation 1 2 In a Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 select the checkboxes next to the appliances or target devices that you want to edit Click Operations then select Properties Bulk Edit from the drop down menu 5 Chapter 10 Managing Units 159 The Bulk Edit Unit Properties window opens The unit names are displayed in the left column and the properties are displayed in the adjacent columns You can scroll to view columns or specify which columns are displayed by clicking Select Columns Select the properties that you want to be displayed click Add then click Save To edit unit properties type the values in the appropriate fields To quickly navigate the spreadsheet use the Tab and Shift Tab keystrokes to move right and left and the Enter and Shift Enter keystrokes to move down and up Click Save To change overview information for one or more target devices 1 SC YE ee BD e In a Units View window containing target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the checkbox next to one or more target devices To change overview in
557. ust 3 Move the slider bar and then fine tune the setting by clicking the Min or Max buttons to adjust the parameter for each icon pressed The adjustments will display immediately in the Video Viewer window 4 When finished click Close Chapter 19 Using the Video Viewer 307 1 n 4 pitts Max Performance Monitor D Pkts Sec Figure 19 2 Manual Video Adjust Dialog Box Table 19 3 Manual Video Adjust Dialog Box Descriptions Number Description Number Description A Image Capture Width H Pixel Noise Threshold B Pixel Sampling Fine Adjust l Automatic Video Adjustment Cc Image Capture Horizontal Position J Refresh Image D Image Capture Vertical Position K E Contrast L Video Test Pattern F Brightness M Performance Monitor G Block Noise Threshold N Close button Image capture width pixel sampling fine adjust image capture horizontal position and image capture vertical position The Image Capture Width Pixel Sampling Fine Adjust Image Capture Horizontal Position and Image Capture Vertical Position adjustments affect how the target video is captured and digitized and are seldom changed The image capture parameters are automatically changed by the Automatic Adjustment function A special image is required on the target in order to make accurate adjustments independently 308 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Contrast and brightness If the image in the Video Viewer window
558. ust meet the policy requirements Managed appliance certificates Certificates are also used for authenticating and authorizing managed appliance sessions when a managed appliance is added in secure mode See Adding Units on page 129 System certificate policy and trust store DSView 3 software administrators may configure the certificate policy by enabling disabling settings The trust store contains a list of all trusted certificate authorities known to the DSView 3 software You may add remove or modify the location of trust store entries To configure certificate policy settings 1 Click the System tab 2 Click Global Properties in the top navigation bar 3 Click X 509 Certificates in the side navigation bar The System Certificate Policy window will open 4 Enable disable checkboxes or select values as indicated for each setting Table 4 3 System Certificate Policy 54 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 5 Feature Chain Building Authority Info Access AIA Max chain length Chain Validation Partial chains Usage flags Validity period Verify signatures Certificate Revocation Lists CRL CRL checks Distribution points Reject on error Secure Sockets Layer SSL Name verification Subject alternative names User Certificates Verify using trust store Click Save Value when enabled Permits the DSView 3 software to use the AIA certificate extension to locate a certific
559. ut log files for a single unit you must have View Data Logging access rights To display information about all data log files in the DSView 3 software system you must be a member of the DSView 3 software administrators or auditor user group To display a list of data log files for a single unit I In a Units View window containing the appliance target device see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the unit name In the side navigation bar click Data Logging then click Session Files The Data Logging Session Files window for that unit will open To view a file s content click on the file name See Displaying data log file content on page 221 To display a list of all data log files in the DSView 3 software system NOTE Thisis the only procedure that will include log files for units that have been renamed or deleted from the DSView 3 software system Chapter 13 Data Logging 221 1 Click the Reports tab 2 Click Data Log Session Files in the top navigation bar The Data Log Session Files window will open You may dynamically archive or delete data log files from this window see Dynamically archiving and deleting data log files on page 219 3 To view a file s content click on the file name See Displaying data log file content on page 221 below Displaying data log file content When you click on a file name in a Data Log Session Files window the file is transferred to the browser It will be ope
560. valid For example virtual media access can be enabled to a target device that does not support it 282 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide 5 Similarly virtual media access could be enabled but KVM Video Viewer access may be disabled See About target device access rights on page 164 for an explanation Click Close when you are finished The User Accounts All window will open To add or remove user group access rights Click the Users tab 1 2 3 Click Groups in the top navigation bar Built In will automatically be selected in the side navigation bar and the User Groups Built in window will open To display the User Groups User Defined window click User Defined in the side navigation bar Click on a user group name Click Access Rights in the side navigation bar The User Group Access Rights window will open To add or remove a unit or unit group from the Unit and Unit Groups list click Edit List The User Group Access Rights Unit Selection window will open To add one or more units unit groups select the units groups in the Available list then click Add The units unit groups will be moved to the List to Update list To remove one or more units unit groups select the units groups in the List to Update list then click Remove The units unit groups will be moved to the Available list Click OK The User Group Access Rights window will display the current list of units unit groups To add remove a
561. ve Changing the color scheme When the color scheme is changed it is changed only for the logged in user To change the color scheme 1 Saz Click the Profile tab Click Preferences in the top navigation bar Click Color Scheme in the side navigation bar The Color Scheme window will open Click a color scheme to use If the System Colors scheme is selected the DSView 3 Explorer window will match the user s desktop color scheme Click Save The color scheme will be applied to the DSView 3 Explorer window 42 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Changing your password When the DSView 3 software internal authentication service is used user accounts will indicate if users are allowed to change their password see User account restrictions and expiration settings on page 269 By default passwords must contain at least three characters and will never expire A different minimum character length and an expiration date may be configured see DSView 3 software internal authentication service on page 88 To change your password 1 Click the Profile tab 2 Click Preferences in the top navigation bar 3 Click Change Password in the side navigation bar The Change Password window will open 4 Type your current password 5 Type and confirm the new password 6 Click Save Choosing the serial session application You may specify the application to be used for serial sessions to target devices e DSView 3 softw
562. vices for managing units appliances and target devices using a web browser The gateway allows for IP based video serial management Telnet Viewer third party Telnet viewer web browser and other supported session types Chapter 1 Product Overview 3 Users may connect to the DSView 3 server from DSView 3 software clients and use the DSView 3 Explorer windows to communicate with the system DSView 3 server The DSView 3 server contains the DSView 3 management software The server provides a centralized database for storing configuration user unit and system information It also provides services for authentication access control logging events monitoring and license management You may configure one or more spoke backup servers in addition to the hub server The hub server is responsible for maintaining the master copy of the database in a DSView 3 software system Only one server in a DSView 3 software system may be configured as the hub server Spoke servers perform database replication with the hub server The hub server acts as the coordinator for database replication between itself and all of the other spoke servers in a DSView 3 software system A hub server and a spoke server both offer the same DSView 3 software functionality to a user The distinction of hub or spoke refers only to the database replication role that the server plays and not with the functionality that the server provides Adding one or more spoke servers to a D
563. vide DSView 3 software functionality including the DSView 3 server DSView 3 software client managed appliances and target devices An SNMP manager and external authentication servers which are optional components and outside the DSView 3 software system may also be added to provide additional functionality Embedded appliance Embedded appliances include IBM ASM RSA II DRAC 4 HP iLO and NEC IPF embedded appliances 450 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Encryption Encryption is the translation of data into a secret code Encryption is the most effective way to achieve data security To read an encrypted file you must have access to a secret key or password that enables you to decrypt the file Unencrypted data is called plain text Encrypted data is referred to as cipher text There are two main types of encryption asymmetric also called public key encryption and symmetric External authentication server The external authentication server is an optional component s outside of the DSView 3 software system that enables you to select an authentication method The DSView 3 server brokers authentication requests LDAP RADIUS and so on Flash Flash is a special type of EEPROM that can be erased and reprogrammed in blocks instead of one byte at a time The BIOS and applications of many modern applications are stored on a Flash memory chip so that it may easily be updated if necessary FRU Field Replaceable Unit
564. vigation bar and then click Sessions The Appliance Sessions window will open Click Settings in the side navigation bar The Appliance Settings Sessions Settings window will open The display includes SSH settings for the appliance Specify how the most recent 64K bytes of online and offline data history from a serial port will be controlled e Auto Displays the history buffer content to a Telnet window e Hold Saves the buffer contents To display the contents you must access the appliance CLI and issue a Port History command Click Enable Inactivity Timeout and use the arrows to specify a value from 1 90 minutes that the managed appliance will wait during inactive intervals until the session is closed and the user must log back into the managed appliance CCM appliances only In the Serial Session Share Mode area enable one of the radio buttons Disable Auto or Query Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open 198 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To change the KVM session settings for a supported KVM switch 1 7 In a Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the KVM switch name Click Appliance Settings in the side navigation bar and then click Sessions The Appliance Sessions window will open Click Settings in the side navigation bar and then click KVM The Appliance KVM Session Settings window will open In the
565. w 3 Software Installer User Guide 3 The Multiple Unit Properties window will open Click Notes 4 Type description accounting and comment information 5 Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open To change the network properties for a target device NOTE Defining incorrect information for these properties may cause network connection errors 1 Ina Units View window containing target devices see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the target device name 2 Click Properties in the side navigation bar and then click Network in the side navigation bar The Unit Network Properties window will open Type the address or the fully qualified domain name for the target device e Type the Telnet port number to use for Telnet connections to the target device If this field is left blank Telnet will not be enabled for the target device e Type the URL for a web browser connection to the target device e Select the DSView 3 server that is in charge of the target device 3 Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open To change the network properties for a managed appliance 1 Ina Units View window containing appliances see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click on the appliance name 2 Click Properties in the side navigation bar and then click Network in the side navigation bar The Unit Network Properties window will open e Type the address or the fully qualifi
566. w displays a list of servers attached to the switch The following items for each server will appear in the content area e Name The name of the server e Port The switch port to which the server is attached EID The Electronic ID EID number of the IQ module attached to the server Table C 3 DSR Remote Operations Content Area Icons Servers View Icon Description l A target device that is powered up and has no established KVM Video Viewer sessions A target device that has an active KVM Video Viewer session g m A target device that is not powered up A target device that is powered up but cannot establish a KVM connection because the path to the target device is blocked for example a cascade switch has only one user port and that port is already connected to another target device a 422 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Power view Selecting Power in the side navigation bar of the DSR Remote Operations window will display a list of power device sockets attached to the switch and their status Table C 4 DSR Remote Operations Content Area Icons Power View Icon Description The power device socket is powered up Ex The power device socket is powered down LO The power device socket is cycling E The socket is unlocked supported only on certain power device types 8 The socket is locked supported only on certain power device types Version view Selecting Version in the side navigation bar of
567. w will open To change user browsing settings for Windows NT external authentication services 1 2 Click the Users tab Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open Click the name of the Windows NT service The side navigation bar will change to include the name of the Windows NT service at the top and below the name the information you may define 6 Chapter 6 Authentication Services 99 Click User Browsing in the side navigation bar The Authentication Service User Browsing NT window will open Click Browse Anonymously to anonymously browse users on the external Windows NT authentication server Or Click Browse with User Credentials to browse users on the extemal Windows NT authentication based on credentials configured If this option is selected do the following a Type the username for an NT domain account that has browse rights in the User Name field b Type the password for an NT domain account that has browse rights in the Password field Click Save and then click Close The User Authentication Services dialog box will appear LDAP external authentication service To add an LDAP external authentication service 1 2 Click the Users tab Click Authentication Services in the top navigation bar The User Authentication Services window will open Click Add The Add Authentication Service Wizard will appear The Provide Authent
568. want to add a sublevel zone Click Add The Add Zone Wizard opens 3 Enter a unique zone name Click Next 4 The Assign Zone Licenses window opens For each license type enter the number of licenses that can be used by this zone in the Assigned Licenses field The number of available licenses is listed in the Available Licenses column For details on zone licenses see Assigning zone licenses on page 252 5 Click Next 6 The Assign Zone Rights window opens For each access rights group select Allow or Deny For details on zone rights see Managing zone access rights on page 253 7 Click Next 8 The Completed Successful window opens Click Finish Accessing zones When logging into the DSView 3 software specify the highest level zone for which you have access rights If your access rights include other zones you may switch to those zones once logged in When in a zone you cannot view or access units that belong to another zone The zone you are currently in is referred to as the active zone and is displayed in the top option bar To specify zone log in options 1 Click the System tab then click Global Properties 2 Select Zones in the side navigation bar 3 Select List all Zones as drop down menu to allow the user to select a zone from a list or Select Request the Zone as text field to require the user to type the zone name in text field when logging in 4 Click Save To log in to a zone 1 Enter the URL o
569. wer Session Properties dialog box or if the user is a member of the administrators user group Users viewing the session in Stealth mode will not be listed If users disconnect from the session and a single user remains connected the mode will change to Normal e Sharing Passive A session that is being shared by two or more users Passive users may only display the DSView 3 software session Interactive users may also share the session but have full control of the video mouse and keyboard and have a state of Sharing Interactive A user may display the usernames of other users sharing the software session if View identity of shared connections is checked in the Video Viewer Session Properties dialog box or if the user is a member of the built in administrators user group Users viewing the session in Stealth mode will not be listed If other users disconnect from the session and a single user remains connected the mode will change to Normal e Scan A temporary non exclusive DSView 3 software session that displays connected target devices in a thumbnail viewer e KVM switches Owner Username of the logged in user that owns the session connected to the managed appliance e KVM switches Port Managed appliance port number connected to the session e Preemption Level Effective user preemption level for the user that is connected to the appliance port See Preemption Levels on page 46 e serial console appliances Client IP add
570. wer device socket choose one of the following actions e Select a socket and select Tools Lock or Tools Unlock from the menu bar e Select a socket that and click the Lock or Unlock toolbar button e Right click on a socket and select Lock or Unlock from the shortcut menu Appendices 425 Appendix D Terminal Emulation This appendix contains information about the keys sequences encoding and decoding for the DSView 3 management software terminal emulation modes when using the Telnet Viewer Encode refers to how the client interface processes typed keys Decode refers to how the client interface processes data coming from the target device The terminal emulation mode is set by selecting Options Session Properties in the Telnet Viewer window and then using the Terminal Emulation drop down menu in the Session Properties dialog box See Customizing Session Properties on page 332 VT terminal emulation Table D 1 lists the VT key and keypad numeric codes Avocent encodes all applicable keys as numeric decoding is not supported Table D 1 VT Key and Keypad Numeric Codes Key Keypad Numeric Code 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 dash dash comma comma period period Enter Same as Return key 426 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide VT100 terminal emulation The VT100 emulation provides compatibility with the Microsoft headless server EMS serial port interface The
571. will appear with a transparent icon 120 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To hide multiple units with one operation 1 2 In a Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click the checkbox next to the units you want to hide from display To select all units on the page click the checkbox to the left of Name at the top of the list Click Operations then select Hide Units from the drop down menu To show hidden units 1 In a Units View window see Accessing Units View windows on page 118 click Customize The Units View Customization window will open Click Visibility in the Available Fields column and then click Add Visibility will be moved to the Fields to Show column Click Show hidden items Click Save and then click Close The Units View window will open containing the hidden items and the Visibility column Hidden items will have a transparent icon and the Visibility field will contain Show Click Show in the Visibility column for the unit s you want to display The unit will be made visible the icon will no longer be transparent and the Visibility field will change to Hide Units View windows fields The following fields may appear in Units View windows You may enable or disable a field s display using the Customize link See Using the Customize link in windows on page 32 Name in Appliance Name of the unit as defined in the appliance Click on the name to display or cha
572. will open In the DSView Servers area click the checkbox next to the DSView 3 server you are currently logged into Click Upgrade The Upgrade Plug in Wizard will open Enter the name or browse to the location of the plug in file then click Next The Overview window will open This window contains read only information about the plug in Click Next The Upgrading Plug in page will open while the plug in is being upgraded The Completed Successful window will open Click Finish Disabling and activating a plug in When a plug in is disabled you cannot use any features and operations supported by that plug in Appliances and target devices that were added to the DSView 3 software system before the plug in was disabled will still appear in Units View windows but you will not be able to acquire status from those units and links that initiate connections to those units will not be available You will not be able to add more appliances of that type until the plug in is re activated A disabled plug in will remain disabled if the DSView 3 software is restarted 404 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide To disable a plug in 1 d k a 6 Click the System tab Click Plug ins in the top navigation bar The Plug ins window will open Click on the name of plug in to be disabled The plug in overview window will open In the DSView Servers area click the checkbox next to the DSView 3 server you are currently logged into
573. y AVSP Avocent Video Session Protocol A protocol used to transfer keyboard video and mouse information between a KVM switch and a remote Video Viewer AVSP operates over SSL encrypted TCP links TCP IP ports 8192 and 2068 are used by default but may be configured to different port numbers Browser session A type of target device session in which the target device contains a web server The DSView 3 software client connects directly to the target device using a web browser without directing the connection through the unit Cascade device A device that connects between a KVM switch or serial console appliance and a target device or connects to a KVM switch or serial console appliance and is not in itself a target device Examples of cascade devices include a cascade switch and a power device Cascade switch A cascade switch is an analog KVM switch connected to a KVM switch port or IQ module A cascade switch expands the number of connections allowed on a KVM switch if the switch supports the cascade protocol CCM appliance A CCM console management appliance is an Avocent managed appliance that provides a Telnet server and an SSH server for accessing serially attached devices over a standard TCP IP connection Model numbers include the CCM850 CCM1650 and CCM4850 appliances Certificate authentication Certificate authentication is the process of authenticating with a digital certificate Appendices CPS appliance A
574. y could select a lower color depth such as Gray Scale Best Compression If you enable Allow users to override this setting or if no profile is assigned to the target device users may specify the color depth using Video Viewer menu commands See Video commands on page 304 Video scaling The video scaling setting View Scaling indicates the Video Viewer window resolution You may choose absolute values auto scale or full scale When autoscaling is enabled the DSView 3 software will automatically adjust the display if the window size changes during a session When a user accesses a channel using sharing the display will be adjusted to match the input resolution selected by the primary user of that channel This will prevent the primary user s display from being affected If the target device resolution changes any time during a session the display will be adjusted automatically When full scaling is enabled the display window is sized to match the resolution of the server being viewed If users are allowed to override this profile setting you may also control whether they may select a value higher than the profile setting For example when this control is enabled if the video scaling setting in the profile is 768 x 576 users on a target device using that profile will not be able to select 1024 x 768 However they could select a lower resolution such as 640 x 480 NOTE Wide screen format absolute values are listed in the scaling
575. y month c Click on a day in the calendar to close the calendar and fill the field to the left of the calendar with the date you have selected Select an hour minute and which half of the day for the start date In the first drop down menu in the To line select Events On to select the end date and time Repeat steps 4 and 5 to specify the end date Click Apply The previous event log view window will open with the event range specified in the Filter Date window The Clear Date Filter button will appear in the event log view window To clear date filtering click this button Changing the Event Log Retention Period By default an event log is retained for seven days one week You may specify a retention period of up to 365 days one year 396 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide NOTE Event log information is stored in the DSView 3 software database and is replicated Increasing the event log retention time may impact the performance of the DSView 3 software system It is recommended that old event log entries be archived to csv files by scheduling tasks see Task Exporting an event log csv file on page 370 You may also export event logs at any time see Creating an Event Log csv File on page 396 To change the event log retention period 1 Click the Reports tab 2 Click Log Retention in the side navigation bar The Event Log Retention Time window will open 3 Type a number of days from 1 365 in the Days fiel
576. y specify a certificate if the administrator has allowed it see the procedure below If the system certificate policy is enabled for user certificates see System certificate policy and trust store on page 53 the user certificate used at login must meet the policy requirements As an alternative the administrator may specify the certificate in the user account properties See User certificates on page 268 To enable user settable certificates NOTE Only DSView 3 software administrators may access this procedure 1 Check the Allow user to set own certificate checkbox 2 Click Save To specify a user certificate NOTE A user may access this procedure only if a DSView 3 software administrator has allowed it 1 Click the Profile tab Preferences will automatically be selected in the top navigation bar 2 Click Credentials in the side navigation bar then click Certificate 3 Type the path and name of the certificate or browse to the certificate location 4 Click Save An updated Certificate window will open Specifying an SSH key A user may specify an SSH key if the administrator has allowed it 44 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide As an alternative to this method the administrator may specify the SSH key in the user account properties See User SSH key on page 268 To enable user settable SSH keys NOTE Only DSView 3 software administrators may access this procedure 1 Click the System tab 2 Click User Credential Prop
577. ying a user SSH key Chapter 4 Basic Operations 41 NOTE You may also set up KVM session profiles for use with the Video Viewer see KVM Session Profiles on page 291 Changing user options To change user options 1 2 5 Click the Profile tab The Options window will open In the Navigation Tree Behavior area select one option e If you select Automatically collapse navigation tree nodes a currently expanded tree node will be collapsed when you select another tree node e Ifyou select Preserve navigation tree state a currently expanded tree node will remain expanded when you select another tree node e Ifyou select Automatically fully expand navigation tree nodes all tree nodes will be expanded This is equivalent to clicking the Expand All Nodes arrow in the side navigation bar see Using the Side Navigation Bar on page 28 Enable or disable prompts when leaving pages with unsaved changes e Check Skip prompt when leaving pages with unsaved changes if you do not want a message box to prompt you to save modified information when you leave a window e Uncheck Skip prompt when leaving pages with unsaved changes if you want a message box to prompt you to save modified information when you leave a window Select a refresh rate or Never By default windows automatically refresh every 30 seconds If you select Never windows will only be refreshed when you click the REFRESH icon or text in the top option bar Click Sa
578. your computer you will be prompted to select a text editor to use for opening the csv file The default filename of the csv file is appliance_rights csv if you are exporting managed appliance rights or target_device_rights csv if you are exporting target device 350 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide rights Subsequent files that you export will be incremented target_device_ rights 1 csv target_device_rights 2 csv and so on 9 Or Click Save The Save As dialog box will appear Select a directory and filename and click Save to save the csv file Click Finish The Units Tools window will open Merging target devices Using the Merge Target Devices tool may be necessary if a target device is connected to one or more managed appliances For example if a target device is connected to both a DSR switch and an ACS console server this tool will merge the target devices that were created when the managed appliances were added into a single target device that contains all of the target actions You may also merge one or more target devices from a Unit Overview window see Merging target devices on page 150 To merge target devices 1 2 3 Click the Units tab Click Tools in the side navigation bar The Unit Tools window will open Click the Merge Target Devices icon or link The Merge Target Devices Wizard will appear The Select Target Devices to Merge window will open To add one or more target device
579. zed Zone DMZ If the managed appliances are not in the same DMZ with the DSView 3 server you must configure the firewall so all data may pass between the zones using TCP IP ports 22 SSH 3211 2068 8192 and 3871 You must also configure the User Datagram Protocol UDP port 3211 so it may pass through the firewall for initial network discovery of appliances that do not have an IP address Chapter 4 Basic Operations 57 CECE e Figure 4 1 Typical DSView 3 Software System Firewall Configuration Table 4 4 Typical DSView 3 Software System Firewall Configuration Descriptions Numbe Description Number Description 1 DSView 3 Software Client 5 DSView 3 Server 2 HTTPS 6 Proxy 3 Proxy 7 KVM Switch or Serial Console Appliance 4 Firewall 8 Target Devices VPNs A Virtual Private Network VPN is a secure network that uses public infrastructure and typically includes several Wide Area Network WAN components that may impact performance of the VPN Typically two sites are connected in a VPN network using WANs and a router This setup provides a secure network between the two sites but processing is slow 58 DSView 3 Software Installer User Guide Several factors related to the network setup including the DSView 3 software database replication schedule and methods of device access can affect the speed of a multi site VPN network The trade off must be made based on the network setup Frequent replication of the DSView 3

Avocent DSView 3 device license - 100 pack

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents